JP6534309B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally referred to as "pachinko machine") and a drum-type gaming machine (generally referred to as "pachislot machine").

 As a conventional gaming machine, an upper tray for storing gaming media for hitting into the gaming area below the gaming area in a front view, and gaming media arranged under the upper tray and overflowing from the upper tray are stored. It is common to have a lower plate and a lower plate (for example, Patent Document 1).

  However, conventional gaming machines have low appeal to players.

JP, 2009-28390, A

  Therefore, in view of the above situation, the present invention has an object to provide a gaming machine having high appeal to a player.

The present invention
A game board in which a game area in which a predetermined game is performed is formed;
A main unit frame on which the game board is mounted;
A door frame which can be opened and closed on the body frame;
A bulging portion provided on the door frame and bulging forward in the lower part of the game area in a front view to form a predetermined internal space;
An upper plate provided on the upper surface side of the bulging portion, and storing a game medium for playing a game in the game area;
An operating device accommodated in the internal space and operable by a player;
A lower plate body provided on the door frame and provided with a vertical wall having a predetermined height, and capable of receiving game media from a predetermined supply port;
The lower plate is provided in a space provided in parallel with the internal space in the bulging portion in the left-right direction,
The lower tray main body is integrally formed with a first lower tray portion in which a region facing the front of the gaming machine is formed , and a configuration in which the first lower tray portion protrudes into the internal space with respect to the first lower tray portion. And a second lower plate portion provided with a second lower plate portion where an area not facing the front of the gaming machine is formed,
The supply port communicates with the second lower plate portion,
A cover upright wall located in front of the supply port is provided integrally with the lower tray body,
The upright wall portion and the cover upright wall portion of the lower tray main body located in front of the supply port have a diagonal wall portion for rolling game media supplied from the supply port toward the first lower tray portion. And
Further, on the side opposite to the side on which the lower plate is provided with the inner space as a boundary, a handle portion for firing game media is provided.
The bulging portion may be provided to project forward than the foremost portion of the handle portion.
Also,
A game board in which a game area in which a predetermined game is performed is formed;
A main unit frame on which the game board is mounted;
A door frame which can be opened and closed on the body frame;
A bulging portion provided on the door frame and bulging forward in the lower part of the game area in a front view to form a predetermined internal space;
An upper plate provided on the upper surface side of the bulging portion, and storing a game medium for playing a game in the game area;
A rendering device accommodated in the internal space and exhibiting a predetermined rendering effect;
A lower plate body provided on the door frame and provided with a vertical wall having a predetermined height, and capable of receiving game media from a predetermined supply port;
The lower plate is provided in a space provided in parallel with the internal space in the bulging portion in the left-right direction,
The lower tray main body is integrally formed with a first lower tray portion in which a region facing the front of the gaming machine is formed , and a configuration in which the first lower tray portion protrudes into the internal space with respect to the first lower tray portion. And a second lower plate portion provided with a second lower plate portion where an area not facing the front of the gaming machine is formed,
The supply port communicates with the second lower plate portion,
A cover upright wall located in front of the supply port is provided integrally with the lower tray body,
The upright wall portion and the cover upright wall portion of the lower tray main body located in front of the supply port have a diagonal wall portion for rolling game media supplied from the supply port toward the first lower tray portion. And
Further, on the side opposite to the side on which the lower plate is provided with the inner space as a boundary, a handle portion for firing game media is provided.
The bulging portion may be provided to project forward than the foremost portion of the handle portion.
Also,
A game board in which a game area in which a predetermined game is performed is formed;
A main unit frame on which the game board is mounted;
A door frame which can be opened and closed on the body frame;
A bulging portion provided on the door frame and bulging forward in the lower part of the game area in a front view to form a predetermined internal space;
An upper plate provided on the upper surface side of the bulging portion, and storing a game medium for playing a game in the game area;
An operating device accommodated in the internal space and operable by a player;
A lower plate body provided on the door frame and provided with a vertical wall having a predetermined height, and capable of receiving game media from a predetermined supply port;
The lower plate is provided in a space provided in parallel with the internal space in the bulging portion in the left-right direction,
The lower tray main body is integrally formed with a first lower tray portion in which a region facing the front of the gaming machine is formed , and a configuration in which the first lower tray portion protrudes into the internal space with respect to the first lower tray portion. And a second lower plate portion provided with a second lower plate portion where an area not facing the front of the gaming machine is formed,
The supply port communicates with the second lower plate portion,
A cover ceiling portion that covers the upper side of the second lower plate portion is provided integrally with the lower plate body,
The standing wall portion of the lower tray main body located in front of the supply port has a diagonal wall portion for rolling game media supplied from the supply port toward the first lower tray portion.
Further, on the side opposite to the side on which the lower plate is provided with the inner space as a boundary, a handle portion for firing game media is provided.
The bulging portion is provided to project forward than the foremost portion of the handle portion.
A game board in which a game area in which a predetermined game is performed is formed;
A main unit frame on which the game board is mounted;
A door frame which can be opened and closed on the body frame;
A bulging portion provided on the door frame and bulging forward in the lower part of the game area in a front view to form a predetermined internal space;
An upper plate provided on the upper surface side of the bulging portion, and storing a game medium for playing a game in the game area;
A rendering device accommodated in the internal space and exhibiting a predetermined rendering effect;
A lower plate body provided on the door frame and provided with a vertical wall having a predetermined height, and capable of receiving game media from a predetermined supply port;
The lower plate is provided in a space provided in parallel with the internal space in the bulging portion in the left-right direction,
The lower tray main body is integrally formed with a first lower tray portion in which a region facing the front of the gaming machine is formed , and a configuration in which the first lower tray portion protrudes into the internal space with respect to the first lower tray portion. And a second lower plate portion provided with a second lower plate portion where an area not facing the front of the gaming machine is formed,
The supply port communicates with the second lower plate portion,
A cover ceiling portion that covers the upper side of the second lower plate portion is provided integrally with the lower plate body,
The standing wall portion of the lower tray main body located in front of the supply port has a diagonal wall portion for rolling game media supplied from the supply port toward the first lower tray portion.
Further, on the side opposite to the side on which the lower plate is provided with the inner space as a boundary, a handle portion for firing game media is provided.
The bulging portion may be provided to project forward than the foremost portion of the handle portion .

Thus, according to the present invention, a gaming machine with high appeal can be provided.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at a pachinko machine from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at a pachinko machine from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at a pachinko machine from the back. It is the perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front in the state which made the door frame open from the main body frame, and made the main body frame open from the outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the pachinko machine into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled a pachinko machine into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, and was seen from back. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the outer frame and was seen from the front. (A) is a perspective view of the portion of the outer frame side upper hinge member in the outer frame, viewed from the lower side without the left frame member, and (b) is an exploded perspective view showing (a) in an exploded manner is there. (A) is a perspective view which expands and shows the state by which the main frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed with respect to the outer frame side upper hinge member of an outer frame, (b) is an outer upper upper hinge member. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the state in which the main body side upper hinge member is attached. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect | action of the locking member in an outer frame. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a right side view of a door frame. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at a door frame from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the AA in FIG. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the BB line in FIG. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the CC line in FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame for every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame for every main member, and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit in a door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit into every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit into every main member, and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the ball | bowl feed unit of the door frame base unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the ball | bowl feed unit from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit disassembled and viewed from the front, (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit after removing the rear case of the ball feeding unit and the tamperproof member and viewed from the rear. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the fal cover unit of the door frame base unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the fal cover unit from the back. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which removed the cover member from the front and removed the cover member, (b) is the disassembled perspective view which removed the cover member and was seen from the back. It is a front view of a foul cover unit in the state where a lid member was removed. (A) is a front view of the handle unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the handle unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the handle unit as viewed from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from the front, (b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit of a door frame from the front right, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit from the left front. (A) is a perspective view of the pan unit as viewed from the upper right rear, and (b) is a perspective view of the pan unit from the lower left rear. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the tray unit into every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the tray unit into every main member, and was seen from back. It is explanatory drawing which expands and shows the site | part of a lower tray in the state which removed the lower tray cover in sectional drawing of FIG. (A) is an explanatory view schematically showing an example in which a lower plate is provided with a ball guiding portion, and (b) is an explanatory view schematically showing an example in which a lower plate is provided with a ball guiding portion different from (a) (C) is an explanatory view schematically showing an example provided with a different ball guiding portion. (A) is an explanatory view schematically showing the lower tray made divisible, and (b) is a schematic illustration showing a state where the storage area of the lower tray is expanded according to the size of the space behind the rendering operation unit It is a figure and (c) is an explanatory view showing the lower tray of (b) with a schematic perspective view. (A) is a front view of the effect operation unit in a door frame, (b) is a right side view of the effect operation unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the back. It is explanatory drawing which looked at the production operation unit from the direction where the central axis of the operation button is extending. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the DD line in FIG. 48 (a). It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the EE line in FIG.48 (b). (A) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the FF line in FIG.48 (b), (b) is an enlarged view of the A section in (a). It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the presentation operation unit into every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the presentation operation unit into every main member, and was seen from back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the operating button disassembled and viewed from the front, (b) is an exploded perspective view of the operating button disassembled and viewed from the rear. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the decoration board unit of a production operation unit, and was seen from the front. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the base unit of the rendering operation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the base unit of the rendering operation unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the base unit of the rendering operation unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the base unit of the rendering operation unit, and was seen from back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which pressed the operation button in sectional drawing of the rendering operation unit of FIG. (A) is a view of the rendering operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. A portion of the operation button is cut out and a portion that is about to be hidden by the first button decoration portion of the operation button or the button frame It is explanatory drawing shown, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which it is going to hide by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in sectional drawing of a rendering operation unit. (A) is explanatory drawing shown by the perspective view which looked at the external appearance of a rendering operation unit from the front, (b) is explanatory drawing which looked at the external appearance of a rendering operation unit from the direction where the central axis of the operation button is extending . (A) is a front view of a second effect operation unit different from the effect operation unit of FIGS. 48 to 63 in the embodiment, and (b) is a right side view of the second effect operation unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the 2nd presentation operation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the 2nd presentation operation unit from the back. It is explanatory drawing which looked at the 2nd presentation operation unit from the direction where the central axis of the operation button is extending. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the GG line | wire in Fig.64 (a). It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the HH line | wire in FIG.64 (b). (A) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the II line in FIG.64 (b), (b) is an enlarged view of the A section in (a). It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the 2nd rendering operation unit into every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the 2nd rendering operation unit into every main member, and was seen from back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button of the second effect operation unit disassembled and seen from the front, (b) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button of the second effect operation unit disassembled and viewed from the back is there. It is the perspective view which looked at the 2nd base unit of the 2nd production operation unit from the front. (A) is explanatory drawing which looked at the 2nd rendering operation unit from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button is extended, with the main screen of the screen unit facing forward, and (b) shows the sub screen of the screen unit It is explanatory drawing which looked at the 2nd presentation operation unit from the direction where the central axis of the operation button is extended in the state which turned to the front. FIG. 74 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line J-J in FIG. 74 (a), and FIG. 74 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line K-K in FIG. In (a), when the main screen is directed forward and the second effect operation unit is viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, it is intended to be hidden by the first button decoration portion or button frame of the operation button (B) is an explanatory view showing a portion where the second effect operation unit in the state of (a) shows a portion that is about to be concealed by the first button decoration portion of the operation button, the button frame, etc. It is. In (a), the second effect operation unit is viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends with the sub screen directed forward, in an attempt to hide it by the first button decoration portion or button frame of the operation button (B) is an explanatory view showing a portion where the second effect operation unit in the state of (a) shows a portion that is about to be concealed by the first button decoration portion of the operation button, the button frame, etc. It is. (A) is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit seen from the front, (c) is a view of the door frame left side unit from the back FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from back. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the LL line in FIG. 78 (a). (A) is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit seen from the front, (c) is a view of the door frame right side unit from the back FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from back. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the MM line in Fig.82 (a). FIG. 82 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line N-N in FIG. 82 (a), and FIG. 82 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line O-O in FIG. 82 (a). (A) is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit viewed from the front, (c) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit viewed from the back It is. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and was seen from back. FIG. 90 is a cross-sectional view of FIG. 87 taken along the line PP. It is the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the main body frame for every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the main body frame for every main member, and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the delivery unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the delivery unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the delivery unit by each main structure, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the delivery unit by each main structure, and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the ball guidance unit of the delivery unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the ball guidance unit from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of a ball guidance unit. (A) is a perspective view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the dispensing device as viewed from the rear. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the payout device and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the payout device and was seen from back. (A) is a front view of a delivery apparatus, (b) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the QQ line in (a). (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the state which closed the ball extraction path | pass by the ball extraction movable piece in a delivery apparatus, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the state which open | released the ball extraction path by the ball extraction movable piece. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the upper full tank path unit in the delivery unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the upper full ball channel unit from the back. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper full tank path unit, and was seen from the front, (b) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper full ball channel unit and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the lower full tank path unit in the delivery unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the lower full ball channel unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the lower full tank path unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the lower full-scale ball path unit and was seen from back. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the state which the guideway opening-closing door has closed in the lower full tank path unit, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the state which the guideway opening-closing door is opening. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the foul cover unit of a door frame, and a lower full-tan ball path unit. It is an explanatory view showing a flow of gaming balls in the payout unit. It is a front view of the game board which made the panel board of the game panel opaque. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board of the state of FIG. 114 from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board of the state of FIG. 114 from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the back. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the RR line | wire in FIG. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the SS line | wire in FIG. It is the front view which cut the front unit in a game board in the approximate center of the front-back direction in a game field. It is a front view of the game board which made the panel board of the game panel transparent. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board into every main structure, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board into every main structure, and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the front component and game panel in a game board from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at (a) from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the starting opening unit in the front unit of a game board, the side unit, the side slope, and the attacker unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at (a) from the back. FIG. 18 is an explanatory view showing the attacker unit in the table unit cut from the approximate center in the front-rear direction in the game area and shown from the front. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the center character in the front unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the center character from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit of the game board from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back unit into every main component, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back unit into main component members, and was seen after. (A) is a front view of the back front decoration unit in a back unit, (b) is the expanded sectional view which cut | disconnected and expanded by the TT line in (a). (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back up movable presentation unit in a back unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back up movable presentation unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back up movable presentation knit mainly for every structure unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back up movable presentation unit for every main structure unit, and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back top 1st decoration body unit in a back up movable presentation unit from the front, (b) is a perspective view which looked at the back top 1st decoration body unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back decoration 1st decoration unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back decoration 1st decoration unit, and was seen from back. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows a drive system from the front when a back decoration 1st decoration unit is in a closed position, (b) is a drive system when a back decoration 1st decoration unit is in an open position from the front FIG. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the 2nd back decoration unit in the back up movable presentation unit from the front, (b) is a perspective view seeing the back 2nd decoration unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the 2nd back decoration unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back upper 2nd decoration body unit and was seen from back. (A) is an explanatory view showing the drive system from the front when the back upper second decoration unit is in the closed position, and (b) is a drive system from the front when the back upper second decoration unit is in the open position FIG. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back upper 3rd decoration body unit in the back up movable presentation unit from the front, (b) is a perspective view which looked at the back upper 3rd decoration body unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back decoration 3rd decoration unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back decoration 3rd decoration unit, and was seen from back. (A) is an explanatory view showing the drive system from the front when the back upper third decoration unit is in the closed position, (b) is a drive system from the front when the back upper third decoration unit is in the open position FIG. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back up rotation base unit in a back up movable presentation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back up rotation base unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back up rotation base unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back up rotation base unit and was seen from back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the gear structure in a back up rotation base unit from a front. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the state of the action | operation lever in a back up rotation base unit from the front at the action position, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the state from which the action lever is non-action from the front. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back up raising / lowering unit in a back up movable presentation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back raising / lowering unit from the back. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back up raising / lowering unit into the movable side unit and the fixed side unit and was seen from the front, (b) disassembles the back up raising / lowering unit into the movable side unit and the fixed side unit And is an exploded perspective view seen from behind. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the movable side unit of the back-up raising / lowering unit, and was seen from the front, (b) is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the movable side unit and was seen from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the fixed side unit of the back up raising / lowering unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the fixed side unit of the back up raising / lowering unit, and was seen from back. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows a drive system from the front when the movable side unit of a back up raising / lowering unit is a raising position, (b) shows the driving system when the movable side unit of a back raising raising / lowering unit is a falling position It is an explanatory view shown from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the drive system for raising / lowering when the movable side unit of a back up raising / lowering unit is a raising position in a back up movable presentation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the drive system for raising / lowering when the movable side unit of a back up raising / lowering unit is a fall position in a back up movable presentation unit. It is an explanatory view showing a state of an operation lever in an operation position, when a back side rotation base unit is in a lower position and a back up rotation base unit is a horizontal position in a back up movable presentation unit. It is an explanatory view showing a state of an operation lever in a non-operating position, when a back side rotation base unit is in a lower position and a back up rotation base unit is in a horizontal position in a back up movable effect unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the drive system of a back up rotation base unit when a back side rotation base unit is a horizontal position and a back up rotation base unit is a fall position in a back up movable presentation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the drive system of a back up rotation base unit when the back side rotation base unit rotates 45 degree | times clockwise from a horizontal position in the fall position of a movable side unit in a back up movable presentation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the drive system of a back up rotation base unit in case a back up rotation base unit is in a down position, and a back up rotation base unit is a perpendicular | vertical position in a back up movable presentation unit. It is an explanatory view showing a state of an operation lever in a non-operating position, when a back side rotation base unit is in a lower position and a back up rotation base unit is a perpendicular position in a back up movable presentation unit. It is an explanatory view showing the state where the operation lever regulates the rotation at the operation position when the movable unit is at the lowered position and the back rotation base unit is at the vertical position in the back movable effect unit. When the movable unit is in the lowered position and the back rotation base unit is in the vertical position in the back movable presentation unit, the action lever is in the action position, the back decoration first decoration unit, the back second decoration unit, and the back decoration second It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which has acted on three decoration body units. (A) is a front view of a back-to-back movable effect unit of the back unit, (b) is a back view of the back-to-back movable effect unit, and (c) is a back-to-back movable decorative unit in the back-to-back movable effect unit. It is a rear view shown in the raised state. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the back middle left decoration body and the middle back right decoration body of the back middle movable effect unit in the back unit are moved to the center side appearance position. After moving the back left decoration and back right decoration of the back left movable effect unit and the back right movable effect unit in the back unit to a position where the center is closer to the center, the first decoration surface of each is directed forward It is a front view of the game board shown. Fig. 171 is a front view of the game board showing the second movable surface of the left movable effect unit and the lower right movable effect unit turned from the state shown in Fig. 171 with the second left decorative surface turned forward. . Fig. 171 is a front view of the game board showing the third decorative surface of each of the left movable effect unit and the back right movable effect unit with the back left decoration and back right decoration of the left movable effect unit and the back right movable effect unit turned forward. . The first left movable decorative lens and the first right movable decorative lens of the back upper first decorative unit and the second left movable decorative lens and the second right movable of the back upper second decorative unit in the back upper movable effect unit in the back unit With the decorative lens and the third left movable decorative lens and the third right movable decorative lens of the back upper third decoration unit respectively in the closed position, the back upper first decoration unit, the back upper second decoration It is a front view of a game board shown in the state where it has moved to a descent | fall position with a back top rotation base unit being in the state of a horizontal position so that a body unit and a back top third decoration unit may be arranged horizontally. From the state of FIG. 174, the back top rotation base unit is rotated 45 degrees in a clockwise direction in a front view, and the back top first decoration unit, the back top second decoration unit, and the back top third decoration unit are inclined. It is a front view of the game board shown in a lined state. From the state shown in FIG. 175, the back top rotation base unit is further rotated 45 degrees in a clockwise direction in a front view to be in the vertical position, and the back top first decoration unit, the back top second decoration unit, and the back top third It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where decoration units are arranged vertically. From the state of FIG. 176, the first left movable decorative lens and the first right movable decorative lens of the back top first decorative unit, the second left movable decorative lens and the second right movable decorative lens of the back top second decorative unit, and The first fixed decorative lens, the second fixed decorative lens, and the third fixed decorative lens of the third left movable decorative lens and the third right movable decorative lens of the back top third decorative unit respectively in the state of the open position It is a front view of the game board shown in the state which enabled visual recognition. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state which moved the lower back movable ornament unit of the lower back movable effect unit in the back unit to the first raised position. FIG. 179 is a front view of the game board showing the back bottom movable decorative body unit further raised from the state of FIG. 178 and moved to the second raised position. Explanatory drawing which shows the example which provided the LED for making the light emission decoration of the stage of a center character and the back front lower central lens of a back front decoration unit in the back up movable production unit of a back unit as another embodiment of a game board It is. In the back up movable effect unit in the back unit of the game board, the back up rotation base unit is placed in the vertical position, and the first left movable decoration lens and the first right movable decoration lens of the back up first decoration unit, the back The state of the open position of the second left movable decorative lens and the second right movable decorative lens of the upper second decorative body unit, and the third left movable decorative lens and the third right movable decorative lens of the back top third decorative unit It is a front view of a pachinko machine shown in the state which enabled visual recognition of each 1st fixed decoration lens, 2nd fixed decoration lens, and 3rd fixed decoration lens. It is a block diagram of a main control board, a delivery control board, and a peripheral control board. FIG. 182 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. 182. It is the schematic of the various detection signals input / output to the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board which relays the electrical connection of the delivery control board which comprises a main board, CR unit, and a frequency display board. FIG. 182 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. 182. It is a block diagram which shows the outline of peripheral control MPU. It is a block diagram of a sound source built-in VDP periphery in a liquid crystal and sound control part. (A) is a flow chart showing the procedure of the main process executed by the main control MPU of the embodiment, (b) is an interrupt process periodically performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment It is a flowchart which shows the procedure. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the special symbol process processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st starting opening passage process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the 2nd starting opening passage processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol process processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol normal processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the big hit determination processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. (A) is a jackpot determination table used for lottery processing for a big hit, and (B) is a symbol determination table used for lottery processing for a type of jackpot. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop symbol setting processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st fluctuation pattern setting process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol variation processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the big hit control processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the big winning a prize opening opening-and-closing process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 2nd inlet-port opening-and-closing process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the normal symbol process processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the gate part passage process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the normal symbol normal processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the submain process performed by periphery control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about 16 ms regular processing performed by periphery control MPU of the embodiment. (A) is a figure which shows the closed state of a 2nd receiving port, (B) is a figure which shows the open state of a 2nd receiving port. (A) is an execution table of 15R big hit gaming state A, (B) is an execution table of 15 R big hit gaming state B, (C) is an execution table of 15 R big hit gaming state C . (A) is a timing chart of the 12th to 15th round executed according to the execution table at the time of 15R big hit gaming state A, (B) is performed according to the execution table at the time of 15R big hit gaming state B 12 to 15 It is a timing chart of a round. (C) is a timing chart for the 12th to 15th rounds executed according to the execution table for the 15R big hit gaming state C. It is an example of a concrete effect at the time of execution of 15R big hit game states A to C in the effect display device. It is an example of a concrete effect at the time of execution of 15R big hit game states A to C in the effect display device.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, an entire configuration of a pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 10. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine which is an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as viewed from the right front, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as viewed from the left front, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as viewed from the rear. Moreover, FIG. 8 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front in a state in which the door frame is opened from the main body frame and the main body frame is opened from the outer frame. FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and seen from the front, and FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled and was seen from back.

  The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed on an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 for closing the front of the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, A main unit frame 4 supported so as to be openable and closable, and removably attached to the main unit frame 4 from the front side, is made visible from the player side through the door frame 3. And a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which game balls are hit.

  The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 is, as shown in FIG. 9 and FIG. 10, an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20 which are vertically separated and extend laterally, an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 which connect the both ends of 20 and extend vertically are provided. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 have the same front and rear width. Further, the upper and lower lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20.

  Further, the outer frame 2 is attached to the curtain plate member 50 which is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20 by connecting the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and to the left end side of the upper frame member 10 in front view The outer frame side upper hinge member 60, and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the left frame member 30 on the left end side in front view of the curtain plate member 50 are provided. The main frame 4 and the door frame 3 are attached to be openable and closable by the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2.

  The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 is a quadrangle in which the external shape of the front view extends vertically and which has a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a through hole 111 which penetrates back and forth, and a through hole of the door frame base unit 100. A handle unit 300 attached to the front lower right corner below the side 111 and operable by the player to drive the game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and the through hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100. The player is attached to the player according to the game state which is changed by the game unit being attached to the center of the dish unit 320 and the dish unit 320 which are attached to the lower front on the lower side and the dish unit 320 It is attached to the front left part on the left side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320 and the presentation operation unit 400 capable of presenting participatory effects. A door frame left side unit 530, a door frame right side unit 550 mounted on the front right side on the right side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320, and a door frame left side unit 530 And a door frame top unit 570 attached to a front upper portion above the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the door frame right side unit 550.

  The main frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 has a frame-like main frame base 600 which is partially insertable into the outer frame 2 and is capable of supporting the outer periphery of the game board 5, and of the main frame base 600. It is attached to upper and lower ends of the left side of the front view and is rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 and the door frame upper hinge member 140 of the door frame 3 and the door frame A body frame side upper hinge member 620 and a body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the side lower hinge members 150 are rotatably attached, a reinforcing frame 660 attached to the left side surface of the body frame base 600 in a front view, and a body frame base 600 The ball launcher 680 is attached to the lower front of the front and is for hitting a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and is attached to the right side of the main frame base 600 in a front view. 4, A lock unit 700 for locking between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 and a reverse L-shaped character attached to the rear side along the front view upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 to pay out the game ball to the player -Like payout unit 800, a base board unit 900 attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and a rear of the game board 5 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 openably and closably And a back cover 980 covering the side.

  Dispensing unit 800 of body frame 4 is an inverted L-shaped dispensing unit base 801 attached to the rear side of body frame base 600 and attached to the top of dispensing unit base 801 and extends upward and leftwardly. A ball tank 802 for storing gaming balls supplied from a not-shown island facility in a box shape, and attached to the payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802, and the gaming balls in the ball tank 802 are left as viewed from the front A tank guide 803 extending to the left and right, a ball guiding unit 820 attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 at the upper left side in a front view and guiding the gaming ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner; Gaming balls which are detachably mounted on the lower side of the payout unit base 801 and guided by the ball guiding unit 820 A payout device 830 which pays out one by one based on an instruction from the payout control substrate 951 accommodated in the payout control substrate box 950 and a gaming ball attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 and paid out by the payout device 830 downward An upper full-ball path unit 850 which causes the game balls to be released from either the normal outlet 850d or the full tank outlet 850e according to the storage state of the gaming balls in the upper plate 321 in the tray unit 320 and the payout unit A normal guiding path 861 and a full guiding path 861 attached to the lower end of the base 801 and guiding the gaming ball discharged from the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full tank path unit 850 forward to the penetrating ball passage 273 of the door frame 3 from the front end. The game ball released from the tongue outlet 850e is guided forward and guided from the front end to the full tank receptacle 274 of the door frame 3. A lower full sphere path unit 860 having a RuMitsurutan taxiway 862, and a.

  The substrate unit 900 of the main body frame 4 is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 on the left side of the main body frame base 600 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and the speaker for bass A speaker unit 920 having a 921. A power supply substrate box 930 mounted on the right side in front view on the rear side of the substrate unit base 910 and having a power supply substrate housed therein, and attached to the rear side of the speaker unit 920. An interface control board box 940 in which the interface control board is housed, and a payout control board 951 mounted across the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and controlling the payout of gaming balls. And a delivery control board box 950. .

  As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, etc., the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a into which the game balls are hit, and the game balls fired from the ball launcher 680 are the top of the game area 5a. A front component 1000 having an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 for guiding the game, and a flat game panel 1100 attached to the rear of the front component 1000 and defining the rear end of the game area 5a There is.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player rotates the handle 302 in a state where the gaming ball is stored in the upper plate 321, the game ball has a strength according to the rotation angle of the handle 302 by the ball launcher 680. It is driven into the game area 5 a of the game board 5. Then, when the gaming balls driven into the gaming area 5a are received by the winning opening, a predetermined number of gaming balls are paid out by the payout device 830 to the upper tray 321 according to the accepted winning openings. Since the interest of the player can be enhanced by the payout of the game balls, the game balls in the upper plate 321 can be driven into the game area 5a, and the player can enjoy the game.

[2. Overall configuration of outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 16. FIG. 11 is a front view of an outer frame in a pachinko machine, and FIG. 12 is a right side view of the outer frame. FIG. 13 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 14 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the back. FIG. 15 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the front. FIG. 16 (a) is a perspective view of the portion of the outer frame side upper hinge member in the outer frame, viewed from the lower side without the left frame member, and FIG. FIG. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) on which the pachinko machine 1 such as a game hall is installed.

  As illustrated, the outer frame 2 connects the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 which are vertically separated and extends in the left and right direction, and both ends of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. And the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 which are extended in The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 have the same front and rear width. Further, the upper and lower lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. Further, the outer frame 2 is assembled such that the left and right end faces of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 and the side faces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 facing outward in the left and right direction are the same surface. It is done.

  Further, the outer frame 2 includes an outer frame side upper hinge member 60 attached to the front end left side of the upper frame member 10 and a lock member 66 attached to the lower surface of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60; An outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the left end upper portion of the curtain plate member 50 in front view and the left frame member 30 is provided. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 can attach the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 so as to be able to open and close.

  Further, the outer frame 2 is mounted on the rear side of the curtain plate member 50 and the curtain plate member 50 attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20 by connecting the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40. A curtain plate reinforcing member 80 whose both ends are attached to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, a flat left sliding member 81 attached at a position from the left to right center of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 And a flat right sliding member 82 mounted at a position near the right end of the upper surface of the plate member 50. The curtain plate reinforcing member 80 is formed of a solid member (for example, wood, plywood, etc.), and is attached to the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40.

  Furthermore, the outer frame 2 includes the upper frame member 10 and the left frame member 30, the upper frame member 10 and the right frame member 40, the lower frame member 20 and the left frame member 30, and the lower frame member 20 and the right frame member 40, respectively. It has a connecting member 85 connected. The outer frame 2 is attached to the inner side (left side) of the right frame member 40, and the upper hooking member 90 and the lower hooking member 91 are engaged with the outer frame hook 703 of the locking unit 700 described later. , Equipped.

[2-1. Upper frame member]
The upper frame member 10 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) of a predetermined thickness. The upper frame member 10 is provided with an engagement notch 11 which penetrates up and down and is recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends. An upper horizontal fixing portion 87 of an upper left connecting member 85A and an upper right connecting member 85B, which will be described later, of the connecting member 85 is attached to the inside of the engagement notch 11. Moreover, the upper frame member 10 is equipped with the mounting step part 12 which was depressed rather than the general surface in the upper surface and front surface of a front view left side edge part. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is attached to the attachment step 12.

[2-2. Lower frame member]
The lower frame member 20 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) of a predetermined thickness. The lower frame member 20 is formed in the same dimensions as the left and right lengths and the upper and lower lengths of the upper frame member 10, and the front and rear widths of the lower frame member 20 are equal to those of the upper frame member 10. It is formed longer than the front and rear width of the. The lower frame member 20 is provided with an engagement notch 21 which penetrates up and down and is recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at a position closer to the rear side than the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends. A lower left fixing member 88 of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, and a lower horizontal fixing portion 88 of the lower right connecting member 85D are mounted in the engagement notch 21.

  Further, the lower frame member 20 is provided with a front end notch 22 which is recessed rearward from the front surface of both left and right ends. In the lower frame member 20, the width in the front-rear direction from the rear end of the front end notch 22 to the rear surface of the lower frame member 20 is formed to the same dimension as the width in the front-rear direction of the upper frame member 10. When the lower frame member 20 is assembled to the outer frame 2, a portion between the left and right front end notches 22 is inserted into the curtain plate member 50.

[2-3. Left frame member and right frame member]
The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 extend up and down with a constant cross-sectional shape, and are formed of an extruded shape of a metal such as an aluminum alloy. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed in symmetrical shapes in plan view. When assembled as the outer frame 2, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are recessed inward between the position near the rear with respect to the center in the front-rear direction and the vicinity of the rear end It has the convex recessed parts 31 and 41, and the protrusion parts 32 and 42 which bulged from the side surface on the opposite side of the recessed parts 31 and 41, and the inside is formed in the cavity. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are enhanced in strength and rigidity by the protrusions 32 and 42. Further, in the projecting portions 32 and 42, an upper left connecting member 85A and a rear lower lower fixing portion 88 of the upper right connecting member 85B of the connecting member 85 are inserted and attached.

  Further, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 have a plurality of grooves extending in the vertical direction on the surface. The plurality of grooves make it easy for the operator to hold the pachinko machine 1 while holding the pachinko machine 1 in place when carrying or installing the pachinko machine 1 on an island facility such as a game hall or the like. The design of the appearance of the machine 1 can be enhanced.

[2-4. Curtain plate member]
The curtain plate member 50 of the outer frame 2 is formed in a box shape whose rear side is open. The curtain plate member 50 is U-shaped in such a size that the game ball can pass from the left end of the rear extension 51 and the rear extension 51 extending in the form of a flat plate to the rear near the left end in front view on the upper surface A left discharge hole 52 which is notched and penetrates up and down, and a right discharge hole 53 which penetrates up and down with a size which allows the game ball to pass on the right side of the left discharge hole 52 in the rear extension 51; A standing wall 54 extending flatly upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 including the rear end of the rear extension 51 and a front side bulging forward from near the upper end of the standing wall 54 And a return portion 55 which is inclined so as to move rearward toward the rear.

  The curtain plate member 50 is provided on the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 so that the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is placed on the front upper surface of the rear extension portion 51 and the upper surface of the rear extension portion 51. The horizontal part 71 mentioned later is attached. Further, the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50 is formed at a position coincident with a discharge hole 74 described later of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 in a state of being assembled to the outer frame 2. Further, the right discharge hole 53 is formed at a position on the right side of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 in a state of being assembled to the outer frame 2. The right discharge hole 53 is formed larger than the left discharge hole 52.

  Further, the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 on the right side of the rear extension portion 51 is inclined so that the front end side is lower. In addition, the curtain plate member 50 has a left mounting portion 56 for mounting the left sliding member 81 at a position on the right side of the rear extension 51 at the upper surface and a right mounting for mounting the right sliding member 82 near the right end at the upper surface And a unit 57. The lower surface of the main body frame 4 is placed on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 via the left slide member 81 and the right slide member 82.

  As shown, the curtain plate member 50 has a shallow relief-like decoration formed on the front surface. Further, although the illustration is omitted, the curtain plate member 50 has a box-like interior divided into a grid by a plurality of ribs, and the strength and rigidity are enhanced. Further, the curtain plate member 50 is formed so that the front half of the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 can be accommodated inside.

[2-5. Outer frame side upper hinge member]
The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is a flat plate extending horizontally and having a rectangular outer shape fixed to the upper fixing portion 61 and a flat shape extending forward from the front end of the upper fixing portion 61 as illustrated. Of the front extension 62, a bearing groove 63 extending to the left and right center of the front extension 62 as going forward from the right end of the front extension 62, and penetrating vertically, and a plan view of the upper fixing portion 61 A flat horizontal fixing portion 64 extending downward from the left side, and a lower side extending from the end of the front extension 62 from the left end to the portion where the bearing groove 63 is open from the left end to the horizontal fixing A flat plate-like hanging portion 65 continuous with the portion 64 is provided (see FIG. 16 (b) and the like).

  In the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the upper fixing portion 61 is placed on the upper surface of the mounting stepped portion 12 of the upper frame member 10 in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, and fixed by screws not shown. There is. Further, the front extension portion 62 extends forward of the front end of the upper frame member 10. Further, the horizontal fixing portion 64 is fixed to the left frame member 30 by a screw in a state of being inserted from the upper side into the recess 31 of the outer side surface of the left frame member 30.

  The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 to insert the main frame 4 by inserting the main frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main frame upper hinge member 620 into the bearing groove 63. It can be supported openable and closable. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

[2-6. Lock member]
The lock member 66 of the outer frame 2 is, as shown in FIG. 16, a band-plate shaped lock main body 66a having a predetermined width on the left and right and extending back and forth, and an operation portion projecting rightward from the rear end 66b, a resiliently deformable rod-like elastic portion 66c extending diagonally forward to the left after extending from the rear end of the lock main body 66a, and an attachment hole vertically penetrating near the rear end of the lock main body 66a And 66d. The lock member 66 is formed of synthetic resin. The lock member 66 is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 by a mounting screw 67.

  The rear end of the lock body 66a is attached to a position rearward of the bearing groove 63 in the front extension 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 through the attachment hole 66d. Further, in a state where the lock member 66 is attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the lock main body 66a can block the bearing groove 63 in plan view, and the right side near the front end is the outer frame side upper hinge member It extends forward so as to be in contact with a portion of the hanging portion 65 extending to the opening of the bearing groove 63 (see FIG. 18).

  Further, the tip end of the elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock main body 66a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. The lock member 66 is biased in a direction such that the front end pivots to the left around the mounting hole 66d by the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c. Therefore, in the normal state, the right side surface near the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is in contact with the hanging portion 65 (see FIG. 18). In this state, a space capable of accommodating a main frame upper hinge pin 622 (described later) of the main frame upper upper hinge member 620 is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 63 on the front side of the lock main body 66a.

  The lock member 66 can rotate the lock main body 66a against the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c by operating the operation portion 66b. Then, the lock main body 66a can be retracted from the bearing groove 63 in plan view by rotating the lock main body 66a in the direction in which the front end moves to the left by the operation of the operation portion 66b. Can be completely through. Thus, the main frame upper hinge pin 622 can be inserted into the bearing groove 63 or the main frame upper hinge pin 622 can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-7. Outer frame side lower hinge member]
As shown in the figure, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 stands upward from a portion behind the center in the front-rear direction on the left side of the horizontally extending flat horizontal portion 71 and the horizontal portion 71. A flat plate-like rising portion 72, an outer frame lower hinge pin 73 protruding upward from near the front end of the horizontal portion 71, and a horizontal portion 71 are vertically penetrated, and only one game ball can pass through. And a discharge hole 74 of a size. The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

  The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed in a trapezoidal shape whose left side is a base in a plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 has a cylindrical shape and is formed in a truncated cone shape whose upper end is narrowed at the upper end than the center in the vertical direction. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 is attached at a position near the front end of the horizontal portion 71 to the left. The discharge hole 74 is formed in the horizontal portion 71 so as to be in contact with a central portion of the rising portion 72 in the front-rear direction, and extends from the left side of the horizontal portion 71 to the right in an inverted U shape. The discharge hole 74 is formed in substantially the same size as the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50.

  In the outer frame side lower hinge member 70, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the horizontal portion 71 is placed on the upper surface near the left end of the curtain plate member 50 and on the rear extension portion 51. Is fixed to the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 by a screw (not shown) penetrating the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50. Further, in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the rising portion 72 is attached to a portion on the front side of the projecting portion 32 on the inner side surface of the left frame member 30 by a screw (not shown). The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is inserted into the main frame lower lower hinge member (not shown) in the main frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4, whereby the outer frame lower upper hinge pin 70 is inserted. The main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be able to open and close in cooperation with the hinge member 60.

  Further, in the state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 74 matches the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50. Thereby, the gaming ball on the horizontal portion 71 can be dropped (discharged) to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50 through the discharge hole 74 and the left discharge hole 52. Specifically, when the main frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 is closed as the main frame 4 is closed. Since the gap between the two gradually narrows, the space is rolled backward and can be discharged from the discharge hole 74. At this time, the discharge hole 74 is formed at a position substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1 By discharging the game balls dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 from the discharge holes 74, it is possible to easily prevent the game frame 4 from rolling to the rear side, the outer frame side It is possible to make it difficult for the gaming ball to stay at the portion of the lower hinge member 70.

[2-8. Connection member]
The connecting member 85 of the outer frame 2 includes an upper left connecting member 85A connecting the upper frame member 10 and the left frame member 30, an upper right connecting member 85B connecting the upper frame member 10 and the right frame member 40, and a lower frame member 20 and a left lower connecting member 85C connecting the left frame member 30 and a lower right connecting member 85D connecting the lower frame member 20 and the right frame member 40.

  The connecting member 85 includes a horizontally extending flat horizontal fixing portion 86, a flat upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extending upward from either the left or right side of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and a horizontal fixing portion. And 86 a flat lower lower fixing portion 88 extending downward from the same side as the portion where the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extends. The connection member 85 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  In the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extends upward from the center in the front-rear direction of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 from the front and rear both sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. It extends downward. That is, in the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, two lower horizontal fixing portions 88 are provided separately in the front-rear direction. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are fixed to the upper frame member 10 in a state of being in contact with the lower surface of the upper frame member 10. The upper horizontal fixing portion 87 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is inserted into the engagement cutout portion 21 of the upper frame member 10 and fixed to the end of the upper frame member 10 in the left-right direction. The lower horizontal fixing portions 88 on the front side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are respectively fixed to the inner side surfaces on the front side of the projecting portions 32 and 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40. Furthermore, the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is inserted into the projecting portions 32 and 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and screwed from the outer side surface. As a result, it is fixed to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 respectively.

  In the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D, the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 protrudes rearward more than the rear end of the horizontal fixing portion 86 and the horizontal fixing portion 86 of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. A lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extends downward from the horizontal fixing portion 86 from the lower end of the portion projecting rearward. The lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D further include a bent portion 89 projecting from the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 to the same side as the horizontal fixing portion 86. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed in contact with the upper surface of the lower frame member 20. Further, the upper horizontal fixing portions 87 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed to the inner side surface on the front side of the protruding portions 32, 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively. Furthermore, the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D is inserted into the engagement cutout portion 21 of the lower frame member 20 and fixed to the end surface of the lower frame member 20 in the left-right direction. Ru.

[2-9. Locking mechanism of outer frame side upper hinge member]
Next, in the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a lock mechanism for the main frame side upper hinge member 620 of the main body frame 4 by the lock member 66 in the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 will be described with reference to FIGS. Refer to the description. Fig.17 (a) is a perspective view which expands and shows the state by which the main frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed with respect to the outer frame side upper hinge member of an outer frame, (b) is an outer upper side. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the state in which the main body side upper hinge member is attached to the hinge member. FIG. 18 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the lock member in the outer frame.

  When the lock member 66 in the outer frame 2 is attached to the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame-side upper hinge member 60 (normal state), the tip of the elastic portion 66c abuts on the inner circumferential surface of the hanging portion 65 The lock main body 66a is configured to close a part of the bearing groove 63 bent in a V-shape, and the tip end portion of the lock main body 66a does not close the deepest part of the bearing groove 63, A space in which the main frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main frame side upper hinge member 620 of the main body frame 4 can be inserted is formed at the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63.

  In the supporting mechanism of the main frame upper hinge pin 622 using the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the lock member 66 in the present embodiment, the main frame upper hinge pin 622 is inserted into the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63 and the front end of the lock main body 66a The right side face of the lock body 66 is in close proximity to the right hanging portion 65 (in this state, there is a slight gap between the right side face of the front end of the lock main body 66a and the right hanging In the normal pivotally supported state, the respective centers of the main frame upper hinge pin 622 located at the deepest part of the bent bearing groove 63 and the front end face of the lock main body 66a are diagonally offset and opposed It is in the state.

  And, in this normal support state, since the main frame upper hinge pin 622 supporting the heavy main body frame 4 is in contact with the front end portion of the bearing groove 63, the main frame upper hinge pin There is almost no load from 622 on the front end face of the lock body 66a. That is, no load is applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66. In addition, since the front end face of the lock main body 66a is formed in a circular arc shape, when the operation portion 66b is turned to turn the lock member 66, the lock member 66 is smoothly turned. There is. Further, in the drawing, the arc center of the front end face of the lock main body 66a is taken as the center of the mounting hole 66d (the rotation center of the lock member 66).

  Therefore, when the acting force F is applied in the direction in which the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame comes out along the slope of the bearing groove 63 formed in the V shape and abuts on the arc-shaped front end face of the lock body 66a, the acting force A component force F1 (a normal direction of an arc of a front end face of the lock main body 66a) acting on a contact portion between the body frame upper hinge pin 622 and the arc shaped front end face, a body frame upper hinge pin 622 and a bearing groove 63 The component force F1 is directed to the center (rotation center of the lock member 66) of the mounting hole 66d (mounting screw 67) when divided into the component force F2 acting on the contact portion with the inner surface on one side The moment that the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 rotates in the direction away from the hanging portion 65 on the right does not work, and the hinge pin 622 of the main body frame is one of the front end portion of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 and the bearing groove 63. Inside Clamped state is maintained between the.

  For this reason, even in a normal pivotally supported state or a state where the action force of the main frame upper hinge pin 622 is applied to the lock member 66, no load is always applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66, and integrally formed of synthetic resin. It is possible to prevent plastic deformation due to creep of the elastic portion 66c, and to prevent the main frame upper hinge pin 622 from coming off from the bearing groove 63 for a long period of time. Even if an excessive force is applied and the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is rotated in the direction to move to the right, the front right side of the lock main body 66a abuts on the hanging portion 65 to further Since it does not rotate, the lock member 66 does not protrude outside the front extension 62.

  Note that even if the shape of the front end face of the lock main body 66a is not arc-shaped, the position where the rotational moment is not generated by the action of the component force F1 described above or the front end portion of the lock member 66 faces the outside of the forward extension portion 62. By placing the rotation center of the lock member 66 (the shaft fixed by the mounting screw 67) at a position where a rotational moment to rotate is generated, no load is always applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66, Even when the lock member 66 rotates, the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66 a just abuts on the hanging portion 65, and therefore the lock member 66 does not protrude outside the front extension portion 62.

  When the main frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main frame upper hinge member 620 is supported by the bearing groove 63 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the upper side of the main frame in the bearing groove 63 from the open side of the bearing groove 63 Insert the hinge pin 622. When the main frame upper hinge pin 622 is inserted into the bearing groove 63, the main frame upper hinge pin 622 abuts on the right side surface of the lock main body 66a of the lock member 66 and the front end of the lock main body 66a resists the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 pivots around the mounting screw 67 so as to move to the left. As a result, the lock main body 66a closing the bearing groove 63 retracts to open the bearing groove 63, and the main frame upper hinge pin 622 can be moved to the deepest portion (front end) of the bearing groove 63.

  Then, when the main frame upper hinge pin 622 is moved to the deepest part of the bearing groove 63, the contact between the main frame upper hinge pin 622 and the lock main body 66a of the lock member 66 is released, and the lock main body 66a is moved by the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 is pivoted so that the front end of the arm moves to the right, and the lock member 66 returns to the normal state. As a result, the body frame upper hinge pin 622 is accommodated in the space on the front side of the front end of the lock main body 66 a in the bearing groove 63, and the body frame upper hinge pin 622 can rotate at the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63. It is held (locked) in the state.

  When removing the main frame upper hinge pin 622 from the inside of the bearing groove 63, the operating portion 66b of the locking member 66 is operated to turn the locking member 66 so that the front end of the lock main body 66a moves to the left. The lock main body 66a is retracted from the bearing groove 63 against the biasing force of 66c. As a result, the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63 and the opening communicate with each other, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-10. Security mechanism and ball biting prevention mechanism at the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member]
Ball catching prevention for preventing the game ball from being caught between the crime prevention mechanism and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 at the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment The mechanism will be described.

  In the assembled state, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is attached to the outer frame 2 at the left end in the front view on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50. The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is mounted in a state of being placed near the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 and the upper surface of the rear extension portion 51. The curtain plate member 50 includes an upright wall portion 54 rising upward from the rear end of the upper surface. Thus, even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is made to enter the rear side of the main frame 4 (pachinko machine 1) through the gap between the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the main frame side lower hinge member 640. Since the tip of the incorrect tool abuts on the upstanding wall portion 54 extending upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, it is possible to prevent the incorrect tool from being inserted further backward. Thus, it is possible to prevent a fraud from being conducted through the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70.

  In addition, since the upper end of the standing wall portion 54 is provided with the return portion 55 extending forward, when the incorrect tool in contact with the upper wall portion 54 is bent upward, the end of the incorrect tool by the return portion 55 Can be further folded forward, so that an unauthorized tool can be prevented from invading the rear side of the main body frame 4, and cheating is performed through the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70. Can be reliably blocked.

  By the way, when the standing wall portion 54 extending upward is provided at the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, the gaming ball is on the outer frame side with the main body frame 4 open to the outer frame 2. When dropped onto the lower hinge member 70 (horizontal portion 71), the gaming ball on the horizontal portion 71 is not discharged rearward from the rear end of the horizontal portion 71 due to the presence of the standing wall portion 54. There is a risk of being caught between On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the discharge hole 74 and the left discharge hole 52 through which the game ball can pass through the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the rear extension portion 51 of the curtain plate member 50. Because the right discharge hole 53 is provided, the gaming balls on the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 can be discharged downward from the discharge hole 74 or the like, and the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4 Between the game ball and the game ball can be reduced.

  Therefore, by the game ball being pinched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 may be damaged or the main frame 4 may not be closed in a normal state. A gap is created between the main unit frame 4 and the gap, which can be used to prevent fraudulent acts.

[3. Overall configuration of the door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 30. 19 is a front view of a door frame in a pachinko machine, FIG. 20 is a right side view of the door frame, FIG. 21 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 22 is a rear view of the door frame. FIG. 23 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the front right, FIG. 24 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the front left, and FIG. 25 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the rear. 26 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A-A in FIG. 19, FIG. 27 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line B-B in FIG. 19, and FIG. 28 is a cross section taken along the line C-C in FIG. FIG. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear.

  As shown in FIG. 29 and FIG. 30, etc., the door frame 3 is attached to the frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a rectangular shape with the outline of the front view extending vertically and the front lower right corner of the door frame base unit 100 The handle unit 300, the dish unit 320 attached to the lower front of the door frame base unit 100, the rendering operation unit 400 attached to the center of the dish unit 320, and the door frame base unit above the dish unit 320 A door frame left side unit 530 attached to the front left of the 100, a door frame right side unit 550 attached to the front right of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320, and a door frame left side Door frame top attached to the upper front of the door frame base unit 100 above the unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 Is provided with a knit 570, a.

  Although details will be described later, the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 is a plate-like door frame base 110 having a through hole 111 penetrating in the front and back in a rectangular shape (square shape) whose outer shape in front view extends vertically. The frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 and the upper and lower ends of the reinforcing unit 130 on the left end side in a front view are hinge-rotatably attached to the main body frame 4 A door frame side upper hinge member 140 and a door frame side lower hinge member 150, a glass unit 190 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 and closing the through hole 111, a crime prevention cover 200 covering the lower rear surface of the glass unit 190; A door frame 3 and a main body frame 4 which are attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to protrude forward through the door frame base 110 and can be opened and closed, and a main body frame 4 and an outer frame 2 An open / close cylinder unit 210 for locking the space, a ball feed unit 250 attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the door frame base 110 for sending gaming balls to the ball launcher 680, and a ball attached to the lower surface of the door frame base 110 And a fall cover unit 270 for receiving the game balls which have been fired by the launch device 680 and have not reached the game area 5a and discharged to the lower tray 322.

  The details of the handle unit 300 of the door frame 3 will be described later, but the game ball stored in the upper plate 321 can be adjusted according to the rotation angle of the handle 302 by the player turning the rotatable handle 302. It is possible to drive into the game area 5a of the game board 5 with an extra strength.

  The plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 is attached to the lower portion of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100, and the front surface bulges forward. The rendering operation unit 400 is attached to the front end in the center in the left-right direction. The dish unit 320 is provided with an upper dish 321 for storing gaming balls to be driven into the game area 5a, and gaming balls provided under the upper dish 321 and supplied from the upper dish 321 and the far cover unit 270. The lower plate 322 that can be stored, the upper plate ball removal button 327 for extracting the gaming balls stored in the upper plate 321 to the lower plate 322, and the remaining amount of cash or prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine A ball lending button 328 for lending a game ball to a player, a cash obtained by subtracting a game ball loaned from a ball lending machine or a return button 329 for returning a prepaid card, a cash inserted into the ball lending machine And a ball loan return display unit 330 for displaying the number of remaining prepaid cards and the like, a production selection left button 331 and a production selection right button 332, which allow reception of the player's operation at the time of presentation, and a lower tray Game balls in 22 and lower tray ball vent button 333 for discharging downwardly the dish unit 320, and a.

  The effect operation unit 400 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front of the plate unit 320 in the center in the left-right direction of the front view, and can be pressed by the player and presents the effect image to the player It can be done. Although this effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail later, a door frame side effect capable of displaying the effect image, which is disposed so as to be visible from the player side in the operation button 410 and the large operation button 410 operable by the player And a display device 460.

  The door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front left portion on the left side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100 at the upper side of the plate unit 320, though the detailed contents will be described later. It decorates the left outside of the game area 5a). The door frame left side unit 530 includes a left unit decorative lens member (not shown) capable of emitting light.

  The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front right portion on the right side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the plate unit 320, though the detailed contents will be described later. It decorates the right outside of the game area 5a). The door frame right side unit 550 protrudes to the front more largely than the door frame left side unit 530, and is provided at the front end with the right unit left decoration member 554 and the right unit right decoration member 557 provided on both right and left sides. And a right unit decorative lens member 561. The door frame right side unit 550 can emit and decorate the right unit left decoration member 554, the right unit right decoration member 557, and the right unit decoration lens member 561.

  The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 is attached to the upper side of the through hole 111 in the front of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 It decorates the upper part of the frame 3. The details of the door frame top unit 570 will be described later, but the left and right sides of the pair of upper speakers 573 spaced apart to the left and right, the top middle decoration member 576 projecting forward at the front center, and the top middle decoration member 576 A top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 are provided. The door frame top unit 570 can emit and decorate the top middle decoration member 576, the top left decoration lens member 579, and the top right decoration lens member 580.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. 31 (a) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 31 (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear is there.

  The door frame base unit 100 is attached to the main body frame 4 so as to be openable / closable (hinge rotatable) so that the left side in a front view closes the front surface of the main body frame 4. In the door frame base unit 100, the handle unit 300 is attached to the front lower corner, and the plate unit 320 to which the rendering operation unit 400 is attached to the lower front of the through hole 111. The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the right outer front surface of the through hole 111, and the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the through hole 111, respectively.

  The door frame base unit 100 is, as shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, a plate-like door frame base 110 having a through-hole 111 which has a rectangular shape whose front view outline extends vertically and which penetrates back and forth. The frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 and the upper and lower ends of the reinforcing unit 130 on the left end side of the reinforcing unit 130 are projected forward from the door frame base 110. A door frame upper hinge member 140 and a door frame lower hinge member 150 rotatably attached to the body frame upper hinge member 620 and the body frame lower hinge member 640, and a front face of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 A door frame left side decoration substrate 160 mounted on the left side and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front, and a glass unit 19 rotatably mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110 The glass unit mounting member 170 for mounting the detachably, and a.

  Further, the door frame base unit 100 is attached to the front lower right corner of the door frame base 110 in front view and is attached to the cylindrical handle attachment member 180 for attaching the handle unit 300 and the rear surface of the door frame base 110. A glass unit 190 for closing the through hole 111, a crime prevention cover 200 for covering a lower rear surface of the glass unit 190, and an open / close cylinder unit attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to project forward through the door frame base 110. 210, a ball feed unit 250 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a rear cover unit 270 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110.

  Further, although not shown, the door frame base unit 100 includes various decoration substrates provided in the door frame 3, a ball feeding solenoid 255, a handle rotation detection sensor 307, a handle touch sensor 310, a single button operation sensor 312, Ball lending button 328, return button 329, ball lending display portion 330, effect selection left button 331, effect selection right button 332, vibration motor 424, press detection sensor 440, door frame side effect display device 460 (liquid crystal display device 461) And a door main body relay board for relaying the connection between the upper speakers 573 and the like and the door frame relay board 911 of the board unit 900 in the main body frame 4.

3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 31 to FIG. The door frame base 110 is formed in a quadrangle (rectangle) in which the outer shape in a front view extends vertically. The door frame base 110 is penetrated back and forth, and is provided with the penetration opening 111 formed in the substantially rectangular shape which the inner peripheral shape in the plain view extended up and down. The upper side and the left and right sides forming the inner periphery of the through hole 111 approach the outer periphery of the door frame base 110 respectively, and the lower side forming the inner periphery is from the lower end of the door frame base 110 vertically It is located at a height of about 1/3 of the direction. Therefore, the door frame base 110 is formed in a frame shape as a whole by the through holes 111 penetrating in the front and rear direction. The door frame base 110 is integrally formed of synthetic resin.

  The door frame base 110 is formed at the lower right corner in the front view of the front view, and is inclined so that the left end side protrudes slightly more forward than the right end side, the handle mounting surface 112, and the through hole 111. The cylinder mounting portion 113 to which the cylinder mounting plate metal 213 of the opening and closing cylinder unit 210 is attached is recessed toward the front from the rear surface in the vicinity of the right end in front view, and the cylinder mounting portion 113 penetrates back and forth The cylinder lock 211 is inserted through the cylinder insertion hole 114, the cylinder insertion hole 114, and the handle mounting surface 112 in a front view on the left side, and penetrates the entrance 251a and the ball outlet 251b of the ball feed unit 250 forward. And a ball feed opening 115 for facing the

  Further, the door frame base 110 penetrates back and forth at substantially the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 112 to the left from the center of the door frame base 110 in the left-right direction, The lower plate passage port 116 and the front side of the door frame base 110 are penetrated forward and backward so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the through hole 111 in the vicinity of the left end, and the through ball passage 273 of the far cover unit 270 is faced forward A recess for the plate 117, a recess from the rear to the front along the inner circumference of the through hole 111, a glass unit attachment portion 118 into which the glass frame 191 of the glass unit 190 is inserted, and left and right on the door frame base 110 It has the speaker insertion port 119 which penetrates back and forth in the corner and into which the rear end of the upper speaker 573 of the door frame top unit 570 is inserted.

[3-1 b. Reinforcement unit]
The reinforcing unit 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 31 and 33 and the like. The reinforcing unit 130 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 to reinforce the door frame base 110, thereby enhancing the strength and rigidity of the door frame base 110 (the door frame 3). The reinforcing unit 130 includes a left and right extending upper reinforcing sheet metal 131 attached along the upper side of the rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a laterally extending middle reinforcement attached below the through hole 111 on the rear surface of the door frame base 110. A sheet metal 132, a vertically extending left reinforcing sheet metal 133 attached along the left side in a front view on the rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a vertically extending right reinforcement attached along the right side in the front surface on the rear surface of the door frame base 110 It has a sheet metal 134 and a locking / locking portion 135 attached to the rear surface of the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 and to which the door frame wedge 702 of the locking unit 700 is locked.

  The left and right ends of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131 are connected and fixed to the upper ends of the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 by screws, and the left end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected to the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 by screws. It is fixed. The right end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected and fixed to the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 via a cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 described later. Therefore, the reinforcing unit 130 is formed in a frame shape by the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, and the like.

  The upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, and the locking / locking portion 135 of the reinforcing unit 130 are formed by appropriately bending a metal sheet. The middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is formed with a notch 132 a penetrating in the front and rear direction at a position corresponding to the upper plate passage port 117 of the door frame base 110.

  Although not shown in detail, the reinforcing unit 130 has portions of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 which are bent in the front-rear direction, The strength and rigidity are enhanced by the portion, and the intrusion of unauthorized tools such as a piano wire and a screwdriver from the outside is prevented.

[3-1 c. Door frame side upper hinge member]
The door frame side upper hinge member 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The door frame upper hinge member 140 is a door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 having a pair of projecting pieces 141 a attached to the door frame base 110 and separated vertically, and a pair of protrusions of the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 A cylindrical door frame upper hinge pin 142 which penetrates the piece 141a and whose upper end is inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main frame side upper hinge member 620, and a pair of projecting pieces 141a of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 Between the wedge member 143 and the lower projecting piece 141a of the pair of projecting pieces 141a, and the door frame upper hinge pin 142 And a lock spring 144 urging the door frame upper hinge pin 142 upward.

  The door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 has a flat plate-like mounting piece connecting the rear ends of a pair of projecting pieces 141a although not shown, and the shape of the side view is opened forward. It is formed in a letter shape. In the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141, mounting pieces connecting the pair of projecting pieces 141a are attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 by screws.

  A portion (upper end) of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 projecting upward from the upper projecting piece 141 a is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main frame side upper hinge member 620. Moreover, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, the site | part which protrudes below rather than the lower side piece 141a of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 is bent in the horizontal direction. The bent portion abuts on the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 141a, thereby restricting the upward movement of the door frame upper hinge pin 142.

  The wedge member 143 is an E-ring, and is inserted and held in a groove formed on the outer periphery of the door frame upper hinge pin 142. The lock spring 144 is a coil spring through which the door frame upper hinge pin 142 can be inserted. The upper end is in contact with the wedge member 143, and the lower end is in contact with the lower projecting piece 141a. The lock spring 144 is interposed between the wedge member 143 and the lower projecting piece 141 a in a compressed state, and biases the door frame upper hinge pin 142 upward through the wedge member 143. .

  The door frame upper hinge member 140 is in a state in which the door frame upper hinge pin 142 is biased upward by the lock spring 144, and the horizontally bent portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 protrudes downward. By coming into contact with the lower surface of the piece 141a, further upward movement is restricted. In this state, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 protrudes upward by a predetermined amount than the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 141a.

  The door frame side upper hinge member 140 holds the horizontally bent portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142, and pulls the portion downward against the biasing force of the lock spring 144 to open the door frame. The upper hinge pin 142 can be moved entirely downward, and the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 can be recessed below the upper surface of the upper projecting piece 141a. Therefore, the door frame side upper hinge member 140 inserts the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main frame side upper hinge member 620 from below or pulls it down. Can. Thereby, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140 is inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main frame side upper hinge member 620, whereby the front left upper end of the door frame 3 is obtained. , And can be rotatably supported relative to the body frame 4.

  Further, in the door frame side upper hinge member 140, a portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 supported by the pair of projecting pieces 141a of the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 is a door frame of the door frame lower lower hinge member 150 described later. It is coaxially supported with the lower hinge pin 152. Thus, the door frame 3 can be hinge-rotated in a good state with respect to the main body frame 4 by the door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame side lower hinge member 150.

[3-1 d. Door frame side lower hinge member]
The door frame side lower hinge member 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32 and the like. The door frame lower hinge member 150 includes a door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 having a flat extending piece 151a attached to the door frame base 110 and extending forward, and a door frame lower hinge shaft bracket And a cylindrical door frame lower hinge pin 152 (see FIGS. 21 and 22) projecting downward from the vicinity of the front end of the extension piece 151a.

  The lower door frame hinge shaft bracket 151 has a flat attachment piece (not shown) extending upward from the rear end of the flat extension piece 151a extending horizontally, and the overall shape of the side view Is formed in a substantially L shape. A mounting piece (not shown) of the lower door frame hinge shaft bracket 151 is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 by a screw.

  The lower end of the lower door frame hinge pin 152 is formed in a truncated cone shape in which the lower end portion is narrowed toward the lower side. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is rotatably inserted from above into the door frame hinge hole 644 of the main frame side lower hinge member 640 in the main body frame 4 described later. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is disposed coaxially with the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140.

  The door frame lower hinge member 150 can rotate the door frame 3 relative to the body frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 152 into the door frame hinge hole 644 of the body frame lower hinge member 640. Support.

[3-1 e. Door frame left side decoration board]
The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 31 and 32 and the like. The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 is attached to the front of the door frame base 110 on the left side in a front view of the through hole 111. The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 extends vertically from the height at a position lower than the speaker insertion opening 119 on the left side in the front view of the door frame base 110 to a height near the center in the vertical direction of the through opening 111 A door frame left side lower decoration extending vertically from the height at the lower position of the frame left side upper decorative substrate 161 and the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 161 to substantially the same height as the lower end of the upper plate passage 117 And a substrate 162.

  The door frame left side upper decoration substrate 161 of the door frame left side decoration substrate 160 and the door frame left side lower decoration substrate 162 are respectively provided with a plurality of LEDs 161 a and 162 a capable of emitting light forward on the front surface. The LEDs 161a and 162a are full color LEDs.

  The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 is located behind the door frame left side unit 530 described later in a state where the door frame 3 is assembled, and a plurality of (mounted) LEDs 161 a and 162 a provided on the front surface By appropriately emitting light, the left unit decorative lens member of the door frame left side unit 530 can be lighted and decorated.

[3-1 f. Glass unit mounting member]
The glass unit attachment member 170 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 31 (b) and the like. The glass unit attachment member 170 is rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 and is for detachably attaching the glass unit 190. The glass unit attachment member 170 has a disk-like base 171 rotatably mounted about an axis extending back and forth on the rear side of the door frame base 110, and a bar-like projection from the base 171 in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. And a protruding portion 172.

  The glass unit attachment member 170 is rotatably attached to a portion outside the glass unit attachment portion 118 below the pair of speaker insertion holes 119 in the rear surface of the door frame base 110.

  By setting the glass unit attachment member 170 to rotate so that the protrusion 172 protrudes upward from the base 171, the protrusion 172 is more outward than the glass unit attachment portion 118 of the door frame base 110 in a rear view. In the state of being positioned, the glass unit 190 can be inserted into the glass unit attachment portion 118 of the door frame base 110 or the glass unit 190 can be removed from the glass unit attachment portion 118.

  When the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the protruding portion 172 protrudes downward from the base portion 171 with the glass unit 190 inserted in the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, the protruding portion 172 is glass The rear side of the mounting piece 191 a of the unit 190 abuts against the rear side of the upper part of the glass unit 190, and the glass unit 190 can be attached to the door frame base 110.

  In the glass unit attachment member 170, the projection 172 projects from the disk-like base 171 rotatably attached to the door frame base 110, so the center of gravity of the glass unit attachment member 170 is located in the projection 172 . From this, in the state where the glass unit attachment member 170 can freely rotate, the protrusion 172 is stabilized in the state of protruding downward from the base 171. And, in the glass unit attachment member 170, since the projection 172 restricts the backward movement of the glass unit 190 at the rotational position where the projection 172 projects downward from the base 171, the glass unit attachment Even if vibration or the like acts on the member 170, the whole does not rotate so that the projecting portion 172 protrudes upward from the base portion 171, and the restriction on the backward movement of the glass unit 190 is naturally released. Absent.

  When the glass unit 190 is removed from the door frame base 110, the glass unit attachment member 170 is rotated so that the projection 172 protrudes upward from the base 171, and the projection 172 is attached to the attachment piece 191a of the glass unit 190. By moving the glass unit 190 further outward, the upper side of the glass unit 190 can be moved backward, and the glass unit 190 can be removed from the door frame base 110.

[3-1 g. Handle mounting member]
The handle attachment member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The handle attachment member 180 is for attaching the handle unit 300 to the front of the door frame base 110. As shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the handle mounting member 180 extends outward in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the cylindrical portion 181 from the rear end of the cylindrical cylindrical portion 181 extending in the front-rear direction and the rear end of the cylindrical portion 181. A plurality of annular flanges 182 extending, and a plurality of protruding into the cylindrical portion 181 and extending over the entire axial length of the cylindrical portion 181 and disposed at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 181 ( In this example, the three protruding ridges 183 are provided, and the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 181 and the front surface of the flange portion 182 are connected to each other, and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 184 arranged in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 181 .

  The handle attachment member 180 is attached to the handle attachment surface 112 with a screw in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 182 is in contact with the front surface of the handle attachment surface 112 of the door frame base 110.

  The cylindrical portion 181 is formed to have an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base portion 301 a of the handle base 301 in the handle unit 300. One of the three protrusions 183 is provided on the upper side in the cylindrical portion 181, and the remaining two are provided on the lower side in the cylindrical portion 181. The three protrusions 183 are formed at positions corresponding to the three grooves 301 c in the handle base 301. Therefore, the handle attachment member 180 can insert the base portion 301a of the handle base 301 into the cylindrical portion 181 only in a state where the three protrusions 183 and the three groove portions 301c of the handle base 301 coincide with each other. The rotational position of the handle base 301 (handle unit 300) can be regulated with respect to the door frame base 110.

  The handle mounting member 180 is mounted on the inclined handle mounting surface 112 of the door frame base 110 because the axis of the cylindrical portion 181 extends perpendicularly to the rear surface of the flange portion 182. The axis 181 is inclined so as to extend to the right front, and the handle unit 300 can be attached to the door frame base 110 in the same inclined state.

[3-1 h. Glass unit]
The glass unit 190 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The glass unit 190 is for closing the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 so that the rear can be seen from the front. The glass unit 190 has a frame-like glass frame 191 attachable to the glass unit attachment portion 118 larger than the inner peripheral shape of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110, and the inside of the glass frame 191 closed. And two transparent glass plates 192 attached to 191. The two glass plates 192 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 191, respectively, and are separated in the front and back direction so as to form a space between each other (see FIG. 26 etc.).

  The glass frame 191 has a pair of mounting pieces 191a extending flatly outward from a position lower than the front left and right upper corners, and a band projecting downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side And a plate-like locking piece 191b. The mounting piece 191 a of the glass frame 191 can be in contact with the projecting portion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170. The locking piece 191 b is insertable into the space between the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 (see FIG. 26).

  The glass unit 190 is inserted from above from the rear side of the door frame base 110 into the gap between the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 from above. The front end of the glass frame 191 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, and the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated to make the projection 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170 a mounting piece 191a of the glass frame 191 It is attached to the door frame base 110 by bringing it into contact with the rear surface of the door frame.

  When the glass unit 190 is removed from the door frame base 110, it can be removed in the reverse procedure to the above. Thereby, the glass unit 190 is detachable with respect to the door frame base 110.

[3-1 i. Security cover]
The crime prevention cover 200 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The crime prevention cover 200 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 so as to cover the lower part of the rear surface of the glass unit 190, and is formed of a transparent synthetic resin. Security cover 200 is disposed with a flat main body portion 201 whose outer periphery is formed in a predetermined shape, a flat rear projection piece 202 which protrudes backwards short along the outer peripheral edge of main body portion 201, and is separated left and right And a pair of locking pieces 203 that project forward relative to the main body 201 and are lockable on the rear side of the door frame base 110.

  The main body portion 201 of the crime prevention cover 200 is formed so that the lower end thereof protrudes downward more than the lower end of the glass unit 190 in a state of being attached to the door frame base 110. Further, the main body portion 201 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5 a in the game board 5 in a state where the upper end is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body portion 201 is formed in a shape along a part of the inner rail 1002 of the front component 1000 described later, the out guiding part 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and the right rail 1005 It is formed so as not to protrude into the game area 5 a in a state where it is assembled in the pachinko machine 1.

  The rear protrusion 202 is formed over substantially the entire outer periphery of the main body portion 201. Therefore, the crime prevention cover 200 is formed in the shape of a shallow box opened rearward by the main body portion 201 and the rear projecting piece 202, and the strength and the rigidity are high. Further, as shown in FIG. 33, the rear protrusion 202 also protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 201 which is different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body 201. A rear projection 202 projecting rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 201 is formed along a part of the outer rail 1001 of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 in a state assembled in the pachinko machine 1 ing.

  The rear projection 202 is not formed at a portion of the game board 5 located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the gaming ball passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 (the gaming ball launched by the ball launching device 680) does not abut the rear projection 202 of the security cover 200, and the inside of the gaming area 5a There is no impediment to hitting the game ball into.

  The pair of locking pieces 203 is elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base 110. Thereby, the crime prevention cover 200 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base 110.

  In the state where the crime prevention cover 200 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body portion 201 is in contact with the rear surface of the glass unit 190 (the rear end of the glass frame 191). The removed rear projection 202 is inserted into the security recess 1008 of the front component 1000 described later. In addition, the security cover 200 has a state in which the rear projection 202 protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 201 protrudes rearward more than the front surface of the front component 1000 so as to contact the lower surface of the front component 1000. . As a result, the space between the crime prevention cover 200 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is intricately bent by the rear projection 202 of the crime prevention cover 200 and the crime prevention recess 1008 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is made to enter the game area 5a from below the front of the board 5 between the crime prevention cover 200 and the front component 1000, it will be blocked by the rear projection 202 and the crime prevention recess 1008. , And can prevent unauthorized tools from entering the gaming area 5a.

[3-1 j. Open / close cylinder unit]
The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is attached from the rear side to the cylinder attachment portion 113 at a position between the through hole 111 and the handle attachment seat surface 112 near the right end of the door frame base 110 in front view, and cooperates with a locking unit 700 described later. It is used to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4.

  The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 has a keyhole 211a on the front surface and a cylindrical cylinder lock 211 extending in the front and rear direction, and a lock unit attached to the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 and locking operation of a key inserted in the keyhole 211a. A rotation transmitting member 212 to be transmitted to the key cylinder 710 of 700 and a cylinder mounting plate 213 for mounting the cylinder lock 211 to the door frame base 110 (reinforcement unit 130) are provided.

  The cylinder lock 211 can rotate a key by inserting a corresponding key (not shown) into the key hole 211a. If the key is a corresponding key, either clockwise or counterclockwise in front view Can also be rotated by a predetermined angle in the direction of.

  The rotation transmission member 212 is formed in a cylindrical shape (specifically, a conical cylindrical shape whose diameter increases toward the rear) opened at the rear, and is directed from the rear end to the front at a position opposite to sandwich the central axis. And a pair of notched portions 212a. The rotation transmitting member 212 is formed such that the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from the rear, and the projection of the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 is inserted into the pair of cutouts 212a. Thus, the rotation of the rotation transmitting member 212 (a key inserted into the key hole 211 a of the cylinder lock 211) can be transmitted to the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 and the key cylinder 710 can be rotated.

  The cylinder mounting plate metal 213 is formed by bending a single metal plate, and is formed in a convex shape in which the shape in plan view is projected forward. More specifically, the cylinder mounting plate 213 has a rectangular plate-like front plate portion 213a that extends vertically in a front view, and a pair of side plate portions 213b that extend in a flat plate shape rearward from both left and right sides of the front plate portion 213a. And a pair of mounting plate portions 213c extending in the form of a flat plate in the direction away from each other from the rear sides of the pair of side plate portions 213b. In the front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting plate 213, the cylinder lock 211 penetrates from the rear at a substantially central position in the vertical direction, and the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 is attached to the rear surface of the front plate portion 213a. In the pair of mounting plate portions 213c of the cylinder mounting plate 213, the mounting plate portion 213c on the left in front view is attached to the right end of the middle reinforcing plate 132 of the reinforcing unit 130, and the mounting plate portion 213c on the right in front view is of the reinforcing unit 130 It is attached to the right reinforcing sheet metal 134. Thereby, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 are connected by the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213.

  In the open / close cylinder unit 210 assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the front end of the cylinder lock 211 projecting forward from the front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting plate 213 is the cylinder insertion hole from the rear side of the door frame base 110. The front plate portion 213a and the pair of side plate portions 213b of the cylinder mounting plate metal 213 are accommodated in a box-like cylinder mounting portion 113 which is inserted into the housing 114 and protrudes forward of the door frame base 110. ing.

[3-1 k. Ball feed unit]
The ball feeding unit 250 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 34 and 35. FIG. 34 (a) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 34 (b) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 35 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 35 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit with the back case removed and the tamperproof member removed. The ball feed unit 250 can supply the game balls supplied from the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 to the ball launcher 680 one by one, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 can be It can be pulled out to the lower plate by the operation of the removal button 327.

  In the ball feed unit 250, the gaming balls stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 are supplied through the upper plate ball feed port 323d of the plate unit base 323 and the ball feed opening 115 of the door frame base 110 and penetrated in the front and back direction An entrance 251a, and a box-like front cover 251 having a ball outlet 251b opened to the lower side of the entrance 251a and opened at the rear, and a box closing the rear end of the front cover 251 and opening the front And a rear cover 252 having a striking ball supply port 252a for supplying to the ball launcher 680 the gaming ball which has entered from the entrance 251a of the front cover 251 penetrating in the front and rear direction, the rear cover 252 and the front cover A partition 253 for pivotally supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between 251 and for partitioning between the entrance 251 a and the ball outlet 251 b on the rear side of the front cover 251 The game balls on the separating portion 253a of the ball removing member 253 are sent one by one to the ball hitting supply port 252a of the back cover 252, and between the front cover 251 and the rear cover 252 in the vertical direction A ball feeding member 254 rotatably supported about an extended axis, and a ball feeding solenoid 255 for turning the ball feeding member 254 are provided.

  As shown in the figure, the ball feeding unit 250 is arranged such that the ball feeding member 254 is disposed on the right side of the entrance 251 a in a front view, the ball removing member 253 on the left side of the ball feeding member 254 The ball feeding solenoids 255 are respectively disposed on the right side.

  The front cover 251 of the ball feeding unit 250 is provided with an arc-shaped slit 251 c concentrically formed with respect to the rotation center of the ball removing member 253 on the left side of the ball outlet 251 b in front view. The actuating rod 253c of the ball removing member 253, which will be described later, is designed to extend forward. Further, the front cover 251 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 251a, and when the door frame 3 is assembled, the ball feed guiding path 323e of the pan unit base 323 and the upstream side of the ball removing guiding path 323f. It is formed so as to close from the rear side a site which is open to the rear at the end side.

  The ball removing member 253 divides the space between the inlet 251 a and the ball outlet 251 b below the inlet 251 a and divides the lower surface in the direction of the ball feeding member 254, and the ball of the partition 253 a It extends downward from the end opposite to the feed member 254 and is bent in a V shape toward the lower center of the ball outlet 251b from near the middle in the vertical direction, and the lower end is rotated about an axis extending in the front and rear direction From the side surface of the pivoting rod 253b below the actuating rod 253c, the pivoting rod 253b supported movably, the rod-like operating rod 253c projecting forward from the upper end of the pivoting rod 253b, and the operating rod 253c And a weight portion 253d protruding to the opposite side to the partition portion 253a. The operating rod 253 c of the ball removing member 253 is formed to project forward through an arc-shaped slit 251 c formed in the front cover 251 (see FIG. 34A). The actuating rod 253 c abuts on the upper end of the actuating transmission portion 327 a operated by the pressing operation of the upper disc ball release button 327 of the disc unit 320 via the ball feed opening 115 of the door frame base 110.

  The ball feed member 254 is directed toward the entrance 251a and the partitioning portion 253a of the ball removing member 253, and has a blocking portion 254a having a fan-like plan view centering on a rotation axis extending in the vertical direction, and a rear end of the blocking portion 254a. The ball holding portion 254b is recessed in an arc shape toward the rotation axis, and a rod-shaped collar portion 254c extending downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 254b. The blocking portion 254a and the ball holding portion 254b of the ball feeding member 254 are formed adjacent to each other within an angle range of about 180 ° around the rotation axis. Further, the ball holding portion 254b of the ball feeding member 254 is sized to be able to hold one gaming ball. The ball feed member 254 is pivoted about the axis of rotation by moving the collar portion 254 c disposed at a position eccentric to the axis of rotation by driving the ball feed solenoid 255 in the left-right direction.

  The ball feed member 254 has a supply position in which the ball holding portion 254b is in communication with the ball hitting supply port 252a at the same time as the blocking portion 254a faces the partition portion 253a, and the ball holding portion 254b faces the partition portion 253a. It is pivoted between the holding position facing it. When the ball feed member 254 is at the supply position, the gaming ball held by the ball holding portion 254b is supplied from the ball striking supply port 252a to the ball firing device 680, and the gaming ball entered into the partition portion 253a from the entrance 251a. However, the movement toward the ball holding portion 254b (ball hitting supply port 252a) is blocked by the blocking portion 254a, and the movement of the ball holding portion 254b remains on the partition portion 253a. On the other hand, when the ball feed member 254 is turned to the holding position, the ball holding portion 254b faces the partition portion 253a, and the end portion of the ball holding portion 254b on the flange portion 254c side closes the hitting supply port 252a. The game ball on the partition part 253a is held in the ball holding part 254b by only one.

  In addition, the ball feed unit 250 has a ball feed operating rod 256 whose tip is swung in the vertical direction by driving (energization) of a ball feed solenoid 255, and back and forth by the movement of the tip of the ball feed rod 256 moving in the vertical direction. And a ball feed crank 257 for pivoting the ball feed member 254 around the vertically extending axis while pivoting about the axially extending axis. The ball feed crank 257 is engageable with the vertically moving tip of the ball feed operating rod 256 and extends in the left and right direction from an engaging portion 257a and a side engaged with the ball feed operating rod 256 of the engaging portion 257a A shaft portion 257b disposed on the opposite side and pivotally supported about an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 251 and the rear cover 252 and extending upward from the shaft portion 257b And a transmission portion 257c engaged with a rod-like collar portion 254c (see FIG. 35B) protruding downward from a position eccentric to the rotation center of the member 254.

  The ball feed unit 250 transmits the movement of the ball feed actuating rod 256 which is rocked by the driving of the ball feed solenoid 255 which is advanced and retracted in the vertical direction by the ball feed actuating rod 256 and the ball feeding crank 257 It can be turned. When the ball feed solenoid 255 is not driven (normal time), the ball feed operating rod 256 is separated from the lower end of the ball feed solenoid 255 and the tip end is positioned downward. In this state, the ball feed member 254 is at the supply position. It will be located in Further, when the ball feed solenoid 255 is driven, the ball feed operating rod 256 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feed solenoid 255 so that the tip is positioned upward, and the ball feed member 254 pivots to the holding position. That is, when the ball feed solenoid 255 is driven (ON state), the ball feed member 254 receives one gaming ball and the drive of the ball feed solenoid 255 is released (OFF state), the ball feed member 254 Can be sent (supplied) to the ball launch device 680 side. The driving of the ball feeding solenoid 255 in the ball feeding unit 250 is controlled by the firing control unit (not shown) of the payout control board 951 in synchronization with the drive control of the firing solenoid 682.

  In addition, the ball extraction member 253 rotatably supported on the ball feeding unit 250 is configured such that a moment is applied by the weight portion 253 d so as to rotate in a counterclockwise direction in a front view, but it protrudes forward The rotation of the actuating rod 253c is restricted by the contact of the actuating rod 253c with the upper end of the actuating transmission portion 327a which is operated by the pressing operation of the upper disc ball releasing button 327 of the disc unit 320. The parting part 253a of the part separates the entrance 251a and the ball outlet 251b, and the game ball does not enter the ball outlet 251b side.

  Then, when the player presses the upper bowl ball release button 327 of the tray unit 320 downward, the upper bowl ball removal slider 327b slides downward with the operation transmission portion 327a to move the operation transmission portion 327a downward. Accordingly, the operating rod 253c is also moved relatively downward. When the actuating rod 253c moves downward together with the actuating transmission portion 327a, the ball removing member 253 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in a front view, and the partition between the entrance 251a and the ball outlet 251b by the partitioning portion 253a is released. Be done. Thereby, the game ball entered from the entrance 251a is discharged from the ball outlet 251b to the ball removal guiding path 323f of the plate unit 320, and is discharged (supplied) to the lower plate 322 via the lower plate ball supply port 323c. be able to.

  The upper disc ball removal slider 327b in which the operation transmission portion 327a with which the actuating rod 253c of the ball removal member 253 abuts is biased upward by the upper disc ball removal spring 327c. Even if the game ball is vigorously supplied, the impact can be absorbed by the upper disc ball release spring 327c through the actuating rod 253c, and breakage of the ball removal member 253 and the like can be prevented. The game ball can be prevented from bouncing back at the partition portion 253a.

  Further, the ball feeding unit 250 is provided with a rectangular attachment recess 252b (see FIG. 35 (b) etc.) recessed forward in the upper right in the back view of the hitting supply port 252a in the rear cover 252. The fraud prevention member 260 is mounted in the mounting recess 252b. The fraud preventing member 260 of the ball feeding unit 250 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the inside of the mounting recess 252 b of the rear cover 252 from the rear side.

  The fraud prevention member 260 is formed in a rectangular shape in which the outer shape in a front view extends in the left and right direction, and is separated vertically at a substantially central position in the vertical direction between predetermined distances from the right side to the left. A lower piece portion 262, and an inclined portion 263 each formed in a C-chamfered shape on the tip end side (right end side in front view) of sides of the upper piece portion 261 and the lower piece portion 262 facing each other . The upper piece portion 261 of the tamper-proof member 260 is bent with respect to the general surface of the tamper-proof member 260 so that the right end in the front view protrudes rearward. The lower piece portion 262 extends in the same plane as the general surface of the tamperproof member 260. Thus, in the plan view, the upper piece portion 261 and the lower piece portion 262 form a V-shaped groove which spreads as it goes to the right.

  The fraud prevention member 260 is attached to the attachment recess 252b of the rear cover 252 so that the V-shaped groove formed by the upper piece portion 261 and the lower piece portion 262 is in communication with the inside of the bat striking hole supply port 252a. Become.

  According to this fraud preventing member 260, the illegal gaming ball attached with the string is driven from the upper plate 321 through the ball feeding unit 250 into the game area 5a by the ball launching device 680 and attached to the illegal gaming ball When a cheating operation is performed such that an illegal game ball is moved into and out of the first starting opening 2002 etc. by operating the string, the force of the illegal game ball fired (hit ball) by the ball launching device 680 causes an illegal action. The string attached to the game ball is inserted between the upper piece part 261 and the lower piece part 262, and then V-shaped narrow formed by the upper piece part 261 and the lower piece part 262 It can be cut off by a part, and it can prevent that the fraudulent act using the illegal game ball which attached the string is performed.

[3-1 l. Foul cover unit]
The fowl cover unit 270 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 36 to 38. FIG. 36 (a) is a perspective view of a front cover unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 36 (b) is a perspective view of the rear cover unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 37 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the fall cover unit with the lid removed and seen from the front, and FIG. 37 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the fall cover with the lid removed and seen from the rear. Furthermore, FIG. 38 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid removed.

  As shown in the figure, the fool cover unit 270 is a shallow box-shaped unit body 271 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 and opened on the front side, and a flat cover member attached to the front of the unit body 271 272, and. The foul cover unit 270 penetrates back and forth at the upper left corner in a front view and connects the normal guiding path 861 of the lower full-ball passage unit 860 of the main body frame 4 and the upper ball supply port 323a of the plate unit 320 A channel 273 and a full tank receptacle 274 which is opened rearward on the lower right side in a front view of the through ball channel 273 and which can communicate with the full channel guide 862 of the lower full tank path unit 860 of the main body frame 4 And have.

  Further, the foul cover unit 270 is opened upward on the right side in front view of the full tank receptacle 274 and does not reach the game area 5a despite being fired by the ball launcher 680 of the main frame 4 The ball ball receptacle 275 for receiving the game ball (far ball) and the game ball which is opened forward in the vicinity of the lower right corner of the front view and received by the full tank ball receptacle 274 and the ball ball receptacle 275 And a ball outlet 276 communicating with the lower ball feed port 323c of the tray unit 320.

  Further, the foul cover unit 270 is formed between the full ball receptacle 274 and the far ball receptacle 275 and the ball outlet 276 by the unit main body 271 and the lid member 272, and can store a predetermined amount of gaming balls. The storage passage 277 having a wide width, the flat plate-like movable piece 278 which constitutes a part of the inner wall of the storage passage 277 and whose lower end is rotatably attached to the unit main body 271, and the movable piece A full tank detection sensor 279 for detecting a rotation in a direction away from the storage passage 277 and a spring 280 biasing the movable piece 278 toward the center of the storage passage 277 are provided.

  In the far cover unit 270, when the lower plate 322 of the plate unit 320 is filled with gaming balls and the gaming balls are not released from the ball outlet 276 to the lower plate 322 side, a certain number of them are stored in the storage passage 277 Game balls can be stored. Then, when a certain number of game balls are stored in the storage passage 277, the upper end of the movable piece 278 moves away from the storage passage 277 against the biasing force of the spring 280 by the weight of the game balls. The movable piece 278 rotates, and the rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 279. As a result, it can be determined that the lower plate 322 is full of gaming balls, so that when full is detected by the full detection sensor 279, the payout of more gaming balls is stopped, This can be notified to the player or a person in charge at the game hall to urge that the lower tray 322 be completely filled.

  Further, the foul cover unit 270 is attached to the lower side of the through ball passage 273 on the rear side of the unit main body 271, and a door opening / closing door of a lower full ball passage unit 860 in a dispensing unit 800 described later of the main body frame 4. A door opening and closing contact portion 281 capable of being in contact with the operation projection 863 e of 863 is provided (see FIG. 112). The door opening and closing contact portion 281 is inclined so as to move forward as the rear surface goes downward. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the door opening / closing abutment portion 281 is formed such that the operation projection 863 e of the guideway opening / closing door 863 abuts. When the actuating projection 863e of the guideway opening / closing door 863 abuts on the door opening / closing abutment portion 281, the guideway opening / closing door 863 is rotated and the downstream ends of the normal guideway 861 and the full induction passage 862 (front opening ) Can be released.

[3-2. Handle unit]
The handle unit 300 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 39 and 40. 39A is a front view of the handle unit in the door frame, FIG. 39B is a perspective view of the handle unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 39B is a perspective view of the handle unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 40 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 40 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. The handle unit 300 is attached to the handle attachment member 180 of the door frame base unit 100, and operated by the player so that the game ball in the upper plate 321 can be driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5 It is.

  The handle unit 300 covers the handle base 301 attached to the cylindrical portion 181 of the handle attachment member 180 in the door frame base unit 100, the handle 302 rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 301, and the front end side of the handle 302. And a handle cover 303 attached to the handle base 301.

  Further, the handle unit 300 has an inner base 304 attached to the front of the handle base 301 on the rear side of the handle 302 and a handle 302 attached to the front end and rotatably attached by the inner base 304 and the handle base 301 It has a shaft member 305 having a drive gear portion 305a, a transmission gear 306 meshing with the drive gear portion 305a of the shaft member 305, and a detection shaft 307a that rotates integrally with the transmission gear 306. And a handle rotation detection sensor 307 held between the base and the steering wheel.

  Furthermore, the handle unit 300 has one end attached to the handle base 301 and the other end attached to the handle 302 to return the handle 302 to the initial rotational position (rotation end in the counterclockwise direction in front view). One end side is attached to the inner base 304, the other end side is attached to the transmission gear 306, and the detection shaft 307a of the handle rotation detection sensor 307 is clockwise viewed from the front through the transmission gear 306. Auxiliary spring 309 biased in the direction, handle touch sensor 310 attached to handle base 301 at the rear of inner base 304, tip end is outward from the left side in front view of the front end outer peripheral surface of handle base 301 Protruding and handle on the rear side of inner base 304 with proximal end A single-shot button 311 rotatably mounted on a shaft 301 and a single-shot button operation sensor 312 attached to the handle base 301 for detecting a pressing operation of the single-shot button 311; There is.

  The handle base 301 of the handle unit 300 is recessed from the outer peripheral surface of a cylindrical base 301a extending in the front and rear direction, a disk-like front end 301b radially projecting from the front end of the base 301a, and a cylindrical base 301a. And three grooves 301c extending in the axial direction and formed at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer diameter of the base portion 301 a of the handle base 301 is formed to be slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the cylindrical portion 181 of the handle attachment member 180. Further, the three groove portions 301 c are formed at positions corresponding to the three ridges 183 of the cylindrical portion 181 of the handle attachment member 180. Therefore, the base 301a can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180 in a state in which the three grooves 301c coincide with the three ridges 183, and the ridges 183 are respectively inserted in the three grooves 301c. By being inserted, the handle base 301 can not be rotated relative to the handle attachment member 180.

  The handle 302 includes four first protrusions 302a, second protrusions 302b, third protrusions 302c, and fourth protrusions 302d, which protrude outward in a circumferential direction away from the outer peripheral surface, and a rotation shaft (shaft member 305). Two slits 302e extending in a circular arc shape as a center and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and projecting backward from a position inside with respect to the rotation center with respect to the slit 302e, the other end side of the handle return spring 308 is locked And a locking projection 302f.

  The four first protrusions 302a, the second protrusions 302b, the third protrusions 302c, and the fourth protrusions 302d are sequentially provided in the clockwise direction in front view. More specifically, the first protrusion 302a has a side in the clockwise direction of the portion of the handle 302 that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 302 in a clockwise direction, and bulges outward. The side in the direction of is concaved (curved) to curve inward. The portion of the second protrusion 302b most projecting from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 302 is separated from the most projecting portion of the first protrusion 302a in the clockwise direction by about a 85 degree rotation angle. Is slightly lower. In the second protrusion 302b, the side surface in the clockwise direction in the front view clockwise bulges so as to expand outward, and the side surface in the direction around the opposite side is curved inward. It is concaved and formed in a shape similar to the first protrusion 302a.

  The third protrusion 302c is located at the most projecting part from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 302 at a rotation angle of about 70 degrees in the clockwise direction from the most projecting part of the second protrusion 302b. It protrudes at about half height. The side surfaces on both sides of the third protrusion 302c are inclined substantially linearly, and the side surface in the clockwise direction is inclined more gently than the side surface in the counterclockwise direction which is the opposite side. In the fourth protrusion 302d, the most protruding part from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 302 is separated from the most protruding part of the third protrusion 302c in the clockwise direction at a rotation angle of about 55 degrees from the first protrusion 302a It also protrudes slightly high. The fourth protrusions 302 d are formed in a substantially isosceles triangle, with the side surfaces on both sides inclined in a substantially linear manner.

  The handle cover 303 has three round mounting bosses 303 a that are rounded forward on the front and bulge forward. The three mounting bosses 303 a are attached to the front of the handle base 301 by penetrating the slit 302 e of the handle 302 from the front. Since the mounting boss 303a of the handle cover 303 passes through the slit 302e of the handle 302, the mounting boss 303a abuts on the circumferential end of the slit 302e, thereby restricting the rotation angle of the handle 302. In this example, the handle 302 can be rotated within a range of approximately 120 degrees of rotation.

  The handle unit 300 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110 via the handle attachment member 180. The handle attachment seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110 is inclined so that the right end is positioned more rearward than the left end in plan view and faces the outside (open side). The handle unit 300 to be attached via is also inclined outward in plan view (in other words, its tip is inclined toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line perpendicular to the front of the pachinko machine 1). It is attached and fixed to the door frame 3. As a result, the player can easily hold the handle 302 of the handle unit 300, and can make the user perform the turning operation without feeling a sense of discomfort.

  The handle rotation detection sensor 307 of the handle unit 300 is a variable resistor, and when the handle 302 is rotated, the detection shaft 307 a of the handle rotation detection sensor 307 is rotated via the shaft member 305 and the transmission gear 306. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 307 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 307a, and the driving force of the emission solenoid 682 in the ball emission device 680 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 307. The game ball is driven into the game area 5a with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 302.

  The outer peripheral surface of the handle 302 and the handle cover 303 is plated with conductive, and the handle touch sensor 310 detects the contact when the player contacts the handle 302 or the like. Then, when the handle touch sensor 310 detects the player's touch, when the handle 302 is turned, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 307 is accepted, and the emission solenoid is generated with a strength according to the rotation angle of the handle 302. The drive of 682 is controlled, and a game ball can be hit. That is, even if the player tries to hit the game ball into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 302 in some way without touching the handle 302, the firing solenoid 682 is not driven and the game ball can be hit. It can not be done. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from playing the game by rotating the handle 302 in a method different from the original method, and it is possible to reduce the load (burden) associated with the gaming hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. .

  In the handle unit 300, when the player presses the one-shot button 311 while rotating the handle 302, the one-shot button operation sensor 312 detects the operation of the one-shot button 311, and the discharge control unit of the payout control board 951 (shown Is omitted to stop the rotational drive of the firing solenoid 682. As a result, it is possible to temporarily stop the firing of the game ball without returning the rotation operation of the handle 302 and, by releasing the pressing operation of the one-shot button 311, the driving before the one-shot button 311 is operated. The game ball can be reentered into the game area 5a by the strength.

  Furthermore, the handle unit 300 includes, in the handle 302, four first protrusions 302a, second protrusions 302b, third protrusions 302c, and fourth protrusions 302d, and the handle 302 is rotated most in a clockwise direction as viewed from the front. The fourth protrusion 302d positions the first protrusion 302a when the fourth protrusion 302d does not rotate the handle 302 when the game ball is most strongly hit into the game area 5a (so-called "right hit"). Since the fourth protrusion 302d is used as the first protrusion 302a, the player can maintain the handle 302 at the “right-handed” position in a comfortable state by replacing the fourth protrusion 302d with the first protrusion 302a. It is possible to reduce the feeling of fatigue of the person and to suppress the decrease in interest for the game.

[3-3. Overall configuration of dish unit]
The plate unit 320 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 45. FIG. 41 (a) is a perspective view of the plate unit of the door frame as viewed from the front right, and FIG. 41 (b) is a perspective view of the plate unit as viewed from the left front. FIG. 42 (a) is a perspective view of the pan unit as viewed from the upper right rear, and FIG. 42 (b) is a perspective view of the pan unit as viewed from the lower left rear. FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear. FIG. 45 is an enlarged explanatory view of a portion of the lower plate with the lower plate cover removed in the cross-sectional view of FIG. 28. The plate unit 320 is attached to the lower portion of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100, and the front surface bulges forward. On the front surface of the plate unit 320, a rendering operation unit 400 described later is attached.

  The dish unit 320 is provided with an upper dish 321 for storing gaming balls to be driven into the game area 5a, and gaming balls provided under the upper dish 321 and supplied from the upper dish 321 and the far cover unit 270. And a lower plate 322 which can be stored.

  The plate unit 320 is attached to a flat plate unit base 323 attached to the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 and to the upper front of the plate unit base 323, and the left side greatly protrudes forward from the left and right center An upper plate main body 324 forming the upper plate 321, and a lower plate main body 325 attached to the left side of the front lower portion of the plate unit base 323 further to the left than the center in the left and right direction And a pan unit cover 326 attached to the front of the pan unit base 323 so as to cover the front sides of the upper pan body 324 and the lower pan body 325.

  Further, the dish unit 320 is provided with an upper disc ball removing button 327 mounted so as to be capable of pressing from above in the front view right side of the upper disc 321 on the upper surface of the disc unit cover 326; A ball lending button 328 mounted on the upper surface of the dish unit cover 326 on the right side, a return button 329 attached on the upper surface of the dish unit cover 326 on the right side in a front view of the ball lending button 328, and a ball lending button 328 Ball return indicator 330 attached to the upper surface of the plate unit cover 326 behind the and return button 329, and attached to the plate front decoration 326b on the front of the plate unit cover 326 in front of the upper plate 321 Projected forward from the front of the pan unit cover 326 in front of the production selection left button 331 and the production selection right button 332 and the lower tray 322 And it has and a, a lower tray ball vent button 333 which is mounted for pressing from the front.

[3-3a. Upper plate]
The upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 41 and 44 and the like. The upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 is formed by the plate unit base 323 and the upper plate main body 324, and the left side largely bulges forward from the center on the left and right in a front view, and is formed into a container shape opened upward. It is done. In the upper tray 321 (upper tray main body 324), a portion about 1/3 of the width from the left end to the right with respect to the width in the left-right direction of the door frame 3 bulges forward most. The upper plate 321 has a front end receding to the rear as it goes to the right in a front view from the most bulging part, and an induction passage portion 321a is formed in which the depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter There is. The upper plate 321 is inclined such that the entire bottom surface including the induction passage portion 321 a is lowered at the right end side, and the right end side of the induction passage portion 321 a in a front view (See FIG. 44).

  The upper plate 321 is assembled to the plate unit base 323, and the bottom surface of the upper plate 321 is placed below the upper plate ball supply port 323a of the plate unit base 323, against the upper end of the upper plate ball feed opening 323d. It is inclined to be lower towards the position slightly lower than the outer diameter of. As a result, the gaming balls discharged forward from the upper ball dispensing opening 323a can be received and stored in the upper tray 321, and the received gaming balls can be received from the right end side of the guiding passage portion 321a. The ball feed port 323d can be supplied.

  As described above, the upper plate 321 is formed such that the bottom surface of the upper portion 321 is lowered downward in the guide passage portion 321a in which the depth in the front-rear direction becomes narrow. That is, a part of the upper tray 321 protrudes from above into the mounting space 326j of the tray unit cover 326 to which the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A) described later is attached. Therefore, in the upper tray 321, a sufficient storage amount of gaming balls can be secured. The upper tray 321 (upper tray main body 324) protrudes into the mounting space 326j of the tray unit cover 326 so as not to contact with the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A).

  The induction passage portion 321a is provided with a metal grounding member 321b electrically grounded (earthed) in the pachinko machine 1, and the game ball contacts (rolls) to make the game ball It can remove charged static electricity.

[3-3b. Lower plate]
The lower plate 322 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 41 to 45 and the like. The lower plate 322 is disposed below the upper plate 321 and to the left of the center in the left-right direction of the plate unit 320 (door frame 3) in a front view. The lower plate 322 is formed in a container shape capable of storing game balls, and is attached to the lower plate ball removing hole 322a which penetrates the bottom wall 325a vertically and can discharge the game balls, and the plate unit cover 326 And a relief unit 322b for avoiding contact with the selected rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A). The relief portion 322 b of the lower plate 322 is formed such that the right front corner thereof is recessed in an arc shape toward the rear.

  The lower tray 322 includes a lower tray main body 325 which is open at the upper side and a rear side, a lower tray cover portion 326k of the lower plate body cover 326 which covers the upper side from the left end side of the lower plate main body 325 The tray unit is formed by the tray unit base 323 closing the back and the lower tray cover 340 covering the upper side of the portion of the lower tray main body 325 projecting into the rendering operation unit attachment portion 326a, It faces outward from the lower plate opening 326d of the cover 326. As shown in FIGS. 28 and 45, the lower plate 322 has a quadrangular shape extending in the right and left directions in a plan view, and a trapezoidal shape whose upper side shorter than the base is disposed on the front side. And the right and left sides of the trapezoidal shape are curved so as to be recessed rearward. The lower plate 322 is formed such that the width in the left-right direction increases as it goes from the front to the rear in plan view.

  As shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, the lower tray main body 325 is formed in the shape of a container whose upper and rear portions are open. The lower bowl body 325 has a flat bottom wall portion 325a, a main body standing wall portion 325b extending upward from the outer peripheral end excluding the rear end side of the bottom wall portion 325a, and the bottom wall portion 325a. And a lower countersink hole 322a penetrating up and down with a possible size. The outer peripheral shape of the bottom wall portion 325a is curved so that the left and right sides of the quadrilateral extending in the left and right directions are disposed on the front side with the upper side shorter than the base and the rectangular side extending to the left and right. It is formed in the shape which combined the trapezoid and. The bottom wall 325a (the upper surface thereof) is inclined so as to be lower toward the lower countersink hole 322a. The main body standing wall portion 325b rises upward from the bottom wall portion 325a at a height twice to five times the diameter of the gaming ball. The lower countersink ball removal hole 322a is formed at a position closer to the right than the center in the left-right direction of the lower disk main body 325 (bottom wall portion 325a). In the lower tray main body 325, the curved portion of the bottom front wall portion 325a and the main body vertical wall portion 325b in the front right-hand front corner corresponds to the relief portion 322b.

  The lower tray cover 340 is formed to cover the upper right half of the lower tray main body 325. The lower cover 340 is, as shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, substantially formed from a cover upright wall 340a rising upward from the upper end of the main body upright wall 325b of the lower tray main body 325 and an upper end of the cover upright wall 340a. And a ceiling portion 340b extending horizontally. The cover upright wall 340a rises from a portion from the part on the front side of the main body upright wall 325b of the lower tray main body 325 to the rear end of the right side. When the lower tray cover 340 is assembled to the tray unit 320, the rear ends of the cover upright wall portion 340a and the ceiling portion 340b are in contact with the front surface of the tray unit base 323. Further, the front end (the left end side of the front side) of the cover upright wall portion 340 a is in contact with the right end side of the lower plate opening portion 326 d of the plate unit cover 326. Furthermore, the left end of the ceiling portion 340 b is in contact with the right end of the lower plate cover portion 326 k of the plate unit cover 326. In the lower cover 340, a curved surface portion of the cover upright wall portion 340a and a portion obliquely extending between the cover upright wall portion 340a and the ceiling portion 340b on the rear side correspond to the relief portion 322b. There is.

  The lower plate 322 is covered with a plate unit cover 326 (rendering operation unit 400) from the vicinity of the left end in the front view near the left end of a portion extending short to the left and right with the front end side. Located behind the. That is, the lower plate 322 is formed such that the right half thereof turns to the rear of the rendering operation unit 400. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 45, the lower tray 322 is a lower tray first area A1 (a cross hatch area in FIG. 45) located behind the lower tray opening 326d of the tray unit cover 326 described later Lower tray second area A2 (shaded in FIG. 45) located behind the right side of the opening 326 d (on the front end side of the rendering operation unit 400, the rendering operation unit attachment portion 326a of the pan unit cover 326, and the lower pan cover 340) Region of and). In other words, the lower plate 322 is half or more of the storage area (the area obtained by combining the lower plate first area A1 and the lower plate second area A2 corresponding to the storage area in plan view). It is located to the rear of the rendering operation unit 400. In FIG. 45, the area of the dotted hatching is the remaining space (area) of the mounting space 326j in the pan unit cover 326.

  In the lower tray 322, the lower bowl ball supply port 323c of the tray unit base 323 forming the rear wall opens to the right of the center of the rear wall in the front view left-right direction. More specifically, the lower tray ball supply port 323c of the lower tray 322 is the effect operation unit 400, the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a (right outer side of the lower tray opening 326d) in the tray unit cover 326, and the front end of the lower tray cover 340. It is disposed in the lower tray second area A2 which is the rear of the side, etc. As a result, when the door frame 3 is viewed from the front, the lower ball and ball supply port 323c can not be seen from the player through the lower plate opening 326d (see FIG. 19 and the like). Therefore, the lower tray 322 is formed so as to turn from the lower tray opening 326 d on the left side surface of the tray unit 320 (the tray unit cover 326) bulging forward to the rear of the rendering operation unit 400, The storage volume of the game ball is formed larger than the range viewed from the front. In other words, the lower tray 322 is formed larger in the lower tray second region A2 than in the lower tray first region A1. As a result, when the lower plate 322 is viewed from the outside (player side), it is possible to store more gaming balls in the lower plate 322 more than it looks.

  In the lower tray 322, as shown in FIG. 41 (a), the right half (lower tray second area A2) of the lower tray main body 325 in the right and left direction is a rendering operation unit attachment portion 326a (attachment space 326j) of the tray unit cover 326. The lower plate cover 340 covers the upper side of the portion of the lower plate main body 325 projecting into the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a. The lower plate cover 340 prevents the finger of the player from touching the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) when the player inserts a finger into the lower plate 322 from the lower plate opening 326d can do.

  The lower plate 322 is provided with a lower plate ball extraction hole 322a penetrating vertically in the front of the lower plate ball supply port 323c in the lower plate second area A2. The bottom surface of the lower plate 322 is inclined to be lower toward the lower plate ball removal hole 322a. The lower ball ball extraction hole 322 a of the lower plate 322 is closed in an openable / closable manner by a lid member 334 operated by pressing the lower ball ball extraction button 333. Under the normal condition, the lower tray 322 is closed by the cover member 334 and the gaming ball can be stored in the lower tray 322. Then, when the lower bowl ball removal button 333 is pressed to open the lid member 334, the gaming balls in the lower plate 322 can be discharged from the lower bowl ball removal hole 322a to the lower side of the plate unit 320.

  The lower countersink hole 322a of the lower tray 322 is disposed in front (directly in front of) the lower countersink supply port 323c of the tray unit base 323 which forms the rear wall of the lower tray 322. Therefore, in the state assembled to the door frame 3, the lower countersink hole 322a is located on the right side of the lower end opening 326d of the tray unit cover 326 and behind the frame unit 415 in the rendering operation unit 400, It can not be seen from the player (front) side.

  As described above, the lower plate 322 is formed such that the outer peripheral shape is a combination of a trapezoid whose front side is narrowed on the front side of the rectangular shape extending to the left and right, It inclines to become lower toward the head. Therefore, with the lid 334 open and the lower countersink hole 322a open, the gaming balls supplied from the lower countersink supply opening 323c into the lower tray 322 are directly in front of the lower countersink supply opening 323c. It is immediately discharged downward from the opened lower countersink hole 322a. The lower end of the lower ball ball extraction hole 322a is located slightly to the left of the left end of the lower ball ball supply port 323c, so the lower ball ball supply hole 322a is open. The gaming ball supplied from the mouth 323c to the lower plate 322 does not flow directly to the area on the left side of the lower plate ball removal hole 322a in the lower plate 322, and is discharged from the lower plate ball removal hole 322a. Become.

  On the other hand, since the right end of the lower ball ball extraction hole 322a is located on the left of the right end of the lower ball ball supply port 323c, the game is supplied to the lower plate 322 from near the right end of the lower ball ball supply port 323c. The ball comes in contact with the portion of the main body standing wall portion 325b that forms the right standing wall of the lower plate 322. The right standing wall of the lower plate 322 is curved obliquely with respect to the front-back direction so as to face the lower plate ball removal hole 322a, so the game ball supplied from the lower plate ball supply port 323c is When it abuts on a sloped part, the light is reflected in the direction of the lower ball open hole 322a, and is discharged from the lower ball open hole 322a without going to the area on the left side of the lower ball open hole 322a. (See Figure 45).

  As described above, the lower plate 322 of the present embodiment is formed to guide the gaming balls supplied from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. In the open state, the game ball supplied from the lower ball supply opening 323c is immediately penetrated from the lower ball removal hole 322a without entering the area to the left of the lower ball removal hole 322a in the lower plate 322 It can be discharged downward (dollar box). As a result, when the lower ball ball removing hole 322a is kept open, the player can not see the game balls circulating on the lower plate 322, and the player is paid out from the upper plate 321 or the payout device 830. The player can play the game by making it difficult for the game balls, etc. to be discharged directly into the dollar box and making it difficult for the game balls to feel annoyance passing through the lower plate 322. And the effect image etc.) to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, the lower plate 322 of the present embodiment includes the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower tray main body 325 and the lower plate covers 340 and 340A extended upward from the upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b. Even if the game ball is supplied to the inside and jumps up in the lower plate 322, the game ball can be prevented from intruding from the lower plate 322 into the mounting space 326j side, and the game ball in the lower plate 322 is Contact with the rear side of the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A) can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible that the gaming balls supplied in the lower plate 322 and the gaming balls stored in the lower plate 322 contact or press the rear side of the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A). It can prevent and it can prevent that the back side of the rendering operation unit 400 (2nd rendering operation unit 400A) is damaged by the game ball.

  Furthermore, since the lower disc ball supply hole 323a is provided in front of the lower disc ball supply port 323c in the lower plate 322, the lower disc ball supply port 323c is released from the lower disc ball supply port 323c. The game ball can be made to reach the front end side of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325 because it can be made to enter the lower plate ball removal hole 322a and be discharged downward (dollar box) as it is Can. In addition, since the bottom wall 325a of the lower tray main body 325 near the front end of the lower tray 322 is higher toward the front, the gaming ball toward the front end side of the main body standing wall 325b of the lower tray main body 325 is inclined The bottom surface is to be climbed, and the movement speed of the game ball can be attenuated. Therefore, the game ball released from the lower ball supply opening 323c into the lower plate 322 can reduce the impact when it abuts on the lower cover 340, 340A or the main body standing wall portion 325b, and they are broken. It can be difficult.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, a lid member 334 that closes the lower disc ball extraction hole 322 a may be interlocked with the upper disc ball extraction button 327. As a result, when the upper disc ball extraction button 327 is operated, the lid member 334 is also moved and the lower disc ball extraction hole 322a is opened, so the gaming balls discharged from the upper plate 321 to the lower plate 322 are further removed. It will be discharged from the hole 322a to the lower dollar box. That is, when the upper bowl sphere removing button 327 is operated to pull out the gaming bowl from the upper plate 321, the gaming sphere of the upper plate 321 is discharged to the dollar box even though the lower bowl sphere extracting button 333 is not operated. As a result, the player can be strongly illusoryed as if the gaming balls of the upper plate 321 are directly discharged to the dollar box, and the above-described effects can be further exhibited. The simultaneous release of the upper tray 321 and the lower tray 322 may be simultaneous release by driving a drive source such as a motor or a solenoid, or may be simultaneous release by a mechanical link mechanism.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the lower tray main body 325 and the lower tray cover 340 constituting the lower tray 322 are shown as separate parts which can be disassembled, but the lower tray main body 325 and the lower tray cover 340 are disassembled. It may be an impossible one. Also, although an example is shown in which the cover upright wall 340a of the lower tray cover 340 rises from the upper end of the main body upright wall 325b of the lower tray main body 325, the bottom wall 325a of the lower tray main body 325 The cover upright wall 340a may rise. In the example, the ceiling 340b of the lower cover 340 extends substantially horizontally from the upper end of the cover upright wall 340a. It may be extended substantially horizontally from the upper end.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, an example has been described in which the relief portion 322 b for avoiding the contact of the lower tray 322 with the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400 A) is provided, but the release portion 322 b is not provided. The lower plate 322 may be used.

  Further, although the lower plate 322 (the lower plate main body 325, the lower plate cover 340, etc.) in this embodiment is a uniform flat plate without holes penetrating, a plurality of through holes through which the game ball can not pass It may have a hole. Specifically, at least a part of the bottom wall 325a, the main body standing wall 325b, the cover standing wall 340a, the ceiling 340b, etc. of the lower plate 322 is formed in a fence shape having a gap where game balls can not pass It is good also as what was formed in thing or mesh shape. A light emitter such as an LED may be disposed in the plate unit cover 326 (attachment space 326j), and the inside of the lower plate 322 may be illuminated (or decorated with light) through the fence-like or net-like gap of the lower plate 322 .

  In the present embodiment, the lower plate 322 is formed by the lower plate main body 325, the lower plate cover 340, the plate unit base 323, and the plate unit cover 326 (lower plate cover portion 326k) which are separately formed. However, the four members may be united in an appropriate combination to form the lower plate 322. Specifically, the lower plate cover 340 and the lower plate body 325 are integrated, the lower plate cover 340 and the plate unit cover 326 are integrated, and the lower plate body 325 and the plate unit cover 326 are One united, one in which the lower plate cover 340 and the plate unit base 323 are integrated, one in which the lower plate main body 325 and the plate unit base 323 are integrally formed, the plate unit base 323 and the plate unit cover 326 The lower plate body 325, the lower plate cover 340, and the plate unit base 323 are integrated, or the lower plate body 325, the lower plate cover 340, and the plate unit cover 326 are integrally formed. A lower plate cover 340, a plate unit base 323 and a plate unit cover 326 integrated with each other; a lower plate body 325; a plate unit base 323; That the Tokaba 326 are integrated, that a lower tray body 325 and Shitasara cover 340 and tray unit base 323 and dish unit cover 326 is integrated, it may be like.

[3-3b-1. Ball guide part of lower plate]
An embodiment including a ball guiding portion 322c or the like for guiding the gaming ball from the lower ball feeding opening 323c to the lower ball dropping hole 322a in the lower plate 322 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. . FIG. 46 (a) is an explanatory view schematically showing an example in which a lower plate is provided with a ball guiding portion, and (b) is a description schematically showing an example in which a lower plate is provided with a ball guiding portion different from (a). It is a figure and (c) is an explanatory view showing roughly an example provided with still another different ball guidance part. In FIG. 46, the same components as those described above are denoted by the same reference numerals.

  An example of the lower plate 322 in FIG. 46 (a) is substantially the same as the diameter of the lower plate spherical hole 322a at the portion between the lower circular plate feed port 323c and the lower plate spherical hole 322a at the bottom of the lower plate 322. It has a pair of ball guiding parts 322c which are disposed to be separated left and right by a distance. The pair of ball guiding portions 322 c is formed in a rail shape (protrusion) extending back and forth in a state of protruding from the bottom surface of the lower plate 322. Also, the lower plate 322 is inclined so that the bottom surface is lowered toward the lower plate ball removal hole 322a. Therefore, the gaming ball supplied from the lower ball supply opening 323c into the lower plate 322 is guided to the lower ball removal hole 322a by the pair of ball guiding portions 322c without crossing over the ball guiding portion 322c. It is discharged downward (dollar box) from the hole 322a.

  Then, the lower tray 322 of this example is, similarly to the above, in the rear (lower tray second area A2) on the right side of the lower tray opening 326d of the tray unit cover 326, the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball The through holes 322a are arranged in a straight line in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the lower disc ball supply port 323c and the lower disc ball extraction hole 322a are located behind the covering wall such as the front end side of the lower disc cover 340 and the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the effect unit 400, the disc unit cover 326 They are not visible from the front.

  As described above, since the lower tray 322 of the present embodiment is provided with the pair of ball guiding portions 322c, the gaming ball supplied from the lower peripheral ball supply port 323c in the state where the lower counterball opening 322a is opened. Can be discharged from the lower countersink opening 322a downward (dollar box) immediately without entering the area on the left side of the lower countersink opening 322a in the lower tray 322. Then, since the gaming ball circulating on the lower plate 322 can not be seen from the player side, the gaming ball etc. paid out from the upper plate 321 and the payout device 830 is illusive as being directly discharged to the dollar box It is possible to make it difficult for the player to concentrate on the game (such as the operation for hitting the game ball and the effect image) by making it difficult for the game ball to feel annoyance passing through the lower plate 322 and to suppress the decline in interest Can.

  In the example shown in FIG. 46 (a), the ball guiding portion 322c is shown as a rail, but the invention is not limited to this, and the gaming ball may be lowered like a groove extending toward the lower ball ball opening 322a. Any guide can be used as long as it can be guided to the countersink hole 322a.

  Next, in the example of the lower plate 322 shown in FIG. 46 (b), the gaming ball released to the right of the lower wall of the lower plate ball opening 322a in the lower plate 322 is diagonally forward right from the lower plate ball supply port 323c. In addition to being shaped in such a way as to reflect in the direction of the lower ball ball opening hole 322a, the buffer portion 322d is provided at a portion where the gaming ball abuts. The buffer portion 322 d is formed of rubber, foam or the like.

  Similarly to the above, the lower plate 322 of this example has the lower plate ball removal hole 322a just in front of the lower plate ball supply port 323c, and the bottom surface of the lower plate 322 is lower toward the lower plate ball removal hole 322a. It is inclined to become. Therefore. The game balls discharged straight forward from the lower ball supply opening 323c are discharged from the lower ball removal hole 322a downward (dollar box). On the other hand, the gaming ball discharged to the right front from the lower ball supply opening 323c is reflected by the buffer portion 322d in the direction of the lower ball removal hole 322a, and is discharged downward (dollar box) from the lower plate removal hole 322a. Be done. At this time, since the gaming ball abuts and reflects on the buffer portion 322d, the collision sound at the time of reflection is reduced.

  Furthermore, the lower tray 322 in this example is also disposed at the rear of the lower right tray opening 326d of the lower tray unit cover 326 in the same manner as described above It is arrange | positioned at the unit mounting part 326a and the back of the covering wall of the front end side etc. of the lower saucer cover 340, and it can not be seen from the front.

  As described above, since the lower plate 322 in this example is provided with the buffer portion 322d on the wall that reflects the game balls, even if the game balls are not released forward from the lower ball supply opening 323c, By the buffer portion 322d, it can be reflected in the direction of the lower countersink hole 322a without sound and can be discharged downward (dollar box). Therefore, when the game balls and the like paid out from the upper plate 321 and the payout device 830 are discharged to the dollar box, the clash is also directly discharged to the dollar box because the collision sound of the game balls is not heard from the lower plate 322 By making it difficult for the game ball to feel annoyance passing through the lower plate 322, it is possible to concentrate the player on the game (such as the operation for hitting the game ball and the effect image, etc.) and to suppress the decline in interest. It can be done.

  Subsequently, in the example of the lower plate 322 of FIG. 46 (c), the lower surface of the lower surface 322 (bottom wall portion 325a) is a portion on the opposite side to the lower surface ball supply port 323c with the lower surface ball opening 322a interposed therebetween. , And a return portion 322e for reflecting the gaming ball having jumped over the lower ball ball release hole 322a to the lower ball ball release hole 322a side. In addition, the return part 322e may use the same material as the material forming the lower plate 322, or may use a shock absorbing material such as rubber or foam that reduces the collision noise at the time of reflection. Further, the return part 322e may not constitute the side wall of the lower tray 322, or may constitute a part of the side wall (main body standing wall portion 325b) of the lower tray 322.

  In the lower plate 322, the lower plate ball supply port 323c, the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, and the return portion 322e are arranged in a straight line sequentially from the rear to the front, and the lower plate of the plate unit cover 326 Rearward on the right side of the opening 326d (at the rear of the covering wall such as the front end side of the lower operation cover 400, the operation operation unit 400 in the lower operation second area A2, the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a in the lower unit cover 326) It is placed and invisible from the front. In this lower plate 322, even if the gaming ball flowing from the lower plate ball supply opening 323c to the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a jumps over the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a side is made by the return part 322e. It can be reflected and discharged downward (dollar box) from the lower countersink hole 322a. Therefore, the same effect as the above can be achieved.

  In the present embodiment, the ball guiding portion 322c and the buffer portion 322d may be appropriately combined with the lower plate 322. Thereby, the same effect as the above can be exhibited.

[3-3b-2. Another embodiment of the lower plate]
Another embodiment of the lower tray 322 of the tray unit 320 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47 (a) is an explanatory view schematically showing the lower tray made dividable, and FIG. 47 (b) is a schematic view showing a state where the storage area of the lower tray is expanded according to the size of the space behind the rendering operation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows, (c) is explanatory drawing which shows the lower tray of (b) by a schematic perspective view. The lower plate 322 shown in FIG. 47 is configured such that the lower plate main body 325 can be divided at a dividing line PL arranged in the lower plate second area A2. The region indicated by the dotted hatching in FIG. 47 indicates the remaining space of the mounting space 326j.

  First, the lower tray main body 325 (lower tray 322) shown in FIG. 47 (a) constitutes a part of the lower tray first area A1 and the lower tray second area A2 and has the lower countersink hole 322a. A main body portion 325A and a first extension portion 325B attached to the right of the main body portion 325A and constituting the remaining area of the lower tray second area A2 are provided. The first extension unit 325B is the remaining space of the mounting space 326j in which the rendering operation unit 400 (the second rendering operation unit 400A) is accommodated further than the main body portion 325A (the rendering operation unit 400 and the second rendering operation unit 400A It projects into the rear space). As shown in the figure, the first extension portion 325B is formed such that the width in the left-right direction increases as it goes from the front to the rear. Further, in the first extension portion 325B, a relief portion 322b for avoiding contact with the second effect operation unit 400A is formed at the right front corner.

  Next, in the examples of FIGS. 47 (b) and 47 (c), the rear end of the effect operation unit 400 does not protrude rearward from the front end of the lower plate 322, and is more than the example of FIG. 47 (a). The space behind the rendering operation unit 400 (the remaining space of the mounting space 326j) is wide. The lower tray main body 325 (lower tray 322) is a part of the lower tray first area A1 and the lower tray second area A2 and has a lower disc ball opening 322a, and a main body It is attached to the right side of the part 325A, constitutes the remaining area of the lower tray second area A2, and has a second extension part 325C larger than the first extension part 325B. As illustrated, the second extension portion 325C has a constant width in the left-right direction from the front end to the rear end, and a storage area of gaming balls is formed larger than the first extension portion 325B. Further, the lower plate 322 is attached with a lower plate cover 340A having a shape corresponding to the shape of the second extension portion 325C (see FIG. 47 (c)).

  In the example shown in FIG. 47, by attaching the first extension part 325B and the second extension part 325C to the main body part 325A, the storage areas of the respective game balls become continuous (connected), and the storage areas of the game balls are stored. Will expand. Further, the boundary between the main body portion 325A and the first extension portion 325B and the second extension portion 325C is a dividing line PL. In addition, the first expansion portion 325B and the second expansion portion 325C in the lower tray main body 325 are in a predetermined gap (connected to the mounting space 326j) with the rear surface of the rendering operation unit 400 or the second rendering operation unit 400A. Space) is formed.

  As described above, in the above example, the lower tray main body 325 (lower tray 322) is configured to be splittable, and at least one of the divided members is replaceable. The reservoir area can be made larger or smaller as needed. Further, since the lower tray main body 325 (lower tray 322) is configured to be split, the projection operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A) attached to the tray unit cover 326 protrudes backward (in the mounting space 326j) An expansion unit (a first expansion unit 325B or a second expansion unit 325C) of a size corresponding to the amount can be attached.

  In the above embodiment, the lower tray second area A2 located behind the effect operation unit 400 (the second effect operation unit 400A) has been described as having the dividing line PL arranged, but the dividing line PL is not It may be disposed on the boundary between the first dish area A1 and the lower dish second area A2, or may be arranged in the lower dish first area A1.

  In the above embodiment, the lower disc body 325 (the lower disc 322) is provided with the lower disc ball extraction hole 322a in the main body part 325A, but the first expanded part 325B and the second expanded part 325C are shown. The lower countersink hole 322a may be provided.

  In the above embodiment, the first extension 325B and the second extension 325C are attached on the right side of the main body 325A of the lower tray main body 325, but on the right side of the main body 325A A flat plate-like closing member without a storage area may be attached.

  Furthermore, although the lower plate main body 325 in the lower plate 322 has been described in the above embodiment, the lower plate cover 340 can be divided similarly to the lower plate main body 325, or the first extension portion 325B and the second extension portion It may be shaped according to the size of 325C.

[3-3 c. Dish unit base]
The plate unit base 323 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 41 to 44 and the like. The plate unit base 323 is attached below the through hole 111 in the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100, and extends flat across the entire width of the door frame base 110 (the rear is opened) It is formed in a shallow box shape).

  The pan unit base 323 penetrates forward and backward in the vicinity of the upper left corner in a front view, and penetrates back and forth under the upper pan and ball supply port 323a, which extends cylindrically rearward. A speaker slit 323b having a plurality of elongated holes extending vertically and vertically, and a lower circular sphere supply port 323c penetrating longitudinally in the lower part on the left side from the left and right center of the front view and cylindrically extending backward; The lower disc ball supply port 323c has an upper disc ball feed port 323d which penetrates forward and backward in a front view upper right side of the lower disc ball supply port 323c and which extends vertically and whose upper part is positioned at the right end of the upper disc body 324.

  Further, the bowl unit base 323 guides the gaming balls sent to the rear side of the bowl unit base 323 through the upper bowl ball feed port 323d and guides the ball to the entrance 251a of the ball feed unit 250; It extends in a substantially L shape so as to become lower toward the cylindrical right side view of the lower ball and ball supply port 323c after hanging down from the lower side of the feed guide path 323e, and from the ball outlet 251b of the ball feed unit 250. A ball extraction guide path 323f for guiding the released gaming ball to the lower ball supply port 323c, and a lower end of the ball feed guide path 323e and an upper end of the ball extraction guide path 323f in front view left of the ball feed guide path 323e And an operation transmitting portion 327a which abuts against the actuating rod 253c of the ball feeding unit 250 and which is operated by the upper disc ball removing button 327 so as to face the rear. And it includes an opening 323 g, a. The ball removal guide path 323f has a downstream end opening into a cylindrical portion of the lower ball feed port 323c.

  Furthermore, the plate unit base 323 penetrates back and forth at the lower right corner in a front view, and the handle insertion opening 323 h through which the cylindrical portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 is inserted And a cylinder insertion opening 323i through which the cylinder lock 211 of the open / close cylinder unit 210 is inserted.

  The upper bowl ball supply port 323a of the pan unit base 323 is assembled to the door frame 3, and the front end is opened to the rear wall of the upper pan 321, and the cylindrical rear end is an upper pan passage port for the door frame base 110 A front end of the through hole 117 is connected to the front end of the through ball passage 273 of the far cover unit 270. As a result, the gaming balls paid out from the payout unit 800 are supplied (paid out) into the upper tray 321 through the upper counterspin supply port 323a.

  The lower disc ball supply port 323 c is assembled to the door frame 3, and the front end opens to the rear wall of the lower disc 322, and the cylindrical rear end penetrates the lower disc passage port 116 of the door frame base 110 from the front side And the front end of the ball outlet 276 of the far cover unit 270. As a result, the game balls circulating in the storage passage 277 of the far cover unit 270 are supplied into the lower plate 322 through the lower ball supply port 323c. The lower bowl ball supply port 323c is disposed at the rear of the stage operation unit 400, the stage operation unit attachment portion 326a (right outside of the lower plate opening portion 326d) in the plate unit cover 326, the front end side of the lower plate cover 340, etc. When the door frame 3 is viewed from the front, the player can not see through the lower plate opening 326d.

[3-3 d. Dish unit cover]
The plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 41 to 44 and the like. The pan unit cover 326 is attached to the front of the pan unit base 323 so as to cover the front sides of the upper pan body 324 and the lower pan body 325. The pan unit cover 326 bulges forward at the center in the left-right direction and opens largely at the center in the left-right direction, and the presentation operation unit attachment portion 326a to which the presentation operation unit 400 is attached A plate front upper decoration portion 326b formed substantially at the same height as the upper plate 321, and a plate front lower decoration portion 326c formed on the lower side of each of the left and right plate front upper decoration portions 326b There is.

  The rendering operation unit attachment portion 326 a is formed to have a size of about 1/3 the width in the left-right direction of the pan unit 320 in the left-right direction, and the vertical direction is substantially the same as the height of the pan unit 320 in the vertical direction It is formed in height. In addition, the rendering operation unit attachment portion 326a is inclined so as to move rearward as the front end goes upward. Specifically, the front end of the rendering operation unit attachment portion 326a is inclined at an angle of 27 degrees with respect to the vertical line.

  The front portion of the plate front upper decorative portion 326b moves rearward from the center in the left and right direction of the plate unit cover 326 toward the left and right ends, and the end and the left and right sides of the plate unit cover 326 in the left and right direction The middle portion is formed in a curved surface shape slightly bulging forward with respect to a plane connecting the end portion of The lower front end of the plate front upper decorative portion 326b is inclined to move upward from the center of the plate unit cover 326 in the left-right direction toward the left and right sides. It is formed so that the up-down direction may be narrowed toward the left and right both end sides from the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a side). The dish unit cover 326 has the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 attached to the plate front upper decorative portion 326b on the left in front view.

  The lower front portion of the dish lower decorative portion 326c moves rearward from the center in the left-right direction of the dish unit cover 326 toward the left and right ends, and the end in the left-right direction of the dish unit cover 326 and the left and right ends The intermediate portion is formed in a curved surface shape that is recessed rearward with respect to a plane connecting the end portion of

  A lower plate opening portion 326d penetrating in the front and rear direction is formed in the lower plate front decoration portion 326c on the left side in a front view, and the lower plate 322 faces the front from the lower plate opening portion 326d. In the lower front dished decorative portion 326c on the left side in a front view, a lower circular ball release button 333 protrudes forward from the lower front surface of the lower lower plate opening 326d. Further, a lower speaker port 326e made of punching metal is formed on the left side of the lower plate opening portion 326d in the lower plate front decoration portion 326c on the left side in a front view. The lower speaker port 326 e is located in front of the speaker slit 323 b of the dish unit base 323 in a state of being assembled to the dish unit 320.

  The handle insertion opening 326f which penetrates the back and forth in the lower right corner of the front view and into which the cylindrical portion 181 of the handle attachment member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 is inserted A cylinder insertion port 326g is formed which penetrates back and forth on the upper side of the handle insertion port 326f near the right corner and through which the cylinder lock 211 of the open / close cylinder unit 210 is inserted.

  The plate unit cover 326 has a plate-like top plate portion 326h extending from the upper end of the plate front upper decorative portion 326b on the right side in front view to the front end of the plate unit base 323, and the top plate portion 326h It covers the upper right side. An upper bowl ball release button 327, a ball loan button 328, a return button 329, and a ball loan return display unit 330 are attached to the top plate portion 326h.

  The pan unit cover 326 includes a flat plate-like bottom plate portion 326i extending from the lower end of the pan front lower decoration portion 326c to the front surface of the pan unit base 323. The lower side of the tray unit 320 is closed by the bottom plate portion 326i. The bottom plate portion 326i is formed in a step-like shape so that a portion located below the lower plate 322 is recessed downward from below, and a lower-disc bowling base 335 described later is attached to the portion. Further, in the bottom plate portion 326i, a hole penetrating vertically is formed at a position corresponding to the lower countersink hole 322a of the lower tray 322.

  The pan unit cover 326 has a mounting space 326j which is opened forward at a portion of the rendering operation unit attachment portion 326a and into which the rear side of the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A) is inserted (accommodated). Further, the pan unit cover 326 extends in a plate shape rearward from the left side and the upper side of the lower pan opening 326 d, and includes a lower pan cover 326 k covering the lower pan 322 (see FIG. 44). . The lower end cover portion 326k is in contact with the left end at the upper end of the left side of the main body standing wall portion 325b in the lower end body 325, and the right end is in contact with the left end of the ceiling portion 340b in the lower end cover 340. There is.

[3-3 e. Upper bowl ball release button]
The upper bowl and ball withdrawal button 327 of the bowl unit 320 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 41 to 44 and the like. The upper plate ball removal button 327 is attached to the top plate portion 326h of the plate unit cover 326 on the right side of the upper plate 321 in a front view, and pressing the game ball in the upper plate 321 to the lower plate 322 by pressing. It can be pulled out. Although the detailed illustration of the upper disc ball extraction button 327 is omitted, the rear end side is below the top board portion 326 h by the ball extraction button holder attached to the lower side of the top board portion 326 h of the dish unit cover 326. It is rotatably mounted around an axis extending to. An upper end of the ball-drawing lever which extends vertically is in contact with the lower surface of the front end of the upper disc ball-extracting button 327. The ball release lever is slidably mounted in the vertical direction by a ball removal base attached to the front of the plate unit base 323 below the upper plate ball release button 327.

  The ball release lever whose upper end is in contact with the lower surface of the front end of the upper ball ball extraction button 327 is in contact with the upper portion of the upper ball ball extraction slider 327b slidably mounted vertically by the disk unit base 323 from above. ing. The upper disc ball removal slider 327 b includes an operation transmission portion 327 a projecting rearward from the rear surface, and in a state where the door frame 3 is assembled, the operation transmission portion 327 a passes through the opening 323 g in the pan unit base 323. It projects rearward so as to face, and abuts on the operating rod 253c of the ball removing member 253 in the ball feeding unit 250 from below. The upper disc ball removal slider 327b is urged upward by the upper disc ball release spring 327c, and the biasing force of the upper disc ball release spring 327c is via the upper disc ball removal slider 327b and the ball extraction lever. The upper bowl ball release button 327 is located at the rising end.

  Therefore, when the upper disc ball extraction button 327 is pressed downward against the biasing force of the upper disc ball extraction spring 327 c, the operation transmission portion 327 a of the upper disc ball extraction slider 327 b moves downward, and the operation transmission portion 327 a Since the actuating rod 253c of the ball removing member 253 in contact with the upper end side also moves relatively downward, the ball removing member 253 rotates in a counterclockwise direction in front view, and enters by the partition portion 253a. The partition between the opening 251a and the ball outlet 251b is released, and they are in communication with each other. As a result, the gaming balls in the upper tray 321 are discharged from the ball outlet 251b of the ball feed unit 250 to the ball outlet guiding path 323f of the tray unit 320, and are discharged to the lower tray 322 through the lower ball inlet 323c. It can be (supplied).

  In addition, when the upper disc ball extraction button 327 is operated, the lid member 334 closing the lower disc ball extraction hole 322a may be moved in an interlocking manner. As a result, when the upper disc ball extraction button 327 is operated, the lid member 334 is also moved and the lower disc ball extraction hole 322a is opened, so the gaming balls discharged from the upper plate 321 to the lower plate 322 are further removed. It will be discharged from the hole 322a to the lower dollar box. That is, when the upper bowl sphere removing button 327 is operated to pull out the gaming bowl from the upper plate 321, the gaming sphere of the upper plate 321 is discharged to the dollar box even though the lower bowl sphere extracting button 333 is not operated. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel strongly that the game balls on the upper plate 321 are discharged directly to the dollar box, making it difficult for the game balls to feel annoyance passing through the lower plate 322. A decrease in interest can be suppressed by concentrating the player on a game (such as a game ball hitting operation and an effect image). The simultaneous release of the upper tray 321 and the lower tray 322 may be simultaneous release by driving a drive source such as a motor or a solenoid, or may be simultaneous release by a mechanical link mechanism.

[3-3 f. Ball loan button, return button, and ball loan return display section]
The ball lending button 328, the return button 329, and the ball lending return display unit 330 of the tray unit 320 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. As shown in the figure, the ball lending button 328, the return button 329, and the ball lending display portion 330 have a circular decoration on the right side of the upper plate ball removing button 327 in the top plate portion 326h of the plate unit cover 326. Is attached to

  The ball lending button 328 inserts a predetermined number of gaming balls by inserting cash or a prepaid card into a ball lending machine (not shown) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 and pressing it. The unit 320 is to be lent (dispensed) into the upper plate 321 of the unit 320. When the return button 329 is pressed in a state in which cash or a prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine is inserted, the cash or the prepaid card is returned after subtracting the portion of the game ball which has been lent out.

  The ball rental return display unit 330, though not shown, has a 3-digit 7-segment LED arranged on the lower side of the transparent surface, and the remaining number of cash and prepaid cards inserted into the ball rental machine, or It displays an error code etc. when the ball lending machine breaks down.

[3-3 g. Effect selection left button and effect selection right button]
The effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 of the dish unit 320 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. The effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 are attached near the right end close to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a in the plate front upper decorative portion 326b on the left in front view in the plate unit cover 326 as illustrated. The presentation selection left button 331 is formed in a triangular shape with one vertex directed to the left. The presentation selection right button 332 is formed in a triangular shape in which one vertex is directed to the right on the right side of the presentation selection left button 331.

  The production selection left button 331 and the production selection right button 332 are provided to the player in the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 of the effect operation unit 400 arranged in the game area 5a in front view. On the other hand, when an effect image prompting selection is displayed, the pressing operation can be accepted, and the desired selection is selected by operating the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 within a predetermined time. .

[3-3 h. Lower bowl ball release button]
The lower bowl sphere removing button 333 of the bowl unit 320 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 41 to 44 and the like. The lower tray ball withdrawal button 333 projects forward from the lower end of the front of the lower tray decoration part 326c on the left side in a front view on the lower side of the lower tray opening 326d in the tray unit cover 326 in front of the lower plate 322. The lower disc ball extraction button 333 can be pressed to operate the lid member 334 closing the lower disc ball outlet hole 322a of the lower disc 322, and the lid member 334 is rotated. The lower bowl ball removal hole 322a is opened, and the gaming balls stored in the lower plate 322 can be discharged to the lower side of the bowl unit 320.

  The lower disc ball release button 333 can slide in the front-rear direction by the lower disc ball removal base 335 (see FIG. 42B) attached to the bottom plate portion 326i of the lower plate body 325 below the lower disc body 325. Is attached to The lower disc ball extraction button 333 is disposed on the left with respect to the lower disc ball extraction hole 322 a of the lower disc 322 (see FIG. 28 and the like).

  The bottom plate ball withdrawal base 335 is a bottom plate so that the bottom plate portion 326i of the plate unit cover 326 is housed in a step formed in a step shape so as to be recessed downward from below the lower plate 322. It is attached to the part 326i. The lower countersinking base 335 has a discharge port 335a, which has the same size as the lower countersink opening 322a and is vertically penetrated, at a position immediately below the lower countersink opening 322a for the lower tray 322. . The lid member 334 is disposed between the lower disc main body 325 and the lower disc ball removing base 335, although the detailed illustration is omitted. As a result, when the lid member 334 closing the lower disc ball opening hole 322a of the lower plate 322 is opened, the discharge port 335a of the lower ball ball sink base 335 is also opened, and the lower ball ball outlet hole 322a and the discharge port 335a And are in communication with each other.

  Although not shown, the lid member 334 is attached to the lower countersink base 335 so as to be rotatable about a position on the left side of the lower countersink button 333 in plan view. The lower disc ball withdrawal button 333 is connected to a part between the part for closing the lower disc ball withdrawal hole 322 a in the lid member 334 and the part to which the lower disc ball withdrawal base 335 is rotatably attached. As a result, when the lower countersunk ball release button 333 is moved in the front-rear direction, the lid member 334 can pivot around an axis extending in the vertical direction to open and close the lower countersink spherical opening 322a (discharge port 335a).

  Although not shown, the holding device for holding the lower tray ball withdrawal button 333 when the lower bowl ball withdrawal button 333 is pressed and moved to the lower disc ball withdrawal base 335, and the lower bowl ball withdrawal button A lower ball ball release spring biasing the 333 forward is attached. With the lower disc ball release button 333 projecting forward and closing the lower disc ball release hole 322a with the lid member 334, when the lower disc ball outlet button 333 is pressed and moved backward, the lid member 334 is rotated. The lower ball ball extraction hole 322a is opened to move, and the lower ball ball extraction button 333 is held by the holding device so as to be moved backward. In this state, even if the lower disc ball release button 333 is released, the lower disc ball release button 333 does not move forward, and the lower disc ball out hole 322a is maintained in the open state, and the lower disc The game balls in the ball 322 can be discharged to the lower side of the dish unit 320 through the lower ball ball removal hole 322a and the discharge port 335a.

  Then, when the lower disk ball extraction button 333 is held in the holding device and the lower disk ball extraction hole 322a is open, when the lower disk ball extraction button 333 is pressed backward, the holding by the holding device is released. In this state, when the pressing of the lower ball releasing button 333 is released, the lower ball removing button 333 moves forward by the biasing force of the lower ball removing spring and returns to the protruded state, and the cover member 334 is rotated. The lower ball ball removal hole 322a (discharge port 335a) is closed to move. Thereby, the gaming balls can be stored in the lower plate 322.

  In addition, separately from the pressing operation of the lower disc ball extracting button 333, the lid member 334 closing the lower disc ball extracting hole 322 a (discharge port 335 a) is also moved by the pressing operation of the upper disc ball extracting button 327. The lower countersink hole 322a may be opened. Thus, when it is desired to discharge the gaming balls stored in the upper tray 321 into the dollar box disposed below the tray unit 320, the dollar box via the lower tray 322 can be operated simply by operating the upper tray ball release button 327. Can be discharged to simplify the labor involved in ball removal. The simultaneous release of the upper tray 321 and the lower tray 322 may be simultaneous release by driving a drive source such as a motor or a solenoid, or may be simultaneous release by a mechanical link mechanism.

[3-4. Overall Configuration of Production Operation Unit]
The entire configuration of the effect operation unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 to 55 and the like. FIG. 48 (a) is a front view of the effect operation unit in the door frame, and FIG. 48 (b) is a right side view of the effect operation unit. FIG. 49 (a) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 49 (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 50 is an explanatory view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the extending direction of the central axis of the operation button. FIG. 51 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line D-D in FIG. 48 (a), and FIG. 52 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line E-E in FIG. 48 (b). Fig.53 (a) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the FF line in FIG.48 (b), (b) is an enlarged view of the A section in (a). FIG. 54 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 55 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear. The rendering operation unit 400 is attached to the front of the plate unit 320 in the center in the left-right direction of the front view, and can be pressed by the player and can present a rendering image to the player It is.

  The effect operation unit 400 has a circular outer shape and is formed transparent at the center side excluding the outer peripheral edge, and the operation button 410 which the player can press and operate, and the outer periphery of the operation button 410 surrounds the operation unit of the dish unit cover 326 A frame-shaped frame unit 415 attached to the attachment portion 326a, a decorative substrate unit 420 disposed behind the operation button 410 and capable of emitting and decorating the outer peripheral edge of the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415; The base unit 430 attached to the rear side of the unit 415 and having the operation button 410 and the decoration board unit 420 attached to the front, and attached to the base unit 430 so as to be visible from the player side through the operation button 410 A door frame side effect display device 460 capable of displaying an image; Eteiru.

[3-4a. Manual operation button]
The operation buttons 410 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. Fig. 56 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the operating button disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the operating button disassembled and viewed from the rear. The operation button 410 is formed in a circular shape whose outer diameter is slightly smaller than the height in the vertical direction of the pan unit 320, and the central side excluding the outer peripheral edge is formed transparent. The operation button 410 is formed on the front side of the outer periphery of the transparent button lens 411 and the outer periphery of the button lens 411, which are formed in a curved surface (a part of the spherical surface) so that the outer periphery is circular and the center side bulges forward. An annular button frame 412 is attached, and a cylindrical button base 413 attached to the rear side of the button frame 412 so as to sandwich the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. The button frame 412 and the button base 413 are formed of members that are difficult to pass light.

  The button lens 411 is formed to have a substantially constant thickness as a whole. Further, the button lens 411 is formed in a smooth curved surface having no unevenness on the surface side. The button lens 411 is extended in a predetermined length to the center side (inner side) in a state of being recessed in a W shape in cross section from the back surface at a position on the inner peripheral side of the button frame 412 and The first button decorative portion 411a and an outer circumferential side of the first button decorative portion 411a are recessed in a circular arc shape in cross section and extend on an axis toward the central side and in a row within a predetermined angle range in the circumferential direction And a plurality of (six) second button decoration parts 411b provided.

  The first button decorative portion 411a of the button lens 411 extends from the inner periphery to the center side of the button frame 412 in the assembled state to the operation button 410 as shown, and a group of both right and left sides is a group of upper and lower sides It extends longer than the center.

  The plurality of second button decorative portions 411 b of the button lens 411 each extend in an arc shape on the same circumference, and are formed three by three on each of the left and right sides. The second button decorative portion 411 b is formed to face the frame opening 412 a of the button frame 412, and protrudes forward so that the front side is substantially flush with the front surface of the button frame 412.

  The button lens 411 exerts a lens effect that light is refracted by the W-shaped cross section and the arc-shaped cross section formed on the back surface at the portions of the first button decorative portion 411a and the second button decorative portion 411b. Therefore, the rear side is not clearly seen.

  The button frame 412 is formed in an annular shape, and includes a plurality of (six) frame openings 412 a penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending in a circular arc shape with a predetermined length in the circumferential direction. The six frame openings 412 a are provided three each on the left and right sides, and correspond to the six second button decoration parts 411 b of the button lens 411. The button frame 412 is provided with a plated layer having a metallic gloss on the surface.

  The button base 413 has a substantially cylindrical main body portion 413a that extends short in the front-rear direction, an annular flange portion 413b protruding outward from the front end of the main body portion 413a, and the main body portion 413a from the rear side of the flange portion 413b. Along the outer periphery of the main body 413a, and a plurality of (four) guide bosses 413c protruding rearward in a cylindrical shape along the outer periphery of the body and arranged at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction; A plurality of (three) detection pieces 413d projecting in the shape of a band plate to the rear and arranged in the circumferential direction and penetrating the flange portion 413b on the outer side than the main body portion 413a and having a predetermined length along the outer periphery And a plurality of (six) base openings 413e extending in the circumferential direction, and cylindrically extending forward from the front end of the main body 413a, and the front end is the inner surface of the button lens 411. And a, an inner extending portion 413f are narrowed inward (central side) along.

  The outer periphery of the button lens 411 and the button frame 412 are attached to the outer peripheral surface of the inner extension portion 413 f of the button base 413 and the front surface of the flange portion 413 b. The four guide bosses 413c are disposed at positions corresponding to the four corners in the upper, lower, left, and right directions with respect to the circumferential direction of the main body 413a. The four guide bosses 413 c are respectively slidably inserted into the holding holes 431 b of the unit base 431 in the base unit 430. The three detection pieces 413d are arranged at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction so as to be disposed two on the upper side and one on the lower side with respect to the circumferential direction of the main body portion 413a. These three detection pieces 413 d are detected by the pressure detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430 when the operation button 410 is pressed.

  The six base openings 413 e are provided three each on the left and right sides, respectively, and correspond to the second button decorative portion 411 b of the button lens 411 and the frame opening 412 a of the button frame 412. In the region of the base opening 413 e in the button base 413, parts of the main body 413 a and the inner extension 413 f are recessed inward from the outer peripheral side. The inner diameter of the front end of the inner extension portion 413 f which is narrowed inward substantially matches the inner diameter of the button frame 412.

  The operation button 410 has a front surface bulging forward in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) and is formed transparent, and the door frame side effect display device 460 disposed on the rear side The display screen of can be viewed from the front. The operation button 410 is an operation button spring 438 in which four guide bosses 413 c are slidably inserted into the holding holes 431 b of the unit base 431 in the base unit 430 and are inserted into the holding holes of the unit base 431. Is biased forward by the Since the front side of the outer peripheral edge of the operation button 410 is in contact with the frame unit 415 by the urging force of the operation button spring 438 of the base unit 430, the further movement to the front is restricted. The rear end is moved backward until it abuts on the front surface of the base unit 430 by pressing against it. When the operation button 410 is pressed and moved backward, at least one of the three detection pieces 413 d is detected by the pressure detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430. The operation button 410 is operated by the detection of the detection piece 413d by the pressure detection sensor 440.

  In addition, the operation button 410 is a first button decoration formed over the entire circumference so as to extend from the inner peripheral end of the button frame 412 in the transparent button lens 411 to the center side in the assembled state of the rendering operation unit 400 The gap between the inner peripheral surface of the button base 413 and the in-operation button decorative member 432 of the base unit 430 can be made less visible to the player by the portion 411a.

  Furthermore, the operation button 410 closes the front end opening of the cylindrical button base 413 by the button lens 411 and the button frame 412, and the operation button is operated by the button frame 412 attached to the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. With respect to the outer diameter of 410, a transparent portion visible in the rear is formed so as to be narrowed inward from the outer periphery. The presence of the button frame 412 also makes it difficult for the player to see the gap between the inner peripheral surface of the button base 413 and the decoration member 432 in the operation button of the base unit 430.

  Further, in a state where the operation button 410 is assembled to the rendering operation unit 400, the rear end of the cylindrical button base 413 (main body portion 413 a) passes through the inner peripheral side of the decorative substrate unit 420 than the front surface of the decorative substrate unit 420. It will be in the state where it projected backward. Thus, the light emitted forward from the first LEDs 422a and 423a and the second LEDs 422b and 423b mounted on the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 42 of the decoration substrate unit 420 is a button The inside of the base 413 can be prevented from leaking inward, and the operation button left inner decoration substrate 433 of the base unit 430, the operation button right inner decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper inner decoration substrate 435, and the operation button lower area Light emitted forward from the LED mounted on the decorative substrate 436 can be prevented from leaking from the inside to the outside of the button base 413. Therefore, the first LED 422a, 423a and the second LED 422b, 423b of the decoration substrate unit 420 and the operation button left inner decoration substrate 433 of the base unit 430, the operation button right inner decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper decoration substrate 435, and the operation button It is possible to prevent the LED mounted on the lower inner decorative substrate 436 from being light emitting decorated other than the light emitting decoration target part, and the light emitting decoration can be performed with good appearance.

[3-4 b. Frame unit]
The frame unit 415 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 53 to 55 and the like. The frame unit 415 is attached from the front to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326 a of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 so as to surround the outer periphery from the front side of the operation button 410 and decorates the outside of the operation button 410. The frame unit 415 is formed in an outer shape that matches the front end side of the rendering operation unit attachment portion 326a.

  The frame unit 415 is attached to the effect operation unit attaching portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320 and has a frame-shaped frame main body 416 having a circular central opening 416a, and a frame main body 416 on both left and right sides of the central opening 416a. A pair of translucent frame side lenses 417 attached from the rear side, and a translucent frame top lens 418 attached from the front to the frame main body 416 above the central opening 416a. There is.

  The frame main body 416 has a circular central opening 416a which is smaller in diameter than the outer diameter of the operation button 410 and which penetrates back and forth, and which penetrates back and forth on both left and right sides of the central opening 416a. And a plurality of (six) peripheral opening portions 416b extending in an arc shape along the peripheral edge of the frame, and notches 416c cut out with a predetermined width on the upper front surface of the central opening portion 416a And. The central opening 416 a is formed to have substantially the same size as the diameter of the outer periphery of the frame opening 412 a of the button frame 412 in the operation button 410. Thus, the front end side of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 can be in contact with the outer peripheral rear side of the frame opening 412a.

  Six outer peripheral openings 416 b are provided three each on the left and right outer sides of the central opening 416 a, and are closed by a frame side lens 417 from the rear side. The notch portion 416 c also penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the frame top lens 418 is fitted from the front side.

  In addition, the frame main body 416 includes a substantially cylindrical inner cylindrical portion 416d that extends rearward from a position slightly outside the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a. The inner cylindrical portion 416d extends rearward from a position between the central opening 416a and the outer peripheral opening 416b, and a portion corresponding to the notch 416c is cut away. The inner cylindrical portion 416d, when the effect operation unit 400 is assembled, the first LED 422a and 423a and the second LED 422b and 423b on the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 of the decoration substrate unit 420. And between the first LEDs 422a and 423a and the second LEDs 422b and 423b (see FIG. 52).

  Furthermore, the frame main body 416 extends outward at the left and right upper portions of the outer periphery, and includes a pair of attachment portions 416e attached to the rendering operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. In the frame main body 416 (rendering operation unit 400), the left and right sides of the pair of attaching portions 416e and the notch portion 416c are attached to the effect operating unit attaching portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 in the plate unit 320.

  The frame main body 416 is substantially entirely metal on the entire surface except for a portion having the same width as the cutout 416c on the side opposite to the cutout 416c (the side on which the frame top lens 418 is attached) with the central opening 416a interposed therebetween. A shiny plating layer is formed.

  The frame side lens 417 closes, from the rear side, outer peripheral openings 416 b formed three on each side of the frame main body 416. The frame side lens 417 is formed to have a smooth surface without irregularities on the front side, and a plurality of irregularities are formed on the rear surface side along the periphery of the central opening 416a (see FIGS. 53 and 63). The light is refracted by the plurality of irregularities so that the rear side of the frame side lens 417 can not be seen.

  The frame top lens 418 has a substantially rectangular outer shape so as to be fitted into the cutout 416 c of the frame main body 416 from the front side. The frame top lens 418 is formed to be smooth on the front side. Further, in the frame top lens 418, a plurality of irregularities extending in a zigzag shape along the periphery of the central opening 416a on the rear surface side are arranged in a plurality of rows in the radial direction of the central opening 416a (see FIGS. 51 and 63). reference). The light is refracted by the plurality of irregularities so that the rear side of the frame top lens 418 can not be seen.

  In the frame unit 415, in a state where the effect operation unit 400 is assembled, the pair of frame side lenses 417 are the second outer LEDs 422b and 423b of the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 of the decoration substrate unit 420. And the frame top lens 418 is located in front of the frame top lens decoration substrate 437 of the base unit 430, and the light emitting decoration is possible by the second LEDs 422b, 423b, etc. mounted on them. .

[3-4 c. Decorative substrate unit]
The decoration substrate unit 420 of the rendering operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 57 and the like. FIG. 57 is an exploded perspective view of the decorative substrate unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front. The decorative substrate unit 420 is attached to the front surface of the base unit 430 below the frame unit 415, and can emit and decorate the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. The operation unit 400 can be vibrated.

  The decorative substrate unit 420 includes a C-shaped substrate base 421 whose upper side is opened, and an operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and an operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 attached to the front of the left and right sides of the substrate base 421, respectively. And a motor cover 425 attached to the front of the substrate base 421 so as to cover the front side of the vibration motor 424.

  The substrate base 421 is formed such that the inner peripheral side is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the cylindrical main portion 413 a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410, and the outer peripheral side is larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 413 b of the button base 413. And, it is formed smaller than the outer diameter of the frame unit 415.

  The operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 extends in a circular arc along the front surface of the substrate base 421. The operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 is formed on the inner periphery of the substrate base 421 radially outward of the plurality of first LEDs 422 a mounted along the inner periphery of the substrate base 421 on the front side and the plurality of first LEDs 422 a And a plurality of second LEDs 422b mounted along. The operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 extends in a circular arc along the front surface of the substrate base 421. The operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 is formed on the inner periphery of the substrate base 421 radially outward of the plurality of first LEDs 423 a mounted along the inner periphery of the substrate base 421 on the front side and the plurality of first LEDs 423 a And a plurality of second LEDs 423b mounted along the same. Both the front and rear surfaces of the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 are white.

  The vibration motor 424 has a weight 424a eccentrically attached to the rotation shaft, and can generate vibration by rotating the weight 424a.

  When the decorative substrate unit 420 is assembled in the rendering operation unit 400, the rear end side of the cylindrical main body portion 413 a of the button base 413 in the operation button 410 is inserted inside the substrate base 421. In the decoration board unit 420, the first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left outside decoration board 422 and the operation button right outside decoration board 423 are positioned behind the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410, respectively. The second LEDs 422 b and 423 b are located behind the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. Moreover, in the state assembled in the rendering operation unit 400, a frame is formed between the respective first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 and the respective second LEDs 422b and 423b. The inner cylindrical portion 416d of the unit 415 is located (see FIG. 52).

  Therefore, the decorative substrate unit 420 causes only the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410 to emit light and decorate by the light from the respective first LEDs 422a and 423a in the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423. It is possible to emit and decorate only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 by the light from each of the second LEDs 422b and 423b.

  In addition, by rotating the weight 424 a of the vibration motor 424, the decoration substrate unit 420 can generate vibration to vibrate the entire rendering operation unit 400.

[3-4 d. Base unit]
The base unit 430 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 58 to 60 and the like. FIG. 58 (a) is a perspective view of the base unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 58 (b) is a perspective view of the base unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective view of the base unit of the effect operation unit as disassembled and viewed from the front. Further, FIG. 60 is an exploded perspective view of the base unit of the effect operation unit as disassembled and viewed from the rear. The base unit 430 of the effect operation unit 400 is attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415 while the operation button 410 is mounted so as to be movable back and forth.

  The base unit 430 includes four through holes 431 a attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415 and penetrating in a substantially rectangular shape extending vertically at the central portion, and a blind hole opened forward outside the through hole 431 a. An annular unit base 431 having a holding hole 431b, an operation button inner decorative member 432 attached so as to cover the through hole 431a on the front surface of the unit base 431 and having a short cylindrical extension in the longitudinal direction Of the operation button left inner decoration substrate 433 and the operation button right inner decoration substrate 434 which are respectively attached to the left and right sides of the through hole 431 a in the front of the unit base 431 behind the button inner decoration member 432 Manipulations attached to the upper and lower sides of the through hole 431a at the front of the unit base 431 at the rear A button on the decorative substrate 435 and the operation buttons under the decorative substrate 436, and a frame top lens decorative board 437 attached to the upper front portion of the unit base 431, a.

  Further, the base unit 430 includes four operation button springs 438 respectively inserted into the four holding holes 431 b of the unit base 431, three sensor holders 439 attached to the front surface of the unit base 431, and each sensor holder Three pressing detection sensors 440 attached to 439 respectively for detecting pressing operation of the operation button 410, a rendering operation unit relay board 441 mounted on the rear side of the unit base 431, and a rendering operation unit relay board 441. And a relay substrate cover 442 attached to the rear side of the unit base 431 so as to cover the rear side.

  The unit base 431 has a substantially circular outer shape and is formed slightly smaller than the outer shape of the frame unit 415. The unit base 431 penetrates back and forth at the center, and a substantially square through hole 431 a extending vertically is formed. The through hole 431 a has a size that fits in the cylindrical main body portion 413 a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410, and is formed in a size that allows the display screen of the door frame side effect display device 460 to be inserted. The door frame side effect display device 460 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 431.

  The four holding holes 431 b of the unit base 431 are formed at four corners on the upper, lower, left, and right sides of the through hole 431 a at positions corresponding to the four guide bosses 413 c of the button base 413 in the operation button 410. The inner diameter of each of the holding holes 431b is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the guide boss portion 413c, and the guide boss portion 413c can be inserted slidably.

  More specifically, the upper left holding hole 431b of the four holding holes 431b extends from the vertically extending center line passing through the center of the unit base 431 (center of the operation button 410) to the center of the unit base 431. It is formed at a position rotated about 30 degrees in the counterclockwise direction. Further, the holding hole 431b on the upper right side of the four holding holes 431b is clockwise with respect to the center of the unit base 431 from the vertically extending center line passing through the center of the unit base 431 (center of the operation button 410). It is formed at a position rotated about 47 degrees in the direction of. On the other hand, the two holding holes 431b disposed at the lower side of the four holding holes 431b are respectively formed at positions opposite to the center of the unit base 431 with respect to the upper two holding holes 431b. .

  The unit base 431 is a light shielding wall portion 431 c projecting forward in the form of a flat plate from the portion on the upper front surface where the operation button inner decorative substrate 435 is attached and the portion on which the frame top lens decorative substrate 437 is attached. Is equipped. The light shielding wall portion 431 c allows the light emitting decoration of the frame top lens 418 to be performed only by the frame top lens decoration substrate 437.

  The operation button inner decorative member 432 is formed in a curved surface shape so as to close the front end side of the substantially cylindrical peripheral wall portion 432a which extends in the front and rear direction and the peripheral wall portion 432a. A front plate portion 432b, a rectangular opening portion 432c penetrating the front plate portion 432b back and forth and extending vertically, a flange portion 432d extending outward from a rear end of the peripheral wall portion 432a, and a flange portion 432d And a plurality of mounting bosses 432 e that project rearward from the rear and are attached to the unit base 431.

  An outer diameter of the peripheral wall portion 432 a of the operation button inner decoration member 432 is formed to have substantially the same size as an inner diameter of the button frame 412 of the operation button 410. The opening 432 c penetrating the front plate 432 b is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the door frame side effect display device 460.

  In the operation button inner decoration member 432, the outer peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion 432a and the front surface of the front plate portion 432b are formed in a smooth surface without unevenness.

  The operation button inner decoration member 432 is formed on the inner peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion 432a, is depressed in an arc shape and extends in the front-rear direction, and a plurality of first button inner decoration portions 432f provided in the circumferential direction , Formed on the rear surface of the front plate portion 432b and bulging in an arc shape, extending in an octagonal shape centered on the center of the front plate portion 432b, and concentrically centered on the center of the front plate portion 432b And a second in-button decorative portion 432g (see FIG. 63). The second in-button decoration 432 g is formed to have a portion extending in parallel with the four inner peripheries of the opening 432 c.

  The operation button inner decoration member 432 is formed of a transparent member. The rear end of the operation button inner decoration member 432 can not be clearly seen behind by the lens effect of the first button inner decoration portion 432f of the peripheral wall portion 432a and the second button inner decoration portion 432g of the front plate portion 432b. .

  The operation button left inner decoration substrate 433, the operation button right inner decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper inner decoration substrate 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration substrate 436 each have a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side. By emitting light, the decoration member 432 in the operation button can be decorated to emit light. By emitting and decorating the operation button inner decoration member 432, it is possible to cause the inside of the operation button 410 and the outside of the door frame side effect display device 460 to emit light and decorate.

  A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the frame top lens decoration substrate 437, and by emitting the LEDs, the frame top lens 418 in the frame unit 415 can be decorated to emit light.

  The LEDs mounted on the operation button left inner decoration substrate 433, the operation button right inner decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper inner decoration substrate 435, the operation button lower inner decoration substrate 436, and the frame top lens decoration substrate 437 are each full color LED It is assumed. Also, the front of the operation button left inner decoration substrate 433, the operation button right inner decoration substrate 434, the operation button inner inner decoration substrate 435, the operation button lower inner decoration substrate 436, and the frame top lens decoration substrate 437 are white. .

  The operation button spring 438 is a coil spring, and is inserted from the front into the four holding holes 431 b in the unit base 431. The guide button spring 438 is a guide boss whose rear end is in contact with the bottom surface of the holding hole 431 b in a state assembled to the rendering operation unit 400 and whose front end protrudes rearward from the main portion 413 a of the button base 413 in the operation button 410 It is in contact with the rear end of the portion 413c. The operating button spring 438 biases the operating button 410 forward.

  The three pressure detection sensors 440 are disposed at positions corresponding to the three detection pieces 413 d of the button base 413 in the operation button 410. More specifically, in the front of the unit base 431, one of the three pressure detection sensors 440 is on the lower left side of the upper left holding hole 431b, and the other is on the lower right side of the upper right holding hole 431b, and the remaining one is lower left The sensor holder 439 is attached to the lower right side of the holding hole 431b. The three pressure detection sensors 440 are attached at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction centering on the center of the unit base 431. The three pressure detection sensors 440 can detect three detection strips 413 d of the operation button 410.

  The effect operation unit relay substrate 441 is attached to the left side (right side in front view) of the through hole 431 a in rear view on the rear side of the unit base 431. The effect operation unit relay substrate 441 includes an operation button left outer decoration substrate 422, an operation button right outer decoration substrate 423, a vibration motor 424, an operation button left inner decoration substrate 433, an operation button right inner decoration substrate 434, an operation button inner decoration substrate 435, for relaying the connection between the operation button lower inner decoration substrate 436, the frame top lens decoration substrate 437, the press detection sensor 440, and the door frame side effect display device 460 and the door main body relay substrate of the door frame base unit 100 It is a thing.

  The relay substrate cover 442 extends from the lower end of the portion covering the rear side of the effect operation unit relay substrate 441 to the left in front view, and includes a leg 442 a attached to the lower portion of the rear surface of the unit base 431. The leg portion 442a of the relay substrate cover 442 has a lower surface extending substantially horizontally when assembled to the door frame 3, and between the bottom plate portion 326i forming the bottom surface of the plate unit cover 326 in the plate unit 320. Form a slight gap (see FIG. 26). Thus, when the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is strongly pressed downward or hit, the bottom surface of the leg portion 442a is in contact with the top surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the plate unit cover 326. The impact can be absorbed by bending the mounting portion 416e and the rendering operation unit mounting portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 downward. Then, after the lower surface of the leg portion 442a abuts on the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the movement of the effect operation unit 400 is restricted downward, and the attachment portion 416e of the frame unit 415 and the effect operation unit attachment portion of the plate unit cover 326 Unreasonable force can be avoided from acting on 326a and the like to prevent their breakage.

[3-4 e. Door frame side effect display device]
The door frame side effect display device 460 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 54 and 55 and the like. The door frame side effect display device 460 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 431 so that the display screen faces forward from the opening 432 c of the decoration member 432 in the operation button in the base unit 430. While being able to visually recognize a display screen from the front side (player side) through a center part, an effect image can be displayed on a display screen.

  The door frame side effect display device 460 is attached to the liquid crystal display device 461 having a square display screen on the front and to the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 461 and to the rear side of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430. And a bottomed square cylindrical mounting bracket 462. The liquid crystal display device 461 is a commercially available color liquid crystal display having an aspect ratio of 16: 9 and a diagonal length of about 4.3 inches. The mounting bracket 462 is formed so that the outer periphery thereof has the same shape as the outer periphery of the liquid crystal display device 461, and is attached so that the bottom of the bottomed cylindrical shape abuts on the rear surface of the liquid crystal display device 461.

  When the door frame side effect display device 460 is assembled in the effect operation unit 400, the liquid crystal display device 461 penetrates the through hole 431a of the unit base 431 from the rear side, and the inside of the peripheral wall portion 432a of the decoration member 432 in the operation button (See Figure 51). The front surface (display screen) of the liquid crystal display device 461 is located in the vicinity of the front end of the peripheral wall 432a of the in-operation button decorative member 432 and faces forward from the opening 432c penetrating the front plate 432b.

  The door frame side effect display device 460 can display a predetermined effect image based on the control signal from the periphery control board 1510 in the liquid crystal display device 461.

[3-4 f. Operation effect of production operation unit]
The effects of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 61 to 63 and the like. FIG. 61 is an explanatory view showing a state in which the operation button is pressed in the cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit of FIG. 51. FIG. 62 (a) is a view of the rendering operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, in which part of the operation button is cut away to hide it by the first button decoration portion of the operation button or the button frame It is explanatory drawing which shows a site | part, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which it is going to hide by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in sectional drawing of a rendering operation unit. FIG. 63 (a) is an explanatory view showing a perspective view of the appearance of the effect operation unit seen from the front, and FIG. 63 (b) is an explanatory view of the appearance of the effect operation unit seen from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends It is.

  The effect operation unit 400 according to the present embodiment can show the effect image to the player according to the game state which is changed by the game ball being hit into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and the player is operated. The player can be made to participate in the effect presented to the player by operating the button 410 and the player can be entertained.

  The rendering operation unit 400 is formed to have a height substantially equal to the height of the lower portion of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3. In addition, the full width of the effect operation unit 400 is formed to be slightly larger than 1/3 of the full width of the door frame 3. The rendering operation unit 400 is disposed at the center in the left-right direction below the gaming area 5a (the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110) in a front view.

  In the effect operation unit 400, the upper portion of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326 a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320. In the effect operation unit 400, the lower surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay substrate cover 442 serving as the bottom surface in a state attached to the dish unit 320 is a gap between the lower surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay substrate cover 442 and the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i in the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320. Is formed. That is, only the upper part of the effect operation unit 400 is attached to the dish unit 320 and is attached in a suspended state.

  Further, in the effect operation unit 400, the front surface of the frame unit 415 (the surface formed by the inner periphery of the front end of the central opening 416a of the frame main body 416) is parallel to the inclined surface of the front end opening of the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a. As attached. Thus, in the effect operation unit 400, the central axis line CL of the transparent operation button 410 bulging forward in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) is at an angle of 63 degrees with respect to the vertical line It is inclined to move upward as it goes forward. Thus, when the player is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 to play a game using the pachinko machine 1, the head of the player is disposed above the dish unit 320 (rendering operation unit 400) The central axis CL of the operation button 410 passes near the head of the player, because the central axis CL of the operation button 410 is located in front of the center of the game area 5a in the game board 5. Therefore, when the player drops his eyes from the game area 5a to the rendering operation unit 400 (the operation button 410), the operation button 410 is as close as possible to the front view (the projection from the direction parallel to the central axis CL). The operation button 410 and the door frame side effect display device 460 or the like in the operation button 410 can be viewed in a good state.

  In the effect operation unit 400, the four guide bosses 413 c of the operation button 410 are slidably inserted into the four holding holes 431 b of the base unit 430, respectively, and are urged forward by the operation button spring 438. In the normal state (when the operation button 410 is not pressed), the effect operation unit 400 has the front end of the flange portion 413 b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 by the biasing force of the operation button spring 438. It abuts on a portion near the central opening 416 a in the rear surface of the frame main body 416.

  In the normal state, the effect operation unit 400 projects forward from the central opening 416 a of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 to the center side (central axis line CL side) from the inner periphery of the button frame 412 in the operation button 410. There is. In other words, in the transparent button lens 411 bulging forward in a curved surface (a part of the shape of a substantially spherical surface) of the operation button 410, the portion projecting forward from the inner periphery (inner side) of the button frame 412 is , And protrudes forward from the central opening 416a of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 (see FIG. 51 and the like).

  Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the diameter of the central opening 416a of the frame main body 416 in the frame unit 415 is about 15 cm, and (the front end of) the button lens 411 is the frame unit with respect to the central axis CL direction of the operation button 410. It projects about 4 cm forward from the front of 415.

  In the normal state, when the player presses the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400, the operation button 410 moves backward along the central axis CL against the biasing force of the operation button spring 438. Then, when the rear end of the operation button 410 abuts on the front surface of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, the backward movement is restricted and the backward movement of the operation button 410 is stopped. When the player presses the operation button 410, the button lens 411 which is bulging forward in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) is pressed.

  The operation button 410 is formed so that the outer diameter is very large compared to the operation button for effect provided in the conventional pachinko machine, and therefore the peripheral edge away from the central portion of the button lens 411 is pressed It is likely to be More specifically, the operation button for effect in the conventional pachinko machine is attached such that its central axis extends substantially parallel to the vertical line, while the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 of this embodiment is attached. Since the central axis CL is attached to be inclined with respect to the vertical line, when the player presses the operation button 410 from the upper side as in the conventional pachinko machine, as shown by the white arrow in FIG. The part away from the central axis line CL of the operation button 410 is pressed.

  By the way, since the operation button for effect in the conventional pachinko machine is formed on a flat surface on which the player performs the pressing operation, the operation button is enlarged while the portion to be pressed is made flat. When pressing a part out of the center of the operation button, the surface to be pressed is inclined so that the pressed part retreats first, and the operation button can not recede straight, and the operation button There is a possibility that the pressing operation can not be performed.

  On the other hand, in the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 of the present embodiment, a portion (button lens 411) pressed by the player has a curved surface (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) bulging forward. Therefore, when a position away from the center of the operation button 410 is pressed, the force is dispersed to the entire operation button 410 and the operation button 410 becomes difficult to tilt, and the operation button 410 moves straight backward. Can. Therefore, even if any position on the front side of the operation button 410 is pressed, the operation button 410 can be smoothly retracted without being tilted, so that the pressing operation can be reliably detected, and the operation button 410 is pressed. It is possible to fully enjoy the effects of operation.

  Further, in the effect operation unit 400, the vibration motor 424 is attached to the lower front of the substrate base 421 in the decoration substrate unit 420, and as described above, only the upper portion is dished so that the effect operation unit 400 can be suspended. Because it is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the unit cover 326, when the weight 424a is rotated by the vibration motor 424 to generate a vibration, the vibration is generated at the most distant part from the attached portion The whole of the rendering operation unit 400 can be vibrated largely (strongly), and the vibration can be transmitted to the player touching the rendering operation unit 400. In addition, since the vibration motor 424 is disposed immediately below the position where the player can easily perform the pressing operation (the position of the white arrow in FIG. 61), for the player pressing the operation button 410 The strong vibration can be transmitted to surprise the player and enjoy the presentation.

  Furthermore, the rendering operation unit 400 is attached to the pan unit cover 326 in a suspended state, and the bottom surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442 forming the bottom surface and the bottom plate of the pan unit cover 326 Since a gap is formed between the upper surface of the portion 326i and the lower surface of the leg portion 442a when the operation button 410 is strongly pressed downward or struck down, the frame is held between the abutment of the lower surface of the leg portion 442a with the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i. The impact can be absorbed by bending downward the attachment portion 416e of the unit 415, the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326, and the like. In addition, after the lower surface of the leg portion 442a abuts on the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the downward movement of the rendering operation unit 400 is restricted, and the mounting portion 416e of the frame unit 415 and the mounting of the tray unit cover 326 Unreasonable force can be prevented from acting on the part 326a and the like, and damage to the rendering operation unit 400 and the like can be prevented. Therefore, even when the player presses the operation button 410 with a strong force or when the player depresses the operation button 410, the operation button 410 or the effect operation unit is presented when an effect of pressing the operation button 410 of the operation unit 400 is presented to the player. Since 400 etc. will not be damaged, interruption of the game due to the breakage can be avoided, and a decrease in interest of the player can be suppressed, and the burden on the game hall side is increased by making the breakage difficult. It can be suppressed.

  As described above, since the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 pressed by the player is formed in a curved surface (a part of the shape of a substantially spherical surface) projecting forward, it is flat. The strength and rigidity are higher than in the case, and the impact can be dispersed to the entire button lens 411 even if it is strongly hit, making it difficult to break.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 63, since the button lens 411, the frame side lens 417, the frame top lens 418, and the operation member in the operation button 432 are made of transparent members, the effect operation unit 400 is composed of The decoration by unevenness such as the first button decoration 411a, the second button decoration 411b, the first button inner decoration 432f, and the second button inner decoration 432g formed on the back side is the front side (the player side Can be viewed from In addition, since the plate thickness is changed and light is complicatedly refracted at the portion where the decoration of the unevenness is formed, it is difficult to visually recognize the rear side through the portion where the decoration of the unevenness is formed .

  Since the rendering operation unit 400 includes the first button decoration portion 411a extending from the inner periphery to the center side of the button frame 412 of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410, the decoration of the unevenness of the first button decoration portion 411a Thus, it is possible to make it difficult to view the rear at a portion of the outer peripheral edge of the portion to be the inside of the button lens 411. Behind the portion where the first button decorative portion 411a is formed (rearward in the central axis line CL direction), the inner circumferential surface of the main portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the peripheral wall portion of the operation member inner decoration member 432 There is a gap between the outer peripheral surface of the operation button 432a and the outer periphery of the operation button inner decoration member 432 from the front side (player's side) by the first button decoration portion 411a located in front of the gap. It can be hard to see. As a result, even if the operation button in-operation decoration member 432 whose position is fixed is provided in the depressible operation button 410, the appearance of the operation button 410 can be prevented from being deteriorated, and the operation button 410 is seen. While being able to prevent the player from having a sense of discomfort, the decorative member 432 in the operation button can be disposed within the transparent operation button 410 without any problem, and the appearance of the operation button 410 can be improved.

  More specifically, in the rendering operation unit 400, the outer periphery of the in-operation button decoration member 432 of the base unit 430 is formed by the first button decoration portion 411 a, the second button decoration portion 411 b and the button frame 412 of the button lens 411 in the operation button 410. A unit base 431 and a decoration board unit 420, etc., which are on the rear side (rear side) outside the unit, are formed so as to be invisible to the player through the transparent button lens 411. Specifically, in FIG. 62, the portion of the cross hatch surrounded by the alternate long and short dash line is made invisible from the player side. As described above, since the operation button 410 includes the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the like, the outside and the back side of the operation button inner decoration member 432 are hidden and concealed It is possible to improve the appearance of the operation button 410 and, consequently, the entire rendering operation unit 400.

  Further, in the effect operation unit 400, the first button decorative portion 411a of the button lens 411 in the operation button 410 extends toward the central axis line CL of the operation button 410 and is arranged in a row in the circumferential direction. The second button inner decorative portion 432g formed on the front plate portion 432b of the operation button inner decorative member 432 disposed on the inner rear side of the operation button 410 extends in an octagonal shape centered on the central axis CL In addition, as shown in FIG. 63, the concavo-convex line of the first button decorative part 411a and the concavo-convex line of the second in-button decorative part 432g intersect with each other, as shown in FIG. The decoration can be shown to the player.

  Further, in the effect operation unit 400, since the first button decorative portion 411a and the second in-button decorative portion 432g are separated in the front-rear direction (the direction in which the central axis CL extends), the first button decorative portion 411a and The second button inner decoration portion 432 g can show the player a geometrical pattern with a deep three-dimensional feel, and can enjoy the decoration including the inside of the operation button 410.

  Furthermore, in the effect operation unit 400, since the first button decorative portion 411a and the second in-button decorative portion 432g are separated in the front-rear direction, the unevenness of the first button decorative portion 411a occurs when the player's eyes move. Since the degree of overlap between the line and the concavo-convex line of the second button inner decorative portion 432g changes, it is possible to show the player a moving decoration, and the player can be entertained.

  As described above, the effect operation unit 400 allows the player to have a three-dimensional decoration with movement by the first button decoration portion 411a of the operation button 410 and the second button decoration portion 432g of the operation button inner decoration member 432. Since it can be shown, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal can be obtained.

  In addition, the rendering operation unit 400 is located in the operation button 410 (inside of the button frame 412) and behind the in-operation button decoration member 432, the operation button left inward decoration substrate 433, the operation button right inward decoration substrate 434, the operation button The upper inner decorative substrate 435 and the lower operating button inner decorative substrate 436 are disposed, and the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surfaces of the upper and lower decorative substrates 435 emit light, thereby emitting the inner decorative member 432 in the operating button 410 It can be decorated. That is, the inside of the operation button 410 can be lighted and decorated by the operation button left inner decoration substrate 433, the operation button right inner decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper inner decoration substrate 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration substrate 436. As shown in FIG. 52, the LEDs mounted on the front of the operation button left inner decoration substrate 433, the operation button right inner decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper inner decoration substrate 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration substrate 436, As viewed from the direction in which the central axis CL extends, the light is transmitted from the light to the outside of the main portion 413a because it is disposed inside the cylindrical main portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410. The light emission decoration can be performed well only in the operation button 410.

  In addition, the rendering operation unit 400 is located behind the second button decoration portion 411b facing from the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 located near the outer periphery of the operation button 410, of the operation button left outside decoration substrate 422 in the decoration substrate unit 420. The first LEDs 423a of the first LED 422a and the operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 are disposed, and the six second button decorative portions 411b of the operation button 410 are lighted by emitting the first LEDs 422a and 423a. Can. As shown in FIG. 52, the first LED 422a of the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 have a cylindrical main portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and a frame unit Since the light from the first LED 422a, 423a does not leak to the inner side of the main body portion 413a or the outer side of the inner cylindrical portion 416d, it is located between the cylindrical inner cylindrical portion 416d in the frame main body 416 of Only the second button decoration portion 411b of the button 410 can be lighted and decorated favorably.

  Furthermore, the rendering operation unit 400 has a second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and an operation button right outer decoration substrate behind the frame side lens 417 facing from the six outer peripheral openings 416b of the frame main body 416 in the frame unit 415. A second LED 423 b of 423 is disposed, and the frame side lens 417 can be decorated to emit light by emitting the second LEDs 422 b and 423 b. The second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 and the second LED 423b of the operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 are between the cylindrical inner cylindrical portion 416d of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 and the outer periphery of the frame main body 416 It is located, and the light from the second LED 422b, 423b does not leak to the inside of the inner cylindrical portion 416d or the outside of the frame main body 416, and only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be well decorated. .

  Further, in the effect operation unit 400, a plurality of frame top lens decoration substrates 437 in the base unit 430 are disposed behind the frame top lenses 418 of the frame unit 415, and a plurality of them are mounted on the front surface of the frame top lens decoration substrates 437 The frame top lens 418 can be decorated to emit light by emitting the LED of From the lower side of the portion of the base unit 430 to which the frame top lens decoration substrate 437 of the unit base 431 is attached, the flat light shielding wall portion 431 c protrudes forward to the rear lower end of the frame top lens 418 The light from the LED of the top lens decorative substrate 437 does not leak to the operation button 410 or the frame side lens 417 side, and only the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 can be favorably decorated by light emission.

[3-4 g. Overall configuration of second embodiment of rendering operation unit]
Next, the second effect operation unit 400A, which is the second embodiment of the effect operation unit 400 described above, will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 64 (a) is a front view of a second effect operation unit different from the effect operation unit of FIGS. 48 to 63 in the embodiment, and FIG. 64 (b) is a right side view of the second effect operation unit. FIG. 65A is a perspective view of the second effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 65B is a perspective view of the second effect operation unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 66 is an explanatory view of the second effect operation unit as viewed from the extending direction of the central axis of the operation button. FIG. 67 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line G-G in FIG. FIG. 68 is a cross-sectional view taken along line HH in FIG. 64 (b). 69 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line II in FIG. 64 (b), and FIG. 69 (b) is an enlarged view of a portion A in (a). FIG. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the second effect operation unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 71 is an exploded perspective view of the second effect operation unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear FIG.

  The second effect operation unit 400A can be attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the dish unit 320 instead of the effect operation unit 400 described above. The second effect operation unit 400A, like the effect operation unit 400, allows the player to perform a pressing operation and can present an effect image to the player. Hereinafter, in the second effect operation unit 400A, the same components as those of the effect operation unit 400 will be described with the same reference numerals.

  The second effect operation unit 400A has a circular outer shape and is formed transparent at the center side excluding the outer peripheral edge, and the operation button 410 which the player can press and operate, and the outer periphery of the operation button 410 surrounds the dish unit cover 326 A frame-shaped frame unit 415 attached to the operation unit attachment portion 326a; a decoration substrate unit 420 disposed behind the operation button 410 and capable of emitting and decorating the outer peripheral edge of the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415 , The second base unit 450 attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415 and the operation button 410 and the decoration board unit 420 attached to the front, and the second base unit 450 visible from the player side through the operation button 410. The door frame side second effect table that can be displayed on the screen and can display effect images And apparatus 460A, a buffer unit 510 which is attached to the lower surface of the second performance display device 460A door frame side, and a.

  In addition, the second effect operation unit 400A has a surface of the second effect operation unit relay board 515 attached to the right side surface of the door frame side second effect display device 460A in front view, and the surface of the second effect operation unit relay board 515 And a relay board cover 516 attached to the right side surface of the door frame side second effect display device 460A in a front view so as to cover the door frame side second effect display device 460A. The second effect operation unit relay substrate 515 and the relay substrate cover 516 are attached to the right side surface of the projector attachment member 505 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A.

  The second effect operation unit relay substrate 515 includes an operation button left outer decoration substrate 422, an operation button right outer decoration substrate 423, a vibration motor 424, a pressure detection sensor 454, a frame top lens decoration substrate 482, a switching drive motor 492, a projector 500, And, it is for relaying the connection between the rotation detection sensor 507 and the door main body relay board of the door frame base unit 100.

[3-4 g-1. Manual operation button]
The operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 69 to 72 and the like. FIG. 72 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button of the second effect operation unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button of the second effect operation unit disassembled and viewed from the back FIG. The operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A is formed in a circular shape whose diameter is slightly smaller than the height of the dish unit 320 in the vertical direction, and the center side excluding the outer peripheral edge is formed transparent. The operation button 410 has a transparent button lens 411 which is formed in a curved surface (a part of a substantially spherical surface) so that the outer periphery is circular and the center side bulges forward, and the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 It has an annular button frame 412 attached to the front side, and a cylindrical button base 413 attached to the rear side of the button frame 412 so as to sandwich the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. The configuration is substantially the same as that of the operation button 410 of the operation unit 400.

  Specifically, the difference between the operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A and the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 is the pattern of the first button decorative portion 411a of the button lens 411 and the guide boss of the button base 413. The shape of the portion 413c is different.

  Describing in detail, as shown in the figure, the first button decoration portion 411a of the operation button 410 in the second effect operation unit 400A has one vertex on the center side of the button lens 411 in a portion in contact with the inner periphery of the button frame 412. A truss-like pattern in which a plurality of triangles facing one another and a triangle whose one apex is on the opposite side to the center are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction over the entire circumference, and the button lens 411 in the truss-like pattern A rectangular triangle-shaped pattern consisting of a base facing to the center side, a side extending from both ends of the base to the center of the button lens 411, and an oblique side extending from the tip of the side to the center of the base , The hypotenuse of the right triangle pattern, the side extending longer than the right triangle pattern from the center of the base of the truss shaped triangle to the center side of the button lens 411, and the tip of that side And varying isosceles triangle pattern constituted by the side extending to the tip of the hypotenuse of each triangle-shaped pattern, in which is formed.

  That is, the first button decoration portion 411a is configured by a combination of a plurality of triangles. In addition, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, each triangle which comprises the 1st button decoration part 411a has faced the direction from which each surface differs, and is formed in polyhedron shape. Thus, the front surface side of the button lens 411 is formed in a smooth curved surface, while the back surface side is formed in a polyhedron at the portion of the first button decorative portion 411 a, so the first button decorative portion 411 a The thickness of the button lens 411 changes intricately at the part of the point of, and the light passing through this part will be irregularly refracted. Therefore, at the portion of the first button decoration portion 411a, it is possible to show the player a geometrical pattern in which a plurality of triangles are combined, and at the same time, it is possible to make the rear member difficult to see by irregular refraction.

  The guide boss portion 413c of the button base 413 of the second effect operation unit 400A is formed in a cylindrical shape whose rear is open. The guide boss portion 413 c is inserted into the holding hole 451 d of the second base unit 450, and is a button shaft 452 held in the holding hole 451 d of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 inside the cylindrical shape. Is slidably inserted. In the present example, the operation button 410 is mounted so as to be movable back and forth in the front-rear direction by the button shaft 452 of the second base unit 450 inserted from behind into the guide boss portion 413c.

[3-4 g-2. Frame unit]
The frame unit 415 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71 and the like. The frame unit 415 is attached from the front to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326 a of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 so as to surround the outer periphery from the front side of the operation button 410 and decorates the outside of the operation button 410. The frame unit 415 is formed in an outer shape that matches the front end side of the rendering operation unit attachment portion 326a.

  The frame unit 415 of the second effect operation unit 400A has the same configuration as that of the frame unit 415 of the effect operation unit 400, and the same reference numerals are given thereto and detailed description will be omitted.

[3-4 g-3. Decorative substrate unit]
The decoration substrate unit 420 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 57, FIG. 69 to FIG. 71 and the like. The decorative substrate unit 420 is attached to the front surface of the second base unit 450 below the frame unit 415, and can emit and decorate the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. The second effect operation unit 400A can be vibrated.

  The decorative substrate unit 420 includes a C-shaped substrate base 421 whose upper side is opened, and an operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and an operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 attached to the front of the left and right sides of the substrate base 421, respectively. And a motor cover 425 attached to the front of the substrate base 421 so as to cover the front side of the vibration motor 424.

  The decoration substrate unit 420 of the second effect operation unit 400A has the same configuration as the decoration substrate unit 420 of the effect operation unit 400, and the same reference numerals are given and detailed description will be omitted.

[3-4 g-4. Second base unit]
The second base unit 450 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 73 and the like. FIG. 73 is a perspective view of the second base unit of the second rendering operation unit as viewed from the front. The second base unit 450 of the second effect operation unit 400A has the operation button 410 mounted so as to be able to move back and forth, and the door frame side second effect display device 460A is attached and mounted on the rear side of the frame unit 415 It is

  The second base unit 450 has a unit base 451 attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415 and a cylindrical guide boss portion 413c projecting from the front surface of the unit base 451 on the button base 413 of the operation button 410 Operation button spring which inserts four cylindrical cylindrical button shafts 452 which are respectively slidably inserted from the inside and four button shafts 452 are inserted to urge the rear end of the guide boss portion 413c of the operation button 410 forward. (Not shown) and three pressing detection sensors 454 attached to the front of the unit base 451 and detecting three detection pieces 413 d of the button base 413 of the operation button 410.

  The unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 includes an annular main body 451a, a cover 451b which protrudes hemispherically from the inner peripheral edge of the main body 451a, and a vertical direction with respect to the front surface of the main body 451a. A through hole 451c which penetrates the cover portion 451b back and forth in a substantially rectangular shape extending up and down when viewed, four holding holes 451d which are recessed backward from the front surface of the main portion 451a, and a main portion 451a An upper bearing 451e recessed in a semicircle (U-shape) from the front to the rear in the upper part of the upper part, and a semicircle coaxial with the upper bearing 451e from the front to the rear in the lower part of the main body 451a The lower bearing portion 451f recessed in a (U-shape) and the upper front surface of the main body portion 451a are formed on the left and right sides of the upper bearing portion 451e, and the screen unit 470 rotates And a, a pair of rotation restricting portion 451g to regulate.

  The annular main body portion 451a of the unit base 451 is formed to have substantially the same size as the substrate base 421 of the decorative substrate unit 420 in which the inner circumference and the outer circumference are formed in a C-shape. The decorative substrate unit 420 is attached to the front of the main body 451a. Cover portion 451b is formed in a size that can be accommodated without contact when screen unit 470 of door frame side second effect display device 460A rotatably attached by upper bearing portion 451e and lower bearing portion 451f rotates. There is. The through hole 451 c is formed in a size that allows the projector 500 of the door frame side second effect display device 460 </ b> A to pass from the rear.

  The four holding holes 451 d of the unit base 451 are formed at four corners on the top, bottom, left, and right of the front surface of the main body 451 a at positions corresponding to the four guide bosses 413 c of the button base 413 of the operation button 410. The inner diameter of the holding hole 451d is larger than the outer diameter of the guide boss portion 413c, and the guide boss portion 413c can be inserted. In the four holding holes 451 d, a button shaft 452 is attached coaxially with the central axis. The front end of the button shaft 452 attached to the holding hole 451 d protrudes more forward than the front surface of the main body 451 a. By inserting the button shaft 452 attached to the holding hole 451d into the cylindrical guide boss portion 413c of the operation button 410, the operation button 410 can be attached slidably in the front-rear direction via the guide boss portion 413c. Can.

  The upper left holding hole 451 d of the four holding holes 451 d is counterclockwise around the center of the unit base 451 from the vertically extending center line passing through the center of the unit base 451 (the center of the operation button 410). It is formed at a position rotated about 30 degrees in the direction. The holding hole 451 d on the upper right side of the four holding holes 451 d is clockwise with respect to the center of the unit base 451 from the vertically extending center line passing through the center of the unit base 451 (center of the operation button 410). It is formed at a position rotated about 47 degrees in the direction of. On the other hand, among the four holding holes 451 d, the two holding holes 451 d disposed on the lower side are respectively formed at positions opposite to the center of the unit base 451 with respect to the upper two holding holes 451 d. .

  In addition, operation button springs (not shown) are respectively inserted into the four holding holes 451 d, and the front ends of these operation button springs abut on the rear ends of the guide boss portions 413 c, whereby the operation buttons are formed via the guide boss portions 413 c. The 410 is urged forward.

  The upper bearing portion 451 e and the lower bearing portion 451 f of the unit base 451 are formed in a U-shape in which the front is opened and the rear extends. The upper bearing portion 451 e and the lower bearing portion 451 f are coaxially located at the center of the portion extending in a semicircular arc shape. The upper bearing portion 451 e and the lower bearing portion 451 f are inserted with the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 of the door frame side second effect display device 460 A from the front, and then the upper bearing member 480 and the lower bearing member 485 from the front side. Can be rotatably supported on the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A by being attached to the front surface of the main body 451a.

  The front surface of each of the pair of rotation restricting portions 451g of the unit base 451 passes through the central axis of the semicircular portion of the upper bearing portion 451e whose extension line (face) is recessed rearward in a U shape. It is formed in the same manner, and is separated in the circumferential direction at a predetermined angle around the central axis. The pair of rotation restricting portions 451 g restricts the rotation range of the screen unit 470 by the abutment of the stopper 475 b of the operating gear member 475 in the screen unit 470 in a state assembled to the second effect operation unit 400A. There is. In the present embodiment, the rotation range of the screen unit 470 is restricted to an angle range of 90 degrees by the pair of rotation restricting portions 451g.

  Although not shown, magnets are embedded in the pair of rotation restricting portions 451g and magnetically contact the iron plate attached to the stopper 475b to abut the rotation restricting portions 451g. The stopper 475b is made difficult to separate from the rotation restricting portion 451g. Therefore, in the screen unit 470, the magnet in the rotation restricting portion 451g and the iron plate of the stopper 475b cause the main screen 471 to face forward or the sub screen 472 to face forward. The screen unit 470 can be held in any of the position states, and the movement by which the screen unit 470 tries to rotate is suppressed by the pressing operation of the operation button 410 or the vibration by the vibration motor 424 etc. The effect image by the second effect display device 460A can be enjoyed in a good state.

  The three pressing detection sensors 454 are attached to the front surface of the main body 451 a of the unit base 451 at a position corresponding to the three detection pieces 413 d of the button base 413 in the operation button 410. More specifically, in the front of the main body 451a of the unit base 451, one of the three pressure detection sensors 454 remains on the lower left side of the upper left holding hole 451d and the other on the lower right side of the upper right holding hole 451d One of them is attached to the lower right side of the lower left holding hole 451d. The three pressure detection sensors 454 are attached at substantially equal intervals circumferentially around the center of the unit base 451. These three pressure detection sensors 454 can detect three detection strips 413 d of the operation button 410.

[3-4 g-5. Door frame side second effect display device]
The door frame side second effect display device 460A of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 70, FIG. 71 and the like. The door frame side second effect display device 460A is attached to the second base unit 450 and can show the effect image to the player through the transparent portion of the operation button 410. The door frame side second effect display device 460A has a screen unit 470 rotatably mounted around an axis extending vertically by the upper bearing 451e and the lower bearing 451f of the second base unit 450, and a second base An upper bearing member 480 attached to the upper front surface of the unit 450 and rotatably mounted on the upper side of the screen unit 470 in cooperation with the second base unit 450; and attached to the lower front surface of the second base unit 450 And a lower bearing member 485 rotatably mounted on the lower side of the screen unit 470 in cooperation with the second base unit 450.

  In the door frame side second effect display device 460A, the screen unit 470 is rotationally driven, and the rotation drive unit 490 attached to the upper part of the second base unit 450 and the cover portion 451b of the second base unit 450. A projector 500 capable of projecting and displaying an effect image on the screen unit 470 from behind and mounted is mounted on the rear surface of the unit base 451 so as to cover the cover portion 451b of the second base unit 450 from the rear side. Mounted so as to cover the actuating gear member 475 of the screen unit 470 from the top on the left side in a front view of the box-like projector mounting member 505 open at the front and the rotary drive unit 490 at the top of the second base unit 450 Top cover 506 and the top And two rotation detecting sensor 507 for detecting the rotational position of the screen unit 470 is attached to the bar 506 (rotational position), and a.

[3-4 g-5 a. Screen unit]
The screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 70, FIG. 71 and the like. The screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A is rotatably attached to the second base unit 450 about an axis extending up and down, and the effect image is projected from the projector 500, The effect image can be displayed (projected) so as to be visible from the player.

  The screen unit 470 is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape, and has a milky white light transmitting main screen 471 and a disk shape whose one end side in the axial direction of the main screen 471 is a part of the outer periphery, and the central portion is an axis A milky-white, translucent sub-screen 472 that curves to bulge outward in a direction, and a cylindrical shape that protrudes outward in a direction perpendicular to the axial direction from the axial center of both ends of the main screen 471 The upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474, and the actuating gear member 475 attached to the tip of the upper shaft member 473 and having gear teeth 475a formed over substantially a half of the outer periphery, and the subscreen 472 Sub-screen decoration member 476 (see FIG. 74 and FIG. 75 etc.) which is formed in the shape of a relief that imitates a predetermined character (dot) to be The sub screen decoration substrate 477 (see FIG. 75 etc.) mounted on the back side of the 472 and having a plurality of LEDs 477a mounted on the side facing the sub screen 472 and the side opposite to the sub screen 472 of the main screen 471 And a semicircular arc-shaped peripheral decoration member 478 extending short from the end of the main screen 471 toward the central axis of the main screen 471.

  The semi-cylindrical main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 has a radius smaller than the inner diameter of the annular main body 451 a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450. The main screen 471 is formed such that its axial length is about 4/3 times as large as the semi-cylindrical radius. The main screen 471 is decorated so that both axial ends are bordered by the peripheral decoration 472 a of the sub screen 472 and the peripheral decoration member 478.

  The sub screen 472 is formed in a circular shape whose outer shape matches the radius of the semi-cylindrical main screen 471 when viewed from the direction in which the central axis extends (see FIG. 74 (b)). . The sub screen 472 is formed in an annular shape with a predetermined width from the outer periphery to the center side, and closes the inside of the peripheral decorative portion 472a and the peripheral decorative portion 472a in which a plurality of quadrangular pyramidal concavities and convexities are arranged in the circumferential direction. And a curved surface general screen portion 472b. The peripheral decoration portion 472a of the sub screen 472 is formed in a truncated cone shape so that the inner peripheral side protrudes in a direction away from the main screen 471. The screen general portion 472 b bulges in a spherical shape having a radius larger than the radius of the semi-cylindrical main screen 471 in a direction away from the main screen 471. The screen general portion 472b of the sub screen 472 is formed with a through hole, and the sub screen decoration member 476 is attached to close the hole.

  The upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 are rotatably inserted from the front into the upper bearing 451 e and the lower bearing 451 f of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450, respectively.

  The actuating gear member 475 is engaged with the second transmission gear 495 of the rotational drive unit 490 and protrudes outward from one of the gear teeth 475a formed substantially along the circumference and the circumferential end of the gear tooth 475a. A stopper 475b is provided, and a detection piece 475c projecting outward in the form of a flat plate from the side opposite to the stopper 475b at the circumferential end of the gear tooth 475a. The stopper 475 b of the operation gear member 475 is located in the recess 481 a of the upper bearing member 480 which is recessed in a circular arc centering on the axis of the upper shaft member 473 in the state assembled to the second rendering operation unit 400A. The rotation range of the screen unit 470 is restricted by coming into contact with the pair of rotation restriction parts 451g of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 located at both ends in the concave part 481a.

  Although not shown in detail, an iron plate is attached to a portion of the stopper 475b in contact with the rotation restricting portion 451g, and the iron plate can be magnetically attached to a magnet embedded in the rotation restricting portion 451g. It is supposed to be.

  The screen unit 470 can be pivoted between a first position where the main screen 471 is directed forward and a second position where the sub screen 472 is directed forward. The detection piece 475 c is detected by a rotation detection sensor 507 attached to the upper cover 506.

  The sub screen decoration member 476 is attached to the screen general portion 472 b of the sub screen 472. The sub screen decoration member 476 is formed in a relief shape imitating a skull by a transparent member, and since the plate thickness is complexly changed, transmitted light is irregularly refracted in a complex manner, and the rear is viewed It is difficult. In addition, although detailed illustration is abbreviate | omitted, the character of "PUSH" is formed in the relief which imitated the subscreen decorative member 476.

  The sub screen decoration substrate 477 is attached on the back side of the sub screen 472 so that a gap is formed between the sub screen 472 and the sub screen 472, and a plurality of LEDs 477 a are provided on the front side (the side facing the sub screen 472). Has been implemented. The outer surface of the sub screen decorative substrate 477 is smaller than that of the sub screen decorative member 476, and its surface is white. By emitting the LED 477a of the sub screen decoration substrate 477, the sub screen decoration member 476 and the sub screen 472 can be lighted and decorated. More specifically, the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 can cause the LED 477a to emit light, thereby strongly emitting and decorating the "eye" portion of the skull and the character portion of "PUSH".

  Further, since the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 is disposed relatively close to the sub-screen 472 and does not have a member for diffusing light between the sub-screen 472 and the sub-screen 472, the LED 477 a emits light. , And the point light source of the LED 477a can be recognized by the player. Further, the sub screen decoration substrate 477 can block the light from the projector 500. Therefore, the projector 500 can cause the sub screen 472 to project the shadow of the sub screen decoration substrate 477.

  The peripheral decorative member 478 is formed in the same shape as a part of the peripheral decorative portion 472a of the sub screen 472. Similar to the peripheral decorative portion 472a, a plurality of quadrangular pyramidal concavities and convexities are arranged in the circumferential direction of the arc. .

  As described above, the screen unit 470 includes two different screens such as the main screen 471 and the sub screen 472. The main screen 471 is for projecting the effect image from the projector 500 over the entire surface of the semi-cylindrical shape, and is intended to display the effect image which is noticed by the player by the projection from the projector 500. On the other hand, the subscreen 472 is a narrow area where the effect image from the projector 500 forms the periphery of the central subscreen decoration member 476 by the presence of the subscreen decoration substrate 477 in the center on the back side (narrower than the main screen 471). Of the subscreen decoration member 476 and pressing the operation button 410 to the player by the light emission decoration of the subscreen decoration member 476 using the LED 477a. The purpose is to

[3-4 g-5 b. Upper bearing member and lower bearing member]
The upper bearing member 480 and the lower bearing member 485 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 70 and 71. The upper bearing member 480 and the lower bearing member 485 close the front side of the upper bearing portion 451 e and the lower bearing portion 451 f which are open forward of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450. It is attached to the front of 451a. In the state where the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 of the screen unit 470 are inserted from the front into the upper bearing portion 451 e and the lower bearing portion 451 f of the unit base 451 The upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 can be rotatably attached to the second base unit 450 by being attached to the front surface of the unit base 451.

  The upper bearing member 480 is mounted on the upper portion of the main body 451a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 so as to close the front side of the upper bearing portion 451e whose front side is open, and a bearing member And a frame top lens decoration substrate 482 attached to the upper front surface of 481. The bearing member 481 has a recessed portion 481 a which is recessed in a circular arc shape from the rear surface to the front so that the center in the left-right direction is deepest. The recessed portion 481a of the bearing member 481 in the upper bearing member 480 is recessed in an arc shape centered on the axis of the upper shaft member 473 of the screen unit 470 in a state assembled to the second rendering operation unit 400A. The stopper 475b of the actuating gear member 475 in the unit 470 is inserted and disposed, and the pair of rotation restricting portions 451g of the unit base 451 is located at both ends of the arc of the recess 481a. The arc-shaped recessed portion 481a allows the stopper 475b of the actuating gear member 475 to rotate favorably between the pair of rotation restricting portions 451g.

  The frame top lens decorative substrate 482 of the upper bearing member 480 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface side, and is located behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 in a state assembled to the second rendering operation unit 400A ing. Thus, by emitting the LED of the frame top lens decoration substrate 482, the frame top lens 418 can be decorated to emit light.

  The lower bearing member 485 is formed substantially in a flat plate shape, and is attached to the front surface of the main body 451 a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 so as to close the front of the lower bearing portion 451 f. The lower shaft member 474 is attached to the front surface of the unit base 451 by inserting the lower shaft member 474 of the screen unit 470 into the lower bearing portion 451 f of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450. It can be mounted rotatably.

[3-4 g-5 c. Rotary drive unit]
The pivot drive unit 490 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 70 and 71. The rotation drive unit 490 is attached to the upper surface of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450, and can rotate the screen unit 470. The rotary drive unit 490 is mounted on the upper surface of the unit base 451 and has a hollow unit case 491 inside, and the switching drive motor 492 mounted on the lower surface of the unit case 491 and having a rotary shaft protruding into the unit case 491 A spur gear-like drive gear (not shown) fixed to the rotation shaft of the switching drive motor, and a spur gear-like first gear engaged with the drive gear and rotatably mounted in the unit case 491 The transmission gear (not shown) and the first transmission gear are meshed with the gear teeth 475a of the operation gear member 475 of the screen unit 470 and rotatably mounted in the unit case 491. And a second transmission gear 495 in the form of a spur gear.

  The second transmission gear 495 meshes with the gear teeth 475 a of the actuating gear member 475 in the screen unit 470 in a state where the rotational drive unit 490 is assembled to the second rendering operation unit 400A. The rotational drive unit 490 rotates the switching drive motor 492 to rotate the screen unit 470 back and forth around the axis via the drive gear, the first transmission gear, the second transmission gear 495, and the gear teeth 475a. It can be turned.

[3-4 g-5 d. projector]
The projector 500 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 70, FIG. 71 and the like. The projector 500 is disposed in the hemispherical cover portion 451 b of the unit base 451 in the second base unit 450, and is attached to the rear side of the unit base 451 via the projector attachment member 505. The projector 500 can project and display the effect image on the main screen 471 or the sub screen 472 by emitting the effect image toward the main screen 471 or the sub screen 472 of the screen unit 470.

  The projector 500 includes a cube-shaped projector main body 501 attached to the projector attachment member 505, and a lens portion 502 projecting forward in a cylindrical shape from the projector main body 501 and irradiating the effect image forward from the front end.

  In the projector 500, the rear portion of the projector main body 501 is attached to the projector attachment member 505, and the lens portion 502 and the projector main body 501 pass through the through hole 451c of the unit base 451 from the rear side and are disposed in the cover portion 451b. Mounted as.

  The projector 500 can project the effect image over substantially the front of the main screen 471 or the sub screen 472 of the screen unit 470, and can project and display a still image or a moving image as the effect image. The projector 500 is a commercially available liquid crystal projector and has an autofocus function.

[3-4 g-5 e. Projector mounting member]
The projector attachment member 505 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 70, FIG. 71 and the like. The projector attachment member 505 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the projector 500 is attached to the inside and attached to the rear side of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450. The projector attachment member 505 can be attached to the rear side of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450, thereby covering the cover portion 451b of the unit base 451 and the rear side of the projector 500.

  The projector mounting member 505 has a bottom wall extending in the horizontal direction and a rear wall extending in the vertical direction, and the projector 500 can be mounted in an inclined state so as to coincide with the inclination of the operation button 410 . The rear wall of the projector attachment member 505 is formed with a plurality of slits 505 a penetrating in the front and rear direction, and the heat released from the projector 500 can be discharged to the outside through the slits 505 a.

  A second effect operation unit relay substrate 515 and a relay substrate cover 516 are attached to the right side surface of the projector attachment member 505 in a front view.

[3-4 g-5 f. Upper cover and rotation detection sensor]
The upper cover 506 and the rotation detection sensor 507 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 70, FIG. 71, and the like. The upper cover 506 is attached to the upper surface of the main body 451 a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 so as to cover the upper side of the operation gear member 475 of the screen unit 470. The rotation detection sensor 507 is for detecting the rotation position of the screen unit 470, and two rotation detection sensors 507 are attached to the lower surface of the upper cover 506 in a state of being separated from each other.

  Although not shown in detail, the two rotation detection sensors 507 are mounted at positions separated by a rotational angle of 90 degrees in the circumferential direction around the rotation axis of the screen unit 470, and the operating gear in the screen unit 470 The detection piece 475c of the member 475 can be detected. Specifically, the two rotation detection sensors 507 have a detection piece 475c at a first position where the main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 faces the front, and a second position where the sub screen 472 faces the front. The time detection piece 475c can be detected. The rotational drive of the switching drive motor 492 of the rotational drive unit 490 is controlled based on the detection signal of the detection piece 475 c by these two rotation detection sensors 507.

[3-4 g-6. Buffer unit]
The buffer unit 510 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 70 and 71. The buffer unit 510 is attached to the lower surface of the door frame side second effect display device 460A, and mitigates an impact when the second effect operation unit 400A is hit from above, and the plate unit cover in the plate unit 320 It is transmitted to the bottom plate portion 326i of 326.

  The buffer unit 510 is in contact with the elastically deformable flat buffer member 511 which is in contact with the lower surface of the projector attachment member 505 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A, and the lower surface of the buffer member 511. And a buffer base 512 mounted so as to be relatively close to the lower surface of the projector mounting member 505.

  The buffer base 512 of the buffer unit 510 has a flat plate-like main body portion 512a that abuts on the lower surface of the buffer member 511, and leg portions protruding downward from both left and right sides of the main body portion 512a in a front view And 512b. The leg portion 512 b of the buffer base 512 is in contact with the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326 i of the pan unit cover 326 in the pan unit 320 when assembled to the door frame 3.

  In the buffer unit 510, the projector mounting member 505 attached to the base unit 430 compresses the buffer member 511 in the buffer unit 510 when the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415 are strongly pressed downward or hit down. Move down to The shock absorbing member 511 is compressed to absorb an impact. Then, when the projector mounting member 505 is further moved downward, the lower surface of the projector mounting member 505 abuts on the upper surface side of the main body 512 a of the buffer base 512. Since a gap is formed between the main body portion 512a and the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the plate unit cover 326 by the left and right leg pieces 512b, the projector attachment member in contact with the upper surface side of the main body portion 512a When the 505 further moves downward, the flat plate-like body portion 512a is bent, and the impact can be absorbed also by the bending of the body portion 512a. Furthermore, when the projector mounting member 505 moves downward, the lower surface of the downwardly bent main body portion 512a abuts the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the pan unit cover 326, and further bending of the body portion 512a is restricted. The impact is transmitted to the dish unit cover 326. Thus, when the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415 are strongly hit from the upper side, the impact can be absorbed in multiple steps, and the attaching portion 416 e of the frame unit 415 and the effect operation unit attaching portion of the plate unit cover 326 Unreasonable force can be avoided from acting on 326a and the like to prevent their breakage.

[3-4 g-7. Operation effect of the second rendering operation unit]
The effects of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 74 to 77 and the like. FIG. 74 (a) is an explanatory view of the second rendering operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends in a state in which the main screen of the screen unit is directed forward; (b) is a sub of the screen unit It is explanatory drawing which looked at the 2nd rendering operation unit from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button is extended in the state which turned the screen forward. FIG. 75 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line JJ in FIG. 74 (a), and FIG. 75 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line K-K in FIG. FIG. 76 (a) is a view of the second effect operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends with the main screen directed forward and is hidden by the first button decoration portion or button frame of the operation button. It is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which is going, and (b) shows the site | part which it is going to hide by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, button frame, etc. in sectional drawing of the 2nd rendering operation unit of the state of (a). FIG. FIG. 77 (a) is a view of the second effect operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends with the sub screen directed forward and is hidden by the first button decoration portion or button frame of the operation button. It is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which is going, and (b) shows the site | part which it is going to hide by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, button frame, etc. in sectional drawing of the 2nd rendering operation unit of the state of (a). FIG.

  The second effect operation unit 400A of the present embodiment changes the decoration in the operation button 410, the operation button, or the like in accordance with the game state which changes as the game ball is hit into the game area 5a of the game board 5. The effect image can be displayed in 410 to entertain the player, and the player can operate the operation button 410 to cause the player to participate in the effect presented to the player. is there.

  The second effect operation unit 400A is formed such that the entire height thereof is substantially the same as the height of the lower portion of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3. In addition, the entire width of the second effect operation unit 400 </ b> A is formed to be slightly larger than 1⁄3 of the entire width of the door frame 3. The second effect operation unit 400A is disposed at the center in the left-right direction below the game area 5a (the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110) in a front view.

  In the second effect operation unit 400A, the upper portion of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320. The second effect operation unit 400A, when attached to the dish unit 320, is between the lower end of the leg portion 512b of the buffer base 512 of the buffer unit 510 and the upper surface of the bottom plate 326i of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320. There is a gap in the That is, only the upper part of the second effect operation unit 400A is attached to the plate unit 320, and is attached in a suspended state.

  Further, in the second effect operation unit 400A, the front surface of the frame unit 415 (the surface formed by the inner periphery of the front end of the central opening 416a of the frame main body 416) is parallel to the inclined surface of the front end opening of the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a It is attached to become. Thereby, in the second effect operation unit 400A, the central axis line CL (see FIG. 67) of the transparent operation button 410 bulging forward in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) is a vertical line. At an angle of 63 degrees, it is inclined to move upward as it goes forward. Thus, when the player is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 to play a game using the pachinko machine 1, the head of the player is disposed above the plate unit 320 (second effect operation unit 400A) The central axis line CL of the operation button 410 passes near the head of the player, because the central axis CL of the operation button 410 is located in front of the center of the game area 5a in the game board 5 being played. Therefore, when the player drops his / her line of sight from the game area 5a to the second effect operation unit 400A (the operation button 410), the operation button 410 is as close as possible to the front view (the projection from the direction parallel to the central axis CL). The door frame side second effect display device 460A or the like in the operation button 410 or the operation button 410 can be visually recognized in a good state.

  In the second effect operation unit 400A, the button shafts 452 held in the four holding holes 451d of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 slide on the four cylindrical guide bosses 413c of the operation button 410, respectively. It is inserted in a movable manner and biased forward by an operation button spring (not shown). In the second effect operation unit 400A, in the normal state (the state in which the operation button 410 is not pressed), the front end of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 is the frame unit 415 by the biasing force of the operation button spring. A portion of the rear surface of the frame main body 416 near the central opening 416a.

  In the second effect operation unit 400A, in the normal state, the center side (center axis line CL side) of the inner periphery of the button frame 412 in the operation button 410 goes forward from the central opening 416a of the frame main body 416 in the frame unit 415. It protrudes. In other words, in the transparent button lens 411 bulging forward in a curved surface (a part of the shape of a substantially spherical surface) of the operation button 410, the portion projecting forward from the inner periphery (inner side) of the button frame 412 is , And protrudes forward from the central opening 416a of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 (see FIG. 67 and the like).

  Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the diameter of the central opening 416a of the frame main body 416 in the frame unit 415 is about 15 cm, and (the front end of) the button lens 411 is the frame unit with respect to the central axis CL direction of the operation button 410. It projects about 4 cm forward from the front of 415.

  In the normal state, when the player depresses the operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A, the operation button 410 moves rearward along the central axis CL against the biasing force of the operation button spring. When the rear end of the operation button 410 abuts on the front surface of the main body 451a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450, the backward movement is restricted and the backward movement of the operation button 410 is stopped. When the player presses the operation button 410, the button lens 411 which is bulging forward in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) is pressed.

  The operation button 410 is formed so that the outer diameter is very large compared to the operation button for effect provided in the conventional pachinko machine, and therefore the peripheral edge away from the central portion of the button lens 411 is pressed It is likely to be More specifically, the operation button for effect in the conventional pachinko machine is attached such that the central axis extends substantially parallel to the vertical line, while the operation of the second effect operation unit 400A of this embodiment is performed. Since the central axis CL of the button 410 is attached to be inclined with respect to the vertical line, when the player presses the operation button 410 from the upper side as in the conventional pachinko machine, the button 410 is separated from the central axis CL of the operation button 410 The region will be pressed (see FIG. 61).

  By the way, since the operation button for effect in the conventional pachinko machine is formed on a flat surface on which the player performs the pressing operation, the operation button is enlarged while the portion to be pressed is made flat. When pressing a part out of the center of the operation button, the surface to be pressed is inclined so that the pressed part retreats first, and the operation button can not recede straight, and the operation button There is a possibility that the pressing operation can not be performed.

  On the other hand, in the operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A of the present embodiment, the portion (button lens 411) pressed and operated by the player has a curved surface (a part of a substantially spherical surface) Because the shape of the operation button 410 is pushed away from the center of the operation button 410, the force is dispersed to the entire operation button 410 and the operation button 410 becomes difficult to tilt, and the operation button 410 moves straight backward. can do. Therefore, even if any position on the front side of the operation button 410 is pressed, the operation button 410 can be smoothly retracted without being tilted, so that the pressing operation can be reliably detected, and the operation button 410 is pressed. It is possible to fully enjoy the effects of operation.

  In addition, in the second effect operation unit 400A, the vibration motor 424 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the substrate base 421 in the decoration substrate unit 420, and as described above, the second effect operation unit 400A is suspended. Since only the upper part is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the pan unit cover 326, when the weight 424a is rotated by the vibration motor 424 to generate a vibration, the vibration is generated at the part farthest from the attached part Since it generate | occur | produces, the whole 2nd rendering operation unit 400A can be vibrated large (strongly), and a vibration can be transmitted to the player touching the 2nd rendering operation unit 400A. In addition, since the vibration motor 424 is disposed immediately below the position where the player can easily perform the pressing operation (near the upper portion of the operation button 410), the vibration is strong against the player pressing the operation button 410 Can be transmitted to surprise the player and enjoy the presentation.

  Furthermore, the second effect operation unit 400A is attached to the plate unit cover 326 in a suspended state, and the bottom plate of the projector attachment member 505 and the plate unit cover 326 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A. A buffer unit 510 is disposed between the upper surface of the portion 326i. The buffer unit 510 includes an elastically deformable buffer member 511, and a gap is formed between the main body 512a with which the buffer member 511 is in contact with the upper surface and the bottom plate 326i of the plate unit cover 326. Therefore, when the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is strongly pressed or hit downward, the impact is multistaged by elastic deformation (compression) of the buffer member 511, bending of the main portion 512a of the buffer base 512, or the like. It can be absorbed, and it can be avoided that an unreasonable force acts on the mounting portion 416e of the frame unit 415, the rendering operation unit mounting portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326, etc., and breakage of the second rendering operation unit 400A Can be prevented. Therefore, even when the player presses the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 with a strong force or the like when the player is presented with the effect of pressing the operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A, the operation is performed. Since the button 410 and the second effect operation unit 400A and the like are not damaged, interruption of the game due to the breakage can be avoided, and a decrease in the player's interest can be suppressed, and it is difficult to damage it. It is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the gaming hall side.

  In addition, since the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 pressed and operated by the player is formed in a curved surface (a part of the shape of a substantially spherical surface) projecting forward, compared with the case where it is flat. The strength and the rigidity are high, and even if struck strongly, the impact can be dispersed to the whole button lens 411, and the breakage is difficult.

  Further, in the second effect operation unit 400A, since the button lens 411, the frame side lens 417, and the frame top lens 418 are made of transparent members, the first button decorative portion formed on the back side thereof Decoration by unevenness such as 411a and the second button decoration portion 411b can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) (see FIG. 63). In addition, since the plate thickness is changed and light is complicatedly refracted at the portion where the decoration of the unevenness is formed, it is difficult to visually recognize the rear side through the portion where the decoration of the unevenness is formed .

  Since the second effect operation unit 400A includes the first button decoration portion 411a extending from the inner periphery to the center side of the button frame 412 of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410, a plurality of first button decoration portions 411a It is possible to make the rear difficult to look at the outer peripheral portion of the portion to be the inner side of the button lens 411 by the decoration of the concavities and convexities in which the triangles are combined. Behind the portion where the first button decorative portion 411a is formed (rearward in the central axis line CL direction), the inner peripheral surface of the main portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the door frame side second effect display device A gap between the screen unit 470 and the outer periphery of the screen unit 470 is located, but the outer side or the back side of the screen unit 470 is viewed from the front side (player's side) by the first button decoration portion 411a located in front of the space. Can be obscured. Thereby, even if the door frame side second effect display device 460A is provided in the operation button 410 capable of pressing, deterioration in the appearance of the operation button 410 can be prevented, and the player who saw the operation button 410 can While being able to prevent having a sense of discomfort, the door frame side second effect display device 460A can be disposed without problems in the transparent operation button 410, and the appearance of the operation button 410 can be improved.

  More specifically, the second effect operation unit 400A uses the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, and the button frame 412 of the button lens 411 in the operation button 410 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A. The second base unit 450, the upper shaft member 473, the lower shaft member 474, and the like located on the rear side (back side) outside the outer periphery of the main screen 471, the sub screen 472, etc. It is shaped to be invisible. Specifically, in the first position with the main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 directed forward, the upper and lower outer sides of the main screen 471, the outer left of the peripheral decoration portion 472a of the sub screen 472 and the right of the peripheral decoration member 478 The outer part (in FIG. 76, the part of the cross hatch surrounded by an alternate long and short dash line) is made invisible from the player side.

  On the other hand, in the second position in which the sub screen 472 of the screen unit 470 is directed forward, the portion outside the annular peripheral decoration 472 a of the sub screen 472 (the portion of the cross hatch surrounded by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. ) But from the player side. As described above, since the operation button 410 includes the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the like, it is difficult to see the outside and the back side of the main screen 471 and the sub screen 472. It can be hidden, and the appearance of the operation button 410 and hence the entire second rendering operation unit 400A can be improved.

  In the first position where the main screen 471 faces forward, the screen general part of the sub screen 472 is formed by the first button decorative part 411a of the button lens 411, the second button decorative part 411b, the button frame 412, and the like. 472b and the sub screen decoration member 476, and the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 are obscured (see FIG. 76). As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to notice that the sub screen 472 exists, the main screen 471 can be rotated, etc. Therefore, when the screen unit 470 is rotated and switched from the main screen 471 to the sub screen 472, the operation is performed. A movement beyond the player's expectation in the button 410 can be made to have a strong impact on the player, and the player can be entertained to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, in the second position where the sub screen 472 faces forward, the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft are formed by the first button decoration 411a, the second button decoration 411b, the button frame 412, etc. of the button lens 411. The member 474 is obscured (see FIG. 77). This makes it difficult for the player to notice that the sub screen 472 (the sub screen decoration member 476) can be rotated, thereby increasing the impact when the sub screen 472 (the screen unit 470) is rotated, The player can be entertained.

  In addition, the second effect operation unit 400A is a button lens 411 that can visually recognize the door frame side second effect display device 460A disposed on the rear side of the operation button 410. The door frame side second effect display disposed inside the rear of the operation button 410 while having a polyhedral first button decorative portion 411a combining a plurality of triangular surfaces within a predetermined width range The apparatus 460A is provided with a peripheral decoration portion 472a of a sub screen 472 in which a plurality of square weights are arranged, and a peripheral decoration member 478. Thus, the triangular decoration (first button decoration 411a) disposed on the front side and the quadrilateral decoration (peripheral decoration 472a and the peripheral decoration member 478) disposed on the rear side overlap so as to intersect with each other. This makes it possible to show a complicated geometric pattern to the player, improve the appearance, and suppress the deterioration of the player's interest.

  Further, as described above, since the first button decoration 411a mainly composed of a triangle, and the peripheral decoration 472a mainly consisting of a square and the peripheral decoration member 478 are separated in the front-rear direction, the eyes of the player When the position moves, the degree of overlapping of them changes, so that the geometric pattern that is seen overlapping changes, and it is possible for the player to show the decoration with motion, and the player to make the decoration with a three-dimensional feeling with depth. The player can be entertained.

  Furthermore, in the door frame side second effect display device 460A disposed behind the inside of the operation button 410, the screen unit 470 is rotated by driving the switching drive motor 492 to direct the main screen 471 forward, or a sub screen 472 can be directed forward, and the decoration consisting of a plurality of squares can be changed. More specifically, in the state where the main screen 471 is directed forward, as shown in FIG. 74 (a), the peripheral decorative portion 472a and the peripheral decorative member 478 are separated vertically and extend vertically. The decoration of the geometric pattern is such that the decoration consisting of a plurality of square weights arranged in a row crosses the decoration consisting of a plurality of triangles arranged in an annular ring of the first button decoration part 411a of the button lens 411 It can be shown to the player. On the other hand, when the sub-screen 472 is directed forward, as shown in FIG. 74 (b), the peripheral decoration portion 472a extends in an annular shape, and a decoration consisting of a plurality of square weights arranged in an annular shape. However, it is possible to show the player the decoration of the geometric pattern overlapped with the decoration consisting of a plurality of triangles arranged in an annular shape of the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411. Therefore, by rotating the screen unit 470, the decoration (physical decoration) of the operation button 410 can be changed, so that the player's attention is drawn to the operation button 410 by the change of the decoration, or The change can cause the player to suggest the arrival of a chance or the like, and the player can be entertained to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, the second effect operation unit 400A has a screen (main screen 471 and sub screen 472) having different switchable forms on the door frame side second effect display device 460A provided in the operation button 410. Since the unit 470 and the projector 500 for projecting and displaying the effect image on the screen unit 470 are provided, it is possible to display an effect image which is completely different from the display of the effect image by the liquid crystal display device, and a strong impact on the player Can be entertained. More specifically, the screen unit 470 includes a semi-cylindrical main screen 471 and a disc-shaped sub screen 472 having a sub-screen decorative member 476 in the center in the center, and the centers of the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474. It is provided separately in the circumferential direction of the rotation angle of 90 degrees around the axis.

  Then, in the first position where the main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 is directed forward in the door frame side second effect display device 460A, the semi-cylindrical central axis is positioned to extend in the left-right direction, When viewed from the front, it looks like a rectangle (rectangle) extending vertically (see FIG. 74 (a)). When the effect image is irradiated forward from the projector 500 disposed behind the main screen 471, the effect image is projected on the rear surface of the main screen 471 (see FIG. 75A), and the milky white light transmitting property is obtained. The effect image projected from the front side can be visually recognized through the main screen 471 of FIG. Since the main screen 471 is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape with a smooth surface, the effect image is also curved in a semi-cylindrical shape on the display screen. Thus, while the display screen of the general liquid crystal display device is flat, the display screen of the main screen 471 is curved in a semi-cylindrical shape, so that the conventional display screen appears to the player And the player can be surprised, the player can be made to pay attention to the main screen 471, and the effect image projected and displayed on the main screen 471 can be entertained. be able to.

  On the other hand, in the second position where the sub screen 472 of the screen unit 470 is directed forward, the disk-like central axis substantially coincides with the central axis of the operation button 410, and the circular operation button 410 It appears that the sub screen decoration member 476 imitating a skull is located at the center (see FIG. 74 (b)). In this state, when the effect image is irradiated forward from the projector 500 disposed behind, the effect image is projected on the rear surface of the sub screen 472. By the way, since a flat and opaque subscreen decoration substrate 477 is attached to the back side of the subscreen 472, the effect image (light) emitted from the projector 500 at the portion of the subscreen decoration substrate 477 And the shadow of the subscreen decorative substrate 477 is projected on the central part of the rear surface of the subscreen 472 (see FIG. 75 (b)). Therefore, in the sub screen 472, the effect image from the projector 500 is projected and displayed on the outer peripheral portion excluding the central portion on which the shadow of the sub screen decorative substrate 477 is projected. At this time, when the LED 477a mounted on the front surface of the sub screen decoration substrate 477 is made to emit light, the central portion of the sub screen 472 can be made to emit light by the light, and the sub provided in the center of the sub screen 472 The screen decoration member 476 can be lighted and decorated. In addition, by making the LED 477a of the sub screen decoration substrate 477 emit light, the shadow of the sub screen decoration substrate 477 projected on the rear surface of the sub screen 472 can be obscured by the light from the projector 500. The entire side can be brightly decorated.

  The door frame side second effect display device 460A emits the LED 477a of the sub screen decoration substrate 477 with the sub screen 472 of the screen unit 470 directed forward, and the effect image (moving image) forward from the projector 500. When illuminated, the effect image is displayed on the portion of the sub screen 472 where the shadow of the sub screen decoration substrate 477 is not projected, that is, the portion outside the sub screen decoration member 476 consisting of the decoration imitating a skull The sub screen decoration member 476 which becomes the inner side of the light emitting decoration is emitted by the LED 477 a of the sub screen decoration substrate 477. In this state, the outside of the light emission decoration of the fixed sub screen decoration member 476 is decorated by the effect image (moving image), and a decoration effect which is completely different from the light emission decoration of the decoration member in the conventional pachinko machine While being able to show to a player and giving a strong impact to a player, a player can be made to pay attention to the subscreen 472 strongly. Further, in this state, the light of the LED 477a is brighter (at high brightness) than the brightness of the effect image inside the effect image, and thus a partially high-intensity effect image which can not be achieved by the conventional liquid crystal display device Can be displayed, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted and, at the same time, it is possible to display an effect image that can further entertain the player.

  Further, in the door frame side second effect display device 460A, the screen directed to the front is appropriately rotated in a state in which the effect image is irradiated from the projector 500 forward, and the main screen 471 is changed to the sub screen 472 When the main screen 471 and the sub screen 472 are rotated, the portion located in the projection range of the projector 500 in the main screen 471 and the sub screen 472 is changed. The effect image is projected and displayed. That is, the effect image is displayed so as to straddle the main screen 471 and the sub screen 472. Therefore, when the main screen 471 is slowly changed to the sub screen 472, such a strange visual effect that the peripheral edge decoration portion 472 a and the sub screen decoration member 476 rotate and move on the effect image projected from the projector 500 is It can be shown to the player and can entertain the player.

  Thus, the second effect operation unit 400A includes the first button decoration portion 411a of the operation button 410 and the decoration (the peripheral decoration portion 472a and the peripheral decoration member 478) of the screen unit 470 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A. Since the player can show the player a decoration with a three-dimensional effect by the movement, the player's interest can be strongly attracted and the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal can be obtained.

  In addition, the second effect operation unit 400A can emit light such as an effect image or the like to the front of the sub screen decoration substrate 477 on the front surface of which the LED 477a is mounted in the back of the operation button 410 (inside the button frame 412) The door frame side second effect display device 460A having the projector 500 is provided, and the inside of the operation button 410 can be favorably decorated by the door frame side second effect display device 460A.

  Further, behind the second button decoration portion 411b facing from the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 located near the outer periphery of the second effect operation unit 400A and the operation button 410, the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 in the decoration substrate unit 420 The first LEDs 422a of the first operation button and the first LEDs 423a of the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 are arranged, and the six second button decoration portions 411b of the operation button 410 are caused to emit light by emitting the first LEDs 422a and 423a. be able to. As shown in FIG. 68, the first LED 422a of the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 have a cylindrical main portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and a frame unit Since the light from the first LED 422a, 423a does not leak to the inner side of the main body portion 413a or the outer side of the inner cylindrical portion 416d, it is located between the cylindrical inner cylindrical portion 416d in the frame main body 416 of Only the second button decoration portion 411b of the button 410 can be lighted and decorated favorably.

  Furthermore, the second effect operation unit 400A is located behind the frame side lens 417 facing from the six outer peripheral openings 416b of the frame main body 416 in the frame unit 415, the second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 and the operation button right outside The second LEDs 423 b of the decorative substrate 423 are disposed, and the frame side lens 417 can be decorated to emit light by causing the second LEDs 422 b and 423 b to emit light. The second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 and the second LED 423b of the operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 are between the cylindrical inner cylindrical portion 416d of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 and the outer periphery of the frame main body 416 It is located, and the light from the second LED 422b, 423b does not leak to the inside of the inner cylindrical portion 416d or the outside of the frame main body 416, and only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be well decorated. .

  In the second effect operation unit 400A, the frame top lens decorative substrate 482 of the upper bearing member 480 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A is disposed behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415. By emitting a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the top lens decorative substrate 482, the frame top lens 418 can be favorably decorated with light emission.

  Further, the second effect operation unit 400A has display screens different in form from each other by rotating the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A disposed behind the inside of the operation button 410. The effect image can be displayed by switching to the main screen 471 or the sub screen 472, and the player can be presented with an effect that can not be realized with a conventional pachinko machine in which the shape of the display screen changes (is switched). Can give the player a strong impact and enjoy it.

[3-5. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 78 to 81. Fig. 78 (a) is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the front, and (c) is a rear view It is the perspective view seen from. FIG. 79 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 80 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 81 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line L-L in FIG. 78 (a). The door frame left side unit 530 is a door frame base unit so as to cover the front side of the door frame upper left side decoration substrate 161 and the door frame left side lower decoration substrate 162 (door frame left side decoration substrate 160) above the plate unit 320 It is attached to the front left portion on the left side of the through hole 111 at 100. The door frame left side unit 530 is for decorating the left side of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 in a front view.

  The door frame left side unit 530 includes a vertically extending strip-shaped left unit base 531 attached to the front of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 and a left unit base 531. A transparent strip-shaped left unit diffusion lens member 532 attached to the front, and a translucent unit disposed in front of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 and having a polyhedral decoration at the front end A left unit decorative lens member (not shown) and a left unit mounted on the front upper portion of the left unit base 531 from the front side of the left unit decorative lens member and projecting like a cylindrical frame to the front and extending vertically It is attached to the lower part of the front of the left unit base 531 from the front side of the decorative base 534 and the left unit decorative lens member, and it is on the left unit. To cover the front end side of the left unit decorative lens member from the front side of the left unit upper decoration base 534 and the left unit upper decoration base 534 and the left unit lower decoration base 535 projecting forward in a frame shape shorter than the decoration base 534 A transparent left unit decorative cover 536 mounted on the front side of the left unit base 531 and a plurality of decorative members 537 mounted on the front side of the left unit decorative cover 536.

  The left unit base 531 of the door frame left side unit 530 is formed in a shallow box shape whose rear side is opened, and has a plurality of openings 531 a penetrating in the front and rear directions on the front surface. The plurality of openings 531a have circular holes and rectangular holes extending vertically as shown. The left unit base 531 includes the LEDs 161a and 162a mounted on the front of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 (the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 162) from the plurality of openings 531a. It is attached to the front left side of the door frame base 110 so as to face the front. Each of the openings 531a of the left unit base 531 is formed such that the respective LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 are positioned substantially at the center in the vertical direction when assembled to the door frame 3. The left unit base 531 is formed of an opaque member.

  The left unit diffusion lens member 532 is formed of a transparent member, and is divided up and down into an upper diffusion lens member 532A and a lower diffusion lens member 532B. The left unit diffusion lens member 532 has a square lens 532a in a front view, which corresponds to the circular opening 531a in the left unit base 531, and a square in a front view, which corresponds to a square opening 531a. And a lens unit 532b. In the state where the door frame left side unit 530 is assembled to the door frame 3, the respective LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decoration substrate 160 are positioned immediately after the centers of the circular lens portion 532a and the square lens portion 532b. It is formed.

  The circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 is formed in a convex lens shape with smooth front and rear surfaces. The light from the LEDs 161a and 162a disposed at the rear can be emitted forward in a point-like manner by the circular lens portion 532a. The circular decorative portion of the left unit decorative lens member can be illuminated and decorated by the light irradiated forward from the circular lens portion 532a.

  The square lens portion 532b of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 includes: a central diffuse reflection portion 532c which is recessed rearward in a conical shape at the center of the front surface; and a front diffusion lens portion 532d formed outside the central diffusion reflection portion 532c at the front surface , The input lens portion 532e bulging backward in the form of a curved surface at the center of the rear surface (immediately after the central diffusive reflection portion 532c), and as it moves away from the input lens portion 532e on the outer surface of the rear surface And a front reflector 532 f inclined to move.

  The front diffusion lens portion 532d of the rectangular lens portion 532b is formed of a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves divided in the circumferential direction by a line extending radially around the central diffusion reflection portion 532c. More specifically, in the front surface diffusing lens portion 532d, the groove portion is concaved in a circular arc shape to the rear in the cross-sectional shape when cut along the radial direction, and the mountain portion between the grooves is forward It bulges in an arc shape, and the front surface is formed in a smooth wave shape. Further, the front diffusion lens portion 532d is formed so that the groove portion and the mountain portion are alternately positioned in the circumferential direction, with the radially extending line divided in the circumferential direction as a boundary.

  The front reflection portion 532f of the rectangular lens portion 532b is formed of a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves divided in the circumferential direction by a line extending radially around the input lens portion 532e. The plurality of grooves are recessed in a V shape from the rear to the front, and the deepest portion is formed in an arc shape. The front reflection portion 532 f is formed in a sawtooth shape in which a cross-sectional shape when cut along the radial direction is formed into a triangular shape in which a mountain portion between the grooves is pointed rearwardly. The front reflection portion 532 f is formed such that the groove and the mountain portion move forward as the distance from the center is increased. Further, the front reflection portion 532 f is formed so that the groove portion and the mountain portion are alternately positioned in the circumferential direction, with the radially extending line divided in the circumferential direction as a boundary. The circumferentially dividing radially extending lines coincide with the radially extending dividing lines in the front diffusion lens portion 532 d.

  In the square lens portion 532b, in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3, the corresponding LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decoration substrate 160 are located immediately after the input lens portion 532e.

  In the rectangular lens portion 532b, light irradiated forward from the LEDs 161a and 162a is input from the input lens portion 532e into the rectangular lens portion 532b. Since this input lens portion 532 e is bulging back in a curved surface (convex lens shape), the light spreading forward from the LEDs 161 a and 162 a is refracted so as to advance in parallel in the forward direction. Substantially all can be directed to the conical central diffuse reflector 532c. The light guided to the central diffusive reflector 532c is perpendicular to the axis extending back and forth (parallel to the front surface of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160) by the inclined conical surface of the central diffusive reflector 532c. In the square lens portion 532b, and travels from the center side to the outer side along the front surface. The light reflected by the central diffusive reflector 532c travels from the center side to the outside (in a direction away from the center line of the central diffusive reflector 532c) over the entire thickness in the front-rear direction of the square lens 532b.

  When light reflected inside the square lens portion 532b from the center side to the outside substantially parallel to the front surface of the door frame left side decoration substrate 160 reaches the saw-like front reflection portion 532f, the front reflection portion 532f faces the front Reflect to the side. At this time, since the front reflection portion 532f is inclined so that the rear surface moves forward as the rear surface moves away from the central diffuse reflection portion 532c, the thickness of the square lens portion 532b in the front-rear direction becomes thinner (See Figure 81). As a result, light reflected toward the outside over the entire thickness in the front-rear direction of the square lens portion 532b in the central diffuse reflection portion 532c is sequentially moved forward by the front reflection portion 532f as it goes from the center side to the outside. It can be reflected.

  Then, the light reflected forward by the front reflection portion 532 f is irradiated forward from the square lens portion 532 b through the front diffusion lens portion 532 d. At this time, since the front surface diffusing lens portion 532 d is formed to have a wave-like cross section, it can diffuse light reflected forward by the front reflecting portion 532 f in various directions, and the prismatic lens portion 532 b Light can be emitted to the front (the rear surface of the left unit decorative lens member) substantially uniformly from the front surface of the lens.

  The square lens portion 532b is divided into a plurality of concentrically extending grooves by a plurality of radially extending grooves in the front diffusion lens portion 532d and the front reflecting portion 532f, and then a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves bordering the dividing line. Of the circular arc-shaped grooves are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction, so that light irradiated forward from the front surface of the square lens portion 532b has concentric stripes of light and shade. Light can be avoided, and more uniform light can be emitted forward. Thereby, the multi-faced decorative part in front of the square lens part 532b in the left unit decorative lens member can be lighted and decorated substantially uniformly.

  The left unit decorative lens member (not shown) is formed along the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 536. The left unit decorative lens member is located in front of the circular decorative portion formed in the front position of the circular lens portion 532 a of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 and the front of the square lens portion 532 b of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 And a multifaceted decorative part formed on the part. The circular decorative portion is formed in a shape in which a plurality of triangular ribs are provided in the circumferential direction on the outer periphery of a cylindrical portion whose front surface is depressed and which extends short in the front and back direction. In the multifaceted decorative part, a plurality of quadrangular pyramidal parts are arranged in the vertical direction on the front of a rectangular solid extending in the vertical direction, and a plurality of triangular polyhedrons are arranged in the vertical direction on the left and right sides of the rectangular solid. It is formed in the same shape. The circular decorative portion and the multi-sided decorative portion are formed in the same shape as the circular decorative portion 561 a and the multi-sided decorative portion 561 b of the right unit decorative lens member 561 in the door frame right side unit 550.

  The left unit decorative lens member can be viewed from the front side (player's side) through the transparent left unit decorative cover 536. In the left unit decorative lens member, the multi-faced decorative portion is moved forward from the square lens portion 532 b of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 by the light irradiated forward from the circular lens portion 532 a of the left unit diffusion lens member 532. Each of the lights is decorated by light emitted.

  The left unit upper decoration base 534 is a rectangular shape extending in the vertical direction in a front view, and is formed in a square tube shape extending in the front and rear direction. In the left unit upper decoration base 534, a portion constituting the lower surface in the outer periphery is inclined so as to protrude downward as going from the front end side to the rear end side, and the lower portion of the portion penetrates forward and backward. The left unit upper decoration base 534 is formed of an opaque member.

  The left unit lower decorative base 535 is formed in a U-shape which is opened upward in a front view. The left unit lower decoration base 535 is inclined from the substantially vertical center at the front end to the rear end so that the upper side moves upward as it goes upward. The left unit lower decoration base 535 is formed of an opaque member.

  The left unit decorative cover 536 extends up and down over the entire height of the door frame left side unit 530. The left unit decorative cover 536 is bent so that the middle portion in the vertical direction is recessed rearward, and the lower portion of the left unit upper decorative base 534 is bent backward along the front end of the left unit upper decorative base 534; A V-shaped portion whose upper part is bent backward along the front end of the unit lower decorative base 535 and a lower end of the upper V-shaped portion and an upper end of the lower V-shaped portion are connected And a linear portion.

  The left unit decorative cover 536 is attached at the upper and lower ends to the front surface of the left unit upper decorative base 534 and the front surface of the left unit lower decorative base 535, respectively. The left unit decorative cover 536 is formed of a transparent member, and can visually recognize the left unit decorative lens member disposed on the rear side from the front side.

  The decoration member 537 extends vertically short and is attached to the front of the left unit decorative cover 536 at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. The decoration member 537 is formed of an opaque member.

[3-6. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 82 to 86 and the like. Fig.82 (a) is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit seen from the front, and (c) is a rear view of the door frame right side unit It is the perspective view seen from. FIG. 83 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 84 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 85 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line M-M in FIG. FIG. 86 (a) is a cross-sectional view cut along the line NN in FIG. 82 (a), and FIG. 86 (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the line O-O in FIG. 82 (a). The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the right side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320.

  The door frame right side unit 550 is a box-shaped right unit base 551 mounted on the front of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the through hole 111 in a front view and a front surface of the right unit base 551. Is mounted on the front of the right unit base 551 on the front side of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 attached to the front of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 and extends in the vertical and longitudinal directions A transparent flat right unit left diffusion lens member 553, a sheet-like right unit left decoration member 554 attached to the left side of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and being decorated, a right unit left decoration member A transparent flat right unit left cover mounted on the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 so as to cover the left side of the 554. Includes a over 555, the.

  Further, the door frame right side unit 550 is a front side of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 and a right side and a right unit left diffusion lens from a front view center on a front surface of the right unit base 551 in front view right side A transparent flat light unit right diffusion lens member 556 attached to the member 553 and extending in the vertical and longitudinal directions and a right unit side of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 are decorated and decorated A sheet-shaped right unit right decoration member 557, and a transparent flat plate right unit right cover and 558 attached to the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 so as to cover the right side of the right unit right decoration member 557; There is.

  Further, the door frame right side unit 550 is disposed between the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556, and extends vertically and longitudinally with the front and right opened. A box-shaped non-light transmitting right unit left light shielding member 559 and a light shielding attached to the left side of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 so as to close the open right side of the right unit left light shielding member 559 And a right unit right light shielding member 560 in the form of a flat plate.

  In addition, the door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the front end of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556, and has a polyhedral decoration at the front end. The unit decorative lens member 561 is attached to the front of the right unit base 551 so as to cover the left and right sides of the right unit decorative lens member 561 and the front end sides of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 A frame-shaped right unit decorative base 562 penetrating back and forth, a transparent right unit cover 563 mounted on the front side of the right unit decorative base 562 to close the front end opening of the right unit decorative base 562, a right unit cover And a plurality of decorative members 564 mounted on the front side of 563. Although not shown, the door frame right side unit 550 is attached to penetrate the right unit base 551 up and down, and the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100 and the door frame of the door frame top unit 570 A connection cable for connecting the top unit relay substrate 589 is provided.

  The right unit base 551 of the door frame right side unit 550 is a rectangular shape which is elongated in the vertical direction in a front view, extends in a short and short rectangular tube shape, and is formed in a box shape closed near the center in the longitudinal direction. It is done. The right unit base 551 is formed of an opaque member.

  The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is formed in the shape of a vertically extending band plate. The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is mounted at the center in the left-right direction at the front in the left-right direction with a plurality of left LEDs 552a mounted on the left from the center in the left-right direction at the front And a plurality of middle LEDs 552c. The left LED 552 a of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 is for emitting and decorating the right unit left decoration member 554 via the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. The right LED 552 b is for emitting and decorating the right unit right decoration member 557 through the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The middle LED 552 c is for emitting and decorating the right unit decorative lens member 561.

  Both front and rear sides of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 are formed in white. The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is divided up and down into an upper door frame right side upper decorative substrate 552A and a lower door frame right side lower decorative substrate 552B. Although illustration is omitted, the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 552B is connected to the door main body relay substrate of the door frame base unit 100, and the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 552A is a door frame right side lower decorative substrate 552B It is connected to the.

  The right unit left diffusion lens member 553 includes: a flat main body portion 553a extending in the vertical direction and the front and rear direction; and a rear wall portion 553b projecting short from the rear side of the main body portion 553a to the right The right unit left decorative member is notched in a rectangular shape from the right end side in the front view of the rear wall portion 553b to the left, and is formed in plural in the vertical direction at predetermined intervals An accommodation recess 553d which is recessed so as to be able to accommodate 554, an input lens portion 553e which protrudes rearward from the rear end face of the main body portion 553a and which is provided in plural in the vertical direction, and each of And a plurality of side reflectors 553f arranged in the vertical direction so that the input lens portion 553e is at the center in the vertical direction.

  The main portion 553a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 has a shape in a side view in which the upper corner on the front end side of the rectangular shape extending vertically is notched obliquely in a C-chamfered shape, and the lower side goes upward as it goes forward It is formed in the shape which inclines so that it may move to. Further, as shown in FIG. 86, the whole of the main body portion 553a moves with respect to the vertical line on the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 so as to move to the right in front view from the rear end side. Slightly inclined. The front end of the main body portion 553a protrudes forward more than the front end of the door frame left side unit 530 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3.

  The rear wall portion 553 b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and the right end thereof extends to approximately the center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction. The left end of the rear wall 556b of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 abuts on the right end of the rear wall 553b.

  The plurality of notch portions 553c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a portion thereof corresponds to the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552. When assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 faces forward from the plurality of cutouts 553c, and the plurality of middle LEDs 552 c favorably emit the right unit decoration lens member 561 It can be decorated.

  The bottom of the accommodation recess 553 d is formed to be a flat surface, and the shape of the outer periphery substantially matches the outer shape of the right unit left decorative member 554. Thereby, the right unit left decoration member 554 can be accommodated.

  The plurality of input lens portions 553 e are projected rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 553 a at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. Specifically, they are formed substantially at the center in the vertical direction when the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is equally divided into six in the vertical direction. The input lens portion 553 e is, although not shown in detail, recessed toward the front so as to be curved in a spherical shape from the rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion where the vertically extending quadrilateral protrudes backward and the rectangular parallelepiped portion. There is a site. The input lens portions 553 e are respectively located immediately in front of the left LED 552 a of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 in a state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. Thereby, the light from the left LED 552a can be input so as to be widely diffused in the main body 553a.

  A plurality of (six) side surface reflecting portions 553 f are provided in the vertical direction. Each side surface reflection portion 553f is formed of a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves divided in the circumferential direction by radially extending lines centering on the input lens portion 553e. In each of the plurality of concentric circular arc grooves, the surface closer to the input lens portion 553e is inclined with respect to the surface of the main body portion 553a, and the surface farther from the input lens portion 553e is the main body portion It extends perpendicularly to the plane of the surface 553a, and the deepest portion is formed in an arc shape. The side surface reflection portion 553f is formed in a triangular shape whose cross-sectional shape is sharp when cut in the radial direction centering on the input lens portion 553e, with the mountain portion between the grooves facing the center side. , The whole is formed in a saw shape. Further, the side surface reflection portion 553f is formed so that the groove portion and the mountain portion are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction, with the radial lines dividing the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the circumferential direction as boundaries. ing.

  In the right unit left diffusion lens member 553, light emitted forward from the left LED 552 a of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 enters the main portion 553 a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 from the rear surface of the input lens portion 553 e. It is incident. Since the rear end of the input lens portion 553e is curved in a curved shape toward the front, the light from the left LED 552a is refracted so as to be spread by the curved surface, and in the main portion 553a, each input lens portion 553e It spreads radially toward the front centering on the

  The main body portion 553a is slightly inclined with respect to a line extending perpendicularly from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 so that the whole moves toward the right in front view as it goes forward, the door frame The light emitted from the left LED 552a mounted on the front surface of the right side decorative substrate 552 and incident from the input lens portion 553e into the main portion 553a strikes the flat left surface in the main portion 553a. However, direct light from the left LED 552a is not radiated to the outside from the left surface of the main portion 553a due to the incident angle with respect to the left surface of the main portion 553a, but is reflected to the side surface reflecting portion 553f on the inner surface of the left surface. It becomes.

  Then, light incident forward from the input lens portion 553e into the main body portion 553a is reflected leftward in a front view by striking the saw-like side reflection portion 553f, and outward from the left surface of the main body portion 553a. It will be irradiated. Although light is emitted outward (right side in front view) from the right surface (side surface reflection portion 553f) of the main body portion 553a, the right unit left light shielding member 559 disposed on the right side of the main body portion 553a is white. Since it is a member, the left surface of the right unit left light shielding member 559 is brightly illuminated, and indirect light reflected by the right unit left light shielding member 559 is irradiated to the left through the main body portion 553a. . Therefore, from the left surface of the main body portion 553a, the light reflected to the left by the side surface reflection portion 553f in the main body portion 553a and the light emitted from the side surface reflection portion 553f to the right side are left at the left surface of the right unit left light blocking member 559 The light reflected to the left and transmitted through the main body portion 553a is irradiated to the left, so that the right unit left decorative member 554 attached to the left side of the main body portion 553a emits light and decorates with good brightness. it can.

  Further, in the side surface reflection portion 553f, the concentric circular grooves are divided into a plurality of radially extending grooves, and then the concentric circular arc grooves are shifted in the radial direction with the dividing line as a boundary. Are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction, so that light irradiated to the outside (left) from the left surface of the main body portion 553a is prevented from becoming light having concentric stripes and shading. It is possible to irradiate the left with more uniform light. Thus, the right unit left decoration member 554 housed in the housing recess 553 d on the left surface of the main body portion 553 a can emit and decorate substantially uniformly.

  In addition, since the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is formed of a transparent member, the side surface reflection formed on the opposite side from the left side in the front view of the main body portion 553a (the side on which the accommodation recess 553d is formed) A pattern consisting of a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the portion 553f and radially extending lines can be visually recognized. Therefore, when a transparent portion is formed in the right unit left decorative member 554, the pattern of the side reflection portion 553f of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 can be visually recognized through the transparent portion. The side portion can be decorated by the side reflection portion 553f.

  The right unit left decoration member 554 is formed in a thin sheet shape, and the decoration such as the maker logo of the pachinko machine 1 or the logo along the concept of the presentation presented to the player on the game board 5 is translucent Is applied to have. The right unit left cover 555 protects the outer surface of the right unit left decoration member 554 when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550.

  The right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is formed substantially symmetrically with the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and has the same configuration. More specifically, the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 has a flat main body portion 556a extending in the vertical and longitudinal directions, and a rear wall short in a plan view left from the rear side of the main body portion 556a. A portion 556b and a plurality of notches 556c which are cut out in a square shape from the left end side in the front view of the rear wall portion 556b to the right and are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction A front view of the main body portion 556a, an accommodation concave portion 556d recessed so as to be able to accommodate the unit right decorative member 557, an input lens portion 556e projecting backward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 556a A plurality of side surface reflecting portions 556f are disposed in the vertical direction so that each input lens portion 556e is at the center in the vertical direction on the left side.

  The main portion 556a of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 has a shape in a side view, with the upper corner of the front end side of the rectangular shape extending up and down being beveled in a C-chamfered shape and the lower side going upward as it goes forward The outer shape of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is substantially the same as that of the main body portion 553a. Further, as shown in FIG. 86, the whole of the main body portion 556a moves with respect to the vertical line of the front surface of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 so as to move to the left in front view Slightly inclined. The front end of the main body portion 556 a protrudes forward more than the front end of the door frame left side unit 530 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3.

  The rear wall portion 556 b is assembled with the door frame right side unit 550, and the left end thereof extends to approximately the center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction. The right end of the rear wall portion 553b of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 abuts on the left end of the rear wall portion 556b.

  The plurality of cutouts 556c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a part thereof corresponds to the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552. The plurality of cutouts 556 c are formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of cutouts 553 c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. Therefore, in the state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, a square opening which is penetrated back and forth by the notch 553c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the notch 556c of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 The inner LED 552c of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 faces forward from the opening, and the plurality of middle LEDs 552c can favorably emit and decorate the right unit decoration lens member 561.

  The bottom surface of the accommodation recess 556 d is formed to be a flat surface, and the shape of the outer periphery substantially matches the outer shape of the right unit right decoration member 557. Thereby, the right unit right decoration member 557 can be accommodated.

  The plurality of input lens portions 556 e project rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 556 a at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. Specifically, they are formed substantially at the center in the vertical direction when the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is equally divided into six in the vertical direction. The input lens portion 556 e is, although not shown in detail, recessed toward the front so as to be curved in a spherical shape from the rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion where the vertically extending quadrilateral protrudes backward and the rectangular parallelepiped portion There is a site. These input lens portions 556 e are respectively located immediately in front of the right LED 552 b of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 in a state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. Thereby, the light from the right LED 552b can be input so as to be widely diffused in the main body portion 556a.

  A plurality of (six) side reflectors 556 f are provided in the vertical direction. Each side reflecting portion 556f is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves divided in the circumferential direction by a line extending radially around the input lens portion 556e. In each of the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves, the surface closer to the input lens portion 556e is inclined with respect to the surface of the main portion 556a in each groove, and the surface remote from the input lens portion 556e is the main portion It extends perpendicularly to the surface of 556a, and the deepest portion is formed in an arc shape. The side surface reflecting portion 556f is formed in a triangular shape whose cross-sectional shape is sharp when cut in the radial direction centering on the input lens portion 556e such that a mountain portion between the groove and the groove is directed to the center side. , The whole is formed in a saw shape. In addition, the side surface reflecting portion 556f is formed so that the groove portion and the mountain portion are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction, with radial lines dividing the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the circumferential direction. ing.

  In the right unit right diffusion lens member 556, light emitted forward from the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 enters the main portion 556a of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 from the rear surface of the input lens portion 556e. It is incident. Since the rear end of the input lens portion 556e is curved in a curved shape toward the front, the light from the right LED 552b is refracted so as to be spread by the curved surface, and each input lens portion 556e is formed in the main portion 556a. It spreads radially toward the front centering on the

  The main body portion 556a is slightly inclined with respect to a line extending perpendicularly from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 so that the entire body moves to the left in front view as it goes forward, the door frame The light emitted from the right LED 552b mounted on the front surface of the right side decorative substrate 552 and incident from the input lens portion 556e into the main portion 556a strikes the flat right surface in the main portion 556a. However, direct light from the right LED 552b is not radiated from the left surface of the main body 556a to the outside due to the incident angle with respect to the right surface of the main body 556a, but is reflected to the side surface reflecting portion 556f on the inner surface of the right surface. It becomes.

  Then, light incident forward from the input lens portion 556e into the main body portion 556a is reflected to the right in front view by striking the saw-like side reflection portion 556f, and outward from the right surface of the main body portion 556a. It will be irradiated. Although light is emitted outward (left in front view) from the right surface (side surface reflection portion 556f) of the main body portion 556a, the right unit right light shielding member 560 disposed on the left side of the main body portion 556a is white. Since it is a member, the right surface of the right unit right light shielding member 560 is brightly illuminated, and indirect light reflected by the right unit right light shielding member 560 is irradiated to the right through the main body portion 556a. . Therefore, from the right surface of the main body portion 556a, the light reflected to the right by the side surface reflection portion 556f in the main body portion 556a and the light emitted from the side surface reflection portion 556f to the left side Since the light reflected toward and transmitted through the main body portion 556a is irradiated to the right, the right unit right decorative member 557 mounted on the right side of the main body portion 556a can be illuminated and decorated with good brightness. it can.

  Further, in the side surface reflecting portion 556f, the concentric circular grooves are divided by the radially extending plural lines, and then the concentric circular arc grooves are shifted in the radial direction with the dividing line as a boundary to form concentric circular arc grooves. Are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction, so that light irradiated outward (rightward) from the right surface of the main body portion 556a is prevented from becoming light having concentric stripes and shading. Can be emitted to the right with more uniform light. As a result, the right unit right decoration member 557 housed in the housing recess 556 d on the right surface of the main body portion 556 a can be illuminated and decorated substantially uniformly.

  In addition, since the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is formed of a transparent member, the side surface reflection formed on the opposite side from the right side in the front view of the main body portion 556a (the side on which the accommodation recess 556d is formed) A pattern consisting of a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the portion 556f and radially extending lines can be visually recognized. Therefore, when a transparent portion is formed in the right unit right decoration member 557, the pattern of the side reflection portion 556f of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 can be seen through the transparent portion, and the transparent in the right unit right decoration member 557 Parts can be decorated by the side reflectors 556f.

  The right unit right decoration member 557 is formed in a thin sheet shape, and the decoration such as the maker logo of the pachinko machine 1 or the logo along the concept of the presentation presented to the player on the game board 5 is translucent. Is applied to have. The right unit right cover 558 protects the outer surface of the right unit right decoration member 557 in the state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. The right unit right decoration member 557 and the right unit right cover 558 are formed substantially symmetrically with the right unit left decoration member 554 and the right unit left cover 555. Further, the decorations provided to the right unit left decoration member 554 and the right unit right decoration member 557 may be the same decoration or different decorations.

  The right unit left light shielding member 559 is formed in substantially the same shape as the side unit of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 in side view. The right unit left light blocking member 559 is formed in a shallow box shape whose front and right sides are open. The right unit left light shielding member 559 has a flat main body 559a extending in the vertical direction and the front and rear direction, a rear wall 559b short in a plan view right from the rear side of the main body 559a, and a rear A plurality of notches 559c which are cut in a rectangular shape from the right end side in the front view of the wall 559b to the left and are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction and extend from the right surface of the main body 559a to the right And a plurality of flat plate-like reinforcements 559 d extending from the wall 559 b to the front end of the main body 559 a.

  The main unit 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 has a shape in a side view in which the upper corner on the front end side of the vertically extending rectangular is notched obliquely in a C-chamfered shape, and the lower side goes upward It is formed in a shape inclined so as to move, and its outer shape is formed in substantially the same shape as the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the main body portions 553a and 556a of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556.

  The left end of the rear wall 559 b extends to the right more than the approximate center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction when assembled in the door frame right side unit 550. The left surface of the right unit right light shielding member 560 abuts on the right end of the rear wall portion 559b.

  The plurality of cutouts 559c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a part thereof corresponds to the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552. The plurality of cutouts 559 c are formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of cutouts 553 c and 556 c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. Therefore, when assembled in the door frame right side unit 550, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 faces forward from the plurality of notches 559c, and the plurality of middle LEDs 552 c favorably emits the right unit decorative lens member 561. It can be decorated.

  The plurality of reinforcing portions 559d are provided in a pair at a height substantially the same as the width of the left and right, and three pairs of the reinforcing portions 559d are spaced apart by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction. Each set of reinforcing portions 559 d is formed at a position behind the decorative member 564 attached to the right unit cover 563. The plurality of reinforcing portions 559d enhance the overall strength and rigidity of the door frame right side unit 550.

  The right unit right light shielding member 560 has a shape in a side view such that the upper corner on the front end side of the vertically extending square is notched like a C-chamfer and the lower side moves upward as it goes forward It is formed in the shape which inclines, and is formed in the substantially same shape as the main-body part 559a in the right unit left light-shielding member 559. As shown in FIG. The right unit right light shielding member 560, when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, closes the right opening opened to the right of the right unit left light shielding member 559 formed in a shallow box shape.

  The right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are each formed of a white member. The right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are assembled to the door frame right side unit 550 as shown in FIG. 86, and the main unit 559a and the right unit right light shielding member 560 The left diffusion lens member 553 and the main body portions 553a and 556a of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 are disposed in proximity to each other. Thus, the main unit 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are separated in the left-right direction, and form a space extending in the vertical direction and the front-back direction with a predetermined width in the left-right direction. . The light emitted forward from the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 through the space formed between the main unit 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 is the right unit decoration The light is irradiated to the rear side of the lens member 561.

  In addition, the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are formed of non-light transmitting members, and are emitted forward from the left LED 552a, the middle LED 552c, and the right LED 552b in the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 respectively. Left light 552a, right LED 552b, and the right unit left decoration member 554, the right unit right decoration member 557, and the right unit decoration lens member 561, respectively. The light emission decoration can be performed only by the middle LED 552c.

  Furthermore, the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are arranged behind the respective divided spaces because the internal space is divided into four in the vertical direction by the three sets of reinforcing portions 559 d. The light can be prevented from interfering between the spaces by the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 which is located, and a portion located in front of each space of the right unit decoration lens member 561 is , Each can be decorated independently luminous. That is, on the front end side of the door frame right side unit 550, it is possible to divide into plural (four) areas in the vertical direction and emit and decorate each of them independently.

  The right unit decorative lens member 561 is formed along the front end of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 includes a circular decorative portion 561a formed in a circular shape in a front view, and a polyhedral decorative portion 561b extending vertically and having a plurality of polyhedrons formed thereon. The circular decorative portion 561a is formed in a shape in which a plurality of triangular ribs are provided in the circumferential direction on the outer periphery of a cylindrical portion whose front surface is depressed and extends short back and forth. In the multifaceted decorative part 561b, a plurality of quadrangular pyramidal parts are vertically arrayed on the front face of a rectangular solid extending vertically, and a plurality of polyhedrons consisting of a plurality of triangles are vertically arranged on both left and right sides of the rectangular solid part. It is formed in the shape as it was set.

  More specifically, the right unit decorative lens member 561 has a plurality of circular decorative portions 561 a and multi-faced decorative portions 561 b respectively divided into four spaces by three reinforcing portions 559 d of the right unit left light shielding member 559. In the part located forward, in the three parts from the top, the multifaceted decorative part 561b is disposed one by one on each of the upper and lower sides of the circular decorative part 561a disposed at the center in the vertical direction. Only the portion 561 b is formed.

  The right unit decorative lens member 561 is attached to the front end of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the transparent right unit cover 563. The right unit decorative lens member 561 is decorated to emit light by the inner LED 552 c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 disposed at the rear.

  The right unit decoration base 562 is formed in the shape of a cylindrical frame penetrating in the front-rear direction. The right unit decorative base 562 is formed in a shape following the shapes of the front end and the upper end of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative base 562 is formed so as to be able to cover the left and right outer sides near the front end of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 and the left and right sides of the right unit decoration lens member 561. When assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the front end of the right unit decorative lens member 561 slightly protrudes forward from the front end of the right unit decorative base 562. The right unit decorative base 562 is formed of an opaque member.

  The right unit cover 563 is formed to be able to close the front end opening of the right unit decorative base 562. The right unit cover 563 is formed of a transparent member, and can visually recognize the right unit decorative lens member 561 disposed on the rear side from the front side.

  The decoration member 564 extends vertically short and is attached to the front surface of the right unit cover 563 at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. The decoration member 564 is formed of an opaque member. The three decorative members 564 divide the right unit cover 563 (right unit decorative lens member 561) into four in the vertical direction.

  The door frame right side unit 550, when assembled to the door frame 3, projects largely in the form of a plate to the front beyond the door frame left side unit 530, and projects slightly to the front from the front end of the upper plate 321 of the pan unit 320. There is. The door frame right side unit 550 independently separates the right unit left decoration member 554 and the right unit right decoration member 557 provided on the left and right both sides which are protruded and the right unit decoration lens member 561 provided at the front end. Can be made to emit light.

  Since the door frame right side unit 550 is plate-shaped and largely protrudes forward, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on the island facility of the game hall, the door frame right side unit 550 is adjacent to the right with the pachinko machine Can exert an effect like a partition. In this way, it is possible for the player playing a game with the pachinko machine 1 to feel as if playing in the private room, and to play the game in a relaxed atmosphere without disturbing other players around. Can.

  In addition, since the door frame right side unit 550 largely protrudes forward, in the game hall where the pachinko machines 1 are installed side by side, even if it is not located in front of the pachinko machine 1, an island facility The pachinko machine 1 can be made visible in the game hall in which a large number of pachinko machines are arranged in a row. Therefore, when the right unit left decoration member 554 and the right unit right decoration member 557 on the left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550 are lighted and decorated, the present from a distance even if not positioned near the front of the pachinko machine 1 The presence of the pachinko machine 1 can be notified, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made highly appealing to the player.

  Furthermore, in the door frame right side unit 550, when a problem such as ball clogging or an error occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens By making the members 561 and the like emit light and decorate in a unique manner, it is possible to immediately notify the staff in the game hall of the occurrence of the problem and make it possible to quickly respond to the problem. As a result, the interruption of the game by the player can be solved at an early stage, and the player can feel frustrated and suppress the decrease in the interest for the game.

[3-7. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 87 to 90 and the like. Fig. 87 (a) is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the front, and (c) is a door frame top unit as viewed from the back It is a perspective view. FIG. 88 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 89 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the rear. 90 is a cross-sectional view of FIG. 87 taken along the line PP. The door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550.

  The door frame top unit 570 is mounted on the left and right sides of the central base 571 at the center of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100, which is attached to the center of the through hole 111 above the through hole 111 A pair of side bases 572 attached to the front of the door frame base 110, a pair of upper speakers 573 attached respectively to the fronts of the pair of side bases 572 A pair of openings 574a penetrating in the front and back at a front position of a pair of upper speakers 573 in a box shape having an open rear, and from a position closer to the center in the lateral direction than the pair of openings 574a A plurality of (three on the left and three on the left and three on the left and right sides) which extend in the longitudinal direction and penetrate in the front-rear direction and are separated vertically. A unit body 574 having a pair 574b and attached to the front of the center base 571 and the pair of side bases 572 and a pair of upper speakers 573 are disposed on the front side and close the pair of openings 574a. And a speaker cover 575 made of punching metal mounted on the rear side of the unit body 574.

  Further, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 574 at the center in the lateral direction of the unit main body 574 and is attached to the top middle decorative member 576 having translucency and the rear side of the top middle decorative member 576 A door frame top middle decorative substrate 577 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front of the cage, and a plurality of slits 574b respectively attached to the front of the unit main body 574 and both left and right ends of the top middle decorative member 576 A plurality of transparent plate-shaped light guide members 578 (three each in the left and right directions) extending from near the opening 574a to near the left and right ends of the unit body 574 and the top middle decoration member 576 in the front of the unit body 574 Top left decorative lens member 579 attached to the left and right sides respectively and covering the front surface of the plurality (three) of light guide members 578 The top right decorative lens member 580 and the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 are respectively attached to the front of the unit body 574 from the front side and the opening 574a from the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 The top middle left decoration member 581 and the top middle right decoration member 582 extend to near the center side end portion of

  Furthermore, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the inner side of the left and right sides of the unit body 574, and the LEDs are mounted on the plurality of (three) light guide members 578 at locations facing the lateral outer end. The door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top right decorative substrate 584, and a plurality of (three) slits 574b formed respectively on the left and right sides of the center of the unit main body 574 in the left and right direction A door with a pair of substrate bases 585 attached to the respective portions and a front face of the pair of substrate bases 585 with a plurality of LEDs 586a and 587a mounted at positions behind the slits 574b of the unit body 574 Frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 and door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587, and door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 And a, a pair of light blocking members 588 which are respectively attached to the rear side of the unit body 574 at the front side of the door frame top right in decorative substrate 587.

  Further, the door frame top unit 570 is provided on the center base 571 so as to cover the front surface of the door frame top unit relay substrate 589 attached to the front surface of the center base 571 in the unit body 574 and the door frame top unit relay substrate 589. The relay board cover 590 attached, the upper cover 591 attached to the unit body 574 so as to close the upper opening 574c of the unit body 574, and the unit so as to close the lower opening 574d of the unit body 574 And a lower cover 592 attached to the main body 574.

  The central base 571 of the door frame top unit 570 is formed in a rectangular shape extending in the left and right direction in a front view. The central base 571 is formed in a box shape opened rearward, and has a plurality of asperities on the front surface. The pair of side bases 572 are respectively attached to the left and right ends of the center base 571. A pair of upper speakers 573 are attached to the front of each side base 572 respectively. When assembled in the door frame top unit 570, the pair of upper speakers 573 are attached obliquely such that the front sides of the pair of upper speakers 573 move rearward in the side near the center of the door frame top unit 570 in the left-right direction. The pair of upper speakers 573 are full-range cone-shaped speakers capable of outputting sound in a wide frequency band.

  The unit main body 574 is formed in a shape as viewed from the front, such that the lower part in the vicinity of the left and right ends of the square extending in the left and right direction bulges downward. In other words, the unit main body 574 is formed in a front view such that it has a rectangular shape extending left and right, which is cut away in a trapezoidal shape that is narrowed upward from the lower end side. The unit main body 574 has a square shape extending in the left and right direction, and a half of the entire width (length in the left-right direction) around the center in the left-right direction on the front end side of the quadrilateral It is formed in the shape which combined the trapezoid which protruded forward, and the quadrangle which protruded short for the front by making the front end side of the trapezoid into a long side. Therefore, in the unit body 574, a line connecting the left and right ends of the unit body 574 with the left and right ends of the front end of the portion projecting forward on both sides of the portion projecting forward in the left and right direction center in the front surface It is located more backward (is recessed).

  In the unit main body 574, openings 574a penetrating in the front and back direction are respectively formed in a portion from the left and right direction both ends in the front surface to a position outside the portion projecting forward. The unit body 574 is a plurality of slits extending in the vertical direction at a predetermined height in the vertical direction and penetrating in the front-rear direction at a diagonally extending portion of the front side projecting in a trapezoidal shape in the front 574b is formed. The plurality of slits 574 b extend from the vicinity of the front end of the portion of the front surface of the unit body 574 obliquely forward to the vicinity of the opening 574 a. In addition, the plurality of slits 574 b are formed on the both sides at the center in the left-right direction of the unit body 574 so as to be separated vertically three by three respectively.

  Further, the unit body 574 has an upper opening 574c which is notched toward the front from the rear end in the lateral center on the upper surface and a lower opening 574d which is notched forward from the rear end in the horizontal direction on the lower surface. And. The upper opening 574 c of the unit body 574 is closed by the upper cover 591. The lower opening 574 d is closed by the lower cover 592.

  The unit body 574 also includes a top left decorative portion 574e and a top right decorative portion 574f extending vertically at the left and right ends. The front surface of the top left decorative portion 574e is formed at substantially the same position as the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. The top right decoration 574f is formed such that its front surface is located forward of the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. The unit body 574 is formed of an opaque member.

  The top middle decoration member 576 is attached to the front end of a portion of the front surface of the unit main body 574 that protrudes forward in the lateral center. The top middle decoration member 576 extends outward in the left and right direction from the upper end of the left and right sides of the metapentagon in which the shape of the front view is bent so that the left and right direction central portion of the lower side of the substantially square is positioned downward. It is formed in the shape which combined the substantially right-angled triangle which connected the front-end | tip of the edge and the lower end of the right and left of a side pentagon. The top middle decoration member 576 is inclined such that the front pentagonal portion moves backward as it goes downward. The top middle decorative member 576 is formed in a three-dimensional shape as a whole, and has translucency.

  In the door frame top middle decoration substrate 577, after the top middle decoration member 576, the front surface is inclined to move backward as it goes downward so as to be along the front surface of the irregular pentagonal portion of the top middle decoration member 576. Attached to the side. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the door frame top middle decoration substrate 577, and by making the LEDs emit light, it is possible to make the top middle decoration member 576 emit light and decorate.

  The light guide member 578 is formed of a transparent member. The light guide member 578 is formed in a shape that follows the shape of both the left and right sides of the front end of the front projecting portion of the front surface of the unit body 574. When the side close to both ends in the lateral direction of the unit body 574 is described as the end side, and the side close to the center is described as the center side, the light guide member 578 is a straight portion extending straight from the end side toward the center side. A straight portion 578a and an arc portion 578b extending in the form of a large radius arc so as to move forward from the end portion on the center side of the straight portion 578a to the center side. The light guide member 578 is formed such that the depth in the front-rear direction is smaller than the height in the vertical direction at the straight portion 578a, and the depth in the front-rear direction is formed larger than the height in the vertical direction at the arc portion 578b. The light guide member 578 is formed such that the height in the vertical direction is constant in the straight portion 578a, and the height in the vertical direction of the arc portion 578b is formed to be smaller toward the center. In the light guide member 578 assembled in the door frame top unit 570, the straight portion 578a is located immediately in front of the opening 574a of the unit body 574, and the arc portion 578b closes the slit 574b of the unit body 574 from the front. There is.

  The light guide member 578 includes a diffuse reflection portion 578c having saw-like unevenness formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a, and a diffusion input portion 578d having a plurality of unevenness formed on the rear surface side of the arc portion 578b. Is equipped.

  In the light guide member 578 assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the end portions on both outer sides in the left-right direction face the LED frame 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 At the same time, the diffusion input unit 578d faces the left decoration substrate 586 in the door frame top or the LEDs 586a and 587a of the right decoration substrate 587 in the door frame top. When light from the LEDs 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 is incident from the end portions in the left and right direction on the light guide member 578, the light is a straight portion 578a The light travels from the end to the front side sequentially by the diffuse reflection portion 578c formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a, and light is emitted forward from the entire front surface of the straight portion 578a. The top left decorative lens member 579 or the top right decorative lens member 580 is disposed in front of the light guide member 578, and the portion in front of the straight portion 578a of these members is illuminated and decorated.

  In the light guide member 578, light from the LEDs 586a and 587a of the left decorative substrate 586 in the door frame top or the right decorative substrate 587 in the door frame top is incident from the diffusion input portion 578d formed on the rear surface of the arc portion 578b. Then, the light is widely diffused into the arc portion 578b by the unevenness of the diffusion input portion 578d, and the light is emitted forward from the entire front surface of the arc portion 578b. Thus, the portion located in front of the circular arc portion 578 b in the top left decorative lens member 579 or the top right decorative lens member 580 can be illuminated and decorated.

  As described above, the light guide member 578 includes the door frame top left decoration substrate 583 and the LEDs 583 a and 586 a of the door frame top middle left decoration substrate 586 or the door frame top right decoration substrate 584 and the door frame top middle decoration substrate 587. The light from the LEDs 584a and 587a can be guided to emit and decorate the entire top left decorative lens member 579 or the top right decorative lens member 580 disposed in the front in a good (uniform) state.

  The top left decorative lens member 579 is attached to the front of the unit body 574 so as to cover the front of the three light guiding members 578 disposed on the left side of the center of the front surface of the unit body 574 in the lateral direction. The top left decorative lens member 579 has three decorative lens portions 579a each accommodating the three light guide members 578 independently from the front. The decorative lens portion 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 is formed in a shape following the light guide member 578, and covers the front surface and upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578. On the front surface of each of the decorative lens portions 579a, the concavities and convexities of the quadrangular pyramid projecting forward are arranged in a row on the left and right.

  The top left decorative lens member 579 extends from the left end of the top middle decoration member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 to the right end of the top left decoration portion 574 e of the unit body 574. That is, the top left decorative lens member 579 decorates substantially the entire left side of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570. The top left decorative lens member 579 is lighted and decorated by the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the LEDs 583a and 586a of the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 via the three light guide members 578.

  The top right decorative lens member 580 is attached to the front of the unit body 574 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578 disposed on the right side of the front of the unit body 574 in the lateral direction. The top right decorative lens member 580 has three decorative lens portions 580a each accommodating three light guiding members 578 independently from the front. The decorative lens portion 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580 is formed in a shape following the light guide member 578, and covers the front surface and upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578. On the front surface of each of the decorative lens portions 580a, the concavities and convexities of the quadrangular pyramid projecting forward are arranged in a row on the left and right.

  The top right decorative lens member 580 extends from the right end of the top middle decoration member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 to the left end of the top right decoration portion 574f of the unit body 574. That is, the top right decorative lens member 580 decorates substantially the entire right side of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570. The top right decorative lens member 580 is lighted and decorated by the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 and the LEDs 584 a and 587 a of the right decorative substrate 587 in the door frame top via the three light guiding members 578.

  The top middle left decoration member 581 is attached to the front of the unit body 574 from the front of the top left decoration lens member 579 between the left opening 574a in the front of the unit body 574 and the top middle decoration member 576. The top middle left decorative member 581 is mounted so as to fill the space between the three decorative lens portions 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 when assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the center of the front surface is the top left It projects further forward than the front surface of the decorative lens member 579. The top middle left decoration member 581 is formed of an opaque member.

  The top middle right decoration member 582 is attached to the front of the unit body 574 from the front of the top right decoration lens member 580 between the right opening 574a in the front of the unit body 574 and the top middle decoration member 576. The top middle right decoration member 582 is mounted so as to fill the space between the three decoration lens portions 580a of the top right decoration lens member 580 when assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the center of the front side is the top right It projects further forward than the front surface of the decorative lens member 580. The top middle right decoration member 582 is formed of an opaque member.

  The door frame top left decorative substrate 583 is attached to the inside of the left side surface (top left decorative portion 574e) in the unit main body 574 with the surface on which the LED 583a is mounted facing right. In the door frame top left decorative substrate 583, the LED 583a is mounted at a position facing the left end faces of the three light guide members 578 attached to the front on the left side of the center of the unit main body 574 (see FIG. 90) ). Each of the three LEDs 583a can emit light independently. A portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 located in front of the opening 574a on the left side of the unit main body 574 through the straight portions 578a of the three light guiding members 578 by the LED 583a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 It can be decorated to emit light.

  The door frame top right decoration substrate 584 is attached to the inside of the right side surface (top right decoration portion 574f) in the unit body 574 with the surface on which the LED 584a is mounted facing left. In the door frame top right decorative substrate 584, the LED 584a is mounted at a position facing the right end face of the three light guide members 578 mounted on the front on the right side of the center of the unit body 574 in the lateral direction (see FIG. 90). ). The three LEDs 584a can emit light independently of one another. A portion of the top right decorative lens member 580 located in front of the opening 574a on the right side of the unit body 574 through the straight portions 578a of the three light guiding members 578 by the LED 584a of the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 It can be decorated to emit light.

  The pair of substrate bases 585 is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 574 in which the plurality of slits 574 b are formed. The pair of substrate bases 585 are formed so as to be substantially symmetrical to each other. The substrate base 585 has a side wall having a substantially square side view having sides extending up and down and back and forth, a rear wall of a front view rectangular shape extending outward at right angles from the rear side of the side wall, and the front end of the upper side of the side wall The upper wall of a substantially right triangle with the upper side of the side wall and the rear wall connecting the upper side of the side wall as the hypotenuse and the lower side of the side wall with the lower wall The lower wall of the right triangle is formed in the shape of a triangular prism box in which the upper and lower oblique sides are open. The substrate base 585 is attached to the unit body 574 such that the portion that is open is closed by the unit body 574. In the substrate base 585, the left decoration substrate 586 in the door frame top or the right decoration substrate 587 in the door frame top is attached such that the opened portion is closed.

  The door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 is attached to the substrate base 585 so as to close the box-like open part from the front in the substrate base 585 attached to the rear side on the left side from the left and right center in the unit body 574 Be The door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 is attached to the front surface of the substrate base 585 so that the front surface moves toward the center side in the left-right direction of the unit main body 574 with respect to the laterally extending surface It will be in the inclined state. Thus, in the state where the left decorative substrate 586 in the door frame top is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the front surface is a surface of a portion where three slits 574b on the left side from the center of the unit body 574 in the left and right direction are formed. Approximately parallel to the

  A plurality of LEDs 586 a are mounted at positions corresponding to the three slits 574 b of the unit body 574 on the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586. Thereby, in the state where the left decorative substrate 586 in the door frame top is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the plurality of LEDs 586a face forward from the three slits 574b on the left side from the center of the unit body 574. The door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 causes the plurality of LEDs 586 a to emit light, thereby allowing the portion near the top middle decoration member 576 to emit light and decorate via the arc portion 578 b of the light guide member 578. be able to.

  The right decoration substrate 587 in the door frame top is attached to the substrate base 585 so as to close the box-like open part from the front in the substrate base 585 attached on the rear side on the right of the right and left center in the unit body 574 Be The right decoration substrate 587 is attached to the front surface of the substrate base 585 in the door frame top, so that the front surface moves toward the center side in the left-right direction of the unit body 574 with respect to the horizontally extending surface It will be in the inclined state. Thereby, in the state where the right decorative substrate 587 in the door frame top is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the front surface is a surface of a portion where three slits 574b right of the center of the unit body 574 in the left and right direction are formed. Approximately parallel to the

  A plurality of LEDs 587a are mounted at positions corresponding to the three slits 574b of the unit main body 574 of the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587. Thereby, in the state where the right decorative substrate 587 in the door frame top is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the plurality of LEDs 587a face forward from the three slits 574b on the right side from the center of the unit body 574. The door frame top middle right decoration substrate 587 causes the plurality of LEDs 587a to emit light, and thereby causes a portion near the middle middle decoration member 576 of the top right decoration lens member 580 to emit light and decorate via the arc portion 578b of the light guide member 578. be able to.

  The pair of light shielding members 588 is attached to the front rear side of the unit body 574 at a position between the door frame top middle left decoration substrate 586 and the door frame top middle decoration member 587 and the unit body 574. The pair of light shielding members 588 are formed substantially in left-right symmetry with each other by an opaque member. A light shielding member 588 is provided between the upper and lower sides of a plurality of LEDs 586 a and 587 a of a left decorative substrate 586 in the door frame top and a plurality of right decorative substrates 587 in the door frame top arranged in a row corresponding to three slits 574 I am divided. With this light shielding member 588, light can be guided forward by the light guiding member 578 only by the LEDs 586a and 587a located immediately after each light guiding member 578, and the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decoration Luminescent decoration can be performed in a state where the respective decorative lens portions 579a and 580a of the lens member 580 are independent of each other.

  The door frame top unit relay substrate 589 is attached to the front of the center base 571. The door frame top unit relay substrate 589 includes a pair of upper speakers 573, a door frame top middle decoration substrate 577, a door frame top left decoration substrate 583, a door frame top right decoration substrate 584, a door frame top middle left decoration substrate 586, and a door The connection between the frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 and the door main body relay substrate of the door frame base unit 100 is relayed. The door frame top unit relay substrate 589 is connected to the door main body relay substrate via a connection cable (not shown) provided in the door frame right side unit 550. The front side of the door frame top unit relay substrate 589 is covered by a relay substrate cover 590.

  The door frame top unit 570 includes a top middle decoration member 576 projecting forward at the center in the left-right direction, and is curved such that the front surfaces on the left and right sides of the top middle decoration member 576 turn to the rear. Therefore, it is possible to make the player illusion that only the top middle decorative member 576 protrudes largely forward, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the pachinko machine 1.

  In addition, the door frame top unit 570 is provided with a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 which decorate the left and right sides of the top middle decoration member 576 disposed at the center, It is formed to extend from the both sides to the top left decoration portion 574e and the top right decoration portion 574f formed on the left and right ends of the unit body 574. Thereby, the front upper portion of the door frame 3 can be totally decorated by the door frame top unit 570.

  At this time, in the door frame top unit 570, a front surface is protected by a speaker cover 575 made of punching metal at the rear of each of both left and right direction both ends where the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 are disposed. The speaker cover 575 is provided so as to face forward from between the three decorative lens portions 579a and 580a spaced apart above and below the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580. The sound output from the left and right upper speakers 573 can be made to be heard by the player in a good state, and a good stereo sound can be enjoyed.

  Further, the door frame top unit 570 is a door frame top left decoration substrate 583 and a door frame top right decoration by a plurality of light guide members 578 provided on the rear side of the top left decoration lens member 579 and the top right decoration lens member 580 The light from the substrate 584, the door frame top middle left decoration substrate 586, and the door frame top middle right decoration substrate 587 can be guided to the top left decoration lens member 579 and the top right decoration lens member 580, and the top left decoration lens member The entire front surface of the lens 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 can be well decorated. Therefore, the door frame top unit 570 can emit and decorate the entire front surface of the upper portion of the door frame 3 including the front of the left and right upper speakers 573.

[3-8. Operation effect of door frame]
The operation and effect of the door frame 3 will be described. The door frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has the through holes 111 penetrating the front and rear of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 larger in the vertical and horizontal directions than in the conventional pachinko machine. The heights of the plate unit 320 and the door frame top unit 570 in the vertical direction are reduced according to the enlargement of the through hole 111, and the width of the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 in the left and right direction. Is made smaller. Thereby, the front of the game board 5 (game area 5a) attached to the main body frame 4 can be made as wide as possible visible to the player (forward) through the through hole 111 (glass unit 190). , Corresponds to the large game board 5 of the game area 5a.

  The door frame 3 has a large hemispherical operation button 410 at the center in the left-right direction of the plate unit 320 bulging forward on the lower side of the through hole 111 (second effect operation unit 400A) And the front half of the lower half (the lower part of the upper plate 321) on the left and right sides of the rendering operation unit 400 (the front of the lower front decoration part 326c) is recessed to turn backward (dish unit The front surface of both left and right sides of the rendering operation unit 400 is formed in a concave shape so that the front surfaces of the left and right sides of the rendering operation unit 400 are positioned backward from the straight line connecting the front ends of the left and right ends of 320 and the front ends of the left and right ends of the rendering operation unit 400 ing. As a result, the rendering operation unit 400 attached to the front in the center in the left-right direction of the plate unit 320 appears to be largely protruded forward, so that the rendering operation unit 400 is highlighted and emphasized for the player. It can be made to pay attention to the rendering operation unit 400 strongly.

  In the door frame 3, the rendering operation unit 400 disposed on the front surface of the plate unit 320 below the through hole 111 is inclined so that the large hemispherical transparent operation button 410 faces obliquely upward and forward. Because the player is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 because it is attached in the state, the operation button 410 faces the player's head (face), and the player loses his sight and effects operation unit 400. When viewed, the operation button 410 can be seen almost in front, and the large and round operation button 410 can be strongly viewed, and the sense of expectation for the effect using the operation button 410 can be enhanced. In addition, the effect image displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460 disposed in the transparent operation button 410 can be visually recognized in a good state, and the effect image is sufficiently facilitated. Maseru can be.

  In addition, since the door frame 3 has the operation button 410 having a diameter substantially the same as the entire height of the plate unit 320 and bulging forward, the operation of the operation button 410 requires a short distance of hand movement. It is possible to touch any part of the operation button 410, and "early pressing" of the operation button 410 can be performed relatively easily. In addition, since the operation button 410, which has a large diameter and bulges forward, is attached in an inclined state, it can not only be pressed from the top like the operation button of a conventional pachinko machine, but also it can be operated left or right The operation can be performed well even from the front, and the operation using the operation button 410 can be more enjoyable by the operation button 410 having a good operability.

  In addition, the door frame 3 is attached to the effect operation unit 400 by the plate unit 320 in a suspended state, and is provided with the vibration motor 424 for generating vibration in the lower part of the effect operation unit 400. According to the state, when the vibration motor 424 is rotated to generate vibration, a strong vibration can be transmitted to the player's hand touching the upper portion of the operation button 410, and the player is surprised by the operation button The presentation using the 410 can be further enjoyed.

  Furthermore, since the door frame 3 is provided with a large operation button 410 (rendering operation unit 400) across the entire height of the plate unit 320 at the front center of the plate unit 320, the upper plate 321 is compared with a conventional pachinko machine. Since the lower plate 322 below is not noticeable, it can be made easy to make the player who is familiar with the conventional pachinko machine clearly recognize that it is clearly different, and the player's attention is strongly attracted It can be a high power pachinko machine 1.

  Further, the lower frame 322 is formed so as to wrap around the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 with respect to the lower plate opening portion 326 d opened on the left side of the effect operation unit 400 in the front surface of the plate unit 320 Therefore, the volume of the lower plate 322 can be increased relative to the size of the lower plate opening portion 326d, and the number of game balls stored in the lower plate 322 can be sufficiently secured. In addition, since the rear of the lower plate 322 turns to the rear side of the effect operation unit 400, when the player puts the left hand in the lower plate 322 or places the left finger on the lower plate opening 326d. Since it is difficult for the fingertip to touch the wall behind the lower plate 322, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel discomfort, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest for the game, and at the same time It can also be recognized that the volume of the lower plate 322 is larger than the height by touch.

  Further, the door frame 3 is a lower portion for pulling out the gaming balls of the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray 322 from the upper tray 321 to the lower tray 322 into the lower portion of the tray unit 320 or the like. The countersink holes 322a are arranged linearly in the front and rear direction, and are arranged on the right outside (right side of the left end of the frame unit 415 of the rendering operation unit 400) of the lower plate opening 326d in front view. That is, the lower bowl ball supply port 323c and the lower bowl ball extraction hole 322a, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a (right outer side of the lower plate opening portion 326d) in the effect operation unit 400 and the plate unit cover 326, the front end of the lower plate cover 340 Since the player is disposed behind the side, etc., the player can not see the lower ball supply port 323c and the lower ball removal hole 322a, and the appearance of the plate unit 320 (pachinko machine 1) can be refreshed. The appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

  Further, in the lower frame 322, since the lower countersink hole 322a is disposed below (in front of) the lower plate ball supply port 323c in the lower tray 322, the lower frame ball opening 322a is opened. Then, the gaming balls discharged from the upper plate 321 or the like to the lower plate 322 are immediately discharged from the lower plate ball removal hole 322a to the lower dollar box or the like when they enter the lower plate 322. At this time, since the lower bowl ball supply port 323c and the lower bowl ball removal hole 322a can not be seen from the player side, the flow of gaming balls discharged from the upper plate 321 or the like through the lower plate 322 to the dollar box is also I can not see it. In this way, it is possible to give the illusion that the game balls and the like paid out from the payout device 830 in a state that the game balls of the upper plate 321 and the upper plate 321 are full for the player are directly discharged to the dollar box. Since it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to feel the troublesomeness of passing through the lower plate 322, it is possible to concentrate the player on the game (such as the operation to hit the game ball and the effect image) and to suppress the decrease in interest. it can.

  Further, in the lower frame 322, the door frame 3 has the lower flat ball opening hole 322a at the front left position of the lower flat ball supply opening 323c, and the lower plate 322 stands upright on the right side of the lower flat ball opening 322a. Since the upper wall portion is bent obliquely so as to face the lower ball ball extraction hole 322a, the gaming ball supplied from the lower ball ball supply port 323c to the lower plate 322 is directly moved to the lower ball ball. The light can be guided to the hole 322a, or can be reflected to the right side wall and indirectly guided to the lower circular ball hole 322a. Thus, in the state where the lower ball ball extraction hole 322a is open, the gaming ball supplied from the lower ball ball supply port 323c to the lower plate 322 is a region on the lower plate 322 on the left side of the lower ball ball extraction hole 322a. (The lower plate first area A1) can be discharged downward from the lower plate ball removal hole 322a without entering the lower plate 322 without showing the gaming balls circulating in the lower plate 322 to the player. The game ball can be discharged downward (dollar box), and the same effect as described above can be exhibited.

  Further, the door frame 3 is provided with the lower plate opening portion 326d of the plate unit cover 326 with the lower plate 322 facing forward, between the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a (effect operation unit 400) and the lower speaker opening 326e. Therefore, even if the player puts his hand on the lower plate opening 326d or puts his hand on the lower plate 322, the front of the lower speaker opening 326e is not blocked by the player's hand. The sound from the speaker 921 in the board unit 900 can be output forward well, and the sound by the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed. In addition, when the player places a hand on the lower plate 322 or moves close to it, the player can tactilely feel the vibration due to the deep bass from the speaker 921 which is output forward from the lower speaker port 326e. Can entertain people and control the decline in interest.

  In addition, since the door frame 3 is provided with the door frame right side unit 550 which is plate-shaped and protrudes forward largely from the right side of the through hole 111, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on the island facility of the game hall, the door Since the frame right side unit 550 can exert an operation effect such as a partition between the pachinko machine adjacent to the right side, the player playing a game with this pachinko machine 1 can play a game in a private room It is possible to give an illusion of a feeling of being present, and to play the game in a relaxed atmosphere without hesitation to other players around.

  Furthermore, since the door frame 3 can emit light and decorate the front end and both the left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550 that is plate-shaped and largely protrudes forward, the game hall installed with the pachinko machines 1 lined up Even if the pachinko machine 1 is not located in front of the pachinko machine, the pachinko machine 1 can be informed of the presence of the pachinko machine even from a distance from the side along the island facility, and the pachinko machine has a high appeal for the player. It can be machine 1.

  In the door frame top unit 570 on the upper side of the through hole 111, the door frame 3 includes a top middle decorative member 576 projecting forward at the center in the left-right direction, and front surfaces on both left and right sides of the top middle decoration member 576 A shape recessed so as to be turned backwards (A top middle decoration member in the door frame top unit 570 than a straight line connecting the front ends of the left and right ends of the door frame top unit 570 and the front ends of the left and right ends of the top middle decoration member 576 The front surfaces of the left and right sides of the 576 are formed in a concavely curved shape so as to be positioned rearward. As a result, only the decorative member 576 at the top of the door frame top unit 570 appears to be projected forward largely, so that the decorative member 576 can be made to be highlighted and highlighted to the player, The inner decorative member 576 can be strongly noticed.

  By the way, on the upper part of the door frame in the conventional pachinko machine, a pair of upper speakers separated to the left and right are provided, and two upper speakers are conspicuous. On the other hand, in the door frame top unit 570 attached to the upper side of the through hole 111, the door frame 3 of the present embodiment has a pair of upper portions whose front surfaces are protected by the speaker cover 575 made of punching metal at the left and right ends. A top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 extending from the left and right sides of the central top middle decorative member 576 to the left and right direction ends are provided with the speaker 573, The entire front face of the left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 can be decorated with light emission. As a result, since the front upper portion of the door frame 3 can be entirely decorated, the pair of upper speakers 573 becomes inconspicuous at the upper portion of the door frame 3, and a decoration distinctly different from conventional pachinko machines is provided It is possible to make the player recognize at a glance that it is present, and it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal to the player, and to entertain the player with high-quality stereo sound by the pair of upper speakers 573. it can.

  As described above, in the door frame 3 of this embodiment, the rendering operation unit 400 attached to the plate unit 320 and the top middle decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 are provided below and above the through hole 111. Because each of the left and right direction is largely projected forward, it is possible to show the player a decoration having a sense of unity in the upper and lower sides where the virtual line passing through the left and right direction center is noticeable, and by the refined decoration. The pachinko machine 1 can be made more prominent than other pachinko machines and has a high appeal.

  In addition, since the door frame 3 causes the top middle decorative member 576 and the rendering operation unit 400 of the door frame top unit 570 disposed vertically at the center in the left-right direction to project forward, the top middle decorative member 576 When the light emitting decoration of the effect operation unit 400 is performed, the light emission line extending vertically at the center in the left and right direction of the front surface of the door frame 3 can be shown to the player, and the line of sight of the player is arranged at the center in the left and right direction. It can be guided to the operation button 410 or the like of the effect operation unit 400.

[4. Overall configuration of body frame]
The main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 94. FIG. 91 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 92 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the back. FIG. 93 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 94 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear. As shown in the figure, the main body frame 4 of the present embodiment is formed in a box shape whose front is open, and the game board 5 is removably accommodated therein. The body frame 4 is attached to the frame-like outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall so as to be openable and closable at the upper and lower ends of the front left side and the door frame 3 is closed It is attached openably and closably.

  The main body frame 4 of the present embodiment has a frame-like main body frame base 600 which is partially insertable into the outer frame 2 and is capable of supporting the outer periphery of the game board 5, and of the main body frame base 600. It is attached to the upper and lower ends of the left side of the front view and is rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 and the door frame upper hinge member 140 and door frame The lower side hinge member 150 comprises a body frame upper hinge member 620 and a body frame lower hinge member 640 rotatably mounted, and a reinforcing frame 660 attached to the left side of the body frame base 600 in a front view. .

  In addition, the main unit frame 4 is attached to the lower front of the main unit frame base 600, and a ball launcher 680 for hitting a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5; And a locking unit 700 for locking between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 and is attached to the rear side along the front view upper side and left side of the main body frame base 600 A reverse L-shaped payout unit 800 for paying out gaming balls to the cage player side, a substrate unit 900 attached to the lower portion of the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and an openable / closable attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 And a back cover 980 covering the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 600.

[4-1. Body frame base]
As shown in FIGS. 91 to 94, the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment is formed in a rectangular shape in which the shape in front view extends vertically. The body frame base 600 penetrates back and forth in a range of about 3/4 of the height from a position slightly lower than the upper end, and the game board insertion slot 601 in which the game board 5 is inserted from the front side The lower side of the board insertion slot 601 is formed, and the game board placement unit 602 on which the game board 5 is placed and the upper side of the game board placement unit 602 project upward from the left and right direction And a game board control unit 603 for restricting the backward movement.

  In addition, the main unit frame base 600 is a launch device attachment portion 604 for attaching the ball launch device 680 formed on the lower right side of the game board placement portion 602 in front view, and a front view right side of the launch device attachment portion 604 The cylinder insertion port 605 which penetrates back and forth and into which the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 is inserted, and penetrates back and forth from the left and right center from the front left and right center of the game board mounting portion 602 A circular opening which penetrates the front and rear of the game board mounting portion 602 in the front opening left side of the game board mounting portion 602 and which has the speaker unit 920 of the board unit 900 facing forward. And a speaker opening 607.

  Furthermore, the main body frame base 600 extends rearward in a plate shape from the right side in a front view of the game board slot 601, the locking unit 700 is attached to the right side, and the back cover 980 is pivotable at the rear end. A rear extension 608 is provided for attachment. The body frame base 600 of the body frame 4 is formed in the vicinity of the upper and lower end portions of the left end in front view on the rear surface, and the upper hinge attachment for attaching the body frame upper hinge member 620 and the body frame lower hinge member 640 A portion 609 and a lower hinge attachment portion 610 are provided.

  In addition, the main frame base 600 is rotatably attached at a position slightly lower on the left side than the front left and right center of the game board mounting portion 602 in an opening cover 615 closing the opening for connection 606 openably and closably. And a game board lock member 616 capable of restricting the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion slot 601.

[4-2. Body frame upper hinge member and body frame lower hinge member]
The main frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 91 to FIG. The body frame upper hinge member 620 and the body frame lower hinge member 640 are attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 609 and the lower hinge attachment portion 610 of the body frame base 600.

  An upper hinge main body 621 in which a rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate member is bent in an L shape downward, and a cylindrical shape projecting upward from a front end of the upper hinge main body 621 A body frame upper hinge pin 622 pivotally supported by the cage outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and an upper hinge main body 621 in front view left side of the body frame hinge pin 622 penetrate the door frame side upper hinge member 140 And an upper hinge hole 623 for a door frame. A portion of the upper hinge main body 621 that is bent downward is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 609 of the main frame base 600.

  The lower hinge member 640 on the body frame side vertically penetrates at the front end of the lower hinge first main body 641 and the lower hinge first main body 641 in which the rear portion of the plate material extending horizontally is bent upward in an L shape. And an outer frame lower hinge hole (not shown) supported by the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 and a horizontally extending flat plate disposed on the upper side of the lower hinge first main body 641 The lower hinge second main body 643 in which the rear portion of the plate material is bent upward in an L shape, and the upper end of the lower hinge second main body 643 vertically penetrate and the door frame lower lower hinge member 150 of the door frame 3 The door frame 3 extends upward from the left end on the rear side of the door frame hinge hole 644 for pivotally supporting the door frame and the door frame hinge hole 644 at the horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 643. And a restriction piece 645 for restricting the rotation range of the .

  The lower hinge second body 643 has a horizontally extending portion spaced upward from the horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge first body 641 and a portion bent upward is a first lower hinge first body. It is in contact with the front surface of a portion of the main body 641 that is bent upward. The main frame side lower hinge member 640 is attached to the lower hinge attachment portion 610 of the main frame base 600 by bending the lower hinge first main body 641 and the lower hinge second main body 643 upward.

[4-3. Reinforcement frame]
The reinforcing frame 660 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 94. The reinforcing frame 660 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 600. The cross section of the reinforcing frame 660 in plan view is formed in a U shape whose right side is open, and extends vertically with a constant cross section. In addition, the reinforcing frame 660 restricts movement of the game board 5 inserted in the game board insertion slot 601 of the main body frame base 600 to the front and up and down to the rear side of the part extending rightward from the front end. The left positioning member 661 is mounted in a pair at vertically spaced positions.

  The hinge side (left side in front view) of the main frame base 600 can be reinforced by the reinforcing frame 660, and the inside of the main frame 4 (game board 5) from the left passing between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 It is possible to prevent incorrect insertion of tools.

[4-4. Ball launcher]
The ball firing device 680 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91, 93 and 94. The ball launcher 680 is a device for driving the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 into the game area 5 a of the game board 5 attached to the main unit frame 4. In this ball launcher 680, the hitting strength of the gaming ball changes in accordance with the pivot angle of the handle 302 of the handle unit 300 in the front lower right corner of the door frame 3.

  The ball launcher 680 is attached to a flat launch base 681 attached to the launcher attachment portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 and to the rear surface of the right side of the launch base 681 in a front view. A firing solenoid 682 formed of a rotary solenoid extending forward and penetrating, a hitting ball 683 having a base end attached to the rotation shaft of the firing solenoid 682 and a tip end extending diagonally upward from the tip of the hitting ball 683 And a launch rail 684 mounted on the front of the launch base 681 so that the game balls can roll.

  In this ball launcher 680, gaming balls are supplied from the ball feed unit 250 of the door frame 3 to the upper right end of the launch rail 684, and the gaming balls are supplied to the upper right end of the launch rail 684 Then, when the handle 302 is turned, the firing solenoid 682 is driven with a strength corresponding to the turning angle, and the game ball is hit by the hit ball 683. Then, the game ball hit by the hitting ball 683 is guided by the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 through the launch rail 684 and driven into the game area 5a.

  In the case where the hit game ball does not reach the game area 5a due to the impact strength of the game ball, etc., between the firing rail 684 and the game board 5 (the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002) Then, it falls to the ball receptacle 275 of the lower far cover unit 270 and is discharged into the lower tray 322 through the inside of the far cover unit 270.

[4-5. Locking unit]
The locking unit 700 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 94. The locking unit 700 of the present embodiment is attached to the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 4 and can lock between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2. The locking unit 700 is attached to the right side surface of the rear extension 608 of the main body frame base 600 and extends vertically, and a plurality of lockable units with the door frame 3 that project forward from the unit base 701. A door frame ridge 702, a plurality of outer frame ridges 703 projecting rearward from the unit base 701 and capable of locking with the outer frame 2, and projecting cylindrically forward from a lower portion of the unit base 701, A protrusion protrudes from the front end in a direction perpendicular to the axis, and by engaging with the rotation transmission member 212 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 of the door frame 3, the rotation of the cylinder lock 211 is transmitted, and the door is rotated according to the rotation direction of the key. And a key cylinder 710 for unlocking the locking of either the frame wedge 702 or the outer frame wedge 703.

[4-6. Disbursement unit]
The dispensing unit 800 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 95 to 113. FIG. 95 is a perspective view of the dispensing unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 96 is a perspective view of the dispensing unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 97 is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled into main components and viewed from the front, and FIG. 98 is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled into main components and viewed from the rear. FIG. 99 (a) is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit of the dispensing unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 99 (b) is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit as viewed from the rear. Furthermore, FIG. 100 is an exploded perspective view of the ball guiding unit. FIG. 101 (a) is a perspective view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 101 (b) is a perspective view of the dispensing device as viewed from the rear. FIG. 102 is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing device as viewed from the front, and FIG. 103 is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing device as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 104 (a) is a front view of the dispensing device, and FIG. 104 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line QQ in FIG. FIG. 105 (a) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the ball drawing passage is closed by the ball drawing movable piece in the dispensing device, and FIG. 105 (b) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the ball drawing passage is opened by the ball drawing movable piece. It is.

  FIG. 106 (a) is a front perspective view of the upper full ball passage unit in the dispensing unit, and FIG. 106 (b) is a rear perspective view of the upper full ball passage unit. FIG. 107 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full tank path unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 107 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full tank path unit disassembled and viewed from the rear is there. Further, FIG. 108 (a) is a front perspective view of the lower full ball passage unit in the dispensing unit, and FIG. 108 (b) is a rear perspective view of the lower full ball passage unit. Further, FIG. 109 is an exploded perspective view of the lower full tank passage unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 110 is an exploded perspective view of the lower full cylinder passage unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 111 (a) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the guideway opening / closing door is closed in the lower full tank route unit, and (b) is an explanatory view showing a state where the guideway opening / closing door is open. . FIG. 112 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the door cover full cover unit and the lower full ball unit. FIG. 113 is an explanatory view showing a flow of gaming balls in the payout unit.

  As shown in FIGS. 95 and 96, etc., the dispensing unit 800 of this embodiment is attached to the inverted L-shaped dispensing unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and the top of the dispensing unit base 801. Ball tank 802 for storing gaming balls supplied from an island facility of a game hall (not shown) in a box shape extending upward and downward and attached to the payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802 A tank rail 803 extends to the left and right for guiding the gaming ball in the ball tank 802 in a left direction in a front view. Within the tank rail 803, the game balls are aligned in the front and rear two rows by a ball leveling member 804 (see FIG. 113) swingably suspended from above while guiding the game balls to the left.

  In addition, the payout unit 800 is attached to the rear surface of the top left side of the payout unit base 801 in front view and guides the gaming balls from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner; A payout device 830 which dispenses the gaming balls removably attached from the payout unit base 801 and guided by the ball induction unit 820 one by one based on an instruction from the payout control substrate 951 accommodated in the payout control substrate box 950. And have. From the tank rail 803 to the payout device 830, gaming balls are distributed in two rows, and from the payout device 830, the gaming balls are paid out one by one.

  Furthermore, the payout unit 800 is attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 and guides the gaming balls paid out by the payout device 830 downward, and according to the storage state of the gaming balls on the upper tray 321 in the tray unit 320 The upper full ball passage unit 850 for releasing the water from either the normal discharge hole 850 d or the full discharge hole 850 e, and the normal discharge hole 850 d of the upper full ball passage unit 850 attached to the lower end of the discharge unit base 801 The guide ball 861 guides the game ball forward and guides it from the front end to the through ball passage 273 of the door frame 3. The game ball released from the full tank outlet 850e is guided forward from the front end of the door frame 3. The main frame of the full opening guide channel 862 leading to the full tank receiving hole 274, and the front end opening of the normal guide passage 861 and the full guidance channel 862 And a, a lower full sphere path unit 860 having a taxiway door 863 to be opened or closed in response to opening and closing of the door frame 3 against.

[4-6a. Ball guidance unit]
The ball guiding unit 820 of the dispensing unit 800 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 99 and 100. The ball guiding unit 820 extends vertically and has a box-like front case 821 open at the rear side, a box-like rear case 822 attached to the rear side of the front case 821 and the front side open, and the front case A flat plate-like partition plate 823 attached between the 821 and the rear case 822 and separating the front case 821 and the rear case 822 and the front and rear ends through the partition plate 823 to the front case 821 and the rear case 822 A pair of movable piece fronts 825 and movable piece members that are rotatably attached by the rod-like shaft member 824 attached and the shaft member 824 and disposed in the front case 821 and the rear case 822 respectively 826, and a ball breakage detection sensor 827 mounted in the front case 821 and capable of detecting the rotational position of the pair of movable piece front 825 and movable piece rear 826. To have.

  The front case 821 has a ball guiding inlet 821a at the upper right side where game balls are open for passage and a ball induction outlet where game balls are open at a position closer to the right than the center of the bottom in the left-right direction. 821 b, and a guiding passage 821 c which communicates the ball guiding inlet 821 a with the ball guiding outlet 821 b and through which the game balls can flow. The guide passage 821c has an introduction portion 821d obliquely extending at a small angle with respect to the horizontal from the ball induction inlet 821a to the vicinity of the left end, and the center of height along the left side of the front case 821 from the introduction portion 821d The detection unit 821e extends straight downward to the vicinity, and a meandering unit 821f extends in a meandering manner from the detection unit 821e to the left and right of the front case 821. Further, the front case 821 is provided with a notch 821g on the wall on the right side in a front view of the detection portion 821e in the guiding passage 821c.

  The rear case 822 has a ball guiding inlet 822a at the upper right side where game balls are open for passage, and a ball induction outlet where game balls are open at a position closer to the right than the center of the bottom in the left-right direction. A guide passage 822c is provided, which communicates the ball guiding inlet 822a with the ball guiding outlet 822b and through which the game balls can flow. The guiding passage 822c has an introduction portion 822d obliquely extending at a small angle with respect to the horizontal from the ball induction inlet 822a to the vicinity of the left end, and the center of height along the left side of the rear case 822 from the introduction portion 822d The detection unit 822e extends straight downward to the vicinity, and a meandering portion 822f extends in a meandering manner from the detection unit 822e to the left and right width of the rear case 822. Further, the rear case 822 is provided with a notch 822g on the right side wall of the detection portion 822e in the guiding passage 822c in a front view.

  The rear case 822 is formed substantially symmetrical to the left and right with respect to the front case 821. The guide passage 821c and the guide passage 822c are formed so as to coincide with each other in the front and rear direction when assembled in the ball guide unit 820. There is.

  The front and rear ends of the shaft member 824 are attached to positions below the upper ends of the notches 821g and 822g in the front case 821 and the rear case 822 and outside the induction passages 821c and 822c.

  The movable piece member front 825 is a flat movable piece 825a extending vertically, a shaft hole 825b which penetrates back and forth at the upper end of the right side surface of the movable piece 825a, and the movable piece 825a into which the shaft member 824 is inserted An extending portion 825c extending rightward from the upper end of the movable piece 825a at a right angle with respect to the right surface of the movable piece 825a; an extending portion 825c and the movable piece 825a; and fanning around the shaft hole 825b A connecting portion 825d, a weight attaching portion 825e having a through hole which protrudes outward from around the center of the upper portion of the extending portion 825c and the outer periphery of the connecting portion 825d and which penetrates back and forth, and an extending portion 825c A detection piece 825f extending outward from the right end in a flat plate shape and detectable by the broken ball detection sensor 827 and extending outward from a position near the movable piece 825a on the outer periphery of the connecting portion 825d Is provided with a stopper piece 825g, the.

  When the shaft member 824 passes through the shaft hole 825b, the movable piece front 825 rotates so that the weight attachment portion 825e protruding from the outer periphery of the connecting portion 825d is positioned directly below the shaft hole 825b by its own weight. The movable piece 825a extends obliquely downward from the portion of the shaft hole 825b. Therefore, in the assembled state of the ball guiding unit 820, the connecting portion 825d is inserted through the notch 821g of the front case 821, and the lower end of the movable piece 825a protrudes into the guiding passage 821c, and the stopper piece 825g It will be in the state contact | abutted to the outer wall of the guidance channel | path 821c (detection part 821e). When the stopper piece 825g abuts on the outer wall of the guiding passage 821c, the lower end of the movable piece 825a is restricted from further rotation in the direction (left direction in front view) projecting into the guiding passage 821c. In addition, when the movable piece member front 825 rotates the lower end of the movable piece 825a in a direction (right direction in front view) approaching the wall of the guiding passage 821c, the left side surface of the movable piece 825a becomes the guiding passage 821c. I agree with the inside. In this state, the detection piece 825f of the movable piece front 825 is in a non-detection state with respect to the out-of-ball detection sensor 827. That is, when the gaming ball is in the guiding passage 821c, the out-of-ball detection sensor 827 is not detected.

  The movable piece member back 826 is a flat plate-like movable piece 826a extending vertically and a shaft hole 826b which is penetrated back and forth at the upper end of the right side surface of the movable piece 826a and through which the shaft member 824 is inserted, and the movable piece 826a Extending from the upper end of the movable piece 826a to the right surface of the movable piece 826a at right angles with the extending portion 826c and the movable piece 826a, and fan-shapedly extending around the shaft hole 826b A connecting portion 826d, a weight attaching portion 826e having a through hole which protrudes outward from around the center of the upper portion of the extending portion 826c and the outer periphery of the connecting portion 826d, and which penetrates back and forth A detection piece 826f which extends outward in a flat plate shape from the right end and can be detected by the broken ball detection sensor 827, and extends outward in a flat plate shape from a position near the movable piece 826a on the outer periphery of the connecting portion 826d. Is provided with a stopper piece 826g, the.

  When the movable piece member 826 passes the shaft member 824 through the shaft hole 826b, the weight attachment portion 826e protruding from the outer periphery of the connecting portion 826d is pivoted so as to be positioned directly below the shaft hole 826b by its own weight. The movable piece 826a extends obliquely downward from the portion of the shaft hole 826b. Accordingly, in the assembled state of the ball guiding unit 820, the connecting portion 826d is inserted into the notch portion 822g of the rear case 822 and the lower end of the movable piece 826a protrudes into the guiding passage 822c, and the stopper piece 826g It will be in the state contact | abutted to the outer wall of the induction | guidance | derivation passage 822c (detection part 822e). When the stopper piece 826g abuts on the outer wall of the guiding passage 822c, the lower end of the movable piece 826a is restricted from further rotation in the direction (left direction in front view) projecting into the guiding passage 822c. In addition, when the movable piece member 826 rotates the lower end of the movable piece 826a in a direction (right direction in front view) approaching the wall of the guide passage 822c, the left surface of the movable piece 826a becomes the guide passage 822c. I agree with the inside. In this state, the detection piece 826f after the movable piece member 826 is in a non-detection state with respect to the out-of-ball detection sensor 827. That is, when there is a game ball in the induction passage 822c, the out-of-ball detection sensor 827 is not detected.

  In the ball guiding unit 820 of the present embodiment, a plurality of gaming balls are supplied in a row in the back and forth direction by the tank rail 803, respectively, and the front case 821 and the rear case are arranged 822 can lead to the lower dispensing device 830 in two rows back and forth (see FIG. 113). At this time, since the front case 821 and the rear case 822 are separated by the partition plate 823, the gaming balls flowing through the respective guide passages 821c, 822c do not interfere with each other, and are well distributed. Can.

  In addition, when the game ball circulates in the guide passages 821c and 822c of the ball guidance unit 820, the game ball abuts on the movable piece 825a and 826a of the movable piece front 825 and the movable piece back 826, and the movable piece 825a and 826a The movable piece front 825 and the movable piece back 826 rotate in a direction coincident with the wall surfaces of the guide passages 821 c and 822 c. Thereby, the detection pieces 825f and 826f of the movable piece front 825 and the movable piece back 826 are in a non-detection state with respect to the out-of-ball detection sensor 827, and it can be seen that gaming balls are present in the guide paths 821c and 822c.

  When the payout device 830 on the downstream side of the ball guidance unit 820 pays out the game balls, the game balls in the guide paths 821c and 822c flow downstream. When the game ball flows in the guide passage 821c, 822c, the momentum of the game ball flowing in the introduction portion 821d, 822d becomes stronger, and the game ball flowing in the introduction portion 821d, 822d is the movable piece at the upper portion of the detection portion 821e, 822e It will rebound to the 825a, 826a side, and will abut on the movable piece 825a, 826a. Since the movable pieces 825a and 826a vibrate due to the contact of the game balls, they are pinched or invaded between the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the notches 821g and 822g of the guide paths 821c and 822c by the vibration. Dust and dirt can be removed, and the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be favorably rotated by their own weight and the like.

  In addition, the ball guiding unit 820 detects the game balls circulating in the guiding passages 821c and 822c by means of the movable piece front 825 and the movable piece back 826 respectively, and the movable piece front 825 and Since each detection piece 825f, 826f of the movable piece member 826 is detected by one ball breakage detection sensor 827, when the game ball in any of the guide paths 821c, 822c disappears, the movable piece member front is removed. The movable pieces 825a and 826a of the back 825 or movable piece member 826 rotate so as to protrude into the guiding passages 821c and 822c, and the detection pieces 825f and 826f on the side where the game ball is lost are detected by the out-of-ball detection sensor 827 Ru. Therefore, the game balls can be detected early, so that the game balls can be quickly replenished, and by reducing the time for interrupting the game as much as possible, the player's interest can be reduced. It can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, the weight of the movable piece front 825 and the movable piece back 826 and the weight can be obtained by screwing in and attaching a metal screw as a weight to the weight attachment portions 825e and 826e of the movable piece front 825 and the movable piece back 826. As a result, the lower end sides of the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be easily turned in the direction of projecting into the guide passages 821c and 822c. In addition, the upper end of the movable piece 825a, 826a is rotatably attached outside the induction passage 821c, 822c, and the lower end side protrudes in the induction passage 821c, 822c, so dust in the induction passage 821c, 822c No dust or the like adheres to the upper end or the lower end of the movable pieces 825a, 826a. Therefore, even if the movable pieces 825a, 826a turn to the wall side of the guide passage 821c, 822c, dust and dirt do not get caught between the lower ends of the movable pieces 825a, 826a and the wall, so their own weight etc. Thus, the rotation of the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be suppressed.

  As described above, in the ball guiding unit 820 of the present embodiment, the movable piece 825a, 826a at the lower end side of the movable piece 825a, 826a after the movable piece 825 and 826 after the lower end side protrudes into the guiding passage 821c, 822c By attaching weights made of metal screws to the weight attachment portions 825e and 826e on the opposite side of the surface in contact with the game ball, the movable piece front 825 and the movable piece back 826 by their own weight and weight of the weight The lower end sides of 825a and 826a can be easily rotated (projected) into the guide passages 821c and 822c. In addition, the upper end of the movable piece 825a, 826a is rotatably attached outside the induction passage 821c, 822c, and the lower end side protrudes in the induction passage 821c, 822c, so dust in the induction passage 821c, 822c No dust or the like adheres to the upper end or the lower end of the movable pieces 825a, 826a. Therefore, even if the movable pieces 825a, 826a turn to the wall side of the guide passage 821c, 822c, dust and dirt do not get caught between the lower ends of the movable pieces 825a, 826a and the wall, so their own weight etc. Accordingly, the movable pieces 825a and 826a (the movable piece members 825 and 826) can be prevented from rotating.

  In addition, in order to screw and attach a metal screw as a weight to weight attachment portions 825e and 826e as through holes, the weight is fixed even if the front of movable piece 825 and the rear of movable piece 826 rotate frequently. The movable piece front 825 and the movable piece back 826 can be maintained in a good state for a long time without coming off from the movable piece front 825 and the movable piece back 826 (weight attachment parts 825 e, 826 e) . In addition, since the weight can be easily attached to the movable piece front 825 and the movable piece back 826 simply by screwing a metal screw into the weight attachment portions 825 e and 826 e, the process of attaching the weight can be simplified. The cost of assembling the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

  Furthermore, since the introduction portions 821d and 822d for guiding the game balls toward the movable pieces 825a and 826a are provided on the upstream side of the portion where the movable pieces 825a and 826a project inward in the guide passages 821c and 822c. Since the gaming ball flows in the guiding passage 821c, 822c, the gaming ball contacts the movable piece 825a, 826a, so that the movable piece 825a, 826a can be vibrated by the abutment of the gaming ball. Accordingly, dust, dirt and the like which are pinched or intruded between the movable pieces 825a, 826a and the walls of the induction passages 821c, 822c can be removed by the vibration of the movable pieces 825a, 826a, and movable by their own weight etc. The front member 825 and the rear movable member 826 can be rotated well.

  Therefore, since the movable piece front 825 and the movable piece back 826 can be favorably rotated, the state (presence or absence) of the gaming ball in the guiding path 821c, 822c can be detected reliably, and It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a defect due to a false detection or the like. In addition, even if the game ball supplied to the payout device 830 disappears from the inside of the guide passage 821c, 822c, the presence or absence in the guide passage 821c, 822c can be reliably detected through the movable pieces 825a, 826a. The game ball can be replenished to the game ball, and by reducing the time for interrupting the game as much as possible, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's interest.

[4-6 b. Dispensing device]
The dispensing device 830 of the dispensing unit 800 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 101 to 105. The payout device 830 has a box shape whose rear side is open, and the payout opening 831a where the gaming ball is open at the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface, and the gaming ball is open near the left end in front view Payout outlet 831b, ball outlet outlet 831c where gaming balls are open for passage near the right end of the front view in the bottom surface, payout opening 831a and payout outlet 831b are communicated and the payout passage 831d through which gaming balls can flow , And a dispensing passage 831 d branched from the middle and communicated with the ball outlet 831 c and has a ball out passage 831 e through which gaming balls can flow, and is attached to the back side of the front box 831 The game ball is open near the left end of the top view in the bottom view in the bottom of the payout opening 832a where the game ball is open so that the game ball can pass in the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface. A payout opening 832b which is overly open, a ball outlet 832c which allows gaming balls to pass in the vicinity of the right end in the front view on the bottom, a payout opening 832a and a payout outlet 832b are communicated, and the gaming balls are distributed It has a possible payout passage 832d and a rear box 832 branched from the middle of the payout passage 832d and communicating with the ball removal outlet 832c and having a ball removal passage 832e through which game balls can flow.

  Further, the dispensing device 830 is mounted on the front side of the front box 831 and has a shallow box-like front cover 833 open on the rear side, and is mounted in the front box 831 and the rotation shaft passes through the front box 831 The delivery motor 834 extending into the front cover 833, the drive gear 835 attached to the rotation shaft of the delivery motor 834, and the drive gear 835 are meshed and can be rotated by the front box 831 and the front cover 833 The intermediate gear 836 in the form of a spur gear attached to the gear, a driven gear 837 meshing with the intermediate gear 836, and a driven gear 837 rotatably penetrated, the front end being attached to the front cover 833 and the rear The shaft member 838, the end of which passes through the front box 831 and is attached to the rear box 832, and is rotatably attached through the shaft member 838, and the front box 831 and the rear box 832 are dispelled. A blade rotation detection sensor 840 disposed in the passages 831 d and 832 d and disposed between the front box 831 and the rear box 832 and detecting a rotation of the discharge blade 839. And have.

  Furthermore, the dispensing device 830 is a flat-plate-like partition plate 841 attached between the front box 831 and the rear box 832 to separate the dispensing passage 831 d of the front box 831 and the dispensing passage 832 d of the rear box 832; And a rear box 832, and a payout detection sensor 842 for detecting a gaming ball discharged from the payout outlets 831b and 832b by the rotation of the payout blade 839, the payout passage 831d and 832d, and the ball release passage 831e, 832e is a portion where it is bifurcated and is rotatably attached by the front box 831 and the rear box 832, and it is possible to close the ball removal passage 831e, 832e, the ball extraction movable piece 843, the front box 831 and the rear And a ball pulling lever 844 slidably mounted up and down on the upper right side surface of the box 832 so as to make the ball pulling movable piece 843 pivotable or non-rotatable It is equipped with a.

  The dispensing passage 831d of the front box 831 obliquely extends from the dispensing inlet 831a toward the ball removing outlet 831c to the lower right of the front view, and descends at a height of about 1/3 from the upper surface to the entire height of the front box 831 To extend vertically to the left, and bend to extend substantially horizontally to the left near the center of the height, then extend vertically downward again approximately 1/3 from the left end of the width of the front box 831 It is bent in a crank shape and extends vertically to the discharge outlet 831b so as to be positioned just above the discharge outlet 831b at a height of about 1/4 from the bottom with respect to the entire height of the front box 831. The delivery blade 839 is disposed at a cranked portion in the delivery passage 831d.

  On the other hand, the ball removal passage 831 e is a form further extending a portion obliquely extending from the discharge inlet 831 a to the lower right in the discharge passage 831 d, and has a height of about 1/3 from the upper surface to the entire height of the front box 831. It branches between the heights near the center.

  Further, the front box 831 is formed at the upper part of the right side surface of the front view right side with a guide shelf 831 f projecting backward as it goes downward at a portion extending vertically toward the discharge outlet 831 b in the discharge passage 831 d. And a lever attaching portion 831g for slidably attaching the ball removing lever 844 up and down.

  The discharge passage 832d of the rear box 832 obliquely extends from the discharge port 832a toward the ball removal outlet 832c to the lower right in front view, and is lower at a height of about 1/3 from the upper surface with respect to the entire height of the rear box 832 And bend to extend substantially horizontally to the left near the center of the height, then extend vertically downward again approximately 1/3 from the left end of the width of the rear box 832 It is bent in a crank shape and extends vertically to the discharge outlet 832b so as to be positioned just above the discharge outlet 832b at a height of about 1/4 from the bottom with respect to the entire height of the rear box 832. The delivery blade 839 is disposed at a cranked portion in the delivery passage 832d.

  On the other hand, the ball removal passage 832e is a form further extending a portion obliquely extending from the discharge port 832a to the lower right in the discharge passage 832d, and is about 1/3 height from the upper surface to the entire height of the rear box 832 It branches between the heights near the center.

  Further, the rear box 832 is formed at the upper part of the right side surface in a front view and a guiding shelf 832f projecting forward as it goes downward at a portion extending vertically toward the dispensing outlet 832b in the dispensing passage 832d. And a lever mounting portion 832g for slidably mounting the ball release lever 844 in the vertical direction.

  The delivery passages 831 d and 832 d and the ball removal passages 831 e and 832 e of the front box 831 and the rear box 832 are formed in the same shape. The dispensing passages 831 d and 832 d are partitioned by the partition plate 841 up to the upstream of the portion where the dispensing blade 839 is disposed. Further, a payout detection sensor 842 is attached between the guide racks 831 f and 832 f and the payout outlets 831 b and 832 b. That is, the gaming balls distributed in the dispensing passage 831d of the front box 831 and the gaming balls distributed in the dispensing passage 832d of the rear box 832 are front and rear of the front box 831 and the rear box 832 by the respective guide shelves 831f and 832f It is brought close to the boundary and detected by one payout detection sensor 842.

  The driven gear 837 radially protrudes from the rear surface of the gear portion 837a in the circumferential direction at an angle of 60 degrees from the rear surface of the spur gear shape that meshes with the intermediate gear 836 and can be detected by the blade rotation detection sensor 840 A plurality of detection pieces 837b, and a connection portion 837c which protrudes cylindrically from the center of the gear portion 837a and has projections and depressions formed on the peripheral surface of the rear end and which can be connected to the discharge blade 839 .

  The delivery blade 839 extends in a cylindrical shape from the front to the back, and projects in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the base cylinder 839a at regular intervals from the front end of the base cylinder 839a into which the shaft member 838 is inserted and the front end of the base cylinder 839a. (A plurality of (three) front blades 839b, and a plurality of (three) projecting from the rear end of the base cylindrical portion 839a in a direction perpendicular to the axial direction of the base cylindrical portion 839a at regular intervals in the circumferential direction so as to alternate with the front blades 839b The third part of the rear blade 839c, and a connected part projecting cylindrically forward from the front end of the base cylindrical part 839a and having projections and depressions that can be connected to the connecting part 837c of the driven gear 837 on the peripheral surface of the front end And 839 d.

  The front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c of the discharge blade 839 are respectively provided three by three at an angular interval of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction, and the rear blade 839c is circumferentially opposed to the front blade 839b so as to be staggered. It is extended outward at an angle of 60 degrees in the direction. In the payout blade 839 of the present embodiment, three front blades 839 b (rear blades 839 c) are connected by a circular arc recessed toward the center, and the diameter of the circular arc is the same as or slightly larger than the diameter of the gaming ball. As a result, between the front wings 839b (rear wings 839c), a ball accommodating portion 839e capable of accommodating only one game ball is formed.

  Further, the diameter D1 of the outer circumference of the three front blades 839b and the rear blades 839c with respect to the axis of the base cylindrical portion 839a is formed to be 1 to 1.4 times the outer diameter of the gaming ball. In addition, the diameter D2 centered on the axis of the base cylindrical portion 839a to the portion closest to the axis of the base cylindrical portion 839a in the portion (ball housing portion 839e) of the arc between the front blades 839b (rear blades 839c) Is formed about 0.3 to 0.4 times the outer diameter of the gaming ball. That is, the depth [(diameter D1-diameter D2) / 2] from the outer periphery of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c to the most recessed portion of the ball housing portion 839e is 0.1 to 0. It is supposed to be four times.

  Therefore, about 3/10 (between 1/4 and 1/3) of the outer circumference of the gaming ball may be held by the portion (ball housing portion 839e) of the arc between the front blades 839b (the rear blades 839c). it can. In other words, a depth of about 1/5 (1/7 to 1/4) of the outer diameter of the gaming ball can be accommodated. As a result, the gaming balls in the payout paths 831d and 832d can be quickly stored in the space (ball housing portion 839e) between the front blades 839b (rear blades 839c).

  In the delivery blade 839 of this embodiment, the front blade 839b is located in the delivery passage 831d of the front box 831 and the rear blade 839c is located in the delivery passage 832d of the rear box 832 in the assembled state of the delivery device 830. The game balls in the payout paths 831 d and 832 d can be paid out respectively. Further, the delivery blade 839 is disposed at a location where the delivery passage 831d, 832d is bent in a crank shape below the center of the entire height of the front box 831 and the rear box 832. Specifically, in the dispensing passages 831d and 832d, the center of rotation of the dispensing blade 839 is located immediately below the portion vertically extending downward from near the center of the entire height of the front box 831 and the rear box 832. In the crank-shaped portion of the dispensing passages 831d and 832d, the wall (inner wall) far from the dispensing blade 839 is centered on the rotation center of the dispensing blade 839 and from the outer periphery of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c. It is formed in an arc shape separated by a distance S smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball. In the present embodiment, the distance S is 0.7 to 0.9 times the outer diameter of the gaming ball. In other words, the distance from the most recessed portion of the ball housing portion 839e to the portion formed in the arc shape of the payout paths 831d and 832d is 1.03 to 1.1 times the outer diameter of the gaming ball. .

  Thus, the payout device 830 passes the crank-shaped portions of the payout passages 831 d and 832 d when the gaming balls having flowed down onto the payout blades 839 abut the outer periphery of the front blade 839 b and the rear blade 839 c. And can not be discharged downward from the delivery outlets 831 b and 832 b. On the other hand, when the gaming ball is housed in the ball housing portion 839e, it moves along with the rotation of the payout blade 839, and can pass through the cranked portion of the payout passage 831d, 832d, and from the payout outlet 831b, 832b It is discharged downward.

  Further, in the payout device 830, the diameter D1 of the front wing 839b and the rear wing 839c is set to about 1.2 to 1.4 times the outer diameter of the gaming ball, and the outer diameter of the gaming ball is 1 by the ball accommodating portion 839e. Since the depth of 1⁄7 to 1⁄4 is accommodated, it is possible to shorten the time taken to accommodate the gaming balls while reducing the outer diameter of the payout blade 839 as much as possible. Thereby, even if the payout wing 839 is rotated fast, the gaming ball can be housed in the ball housing portion 839e and sent to the payout outlet 831b, 832b side. Therefore, the number of game balls paid out per unit time can be increased more than in the past, and the time taken to pay out the game balls can be shortened.

  The ball removal movable piece 843 extends in a plate shape in the top and bottom and front and back, and the lower portion is bent to extend in a tubular shape in the front and back at the upper end of the main portion 843a formed in a V shape. A cylindrical portion 843b rotatably attached at its both ends to the front box 831 and the rear box 832, a projecting portion 843c projecting from an upper portion of the V-shaped outer surface of the main portion 843a, and a main portion 843a And a weight attaching portion 843d (see FIG. 105) formed of a through hole penetrating in the front and back direction in a lower part bent in a V-shape.

  In the assembled state of the dispensing device 830, the ball removal movable piece 843 is oriented such that the lower portion of the main body 843a extends obliquely to the lower left in front view, In the passages 831d and 832d, it is possible to turn at a position obliquely extending from the delivery port 831a and 832a to the lower right in the front view and at a position outside the wall on the right side in the front view Is attached to

  In the normal state, the dispensing device 830 according to the present embodiment slides the ball release lever 844 downward, and the lower portion of the ball release lever 844 is in contact with the protrusion 843 c of the ball release movable piece 843 from the right in front view. I am in touch. Thereby, the pivoting movable piece 843 is restricted from turning counterclockwise in a front view (see FIG. 105A).

  In this normal state, in the main portion 843a of the ball-extracting movable piece 843 bent in the V-shape, the upper side of the bent portion extends vertically, and the lower side of the bent portion is a front left lower left It extends to The lower end of the main body 843a is located in the vicinity of a portion where the dispensing passages 831d and 832d and the ball removing passages 831e and 832e are branched. Therefore, while the ball removal passages 831e and 832e are closed by the ball removal movable piece 843 (the main body portion 843a), the surface of the main body portion 843a facing the left forms a part of the walls of the discharge passages 831d and 832d. doing.

  The unrolling movable piece 843 of this embodiment is formed so that the center of gravity of the unpunching movable piece 843 is located on the left side in a front view of a vertical line passing through the center of the axial cylinder portion 843b in a normal state. Thus, a force is exerted to try to rotate counterclockwise in a front view, but since the counterclockwise rotation is restricted by the ball release lever 844, the normal state is maintained.

  When the ball extracting lever 844 is slid upward from the normal state, the lower part of the ball extracting lever 844 is separated from the projecting portion 843 c of the ball extracting movable member 843 and the counterclockwise movement of the ball extracting movable member 843 is counterclockwise. Motion restrictions are lifted. Therefore, the ball removing movable piece 843 is pivoted counterclockwise by its own weight so that the center of gravity is positioned immediately below the shaft cylinder portion 843 b. The ball removal movable piece 843 rotates counterclockwise until the lower right side surface of the main body 843a abuts on the left surface of the member forming the right side surface of the front box 831 and the rear box 832. (See FIG. 105 (b)). As a result, the ball removal passages 831e and 832e are opened, and the gaming balls entering from the payout openings 831a and 832a contact the main body 843a of the ball removal movable piece 843 in the middle of the payout passages 831d and 832d. The ball removing movable piece 843 is pivoted counterclockwise in a front view to open the ball removing passages 831e and 832e, and flows through the opened ball removing passages 831e and 832e and discharged downward from the ball removing outlets 831c and 832c. The Rukoto.

  In this embodiment, since the ball removing movable piece 843 is provided with a weight attaching portion 843d, the ball removing lever 844 is slid upward by screwing in and attaching a weight made of a metal screw to the weight attaching portion 843d. And when the restriction of the pivoting in the counterclockwise direction in the front view is released, the lower end of the deballing movable piece 843 is projected into the deballing passage 831e, 832e by the weight of the deballing movable piece 843 and the weight of the weight. It can be made easy to turn in the direction (counterclockwise in front view).

  Further, in a normal state in which the ball extracting lever 844 is slid downward to close the ball extracting passages 831e and 832e, the gaming ball entering from the payout opening 831a and 832a is attached to the main body 843a of the ball releasing movable piece 843 Since the contact is made, it is possible to vibrate the ball removing movable piece 843 by the contact of the game ball. Therefore, dust, dirt, etc. which are pinched or invaded between the lower end of the ball removing movable piece 843 and the inner surface of the ball removing passage 831e, 832e can be removed by the vibration of the ball removing movable piece 843. It is possible to prevent the ball removal movable piece 843 from being unable to rotate by biting in dust or the like.

  In addition, since the metal screw as the weight can be screwed into and attached to the weight attachment portion 843d formed as the through hole, the weight can be removed from the movable member 843 even if the movable member 843 rotates frequently The ball removal movable piece 843 can be maintained in a good state for a long time without being detached from the (weight attachment portion 843d). In addition, since the weight can be easily attached to the ball removal movable piece 843 simply by screwing the metal screw into the weight attachment portion 843d, the time and effort for attaching the weight can be simplified. Cost can be reduced.

  By the way, when the ball removing passage 843e closes the ball removing passages 831e and 832e for a long period of time, fine dust adheres to the rotating shaft of the ball removing movable member 843 and the rotating shaft is rusted. The removal movable piece 843 may be difficult to rotate. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the game balls entered from the payout opening 831a and 832a are in contact with the main body 843a of the ball removing movable piece 843, the ball removing movable piece 843 is used to remove the ball removing passage 831e. , 832e from the closed state, when the ball release lever 844 for releasing the lock is slid upward to release the lock, the game ball comes into contact with the ball release movable piece 843, thereby causing an impact of the contact. The ball removal movable piece 843 can be rotated, and the ball removal passages 831 e and 832 e can be reliably opened.

  Therefore, when the ball releasing lever 844 is operated to open the ball releasing passages 831 e and 832 e, the ball releasing movable piece 843 can be favorably rotated, so that the game ball removing operation can be surely performed. Workability at the time of maintenance can be improved.

[4-6 c. Upper full tank path unit]
The upper full tank path unit 850 of the dispensing unit 800 in the present embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 106 and 107. The upper full tank path unit 850 is attached to the lower side of the dispensing device 830 in the dispensing unit base 801. The upper full tank path unit 850 is attached to the dispensing unit base 801 and has a box-like upper full tank base 851 open at the rear side, and is attached to the rear side of the upper full tank base 851 and the front side is open. A box-like upper full tank cover 852 and a dispensing apparatus pressing member 853 rotatably mounted on the rear side of the upper full tank cover 852 and capable of pressing the dispensing apparatus 830 upward are provided.

  Also, the upper full-ball-path unit 850 has an upper outlet ball socket 850a which is open upwards so that gaming balls can pass upward in a region from the left-right center to the left in front view on the upper surface, and Is formed between the upper ball-out opening 850b which is open upward to allow the game ball to pass through at the part of the upper part, the upper full tank base 851 and the upper full tank cover 852 and received by the upper dispensing ball receptacle 850a An upper ball storage passage 850c of a predetermined size through which gaming balls circulate, a normal discharge port 850d opened downward at a lower portion of the upper ball discharge passage 850a at the lower end of the upper ball storage passage 850c, and an upper ball storage At the lower end of the passage 850c, a full tank outlet 850e opened downward at a site excluding the normal outlet 850d, a normal outlet 850d and a full tank outlet 850e And a, and a partition piece 850f, which partitions the lower portion to the left and right in the upper sphere reservoir passage 850c protrudes upward from between.

  Also, the upper full-tan ball path unit 850 is an upper upper ball-opening passage 850g for guiding the gaming ball entering from the upper ball-opening inlet 850b downward, and an upper portion opened downward at the lower end of the upper ball-opening passage 850g. And a ball outlet 850h. In the upper full tank passage unit 850, the normal outlet 850d, the full tank outlet 850e, and the upper ball outlet 850h are sequentially opened downward from the left side in front view. In addition, the upper full tank path unit 850 includes a back cover attachment portion 854 for attaching the back cover 980 to the right end of the upper full tank base 851.

  The upper full ball passage unit 850 is assembled in the discharge unit 800, and the upper discharge ball socket 850a is located directly below the discharge outlets 831b and 832b of the discharge device 830, and the upper ball removal inlet 850b. Are located directly below the ball removal outlets 831 c and 832 c of the dispensing device 830. Also, when the upper full-tank passage unit 850 is assembled to the delivery unit 800, the normal outlet 850d, the full-tank outlet 850e, and the upper ball outlet 850h are normally guided paths of the lower full-tank passage unit 860. Openings 861, a full tank guide passage 862, and a lower ball removal guide passage 865 are respectively directly above the rear end opening (see FIG. 113).

  In the upper full tank path unit 850, the gaming balls dispensed by the dispensing device 830 and discharged downward from the dispensing outlets 831b and 832b enter the upper ball storage passage 850c from the upper dispensed ball receptacle 850a. In a state where the normal discharge port 850d at the lower end of the upper ball storage passage 850c is not closed, the gaming ball that has entered into the upper ball storage passage 850c from the upper discharge ball socket 850a opens immediately below the upper discharge ball socket 850a. The normal outlet 850d is released.

  When the inside of the upper tray 321 of the door frame 3 is filled with gaming balls and the gaming balls can not be stored, and furthermore, the inside of the normal guiding path 861 of the lower full ball path unit 860 is filled with gaming balls The outlet 850d is in a closed state. When the gaming ball enters into the upper ball storage passage 850c in this state, it is normally stored above the discharge port 850d. When the amount of gaming balls stored above the normal discharge port 850d becomes higher than that of the dividing pieces 850f, the gaming balls that have newly entered the upper ball storage passage 850c overcome the dividing pieces 850f and become full. It is discharged downward from the tongue discharge port 850e, and is sent to the lower tray 322 through the filling channel 862 of the lower filling channel unit 860.

  In this manner, the upper full-tan ball path unit 850 automatically lowers the gaming balls paid out from the payout device 830 from the upper tray 321 according to the storage amount of the gaming balls in the upper tray 321 in the door frame 3. It can be distributed to the plate 322.

[4-6 d. Lower full tank path unit]
The lower full tank path unit 860 of the dispensing unit 800 in the present embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 108 to 112. The lower full tank path unit 860 is attached to the lower side of the upper full ball channel unit 850 in the dispensing unit base 801. The lower full-tan ball path unit 860 guides the gaming ball discharged from the normal outlet 850 d of the upper full-tan ball path unit 850 forward to guide it from the front end to the through ball passage 273 of the door frame 3. And a full induction channel 862 for guiding game balls discharged from the full tank outlet 850e of the upper full tank path unit 850 forward to the full tank receptacle 274 of the door frame 3 from the front end, A guideway opening / closing door 863 for opening and closing the front end opening of the induction passage 861 and the full induction passage 862 according to the opening / closing of the door frame 3 with respect to the main frame 4 And a closing spring 864 urging the front end opening of the

  In addition, the lower full-tan ball path unit 860 guides the gaming balls discharged from the upper ball outlet 850h of the upper full-tan ball path unit 850 forward and from above the center right end in the front-rear direction on the substrate unit base 910 of the substrate unit 900. A lower ball out guideway 865 is provided for release into.

  In the lower full-tan ball route unit 860, the normal guide path 861, the full-tan guide path 862, and the lower open ball guide path 865 are arranged in order from the left side to the right side in front view. The rear ends of the normal guide path 861, the full guide path 862, and the lower ball removal guide path 865 open upward. The normal guiding path 861 and the full guiding path 862 extend forward to the vicinity of the front end of the main body frame 4 so that the front end side is lower than the width at which the game balls are arranged side by side. Furthermore, the full induction passage 862 usually extends forward at a lower position than the induction passage 861. The normal induction passage 861, the full induction passage 862, and the lower ball out induction passage 865 are formed by an upper case 866 and a lower case 867 which can be divided up and down as shown in the drawing.

  The guideway opening / closing door 863 is rotatably attached at a front end of the lower case 867 between the normal guideway 861 and the full induction way 862 and is closed by a closing spring 864 in a clockwise direction as viewed from the front. It is energized. More specifically, at the front end of the lower full tank path unit 860, the full induction channel 862, which is open to the right of the front end opening of the normal induction channel 861 in a front view, normally It is placed at a lower position by the height of the ball. And, the guideway opening / closing door 863 is attached rotatably around an axis extending in the front and rear direction, generally at a position below the guideway 861 and at the left side of the full induction passage 862.

  The guideway opening / closing door 863 has a disk-like base 863a rotatably mounted, and a first door plate 863b which extends in a flat plate shape obliquely from the base 863a to the upper left and can normally close the front end opening of the guideway 861. A second door plate 863c extending flatly to the right from the base 863a and capable of closing the front end opening of the full induction channel 862; and an extension 863d extending flatly from the base 863a to the lower left side The operation projection 863 e protrudes forward from the front end of the extension 863 d and can contact the door opening / closing contact portion 281 of the door cover 3 with the door opening / closing contact portion 281.

  Here, closing the front end openings of the normal induction passage 861 and the full induction passage 862 does not have to close the openings, as long as the game balls can not pass. The actuating projection 863e is formed in a short arc shape centered on the base 863a in a front view shape, and is inclined so that the front end surface projects forward as it approaches the end in the counterclockwise direction. doing.

  The guideway opening / closing door 863 is biased in a clockwise direction as viewed from the front by a closing spring 864, and the second door plate portion 863c is from the lower side of the front end opening of the full induction path 862 at the front end of the lower case 867. By being in contact with the boss portion 867a protruding forward, rotation in the clockwise direction is restricted.

  In the lower full tank passage unit 860 of the present embodiment, in the state where the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the front end is the ball passing passage 273 in the far cover unit 270 of the door frame 3, the full tank reception 274 and the door opening / closing It is attached to the position which opposes the contact part 281 (refer FIG. 112). And, in the state where the doorway 3 is open with respect to the main body frame 4, nothing is in contact with the operation projection 863e in the state where the doorway 3 is open to the body frame 4. Thus, the second door plate 863 c is rotated in the clockwise direction as viewed from the front, and is stopped in a state in which the second door plate 863 c is in contact with the boss 867 a of the lower case 867. In this state, the first door plate portion 863b and the second door plate portion 863c are located at the front of the front end opening of the normal guide path 861 and the full guide path 862 and close the front end opening (FIG. 111). See (a)). Therefore, in this state, the gaming balls in the normal induction passage 861 and the full induction passage 862 can not move forward from the front end opening, and even when the door frame 3 is opened, the normal induction passage 861 and full induction There are no spills of gaming balls from the road 862.

  Then, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the door open / close contact portion 281 of the far cover unit 270 in the door frame 3 abuts on the front end face of the operation projection 863e of the guideway opening / closing door 863 The inclination of the front end face of the projection 863 e acts on the urging force of the closing spring 864 to turn the guide path opening / closing door 863 in the counterclockwise direction in a front view. As a result, the first door plate 863 b and the second door plate 863 c that normally closed the front end opening of the induction passage 861 and the full induction passage 862 rotate in the direction away from the front end opening. The front end opening of the full tank induction passage 862 is in an open state (see FIG. 111 (b)). In this state, as shown in the figure, the first door plate 863 b is located below the front end opening of the normal guide passage 861, and the second door plate 863 c is located above the front end opening of the full induction passage 862. .

  In the state where the front end opening of the normal induction passage 861 and the full induction passage 862 is opened, the door frame 3 is completely closed with respect to the main body frame 4, and the normal induction passage 861 and the full The through ball passage 273 and the full ball receiving hole 274 of the far cover unit 270 in the door frame 3 are located on the front side of the front end opening of the guide passage 862 and penetrated from the side of the normal guide passage 861 and the full guide passage 862 The game ball can be delivered to the ball passage 273 and the full tank ball receptacle 274 side.

  In this manner, the front end openings of the normal induction passage 861 and the full induction passage 862 are made different by vertically varying the front end openings of the normal induction passage 861 and the full induction passage 862 and rotating the induction passage opening / closing door 863. Since the opening and closing of the induction passage opening / closing door 863 can be made as narrow as possible, the opening / closing mechanism of the normal passage 861 and the full induction passage 862 can be miniaturized. Therefore, the space for other members can be relatively enlarged, and the internal space of the pachinko machine 1 can be used more effectively.

  In the payout unit 800 of the present embodiment, more gaming balls from the payout device 830 in a state where the upper tray 321 of the door frame 3 is full of gaming balls and can not release the gaming balls to the upper tray 321. When the player pays out, the game balls can be stored until the inside of the normal guiding path 861 of the lower full-tan ball path unit 860 is full of game balls. Then, when the game ball is further paid out from the payout device 830 in a state where the normal guide path 861 is full of game balls, the game ball is normally released in the upper ball storage passage 850c of the upper full tank path unit 850. If it stays above the outlet 850d and exceeds the partition piece 850f, it flows to the full tank outlet 850e side, and the full tank channel 862 of the lower full tank path unit 860 from the full tank outlet 850e, The payout of the game ball is automatically switched to the lower plate 322 through the foul cover unit 270. Thereafter, when the game ball is further paid out from the payout device 830 and the lower plate 322 is full of the game ball in addition to the upper plate 321 and the game ball can not be supplied to the lower plate 322, the fall cover unit 270 The game ball is stored in the storage passage 277 of The upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 are filled with gaming balls when the movable piece 278 is rotated by the storing passage in the storage passage 277 and detected by the full detection sensor 279. Is notified, and the payout of the gaming ball by the payout device 830 is temporarily stopped until the detection of the movable piece 278 by the full tank detection sensor 279 is cancelled.

  The game ball is stored until the movable piece 278 is detected in the storage passage 277 of the far cover unit 270, for example, when the payout device 830 stops the payout of the game ball in response to the detection of the movable piece 278 by the full tank detection sensor 279. In the upstream storage passage 277, the full tank induction passage 862 of the lower full tank passage unit 860, and the upper ball storage passage 850 c of the upper full tank passage unit 850. When the game ball of the above is paid out, the payout of the game ball by the payout device 830 may be stopped. As a result, since it is possible to store more gaming balls than conventional pachinko machines, in the gaming state in which many gaming balls are paid out, such as during a big hit, the upper tray 321 and the lower tray 322 It is possible to reduce the need to be concerned about being filled with gaming balls, and to allow the player to concentrate on and play a big hit game.

[4-7. Substrate unit]
The board | substrate unit 900 of the main body frame 4 in this embodiment is demonstrated with reference to FIG. 91 thru | or FIG. The substrate unit 900 of the main body frame 4 is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 on the left side of the main body frame base 600 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and the speaker for bass A speaker unit 920 having a 921. A power supply substrate box 930 mounted on the right side in front view on the rear side of the substrate unit base 910 and having a power supply substrate housed therein, and attached to the rear side of the speaker unit 920. An interface control board box 940 in which the interface control board is housed, and a payout control board 951 mounted across the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and controlling the payout of gaming balls. And a delivery control board box 950. .

  The board unit 900 includes a door frame relay board 911 mounted on the front surface of the board unit base 910 so as to face forward from the connection opening 606 of the main body frame base 600. The door frame relay board 911 relays the connection between the payout control board 951, the main control board 1310, and the peripheral control board 1510 and the door main body relay board attached to the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3. It is for. The dispensing device 830 is controlled by the dispensing control substrate 951 accommodated in the dispensing control substrate box 950.

[5. Overall configuration of the game board]
Next, the entire configuration of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 114 to 123. FIG. 114 is a front view of the gaming board in which the panel board of the gaming panel is in an opaque state. FIG. 115 is a perspective view of the game board in the state of FIG. 114 as viewed from the right front, FIG. 116 is a perspective view of the game board in the state of FIG. It is a perspective view. FIG. 118 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line R-R in FIG. 114, and FIG. 119 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line S-S in FIG. Further, FIG. 120 is a front view of a front unit of the game board, cut at substantially the center in the front-rear direction in the game area. FIG. 121 is a front view of the game board in which the panel board of the game panel is in a transparent state. FIG. 122 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into main components and viewed from the front, and FIG. 123 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into main components and viewed from the rear.

  The game board 5 has a game area 5a in which a game ball is hit when the player operates the handle 302 of the handle unit 300. In addition, the game board 5 is attached to the front component 1000 which divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a and the outer shape is substantially square in a front view, and is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000. Rows are attached by inserting a game ball into the game area 5a, which is attached to the plate-shaped game panel 1100 to be partitioned, the substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200. And a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 for controlling the game contents to be played. A plurality of obstacle nails in contact with the game balls are implanted in a predetermined gauge array (not shown) at a portion in the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100.

  In addition, the game board 5 displays the game situation based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, and the function display unit 1400 attached to the player side in the lower left corner of the front component 1000 so as to be visible to the player A peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the 1100, a game board side effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and a front face of the game panel 1100 And a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100. While the game board side effect display device 1600 is attached to the back surface of the back unit 3000, the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the back surface of the game board side effect display device 1600.

  The outer periphery of the game panel 1100 is formed slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000, and the outer periphery of the transparent flat panel plate 1110 and the panel plate 1110 is held. And a frame-like panel holder 1120 to which the back unit 3000 is attached on the rear surface.

  The front unit 2000 has a plurality of general winning openings 2001 always open to accept the game balls driven into the game area 5a and a plurality of general winning openings 2001 at different positions in the game area 5a. A first start port 2002 always openable to receive the ball, a gate unit 2003 attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a for detecting passage of the game ball, and the game ball pass the gate unit 2003 In accordance with the result of the regular lottery that is drawn by the second game, it is possible to receive the game ball according to the result of the second lottery, and the first special game lottery by receiving the game ball to the first game opening 2002 or the second game machine 2004 A first large winning opening 2005 and a second large winning opening 2006 are provided which allow the game ball to be accepted in any of the two according to the lottery result or the second special lottery result.

  Further, the front unit 2000 is mounted right above the out port 1126 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and has a starting port unit 2100 having a first starting port 2002 and a front view left of the starting port unit 2100 Side unit 2200 which is attached along the inner rail 1002 and has a plurality of (three in this case) general winning openings 2001, and a side slope attached to the upper left end of the side unit 2200 in a front view 2300 and a front view right side of a starting opening unit 2100 which is a front view lower right corner in the game area 5a are attached to one general winning opening 2001, a gate portion 2003, a second starting opening 2004, a first large winning opening Attacker unit 2400 having the 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006, the starting opening unit 2100 and the side uni In above the bets 2200, and a frame-shaped center won game 2500 is attached to the front view substantially central slightly above closer in the game area 5a, a.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the back surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box shape open at the front and is attached to the back surface of the back box 3010 and the back box 3010 having a square opening 3010 a in the back wall. A lock mechanism 3020 for removably attaching the panel side effect display device 1600, an effect drive substrate 3031 attached to the lower surface of the opening 3010a on the rear surface of the back box 3010, and an effect drive substrate on the rear surface of the back box 3010 A panel relay substrate 3032 mounted on the right side of the rear view of the panel 3031, a lower left relay substrate 3033 mounted on the right side of the panel relay substrate 3032 on the rear surface of the back box 3010, and an effect drive substrate on the rear surface of the rear box 3010 And a lower right relay substrate 3034 attached to the left side in a rear view of 3031.

  Furthermore, back unit 3000 is a back front decoration unit 3100 attached from the front end of back box 3010 to the left side and the lower side in a front view, and the back mounted to surround opening 3010 a in back box 3010. Inside the middle movable effect unit 3200, the back left movable effect unit 3300 and the back right movable effect unit 3400 mounted on the left and right sides of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010, and above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 The back-up movable effect unit 3500 is mounted, and the back-down movable effect unit 3700 mounted on the lower side of the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010.

[5-1. Front component]
Next, the front component 1000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 124 (a) is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel in the game board as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of (a) as viewed from the back. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape in a front view, an inner shape penetrating in a substantially circular shape in the front-rear direction, and the outer periphery of the game area 5a is divided by the inner shape of the inner shape. The front component 1000 is an outer rail 1001 which extends in an arc shape along the circumferential direction clockwise from the lower end on the left side to the left side in front view and extends to the upper right oblique side passing through the upper end in the left and right direction in front view; The inner rail 1002 disposed inside the front component 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extending in an arc shape from the center lower portion in the front view left-right direction to the upper left diagonal upper part And an out guiding portion 1003 which is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and is inclined to be lower toward the rear.

  Further, the front component 1000 includes a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 which are linearly inclined such that the right end is slightly higher from the right end in front view of the out guiding portion 1003 to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000. The right rail 1005 extends from the right end of the front component 1000 along the right side of the front component 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001, and the upper portion is curved inward of the front component 1000; A stop portion 1006 is connected to the upper end of the base 1001 and is in contact with the game ball rolled along the outer rail 1001.

  Also, the front component 1000 is pivotally supported at the upper end of the inner rail 1002 and has a closed position and a front view clock extending upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space with the outer rail 1001. A backflow preventing member (not shown) which is pivotable in the direction of rotation to be pivotable only between the open position where it and the outer rail 1001 are open and to return to the closed position side. It has 1007.

  Furthermore, the front component 1000 is located outside the portion of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 which extends substantially perpendicularly from the lower end, the lower side of the out guiding portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and the outer side of the right rail 1005, In each part, it has a crime prevention recess 1008 recessed rearward from the front end. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the crime prevention recess 1008 has a rear projection 202 protruding to the rear of the crime prevention cover 200 in the door frame 3. It will be in the inserted state. As a result, the space between the crime prevention cover 200 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is intricately bent by the rear projection 202 of the crime prevention cover 200 and the crime prevention recess 1008 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is made to enter the game area 5a from below the front of the board 5 between the crime prevention cover 200 and the front component 1000, it will be blocked by the rear projection 202 and the crime prevention recess 1008. , And can prevent unauthorized tools from entering the gaming area 5a.

  Further, although not shown, the front component 1000 includes a plurality of positioning projections that project rearward from the rear end of the inner rail 1002. These positioning projections can be positioned and fixed to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 by inserting the positioning projections into the inner rail fixing holes formed in the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100.

  Further, although not shown, the front component 1000 includes a plurality of mounting bosses that project rearward from the rear surface. The plurality of mounting bosses can be positioned between the panel holder 1120 (game panel 1100) by being inserted into the mounting holes (not shown) of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100.

  In addition, the front component 1000 includes a notch 1011 that is cut away from the lower end in the lower left corner in a front view. The notch portion 1011 corresponds to the notch portion 1127 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch portion 1011 and 1127 are penetrated to lower full ball path The front end openings of the normal guideway 861 and the full guideway 862 of the unit 860 are adapted to face forward.

5-2. Game panel]
Next, the game panel 1100 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. The game panel 1100 holds the outer periphery of a flat panel panel 1110 formed of a transparent synthetic resin and the outer periphery of which is formed slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component 1000. And a frame-like panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and to which the back unit 3000 is attached on the rear surface.

  The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, and methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The panel thickness of this panel board 1110 is thinner than the panel holder 1120, and the minimum necessary thickness (8 to 10 mm) which can be sufficiently retained even if an obstacle nail is planted on the front or the front unit 2000 is attached. It is assumed. In this example, the panel board 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin board.

  The panel board 1110 is provided with an out-concave portion 1111 which is recessed upward from the lower end at a portion which becomes the lowest position in the game area 5a. In addition, a plurality of openings 1112 are formed in the panel plate 1110 so as to penetrate front and back and to attach the front unit 2000.

  Further, although not shown, panel plate 1110 is arranged in the vicinity of the outer periphery and has a plurality of fitting holes consisting of round holes penetrating in the front-rear direction, and is arranged in the vicinity of the outer periphery of the lower left part and penetrates in the front-rear direction And a long hole extending. The fitting holes and the long holes are disposed outside the game area 5a, and are positioned with the panel holder 1120. Further, the panel plate 1110 is provided with stepped engagement steps having a front side recessed at both ends of the upper side and both ends of the lower side. These engagement steps are notched up to about half of the thickness of the panel plate 1110, and are disposed outside the game area 5a, similarly to the fitting holes and the long holes, and the panel plate 1110 Is engaged and fixed to the panel holder 1120.

  Further, although not shown, the panel plate 1110 is provided with a plurality of inner rail fixing holes at predetermined positions. The inner rail 1002 can be fixed at a predetermined position by fitting and fixing a positioning projection (not shown) projecting from the rear side of the inner rail 1002 to the inner rail fixing hole.

  The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 has a size including the panel plate 1110 and a substantially square outer shape, and is formed thicker (about 20 mm in this example) than the panel plate 1110. The panel holder 1120 is formed of a synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 detachably holds the panel plate 1110 and has a holding step (not shown) recessed from the front side toward the rear side, and a size substantially equal to that of the game area 5a inside the holding step And a through hole 1122 penetrating in the front-rear direction.

  The depth of the holding step of the panel holder 1120 is substantially the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1110 from the front, and the front of the panel 1110 held in the holding step is substantially the same as the front of the panel holder 1120 It becomes the same side. Further, the front inner circumferential surface of the holding step portion is formed in a size such that a predetermined amount of clearance is formed with respect to the outer circumferential surface of the panel plate 1110. By this clearance, even if the panel board 1110 relatively expands and contracts due to a temperature change and a temporal change, the expansion and contraction can be absorbed.

  Further, although not shown, panel holder 1120 is disposed at a position corresponding to the fitting hole and the long hole formed in panel plate 1110 held by the holding step, from the front surface of the holding step to the front. It has a plurality of projecting pins which extend toward and which can be fitted and inserted into the fitting holes and the long holes of the panel plate 1110. By fitting and inserting these projecting pins into the fitting holes and the long holes of the panel plate 1110, the panel holder 1120 and the panel plate 1110 can be positioned to each other.

  Further, although not shown, the panel holder 1120 is provided with an engagement claw and an engagement piece which engage with the engagement step at a position corresponding to the engagement step of the panel plate 1110. More specifically, the engaging claws are disposed on the upper side of the holding step of the panel holder 1120, correspond to the upper engaging step on the panel plate 1110, and project forward from the front of the holding step, It resiliently engages with the engagement step. The engagement claws are sized so as not to protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 1120.

  The engagement piece of the panel holder 1120 is disposed below the holding step of the panel holder 1120 and corresponds to the lower engagement step of the panel plate 1110. The engagement piece is formed on the upper side (center side) along the front surface of the panel holder, with a gap of a size that allows the insertion step of the panel plate 1110 to be inserted between the engagement piece and the front surface of the holding step. A predetermined amount extends toward the end. The panel plate 1110 is detachably held to the panel holder 1120 by engaging the engagement steps of the panel plate 1110 with the engagement claws and the engagement pieces.

  In addition, the panel holder 1120 is provided with an out port 1126 penetrating in the front and back direction at a position which is the lowest position in the game area 5a. In the panel holder 1120, the lower side of the rear surface of the out port 1126 is recessed forward to the lower end with the same width as the out port 1126.

  Furthermore, the panel holder 1120 is provided with the notch part 1127 which is notched upward from the lower end in a front view lower left corner. This notch portion 1127 is coincident with the notch portion 1011 of the front component 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, these notch portions 1011 and 1127 are penetrated and the lower full ball passage unit 860 is The front end openings of the normal induction passage 861 and the full induction passage 862 face forward.

  Further, although not shown, panel holder 1120 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes penetrating in the front and back direction at positions corresponding to a plurality of mounting bosses (not shown) in front component member 1000. By inserting the mounting bosses of the front component 1000 into the plurality of mounting holes, the panel holder 1120 can be attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, and the panel holder 1120 (with the front component 1000) The game panel 1100) can be positioned.

  Further, the panel holder 1120 is provided with a square insertion hole 1129 penetrating in the front-rear direction above the cutout 1127. The rear end of the function display unit 1400 is inserted through the insertion hole 1129.

  When the gaming panel 1100 is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000, the out port 1126 of the panel holder 1120 is opened on the rear side of the out guiding portion 1003 of the front component member 1000. As a result, the gaming balls having flowed down to the lower end of the gaming area 5a are guided by the out guiding portion 1003 to the out port 1126 on the rear side, and are discharged to the back side of the gaming panel 1100 through the out port 1126.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1200 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 122 and 123. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape whose upper and front sides are open, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to be lower toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 can cover the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side in the assembled state to the game board 5. Thus, the game balls discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1126 and the game balls discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 can all be received and formed on the bottom surface It is possible to discharge downward from the discharged portion 1201.

5-4. Main control board unit]
Next, the main control unit 1300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 122 and 123. Main control unit 1300 is removably attached to the rear surface of substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 118) for controlling game contents and payout of game balls, and a main control board box 1320 that accommodates the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. And have.

  The main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of sealing mechanisms, and when the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism is broken next to open the main control board box 1320. It is necessary to leave a trace of the opening and closing of the main control board box 1320. Therefore, by looking at the trace of the opening and closing, it is possible to detect the improper opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrence against the tampering with the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

  The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the payout control board 951 and the peripheral control board 1510. Further, the main control board 1310 is provided with a function display unit 1400, a gate sensor 2401, a first starting opening sensor 3112, a second starting opening sensor 4004, a magnetic detection sensor 4024, a first special winning opening sensor via a panel relay substrate 3032. 4005, second large winning opening sensor 2402, first receiving sensor 2434, second receiving sensor 2435, general winning hole sensor 3111, gate sensor 2401, start opening solenoid 2107, first attack solenoid 2108, second attack solenoid 2109 , And the distribution solenoid 2110.

[5-5. Function Display Unit]
Next, the function display unit 1400 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 outside the gaming area 5a, as shown. The function display unit 1400 can be viewed from the front (player side) through the through hole 111 of the door frame 3 in a state where the gaming board 5 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 181). The function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on a control signal from the main control board 1310 to display a gaming state (playing status), an ordinary lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like.

  As shown, the function display unit 1400 comprises a state indicator 1401 consisting of one LED for displaying the gaming state, and four LEDs for displaying the result of the ordinary lottery that is drawn by passing the game ball to the gate portion 2003. A normal symbol display 1402, a normal hold indicator 1408 consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations pertaining to the passage of the game ball to the gate unit 2003, and a number drawn by receiving the game ball to the first start opening 2002 A first special symbol display 1403 consisting of eight LEDs for displaying a special lottery result, and a first special reservation number display consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations pertaining to the reception of the game ball to the first starting opening 2002 The second special lottery result selected by the receipt of the game ball to the second start port 2004 A special symbol display 1405, a second special number-of-retentions display 1406 consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations pertaining to the acceptance of the game ball to the second start port 2004, the first special lottery result or the second special lottery When the result is a "big hit" etc., it mainly has a round indicator 1407 consisting of three LEDs for displaying the number of repetitions (the number of rounds) of the opening and closing pattern of the first large winning opening 2005 and the second large winning opening 2006. ing.

  The function display unit 1400 can display the number of holdings, a symbol, and the like by appropriately turning on, off, and blinking the provided LEDs.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 117 and 123 and the like. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the game board side effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. Peripheral control unit 1500 controls peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 118) for controlling effects to be presented to the player based on control signals from main control board 1310, and peripheral control board housing peripheral control board 1510. And a box 1520. Although not shown, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit for controlling a light emission effect, a sound effect, a movable effect, and the like, and an effect display control unit for controlling an effect image. .

  The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected to the main control board 1310, the rendering operation unit 400, various decoration boards on the door frame 3 side, the game board side rendering display device 1600, the rendering drive board 3031, and the like.

[5-7. Game board side effect display device]
Next, the game board side effect display device 1600 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 122 and FIG. The game board side effect display device 1600 is disposed at the center of the game area 5a in a front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. More specifically, the game board side effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the rear wall of the back box 3010 substantially at the center. The gaming board side effect display device 1600 can be viewed from the front side (the player side) through the frame of the center character 2500 in the assembled state of the gaming board 5. The game board side effect display device 1600 is a full color liquid crystal display device using a white LED as a backlight. The game board side effect display device 1600 is connected to the peripheral control board 1510, and can display a predetermined still image or a moving image.

  The game board side effect display device 1600 includes two left fixed pieces 1601 projecting outward from the left side in a front view, and a right fixed piece 1602 projecting outward from the right side in the front view. The game board side effect display device 1600 has two fixed grooves opened on the left inner circumferential surface in a front view left side in a frame-like liquid crystal mounting portion 3010 b of the back box 3010 described later with the liquid crystal screen directed to the front. After inserting the two left fixing pieces 1601 obliquely from the rear of the back box 3010 into the 3010 c, move the right fixing piece 1602 side forward, insert the right fixing piece 1602 into the opening of the locking mechanism 3020, and lock It is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding the mechanism 3020 downward.

[5-8. Overall configuration of table unit]
Next, the overall configuration of the table unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 122 and 123. The front unit 2000 of the game board 5 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, the front end protrudes forward more than the front surface of the panel board 1110 and the rear end penetrates the opening 1112 It projects rearward than the rear surface of the panel plate 1110.

  The front unit 2000 of the present embodiment is capable of receiving the game balls driven into the game area 5a, and has a plurality of general winning openings 2001 always open and a plurality of general winning openings 2001 in the game area 5a. The first start port 2002, which is always open to accept game balls at different positions, the gate unit 2003 attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a for detecting passage of the game balls, and the game balls as gates Lottery by receiving the game ball to the second start port 2004 and the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 that can receive the game ball according to the result of the normal lottery that is drawn by passing the part 2003 The first special winning opening 2005 and the second large winning opening 2006, which can receive game balls in any of the first special lottery results or the second special lottery results

  A plurality of (four in this case) general winning openings 2001 are arranged at the lower part in the game area 5a, three on the left side and one on the right side with respect to the center in the horizontal direction. The first start port 2002 is disposed right above the out port 1126 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a. The gate portion 2003 is disposed near the lower end in the vertical direction near the right end in the front view in the game area 5a. The second start port 2004 is disposed immediately below the gate unit 2003. The first large winning opening 2005 is disposed at the height between the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2002 on the right side of the general winning opening 2001 on the right side from the center in the left-right direction. The second large winning opening 2006 is disposed between the second starting opening 2004 and the first large winning opening 2005.

  Further, the front unit 2000 is provided with a sub-out port 2007 between the first large winning opening 2005 and the second large winning opening 2006 for discharging game balls from the inside of the gaming area 5a.

  Furthermore, the front unit 2000 is mounted right above the out port 1126 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and has a start port unit 2100 having a first start port 2002, and a front view left of the start port unit 2100. Side unit 2200 mounted along the inner rail 1002 and having three general winning openings 2001, a side slope 2300 mounted above the left end of the side unit 2200 in a front view, and a starting opening unit Attacker unit 2400 that is attached to the right side of the front view of the 2100 and has one general winning opening 2001, gate part 2003, second starting opening 2004, first large winning opening 2005, and second large winning opening 2006. And a frame-shaped center character 2500 attached substantially at the center of the game area 5a.

[5-8a. Starting port unit]
Next, start port unit 2100 of front unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 125 (a) is a perspective view of the starting opening unit, the side unit, the side slope, and the attacker unit in the front unit of the game board, viewed from the front, and FIG. 125 (b) is a perspective view of is there. The starting opening unit 2100 is disposed immediately above the out port 1126 near the lower end in the middle in the left-right direction in the gaming area 5a, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. At the top of the starting opening unit 2100, the first starting opening 2002 is always open upward at a size that can receive only one game ball at a time.

  The starting opening unit 2100 has a first starting opening 2002 and is attached to the light transmitting unit main body 2101 attached from the front to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 and to the rear side of the unit main body 2101. And a start-up decorative substrate 2102 (see FIG. 120) on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface. The starting opening unit 2100 can emit light and decorate the lower side of the first starting opening 2002 by causing the LED of the starting opening decorative substrate 2102 to emit light.

  When the starting opening unit 2100 is attached to the panel plate 1110, the first starting opening 2002 projects forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 and then is opened upward, and the first starting opening 2002 will be described later. It is located directly below the chance exit 2536 in the stage 2530 of the center work 2500. Therefore, when the gaming ball is released downward from the chance outlet 2536 of the stage 2530, it is accepted by the first starting opening 2002 with a very high probability. The starting opening unit 2100 guides the gaming ball received in the first starting opening 2002 to the rear of the panel board 1110 and delivers it to the center delivery opening 3135 of the back front decoration unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 described later. it can.

[5-8b. Side unit]
Next, the side unit 2200 of the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The side unit 2200 extends in an arc shape along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the starting opening unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. The side unit 2200 has three general winning openings 2001 which are always open upward.

  The side unit 2200 is provided with three general winning openings 2001 arranged side by side, and the three general winning openings 2001 are arranged to be higher toward the left in front view.

  When the side unit 2200 is attached to the panel plate 1110, the three general winning openings 2001 project forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and also below the first start opening 2002 and at the start It will be in the state arrange | positioned between the mouth unit 2100 and the side slope 2300. FIG. Side unit 2200 guides the game ball received in each general winning opening 2001 to the rear of panel plate 1110 and delivers it to delivery opening 3151 of ball guiding unit 3150 in back decoration unit 3100 of back unit 3000 described later. be able to.

5-8 c. Side slope]
Next, the side slopes 2300 of the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The side slope 2300 is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front slightly lower than the center in the vertical direction in the upper left of the front view of the side unit 2200 in the game area 5a. The side slope 2300 includes a shelf 2301 that protrudes forward and extends in the left and right direction so that the right end in the front view is lowered.

  With the side slope 2300 attached to the front of the panel plate 1110, the left end of the shelf 2301 approaches the inner rail 1002, and the right end of the shelf 2301 is from the leftmost general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200. Is also located on the left. Further, the shelf 2301 is positioned above the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100 in a state where the side slope 2300 is attached to the panel plate 1110. Thereby, the side slope 2300 can guide the gaming ball having flowed down along the inner rail 1002 to the right (the center in the left-right direction of the game area 5a) by the shelf 2301. A game ball may be accepted in any of the starting opening 2002 and the three general winning openings 2001 of the side unit 2200.

[5-8 d. Attacker unit]
Next, the attacker unit 2400 of the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 125 and 126. FIG. 126 is an explanatory view showing the attacker unit in the front unit cut from the front and back in the approximate center of the game area. The attacker unit 2400 is disposed on the right in front view of the starting opening unit 2100 which is the lower right corner in front view in the game area 5a, and is attached to the front of the panel plate 1110 from the front. The attacker unit 2400 has one general winning opening 2001 among four general winning openings 2001, a gate section 2003, a second starting opening 2004, a first large winning opening 2005, a second large winning opening 2006, and a sub-out opening 2007. Is equipped.

  As shown in FIG. 126 and the like, the outer shape of the attacker unit 2400 in a front view has a base inclined such that the right end is positioned slightly upward, a right side rising substantially perpendicularly from the right end of the base, and an upper end of the right side. It is formed in a substantially triangular shape having an oblique side extending obliquely so as to connect with the left end of the bottom side. In the attacker unit 2400, a gate unit 2003 through which gaming balls flow up and down is disposed at the upper right corner, and a second starting opening 2004 which can be opened forward is disposed directly under the gate unit 2003. . In addition, the second large winning opening 2006 which can be opened upward is arranged at the lower left of the second starting opening 2004, and the attacker unit 2400 always opens left at the lower left of the second large winning opening 2006 The sub out port 2007 is arranged. Furthermore, while the first large winning opening 2005 which can be opened upward is disposed on the left slightly below the sub-out opening 2007, the attacker unit 2400 is always open upward at the lower left of the first large winning opening 2005. The general prize winning slot 2001 is arranged.

  The attacker unit 2400 has a gate sensor 2401 for detecting gaming balls passing through the gate portion 2003, a second starting opening sensor 4004 for detecting gaming balls received by the second starting opening 2004, and a first large winning opening 2005. A first large winning opening sensor 4005 for detecting the accepted gaming ball and a second large winning opening sensor 2402 for detecting the gaming ball accepted by the second large winning opening 2006 are provided.

  The attacking unit 2400 has a second starting opening door 2411 that opens and closes the second starting opening 2004 according to the result of the normal drawing drawn by passing the gaming balls of the gate unit 2003, the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 The first special winning opening door 2412 that opens and closes the first special winning opening 2005 according to the first special lottery result or the second special drawing result that is drawn by the acceptance of gaming balls to the first start opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2002 The second special winning opening door 2413 opens and closes the second special winning opening 2006 according to the first special drawing result or the second special drawing result drawn by drawing the game ball to the starting opening 2004.

  The attacker unit 2400 extends vertically at the upper right corner in a front view and can circulate game balls, and a left side passage 2421 extends vertically at the left side of the gate passages 2420 and can circulate game balls. The right side passage 2422 which extends vertically up and down on the right side of the gate passage 2420 and through which gaming balls can flow, the gate passage 2420, the left side passage 2421 and the right side passage 2422 The attacking passage 2423 extends leftward than the left side passage 2421 and allows the game ball to flow, and extends leftward so that the left end becomes lower below the left side of the attacking passage 2423 and guides the game ball And a possible attachment shelf 2424.

  In the gate passage 2420, the gate portion 2003 is disposed in the vicinity of the upper portion, and the second start port 2004 is disposed in the lower portion. The left and right walls of the gate passage 2420 pass through so as to communicate with the left side passage 2421 and the right side passage 2422 between the gate portion 2003 and the second starting port 2004, respectively. The gate passage 2420 extends up and down with a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the gaming ball.

  The second passage winning opening 2006 is opened on the bottom wall on the left side of the left side passage 2421 in the attacking passage 2423. In the attacker passage 2423, a second large winning opening door 2413 which closes the second large winning opening 2006 so as to be able to open and close forms a part of the bottom wall. In addition, the lowermost left end side of the attachment passage 2423 opens downward. The second large winning opening 2006 is opened about 1.5 times the outer diameter of the gaming ball.

  The first large winning opening 2005 is opened, and the first large winning opening door 2412 which closes the first large winning opening 2005 so as to be openable and closable forms a part of the attachment shelf 2424. The first large winning opening 2005 is opened about three times as wide as the outer diameter of the gaming ball. At the right end of the attachment shelf 2424, a sub out port 2007 is open. Further, one general winning opening 2001 is opened at the lower left than the left end of the attachment shelf 2424.

  The second start opening door 2411 is capable of closing the second start opening 2004 opened forward from the front, and in the vicinity of the lower end of the second start opening 2004, the lower side is rotatable about an axis extending leftward and rightward It is attached. The second start opening door 2411 is rotated (turned) so that the upper side moves forward, thereby opening the second start opening 2004 and closing the gate passage 2420 and flowing down the gate passage 2420. The game ball can be guided to the second start opening 2004 side and received into the second start opening 2004. The second start opening door 2411 is formed to rotate by the drive of the start opening solenoid 2107, and closes the second start opening 2004 when the start opening solenoid 2107 is OFF (during non-energization), and the start opening When the solenoid 2107 is ON (during energization), the second start port 2004 is opened.

  The first large winning opening door 2412 is formed in a plate shape extending in the front and back direction and extending left and right so that the left end is low, and the first large opening by moving forward and backward The winning opening 2005 can be closed. The first large winning opening door 2412 closes the first large winning opening 2005 by moving forward, forms a part of the attachment shelf 2424 and forms the left of the game ball which has flowed down onto the attachment shelf 2424. It is guided to the bottom and discharged downward from the left end of the attachment shelf 2424. In addition, the first large winning opening door 2412 opens the first large winning opening 2005 by retreating, and the gaming ball that has flowed down onto the attachment shelf 2424 through the attachment passage 2423 or the like is the first large winning opening. May be accepted in 2005. The first big winning opening door 2412 is formed to advance and retreat by the driving of the first attachment solenoid 2108, and closes the first big winning opening 2005 when the first attachment solenoid 2108 is OFF (during non-energization). When the first attachment solenoid 2108 is ON (during energization), the first large winning opening 2005 is opened.

  The second large winning opening door 2413 is formed in a plate shape extending in the front and back direction and extending left and right so that the left end is low, and the second large opening by moving forward and backward The winning opening 2006 can be closed. The second large winning opening door 2413 closes the second large winning opening 2006 by moving forward and forms a part of the bottom wall of the attacking passage 2423, and the gate passage 2420, the left side passage 2421 and the right side passage The gaming ball which has passed any of 2422 is guided to the left and discharged downward from the left end of the attack path 2423. In addition, the second large winning opening door 2413, by moving backward to open the second large winning opening 2006, to allow the second large winning opening 2006 to accept the game ball that has entered the attack passage 2423 with high probability it can. The second large winning opening door 2413 is formed to move forward and backward by the drive of the second attachment solenoid 2109, and closes the second large winning opening 2006 when the second attachment solenoid 2109 is OFF (during non-energization). When the second attachment solenoid 2109 is ON (during energization), the second large winning opening 2006 is opened.

  In addition, the attacker unit 2400 has an inner passage 2430 through which gaming balls received in the second big winning opening 2006 can flow, a first receiving port (first ball passage) 2431 opened at the bottom of the inner passage 2430, and Received in a second receiving port (second ball passage) 2432, a distributing piece 2433 for distributing gaming balls to either the first receiving port 2431 or the second receiving port 2432 in the inner path 2430, and the first receiving port 2431 And a second receiving sensor 2435 for detecting the gaming ball received by the second receiving port 2432.

  The inner passage 2430 is formed on the downstream side of the second big winning opening sensor 2402. The first receiving port 2431 is disposed immediately below the portion of the second large winning opening sensor 2402 through which the game ball passes, and the second receiving port 2432 is disposed on the right side of the first receiving port 2431 in a front view . The distribution piece 2433 is disposed between the first receiving port 2431 and the second receiving port 2432 in the inner passage 2430, and the lower side thereof is rotatably mounted around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. In the distribution piece 2433, a state where the second large winning hole 2006 and the first receiving port 2431 are in communication with each other by rising vertically, the upper side moves leftward in a front view, and the side wall on the left side of the internal passage 2430 It is attached so as to rotate in a state in which the second big winning opening 2006 and the second receiving port 2432 are in communication with each other in an abutting (or approaching) manner. The distribution piece 2433 is formed to rotate by the drive of the distribution solenoid 2110, and when the distribution solenoid 2110 is OFF (during non-energization), the game ball is distributed to the first receiving port 2431 and distribution is performed. When the solenoid 2110 is ON (during energization), the game ball is distributed to the second receiving port 2432.

  In the attached state on the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the gate passage 2420 is located immediately below the opening on the downstream side of the right guide passage 2540 in the center member 2500 described later, and the gate portion 2003 is located above the stage 2530 of the center character 2500. Further, the first large winning opening 2005 and the general winning opening 2001 are located below the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100.

  Subsequently, the flow of gaming balls in the attacker unit 2400 will be described. Since the gate unit 2003 of the attacker unit 2400 is located above the stage 2530 of the center character 2500 in the assembled state on the game board 5, the gate unit 2003 is held even if the game ball is released from the stage 2530. There is no passing through. Therefore, only the gaming balls having flowed down the right side of the center character 2500 may pass through the gate unit 2003. The upper end opening of the gate passage 2420 in which the gate portion 2003 is disposed is opened right below the opening on the downstream side of the right guiding passage 2540 in the center character 2500, so the right side of the center character 2500 The game ball having flowed down enters the gate passage 2420 with high probability and passes through the gate section 2003.

  Then, the gaming ball having passed through the gate portion 2003 is discharged from the gate passage 2420 to the attacker passage 2423 through the front of the second starting opening door 2411 closing the second starting opening 2004 immediately below. At this time, when the second start opening door 2411 is turned forward and is in the open position, the gaming ball having passed through the gate portion 2003 abuts on the back surface of the second start opening door 2411 and the second It is guided to the starting opening 2004 side and is accepted by the second starting opening 2004. The second starting opening door 2411 is based on the result of the normal lottery that is selected by the game ball passing through the gate portion 2003 (the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 2401) (the normal lottery result is “normal hit” At the same time, the game ball itself that has drawn the “normal hit” is accepted by the second starting opening 2004 by appropriately setting the drawing time of the normal drawing result, the opening / closing timing of the second starting opening door 2411 and the like. be able to.

  The gaming balls received in the second starting opening 2004 are detected by the second starting opening sensor, and then discharged downward (on the substrate holder 1200) on the rear side of the gaming panel 1100.

  In the gate passage 2420, since the left and right sides of the portion between the gate portion 2003 and the second start opening 2004 communicate with the left side passage 2421 and the right side passage 2422, the game passed through the gate portion 2003 A ball may enter the left side passage 2421 or the right side passage 2422 through a portion which rarely communicates. That is, the gaming ball having passed through the gate unit 2003 does not necessarily pass in front of the second starting opening door 2411.

  If the gaming ball which has flowed down the right side of the center character 2500 does not enter the gate passage 2420, it enters either the left side passage 2421 or the right side passage 2422 disposed on the left and right sides of the gate passage 2420, It is discharged to the attacker passage 2423 through the left side passage 2421 or the right side passage 2422.

  The gaming ball released from the gate passage 2420, the left side passage 2421 or the right side passage 2422 to the attacher passage 2423 is guided leftward along the slope of the attacher passage 2423, and downward from the left end of the attacher passage 2423. Released into At this time, when the second large winning opening door 2413 closing the second large winning opening 2006 is retreated and the second large winning opening 2006 is opened, the gaming ball released into the attack passage 2423 is It is highly likely to be accepted in the second large winning opening 2006. The game ball received in the second large winning opening 2006 is detected by the second large winning opening sensor 2402 and is then sent to the inner passage 2430, and the first receiving port 2431 or the second receiving port 2432 by the distribution piece 2433 It is distributed to any of.

  The gaming balls received in the first receiving port 2431 or the second receiving port 2432 are detected by the first receiving port sensor 2434 or the second receiving port sensor 2435, and then the lower side of the game panel 1100 (substrate holder Discharged on the

  The second large winning opening 2006 has a width of about 1.5 times the outer diameter of the game ball, so the second large winning opening door 2413 recedes and the second large winning opening 2006 Even if it is open, the game ball may jump over the second large winning opening 2006 and may not be accepted by the second large winning opening 2006, depending on the speed, behavior, etc. of the gaming balls circulating in the attack path 2423. .

  The gaming ball discharged from the adjacency passage 2423 flows down onto the adjacency shelf 2424, is guided to the adjacency shelf 2424, and is discharged downward from the left end of the adjacency shelf 2424. At this time, when the first large winning opening door 2412 is retreated and the first large winning opening 2005 is opened, the game ball released from the attacker passage 2423 will be accepted by the first large winning opening 2005. . Therefore, when the first big winning opening 2005 is open, if you hit the gaming ball into the gaming area 5a so as to circulate the right side of the center role 2500, the gaming ball in the first big winning opening 2005 with high probability It can be accepted.

  The game balls received in the first large winning opening 2005 are detected by the first large winning opening sensor 4005, and then discharged downward (on the substrate holder 1200) on the rear side of the gaming panel 1100.

  The gaming balls discharged downward from the attachment shelf 2424 may be accepted by one general winning opening 2001 disposed below. The gaming balls received in the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2400 are guided to the rear side of the panel board 1110 and then delivered to the right delivery port 3136 of the back front decoration unit 3100 in the back unit 3000. On the other hand, the game balls not accepted by the general winning opening 2001 pass through the out port 1126 at the lower end of the game area 5a and are discharged downward (on the substrate holder 1200) on the back side of the game panel 1100.

5-8 e. Center feature]
Next, the center product 2500 of the table unit 2000 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. FIG. 127 (a) is a perspective view of the center part in the front unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 127 (b) is a perspective view of the center part from the rear. The center character 2500 is disposed slightly above the center of the game area 5a, above the starting opening unit 2100 and the side unit 2200, and slightly above the center of the front view, and is attached to the front of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. It is done. The center character 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and visually recognizes from the front the effect units and the like provided in the game board side effect display device 1600 and the back unit 3000 disposed behind the game panel 1100 through the frame. be able to.

  In the frame-shaped center character 2500, the entire circumference excluding the lower side protrudes forward more than the front surface of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100, and the game ball hit into the game area 5a is in the frame It can not be invaded.

  The center character 2500 is capable of releasing the warp ball 2520 having the game ball in the game area 5a open to the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the front view and the game ball having entered the warp ball 2520 within the frame. It has a warp outlet 2522 that is open, and a stage 2530 that can be released into the game area 5a after rolling the gaming ball discharged from the warp outlet 2522 in the left-right direction (see FIG. 120 etc.) .

  The stage 2530 of the center character 2500 is a curved shape in which the center side in the left-right direction is recessed and corresponds to a position directly above the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100, that is, the center character 2500 is In the state of being attached to 1110), the substantially central position in the left-right direction is formed in a wave shape so as to be slightly higher than the left and right sides. This stage 2530 can release the game balls into the game area 5a from the lowermost portions on both sides of the center formed in a wave shape.

  The center character 2500 is opened forward at the highest position of the central slightly elevated part of the stage 2530, and the gaming ball enters the chance entrance 2535 where the game ball can enter and the chance entrance 2535. And a chance outlet 2536 for discharging into the game area 5a below the stage 2530. The chance exit 2536 is located immediately above the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100 in a state where the center product 2500 is assembled on the game board 5. As a result, when the gaming ball is released from the chance outlet 2536, it is accepted by the first starting opening 2002 with extremely high probability.

  In addition, the center product 2500 includes a right guiding passage 2540 that guides the gaming ball, which has flowed down along the outer peripheral surface on the right side in a front view, to a slight left and then releases the gaming ball downward. The right guide passage 2540 is formed such that the downstream end of the right guide passage 2540 is located immediately above the gate passage 2420 (gate portion 2003) of the attacker unit 2400 when the center product 2500 is assembled on the game board 5. It is done.

  The center accessory 2500 is formed such that the outer peripheral surface on the right side is separated from the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000 slightly larger than the outer diameter of the gaming ball when assembled on the game board 5. Therefore, when the gaming ball circulates on the right side of the center character 2500, it circulates along the outer peripheral surface on the right side of the center character 2500, and all gaming balls circulating on the right side of the center character 2500 are in the right guiding passage 2540. It is approached and guided. As a result, when the game ball is driven into the game area 5a so that the game ball circulates on the right side of the center character 2500 (so-called right-handed), the game ball can pass through the gate portion 2003 with a very high probability. it can.

[5-9. Overall configuration of back unit]
Next, the entire configuration of the back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 128 to 131. FIG. 128 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 129 is a perspective view of the back unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 130 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit disassembled into main components and seen from the front, and FIG. 131 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit disassembled into main components and viewed from the back is there. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100. Further, on the rear side of the back unit 3000, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the peripheral control unit 1500 are attached.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the back surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box shape open at the front and is attached to the back surface of the back box 3010 and the back box 3010 having a square opening 3010 a in the back wall. A lock mechanism 3020 for removably attaching the panel side effect display device 1600, an effect drive substrate 3031 attached to the lower surface of the opening 3010a on the rear surface of the back box 3010, and an effect drive substrate on the rear surface of the back box 3010 A panel relay substrate 3032 mounted on the right side of the rear view of the panel 3031, a lower left relay substrate 3033 mounted on the right side of the panel relay substrate 3032 on the rear surface of the back box 3010, and an effect drive substrate on the rear surface of the rear box 3010 And a lower right relay substrate 3034 attached to the left side in a rear view of 3031.

  The effect drive board 3031 is based on the control signal from the peripheral control board 1510, the back front decoration unit 3100, the back inside movable effect unit 3200, the back left movable effect unit 3300, the back right movable effect unit 3400, the back upper movable effect unit A decoration substrate, a drive motor, and the like provided in the 3500 and the under-the-back movable effect unit 3700 are controlled. The panel relay board 3032 includes a main control board 1310, a function display unit 1400, a gate sensor 2401, a first start port sensor 3112, a second start port sensor 4004, a magnetic detection sensor 4024, a first special winning port sensor 4005, a second Large winning opening sensor 2402, first reception sensor 2434, second reception sensor 2435, general winning opening sensor 3111, gate sensor 2401, start opening solenoid 2107, first attachment solenoid 2108, second attachment solenoid 2109, distribution solenoid It relays the connection with 2110.

  The lower left relay substrate 3033 relays the connection between the effect drive substrate 3031 and the back left movable effect unit 3300. The lower right relay substrate 3034 is connected to the effect driving substrate 3031 with the back front decoration unit 3100, the back inside movable effect unit 3200, the back right movable effect unit 3400, the back upper movable effect unit 3500, and the back lower movable effect unit 3700 Are relayed.

  In addition, the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 so as to cover the rear sides of the effect drive substrate 3031, the panel relay substrate 3032, the lower left relay substrate 3033, and the lower right relay substrate 3034 respectively. A substrate cover 3035, a panel relay substrate cover 3036, a lower left relay substrate cover 3037, and a lower right relay substrate cover 3038 are provided.

  In addition, back unit 3000 is a back front decoration unit 3100 attached from the front end of back box 3010 to the left side and the lower side in a front view, and the back attached to surround opening 3010 a in back box 3010. Inside the middle movable effect unit 3200, the back left movable effect unit 3300 and the back right movable effect unit 3400 mounted on the left and right sides of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010, and above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 The back-up movable effect unit 3500 is mounted, and the back-down movable effect unit 3700 mounted on the lower side of the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010.

[5-9a. Back box]
Next, the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 128 to 131. The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box shape open at the front, an opening 3010 a which is squarely penetrated to the back wall, and a flat frame which protrudes backward from the periphery of the opening 3010 a. A liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, and two fixing grooves 3010c which are recessed outward from the inside of the frame in the rear view right side in the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b and into which the left fixed piece 1601 of the game board side effect display device 1600 is inserted And a notch 3010d to which a lock mechanism 3020 is attached from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 at the center in the vertical direction of the left side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b in the back view.

  The opening 3010 a of the back box 3010 is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the game board side effect display device 1600. In addition, the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010 b is formed in a size in which the game board side effect display device 1600 can be fitted into the frame. In the back box 3010, the lock mechanism 3020 is slidably mounted vertically on the left side of the rear surface of the cutout 3010d in the rear surface.

  In addition, the back box 3010 includes a flat fixing piece 3010 e extending outward from the front end. The fixed piece portion 3010 e is attached to the panel holder 1120 with the front surface in contact with the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100. In the back box 3010, bosses, mounting holes and the like for mounting the movable effect units and the like are formed at appropriate positions.

[5-9b. Back front decoration unit]
Next, the back front decoration unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 128 to 132. FIG. 132 (a) is a front view of the back decoration unit in the back unit, and FIG. 132 (b) is an enlarged sectional view taken along line T-T in FIG. The back front decoration unit 3100 is attached so as to extend from the front side left side to the lower side of the front end of the back box 3010.

  The back front decoration unit 3100 is formed in an L shape (crescent type) along the left side and the lower side of the front end of the back box 3010, and is a transparent unit base 3110 attached to the front end of the back box 3010; A general winning opening sensor 3111 for detecting gaming balls received in the general winning openings 2001 of the front unit 2000, and a first starting opening sensor 3112 for detecting gaming balls received in the first starting openings 2002 of the front unit 2000; The game area 5a is provided with a magnetic detection sensor 4024 capable of detecting improper magnetism that has been acted from the outside.

  Also, the back front decoration unit 3100 extends up and down along the left side of the back box 3010 and is attached to the front of the unit base 3110 and the back front left decoration unit 3120 and the back front left decoration unit 3120 from the bottom A back front lower decoration unit 3130 extending left and right along the side of the box 3010 and attached to the front of the unit base 3110, and a lower part of the back front lower decoration unit 3130 in front view, a unit base And a ball guiding unit 3150 attached to the front of the 3110.

  As shown in the figure, the back front left decoration unit 3120 of the back front decoration unit 3100 is a light transmitting flat plate back front left decoration decoration body 3121 having a decoration of characters of "dodododo" and a back front left decoration A transparent flat flat back left light guiding lens 3122 mounted on the rear side of the decorative body 3121 and a plurality of LEDs 3123 a capable of emitting light toward the left side of the back front left light guiding lens 3122 are mounted A back front left decorative substrate 3123 is provided (see FIG. 132 (b)).

  The back front left light guiding lens 3122 has a plurality of conically formed reflecting portions 3122 a on the rear face behind the decoration of the letter “D” in the back front left decoration 3121. The light incident on the inside from the left side surface of the back front left light guiding lens 3122 is reflected forward by the plurality of reflecting portions 3122 a, and the back front left decoration decoration body disposed in front of the back front left light guiding lens 3122 The 3121 can be illuminated and decorated in a plane.

  The back front and bottom decoration unit 3130 of the back front decoration unit 3100 is disposed to correspond to the center of the game area 5a in the left and right direction, and has a back front bottom central lens 3131 on which a predetermined three-dimensional decoration is formed on the front. The back front lower left lens 3132 and the back front lower right lens 3133 which are disposed on the left and right sides of the back front lower center lens 3131 and on which the predetermined three-dimensional decoration is formed on the front, and the back front lower center lens 3131 , A back front lower left lens 3132, and a back front lower decoration substrate 3134 disposed on the back side of the back front lower right lens 3133 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. By appropriately emitting the LEDs of the back front lower decoration substrate, the back front lower central lens 3131, the back front lower left lens 3132, and the back front lower right lens 3133 can be made to emit light in an independent state.

  In addition, the back front lower decoration unit 3130 is opened toward the front at the upper center of the back front lower central lens 3131 and is received by the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100 and is guided backward. The game ball which is opened forward from the center delivery port 3135 which can enter and the lower right of the lower back of the central lens 3131 and is received by the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2400 and entered to the rear enters And a possible left delivery port 3137. The gaming ball having entered the central delivery opening 3135 is discharged downward (on the substrate holder 1200) after being detected by the first starting opening sensor 3112. Further, the gaming ball having entered the right delivery opening 3136 is discharged downward (on the substrate holder 1200) after being detected by the general winning opening sensor 3111.

  The ball guiding unit 3150 of the back front decoration unit 3100 is attached to the unit base 3110 so as to be disposed below the back front lower left lens 3132 in the back front lower decoration unit 3130. The ball guiding unit 3150 is formed in a box shape as a whole, and is opened forward at a position corresponding to the three general winning openings 2001 in the side unit 2200, and three delivery openings 3151 into which game balls can enter. And a discharge port (not shown) for discharging the gaming ball having entered from the delivery port 3151 downward (on the substrate holder 1200). The game ball entering the inside from the delivery port 3151 is discharged downward from the discharge port after being detected by the general winning opening sensor 3111.

[5-9c. Back-to-back movable production unit]
Next, the back inside movable effect unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 130 and 131. The back middle movable effect unit 3200 is attached to the back wall in the back box 3010 so as to surround the opening 3010 a. The back middle movable effect unit 3200 is disposed on the left side in front view, extends up and down higher than the height of the opening 3010 a of the back box 3010 and has a predetermined decoration in the back middle left decoration body 3210, And the right inner body 3220 of the back middle which extends vertically upwards and higher than the height of the opening 3010 a of the back box 3010 and has a predetermined decoration, and the opening 3010 a of the back wall in the back box 3010 A back middle drive unit 3250 is mounted on the upper and lower outer sides and moves the back middle left decoration 3210 and the middle back right decoration 3220 in the left-right direction.

  The back decoration left-handling body 3210 is disposed on the front side of the light-transmissive plate-like back-left decoration lens 3211 having a relief-like decoration formed on the front, and the back decoration center-left decoration lens 3211 A back-to-back left decorative substrate (not shown) on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, and a flat back-to-back mounted on the back side of the back-to-left decorative lens 3211 to cover the back surface of the back-to-back left decorative substrate And a left decoration base 3212. The back decoration center left decoration base 3212 is provided with a rack gear (not shown) at the lower end, which extends to the left and right and has gear teeth formed upward. The back middle left decoration body 3210 can make the back middle left decoration lens 3211 emit light and decorate by emitting the LED of the back middle left decoration substrate.

  The back right decoration 3220 is disposed on the front side of the translucent back flat right back decoration lens 3221 having a relief-like decoration formed on the front, and the back back right decoration lens 3221 on the front. A back-to-back right decorative substrate (not shown) on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, and a flat back-to-back mounted on the back side of the right decorative lens 3221 to cover the back surface of the back-to-right decorative substrate And a right decoration base 3222. Although the illustration is omitted, the back decoration right decoration base 3222 is provided at the lower end with a rack gear which extends to the left and right and the gear teeth are formed downward. The back-right decorative body 3220 can emit light to decorate the back-right decorative lens 3221 by causing the LEDs of the back-right decorative substrate to emit light.

  The back decoration center left decoration lens 3211 and the back decoration center right decoration lens 3221 of the back decoration left decoration body 3210 and the back middle right decoration body 3220 are formed in the shape of left-right symmetry mutually, in the approximate center of the up-down direction The side close to the center in the left-right direction of 5 is formed in a shape in which it curls up.

  The back middle drive unit 3250 is attached to the upper side of the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010 and supports the top of the back middle left decoration 3210 and the top back of the middle back right decoration 3220 so as to be slidable in the lateral direction. A flat unit base 3252 slidably supporting the lower ends of the middle left decoration 3210 and the back middle right decoration 3220 in the left and right direction, and an opening 3010 a attached to the rear side of the unit base 3252 in the back box 3010 And a back-to-back drive motor 3254 mounted on the front of the unit base 3252 so that the rotary shaft protrudes between the mounting base 3253 and the unit base 3252; The rotation of the drive motor 3254 is transmitted and the front surface of the mounting base 3253 can be rotated. Attached to and pinion gear rack and is engaged in the rack gear and the back in the right decorations 3220 of the back in the left ornamental body 3210 so as to be sandwiched from above and below (not shown) in which it provided with a.

  In the back-to-back movable effect unit 3200, in the normal state, the left back and right back decoration 3210 and the back and right back decoration 3220 are in the state of the retracted position where they are most apart from each other. In this state, the back center left decoration 3210 and the back center right decoration 3220 are slightly visible through the frame of the center character 2500 (see FIG. 114 and the like). When the pinion gear is rotated counterclockwise from the normal state by driving the back-to-back drive motor 3254 in a front view counterclockwise direction, the rack gear of the back-to-back left decorative body 3210 and the back-to-back right decorative body 3220 meshing with the pinion gear By the rack gear, the back center left decoration 3210 moves to the right and the back center right decoration 3220 moves to the left.

  As a result, the back-rear left decoration 3210 and the back-middle right decoration 3220 which are separated from each other move so as to approach each other, and the movement is stopped immediately before they abut each other. In this state, the back middle left decoration 3210 and the back middle right decoration 3220 are positioned approximately at the center (appearing position) of the front side of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the back middle left decoration 3210 In the back, the decorations with the right decoration 3220 unite to form a single large decoration (a decoration imitating a cherry petal) (see FIG. 170).

[5-9 d. Back left movable production unit]
Next, the back left movable effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 130 and 131. The back left movable effect unit 3300 is mounted on the left outside in a front view of the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010. The back left movable effect unit 3300 is formed substantially symmetrically with respect to the back right movable effect unit 3400 with the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010 interposed therebetween.

  The back left movable effect unit 3300 includes a back left decoration 3310 formed in a triangular column shape, a back left rotation drive unit 3330 for rotating the back left decoration 3310 around an axis extending up and down, and a back box 3010. A back left moving drive unit 3350 attached to move the upper end side of the back left rotation driving unit 3330 in the left and right direction, and mounted in a back box 3010 guide the lower end side of the back left rotation driving unit 3330 in the left and right direction A lower left guide rail 3370, and a rear upper left decoration 3390 attached to the front side of the back left movement drive unit 3350 and having a predetermined decoration.

  The back left decorative body 3310 is formed in a triangular prism extending vertically, and extends shorter than the height of the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010. The back left decoration body 3310 has a first decoration surface 3311 on which a relief of a statue of Nioh is formed, a second decoration surface 3312 on which a decoration of a predetermined character is formed, and a character different from the second decoration surface 3312 And a third decorative surface 3313 on which the decoration is formed. The back left decorative body 3310 is formed to have a light transmitting property. Moreover, although the back left decoration body 3310 abbreviate | omits illustration, it equips the lower end with the cylindrical axial part.

  The back left rotation drive unit 3330 is attached to the lower part of the movement base 3331 so as to project forward and the movement base 3331 extended vertically so as to be movable in the left and right direction by the back left movement drive unit 3350. A lower rotation base 3332 rotatably supporting a lower end of the body 3310, and an upper rotation base (not shown) attached to an upper portion of the movement base 3331 so as to protrude upward of the back left decoration 3310; A back left rotation drive motor (not shown) whose rotation axis is attached to the upper rotation base so as to project downward, and the rotation axis which penetrates the upper rotation base is attached to the upper end of the back left decoration 3310 , The motor cover 3333 attached to the movement base 3331 so as to cover the outer periphery of the back left rotation drive motor, and the inside of the back left decoration 3310 The lower end with being location includes a Urahidari decorative substrate 3334 in which a plurality of LED on the front is attached to the lower rotary base 3332 is mounted (see FIG. 119), the.

  The movement base 3331 is provided with a rack gear extending to the left and right at the upper end, although not shown. The lower rotation base 3332 is rotatably supported on the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical shaft portion of the back left decoration 3310. Although not shown, the lower rotation base 3332 has a protrusion which protrudes downward from the lower surface and is guided to the back lower left guide rail 3370.

  The back left decoration substrate 3334 is disposed inside the back left decoration 3310 through the inside of the cylindrical shaft. Although the illustration of the back left decorative substrate 3334 is omitted, the upper end side is supported relatively rotatably at the lower side of the upper end of the back left decorative body 3310. Thereby, only the back left decoration body 3310 is formed to rotate by the drive of the back left rotation drive motor. In addition, the LEDs of the back left decorative substrate 3334 always face forward, and only the portion of the back left decorative body 3310 located in front of the back left decorative substrate 3334 (that is, the decorative surface facing forward) is made to emit light be able to.

  The back left moving drive unit 3350 has a unit base 3351 attached to the upper left corner above the opening 3010 a on the front surface of the rear wall which is inside the back box 3010 and a rotation axis projecting backward through the unit base 3351 The rear left movement drive motor 3352 attached to the front of the unit base 3351, the drive gear 3353 attached to the rotation shaft of the back left movement drive motor 3352, and the drive gear 3353 mesh with the back left rotation A pinion gear (not shown) engaged with the rack gear of the drive unit 3330 and rotatably attached to the unit base 3351 and a movement base of the back left rotation drive unit 3330 attached to the lower front of the unit base 3351 Slide rail that mounts 3331 movably to the left and right Shown is provided with abbreviated).

  When the back left movement drive unit 3350 rotates the pinion gear in a counterclockwise direction in a front view through the drive gear 3353 by the back left movement drive motor 3352, back left rotation drive is performed by the rack gear engaged with the pinion gear. The unit 3330 (back left decoration 3310) can be moved to the right.

  The lower left lower guide rail 3370 is attached to the front of the rear wall of the back box 3010 below the opening 3010 a and near the left end. The lower left lower guide rail 3370 extends in the left and right direction, and is formed in a box shape whose upper surface is open. The back left lower guide rail 3370 guides the projection slidably in the left and right direction by inserting the projection projecting from the lower surface of the lower rotation base 3332 of the back left rotation drive unit 3330 into the opening of the upper surface. Can.

  The back upper left decorative body 3390 is attached to the back upper left decorative lens 3391 having a light transmitting property on which a predetermined decoration is formed, and the back left upper back decorative lens 3391 of the unit base 3351 of the back left moving drive unit 3350. It is equipped with a decoration base 3392 attached to the front, and a back left decoration substrate (not shown) mounted between the decoration base 3392 and the back left top decoration lens 3391 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side. ing. The back upper left decorative body 3390 can emit light and decorate the back upper left decorative lens 3391 by causing the LED of the back upper left decorative substrate to emit light.

  In the normal state, the back left movable effect unit 3300 is in the state (back position) where the back left rotary drive unit 3330 (back left decoration body 3310) is moved to the most left by the back left movable drive unit 3350. ing. In this normal state, the back left decoration body 3310 is located behind the back front left decoration unit 3120 in the back front decoration unit 3100, and is blocked by the back front left decoration unit 3120 and can be seen almost from the front Not possible (see Figure 114 etc.).

  In this normal state, by driving the back left movement drive motor 3352 of the back left movement drive unit 3350, the back left decoration 3310 can be moved to the right via the back left rotation drive unit 3330, When the right end position (appearing position) of the slide rail of the left movement drive unit 3350 is reached, the movement is stopped. In the state of this appearance position, the back left decoration 3310 is positioned to the right of the back front left decoration unit 3120 in the back front decoration unit 3100 via the back left rotation drive unit 3330, and the game board side effect display It is located near the left end of the front of the device 1600 and is visible through the frame of the center piece 2500 (see FIGS. 171 to 173).

  In addition, the back left movable effect unit 3300 rotates the back left decoration body 3310 with the back left rotation drive motor of the back left rotation drive unit 3330, or the first decoration surface 3311 of the back left decoration body 3310, the second decoration The rotation can be stopped so that any of the surface 3312 and the third decorative surface 3313 faces forward. The back left decoration 3310 can be rotated at any position of the retracted position and the appearance position.

5-9 e. Back right movable production unit]
Next, the back right movable effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 130 and 131. The back right movable effect unit 3400 is attached to the right outside of the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010 in a front view. The back right movable effect unit 3400 is formed substantially symmetrically with respect to the back left movable effect unit 3300 with the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010 interposed therebetween.

  The back right movable effect unit 3400 includes a back right decoration 3410 formed in a triangular column shape, a back right rotation drive unit 3430 for rotating the back right decoration 3410 around an axis extending up and down, and a back box 3010. A back right movement drive unit 3450 is attached and moves the upper end side of the back right rotation drive unit 3430 in the left and right direction, and is mounted in the back box 3010 and movably guides the lower end side of the back right rotation drive unit 3430 in the left and right direction. And a rear upper right decoration 3490 attached to the front side of the rear right movement drive unit 3450 and having a predetermined decoration.

  The back right decoration 3410 is formed in a triangular prism extending vertically, and extends shorter than the height of the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010. The back right decoration 3410 has a first decoration surface 3411 on which a relief of a statue of Nioh is formed, a second decoration surface 3412 on which a decoration of a predetermined character is formed, and a character different from the second decoration surface 3412 And a third decorative surface 3413 on which the decoration is formed. The back right decoration 3410 is formed to have a light transmitting property. The back right decoration 3410 is provided with a cylindrical shaft at its lower end, although the illustration is omitted.

  The back right rotation drive unit 3430 is attached to the lower part of the movement base 3431 so as to protrude forward and the movement base 3431 extended vertically movably mounted in the left and right direction by the back right movement drive unit 3450 and back right decoration A lower rotation base 3432 rotatably supporting a lower end of the body 3410, and an upper rotation base (not shown) attached to an upper portion of the movement base 3431 so as to protrude upward of the back right decoration 3410; A back right rotation drive motor (not shown) is mounted on the upper rotation base so that the rotation axis protrudes downward, and the rotation axis passing through the upper rotation base is attached to the upper end of the back right decoration 3410 The motor cover 3433 attached to the moving base 3431 so as to cover the outer periphery of the back right rotation drive motor, and the inside of the back right decoration 3410 The lower end with being location includes a back right decorative substrate 3434 in which a plurality of LED on the front is attached to the lower rotary base 3432 is mounted (see FIG. 119), the.

  The moving base 3431 is provided with a rack gear extending to the left and right at the upper end, although not shown. The lower rotation base 3432 is rotatably supported on the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical shaft portion of the back right decoration 3410. Although not shown, the lower rotation base 3432 has a protrusion which protrudes downward from the lower surface and is guided to the back lower right guide rail 3470.

  The back right decoration substrate 3434 is disposed inside the back right decoration 3410 through the inside of the cylindrical shaft. The back right decorative substrate 3434 is, although not shown, relatively rotatably supported at the upper end side below the upper end of the back right decoration 3410. Thereby, only the back right decoration body 3410 is formed to rotate by the drive of the back right rotation drive motor. In addition, the LEDs of the back right decoration substrate 3434 always face forward, and only the portion of the back right decoration 3410 located in front of the back right decoration substrate 3434 (that is, the decoration surface facing forward) is made to emit light be able to.

  The back right movement drive unit 3450 has a unit base 3451 attached to the upper right corner above the opening 3010 a on the front surface of the rear wall which is inside the back box 3010 and a rotation axis projecting backward through the unit base 3451 The rear right movement drive motor 3452 attached to the front of the unit base 3451, the drive gear 3453 attached to the rotation shaft of the back right movement drive motor 3452, and the drive gear 3453 mesh with the rear right rotation A pinion gear (not shown) engaged with the rack gear of the drive unit 3430 and rotatably mounted to the unit base 3451 and a movement base of the back right rotation drive unit 3430 mounted on the lower front of the unit base 3451 Slide rail that mounts the 3431 movably to the left and right Shown is provided with abbreviated).

  When the back right movement drive unit 3450 rotates the pinion gear in a clockwise direction in a front view through the drive gear 3453 by the back right movement drive motor 3452, the back right rotation drive unit is engaged by the rack gear engaged with the pinion gear. 3430 (back right decoration 3410) can be moved to the left.

  The back lower right guide rail 3470 is attached to the front of the rear wall of the back box 3010 below the opening 3010 a and near the right end. The back lower right guide rail 3470 extends in the left and right direction, and is formed in a box shape whose upper surface is open. The back lower right guiding rail 3470 guides the projection in the lateral direction by inserting the projection projecting from the lower surface of the lower rotation base 3432 of the back right rotation drive unit 3430 into the opening of the upper surface. be able to.

  The back upper right decoration body 3490 is attached to the back right side of the back right upper decoration lens 3491 having a light transmitting property on which the predetermined decoration is formed and the back right upper decoration lens 3491 and of the unit base 3451 of the back right movement drive unit 3450 It has a decoration base 3492 attached to the front, and a back right decoration substrate (not shown) attached between the decoration base 3492 and the back right upper decoration lens 3491 and mounted with a plurality of LEDs on the front side. ing. The back upper right decoration body 3490 can emit light and decorate the back upper right decoration lens 3491 by emitting the LED of the back upper right decoration substrate.

  In the normal state, this back right movable effect unit 3400 is in the state (back position) where the back right rotation drive unit 3430 (back right decoration 3410) has moved to the most right by the back right movement drive unit 3450. ing. In this normal state, the back right decoration 3410 is located behind the right side of the center character 2500, and a part can be viewed through the frame of the center character 2500 (see FIG. 114, etc.). reference).

  In this normal state, by driving the back right movement drive motor 3452 of the back right movement drive unit 3450, the back right decoration 3410 can be moved to the right via the back right rotation drive unit 3430. When the left end position (appearing position) of the slide rail of the right moving drive unit 3450 is reached, the movement is stopped. In the state of this appearance position, the back right decoration 3410 is positioned on the left side of the right side in the center character 2500 via the back right rotation drive unit 3430 and at the front of the game board side effect display device 1600. It is located in the vicinity of the right end, and the whole is visible in the frame of the center character 2500 (see FIGS. 171 to 173).

  In addition, the back right movable effect unit 3400 rotates the back right decoration 3410 in a loop by the back right rotation drive motor of the back right rotation drive unit 3430, or the first decoration surface 3411 of the back right decoration 3410, the second decoration It is possible to stop the rotation so that any of the surface 3412 and the third decorative surface 3413 faces forward. The back right decoration 3410 can be rotated at any position of the retracted position and the appearance position.

[5-9 f. Overall configuration of back-to-back movable effect unit]
Next, the overall configuration of the back-up movable effect unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 133 to 158. FIG. 133 (a) is a perspective view of the back up movable effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 133 (b) is a perspective view of the back up movable effect unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 134 is an exploded perspective view of the back-side movable effect knit unit mainly disassembled into each constituent unit and seen from the front, and FIG. 135 is an exploded back-side movable effect unit as the main constituent units viewed from the back It is a disassembled perspective view. In the back box 3010, the back-up movable effect unit 3500 is attached to the upper side of the opening 3010 a at the front of the back wall.

  The back top movable effect unit 3500 has a back top first decoration unit 3510 having a decoration of a predetermined character and a back top second decoration unit having a decoration of a character different from the back top first decoration unit 3510. A back top third decoration unit 3550 having a different character decoration than the back top first decoration unit 3510 and the back top second decoration unit 3530, and the back top first decoration at the center in the longitudinal direction The unit 3510 is mounted rotatably relative to the back and forth extending axis, and the back upper second decoration unit 3530 and the back upper third decoration unit 3550 extend back and forth respectively near the longitudinal ends. The back upper rotation base unit 3570, which is mounted rotatably relative to the axis of rotation, and the back While the decoration unit 3510 is mounted non-rotatably, the back top first decoration unit 3510 and the back top rotation base unit 3570 are raised and lowered, and a back top lifting unit 3600 mounted in the back box 3010 is provided. There is.

5-9 f-1. Back side first decoration unit]
Next, the back first decoration unit 3510 in the back movable effect unit 3500 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 136 to 139. FIG. 136 (a) is a front perspective view of the back top first decoration unit in the back top movable effect unit, and FIG. 136 (b) is a back perspective view of the back top first decoration unit. FIG. 137 is an exploded perspective view of the back decoration first decoration unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 138 is an exploded perspective view of the back decoration first decoration unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 139 (a) is an explanatory view showing the drive system from the front when the back top first decoration unit is in the closed position, and FIG. 139 (b) is a drive system when the back top first decoration unit is in the open position It is an explanatory view shown from the front. The back first decoration unit 3510 of the back up movable effect unit 3500 has its rear end non-rotatably attached to the front of the movable side unit 3610 in the back up lift unit 3600.

  The first decorative unit 3510 has a first character and a second character, and a first left movable decorative lens 3511 and a first right movable decorative lens 3512 each having a light transmitting property. A light transmitting first fixed decorative lens 3513 disposed on the rear side of the one left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 and having a predetermined decoration formed thereon, and a back of the first fixed decorative lens 3513 It is attached to the back side of the first fixed decorative lens 3513 so as to cover the back surface of the back top first decoration substrate 3514 disposed on the side and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface and the back surface of the back top first decoration substrate 3514 And a first decorative base 3515 in the form of a flat plate. In the first fixed decorative lens 3513, a decoration imitating lightning is formed.

  In addition, the back top first decorative body unit 3510 extends in the left and right direction at the lower portion on the rear side of the first decorative body base 3515 and the left end is the first left movable decorative lens 3511 at the left outside of the first decorative body base 3515 And a first lower arm 3516 having a rack gear 3516a extending to the left and right on the upper side, and a slit 3516b extending in the front and rear direction on the lower side of the rack gear 3516a, and a first lower arm 3516 A lower arm presser 3517 which is attached to the rear side of the first decorative body base 3515 through the slit 3516b of the first decorative body 3515 so as to slide the first lower arm 3516 in the lateral direction in cooperation with the first decorative body base 3515; Is equipped.

  In addition, the back top first decorative body unit 3510 extends in the left-right direction at the upper part on the rear side of the first decorative body base 3515 and the right end is the first right movable decorative lens 3512 at the right outside of the first decorative body base 3515 Of the first upper arm 3518 having a rack gear 3518a extending to the left and right at the lower side, and a slit 3518b extending leftward and rightward through the upper side of the rack gear 3518a, and a first upper arm 3518 An upper arm presser 3519 attached to the rear side of the first decorative body base 3515 through the slit 3518b and slidably mounting the first upper arm 3518 in the left-right direction in cooperation with the first decorative body base 3515; Have.

  Furthermore, the rear upper first decorative body unit 3510 is provided on the rear surface of the large-diameter transmission gear portion 3520a and the transmission gear portion 3520a that respectively mesh with the rack gear 3516a of the first lower arm 3516 and the rack gear 3518a of the first upper arm 3518. A first opening / closing gear member 3520 having a small-diameter drive gear portion 3520b integrally formed and rotatably mounted on the rear side of the first decorative body base 3515 is provided.

  Further, the back top first decorative body unit 3510 extends in a flat plate shape in the front view left side of the first open / close gear member 3520 on the rear side of the first decorative body base 3515, and extends vertically on the right side. A drive rack gear 3521a extending in the vertical direction and a receiving boss 3521b protruding in a cylindrical shape from the lower part of the rear surface in mesh with the drive gear portion 3520b of 3520, and a slit 3521c penetrating vertically in the vicinity of the left side It is attached to the back of the first decorative body base 3515 through the first opening and closing arm 3521 and the slit 3521 c of the first opening and closing arm 3521 and cooperates with the first decorative body base 3515 to make the first opening and closing arm 3521 vertically An open / close arm presser 3522 slidably mounted.

  Furthermore, the rear upper first decorative body unit 3510 has a left end attached to the rear side of the first decorative body base 3515 and a right end attached to the first upper arm 3518, and the first upper arm 3518 is viewed from the front And a first mounting base 3524 attached to the rear side of the first decorative body base 3515 so as to cover the rear side of the first opening and closing gear member 3520. And the horizontal lock hole 3525a attached to the rear side of the first mounting base 3524 and opened in the outer peripheral surface on the right side, the front-rear direction is formed at the same position as the horizontal lock hole 3525a, and the outer peripheral surface on the lower side A vertical lock hole 3525b which opens in the back, and a mounting shaft 3525c which protrudes cylindrically rearward on the rear side of the vertical lock hole 3525b. End and a, a first mounting shaft member 3525 attached to the front surface of the movable unit 3610 in the back on the lift unit 3600.

  Subsequently, the movement of the back top first decoration unit 3510 will be described in detail. The back top first decorative unit 3510 is located between a closed position where the left and right first left movable decorative lenses 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 come close to each other and in contact with each other, and an open position where they are separated from each other. It is formed to slide in the left and right direction.

  In the back top first decorative unit 3510, the first upper arm 3518 having the first right movable decorative lens 3512 mounted thereon is disposed above the first lower arm 3516 to which the first left movable decorative lens 3511 is mounted. Each is mounted slidably in the left-right direction. The first lower arm 3516 is provided with the rack gear 3516a extending in the left and right direction, and the first upper arm 3518 is provided with the rack gear 3518a extending in the left and right direction downward. The rack gear 3516 a of the arm 3516 and the rack gear 3518 a of the first upper arm 3518 face each other. Then, between the first lower arm 3516 and the first upper arm 3518, the transmission gear portion 3520a of the first open / close gear member 3520 is a rack gear 3516a of the first lower arm 3516 and a rack gear 3518a of the first upper arm 3518. They are engaged with each other. Thus, when the first open / close gear member 3520 (transmission gear portion 3520a) is rotated, the first lower arm 3516 and the first upper arm 3518 can be slid in directions different from each other in the left-right direction.

  Therefore, when the first opening and closing gear member 3520 is rotated in a counterclockwise direction in a front view, the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decoration via the first lower arm 3516 and the first upper arm 3518 When the first open / close gear member 3520 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front, the first lower arm 3516 and the first upper arm 3518 can be slid in a direction in which the lens 3512 approaches each other (the direction of the closed position). The first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 can be slid in a direction (direction of open position) away from each other.

  Further, in the back top first decorative body unit 3510, the first open / close gear member 3520 has a drive gear portion 3520b that rotates integrally with the transmission gear portion 3520a, and extends vertically to mesh with the drive gear portion 3520b. A first open / close arm 3521 having a drive rack gear 3521a is provided. Since the first opening and closing arm 3521 is mounted slidably in the vertical direction, when the first opening and closing gear member 3520 rotates, it slides in the vertical direction. Since the first opening / closing arm 3521 is disposed on the left side of the first opening / closing gear member 3520 in a front view, the first opening / closing arm 3521 slides downward when the first opening / closing gear member 3520 is rotated in a counterclockwise direction. When the first open / close gear member 3520 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front, it slides upward.

  In other words, when the first opening and closing arm 3521 is slid downward, the first opening and closing gear member 3520 rotates in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front, and the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 Can be slid toward each other (in the direction of the closed position). On the other hand, when the first opening and closing arm 3521 is slid upward, the first opening and closing gear member 3520 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front, and the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 are mutually moved. It can be slid in the direction of separation (the direction of the open position).

  The back top first decoration unit 3510 has a first open / close spring 3523 urging the first upper arm 3518 to move leftward, so that a force acts on the first open / close arm 3521 When not moving (in the normal state), the first upper arm 3518 is slid to the left by the biasing force of the first opening and closing spring 3523, and the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decoration It will be in the state of the closed position where the lens 3512 abutted mutually. In the closed position, the transmission gear portion 3520a of the first open / close gear member 3520 meshes with the vicinity of the left end of the rack gear 3516a of the first lower arm 3516, and the vicinity of the right end of the rack gear 3518a of the first upper arm 3518 I am engaged. Further, in this state, the drive gear portion 3520b of the first open / close gear member 3520 is engaged with the vicinity of the upper end of the drive rack gear 3521a in the first open / close arm 3521 (see FIG. 139 (a)).

  When the first opening and closing arm 3521 is slid upward to resist the biasing force of the first opening and closing spring 3523 from the state of the closed position, the first opening and closing gear member 3520 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front. The first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 slide away from each other via the lower arm 3516 and the first upper arm 3518. Then, when the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 reach the open position, the slide is stopped (see FIG. 139 (b)). The stop of the slide in the open position is at the end of the elongated hole in at least one of the slit 3516b of the first lower arm 3516, the slit 3518b of the first upper arm 3518, and the slit 3521c of the first opening and closing arm 3521 The lower arm presser 3517, the upper arm presser 3519, and the open / close arm presser 3522 contact each other to restrict the slide.

  Therefore, when the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 are in the closed position, the back upper first decorative unit 3510 and the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 Is positioned in front of the first fixed decorative lens 3513 so that the first fixed decorative lens 3513 is hardly visible from the front, and a predetermined character is formed by the first left movable decoration lens 3511 and the first right movable decoration lens 3512 You can see the decoration of. On the other hand, when the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 are in the open position, the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 are separated, and The decoration of the fixed decorative lens 3513 can be seen.

  In addition, the back first decoration unit 3510 appropriately emits the LED of the back first decoration substrate 3514 to allow the first left movable decoration lens 3511, the first right movable decoration lens 3512, and the first fixed decoration lens. The 3513 can be illuminated and decorated accordingly. Specifically, when the LED of the back top first decoration substrate 3514 is made to emit light when the first left movable decoration lens 3511 and the first right movable decoration lens 3512 are in the closed position, the first fixed decoration lens 3513 is used. The light emitting decoration can be performed with the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512. On the other hand, when the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 are in the open position, when the LED of the back first decorative substrate 3514 is made to emit light, the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable Only the first fixed decorative lens 3513 facing from the decorative lens 3512 can be illuminated and decorated.

5-9 f-2. Back side second decoration unit]
Next, the second back decoration unit 3530 in the second back movable effect unit 3500 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 140 to FIG. FIG. 140 (a) is a perspective view of the back upper second decoration unit in the back up movable presentation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 140 (b) is a perspective view of the back top second decoration unit from the back. FIG. 141 is an exploded perspective view of the back upper second decoration unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 142 is an exploded perspective view of the back upper second decoration unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 143 (a) is an explanatory view showing the drive system from the front when the back upper second decoration unit is in the closed position, and FIG. 143 (b) is a drive system when the back upper second decoration unit is in the open position It is an explanatory view shown from the front. The back end of the back second decoration unit 3530 of the back top movable effect unit 3500 is in the front-rear direction near one end of the back top rotation base unit 3570 in the longitudinal direction (near the right end at the time of horizontal position) It is rotatably mounted about an axis extending to it.

  A second left movable decorative lens 3531 and a second right movable decorative lens 3532 having a light transmitting property are formed by forming a decoration that forms a predetermined character in a pair on the back upper second decoration unit 3530; A translucent second fixed decorative lens 3533 disposed behind the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 and having a predetermined decoration formed thereon, and a back of the second fixed decorative lens 3533 It is attached to the back side of the second fixed decorative lens 3533 so as to cover the back surface of the back upper second decoration substrate 3534 disposed on the side and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface And a second decoration base 3535. The second fixed decorative lens 3533 is formed with a decoration imitating lightning.

  In addition, the back upper second decoration unit 3530 extends in the left and right direction at the lower portion on the rear side of the second decoration base 3535 and the left end is the second left movable decoration lens 3531 at the left outside of the second decoration base 3535. And a second lower arm 3536 having a rack gear 3536a extending laterally to the upper side, and a slit 3536b extending leftward and rightward through the lower side of the rack gear 3536a, and a second lower arm 3536 A lower arm presser 3537 which is attached to the rear side of the second decoration base 3535 through the slit 3536b of the second arm and which slidably mounts the second lower arm 3536 in the left-right direction in cooperation with the second decoration base 3535; Is equipped.

  In addition, the back upper second decoration unit 3530 extends in the left-right direction at the upper portion on the rear side of the second decoration base 3535 and the right end is the second right movable decoration lens 3532 at the right outside of the second decoration base 3535. And a second upper arm 3538 having a rack gear 3538a extending to the lower side and a slit 3538b extending leftward and rightward through the upper side of the rack gear 3538a, and a second upper arm 3538 An upper arm presser 3539 attached to the rear side of the second decorative body base 3535 through the slit 3538b and slidably mounting the second upper arm 3538 in the lateral direction in cooperation with the second decorative body base 3535; Have.

  Furthermore, the rear upper second decorative body unit 3530 is provided on the rear surface of the large diameter transmission gear portion 3540a and the transmission gear portion 3540a that respectively mesh with the rack gear 3536a of the second lower arm 3536 and the rack gear 3538a of the second upper arm 3538. A second open / close gear member 3540 having a small diameter drive gear portion 3540b integrally formed and rotatably mounted on the rear side of the second decorative body base 3535 is provided.

  In addition, the back upper second decorative body unit 3530 extends in a flat plate shape in the front view left side of the second open / close gear member 3540 on the rear side of the second decorative body base 3535 and extends vertically on the right side. A drive rack gear 3541a extending in the vertical direction, which engages with the 3540 drive gear portion 3540b, a receiving boss 3541b cylindrically projecting rearward from the vicinity of the upper end of the rear surface, and a slit 3541c penetrating vertically in the vicinity of the left side Is attached to the rear side of the second decorative body base 3535 through the second opening / closing arm 3541 having the second opening / closing arm 3541 and the slit 3541 c of the second opening / closing arm 3541 and cooperates with the second decoration base 3535 to move up and down the second opening / closing arm 3541 And an open / close arm presser 3542 mounted slidably in the direction.

  Furthermore, the back upper second decoration unit 3530 has its left end attached to the second lower arm 3536 and its right end attached to the rear side of the second decoration base 3535, so that the second lower arm 3536 can be viewed from the front right And a second mounting base 3544 attached to the rear side of the second decorative body base 3535 so as to cover the rear side of the second opening / closing gear member 3540. And have. The second attachment base 3544 is attached to a second drive link gear member 3573 of the back-up rotation base unit 3570 described later.

  Subsequently, the movement of the back upper second decoration unit 3530 will be described in detail. The back upper second decorative body unit 3530 is located between a closed position where the left and right second left movable decorative lenses 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 abut each other, and an open position where they are separated from each other. It is formed to slide in the left and right direction.

  In the back upper second decoration unit 3530, a second upper arm 3538 to which a second right movable decorative lens 3532 is attached is disposed above the second lower arm 3536 to which the second left movable decorative lens 3531 is attached. Each is mounted slidably in the left-right direction. The second lower arm 3536 is provided with the rack gear 3536a extending in the left and right direction, and the second upper arm 3538 is provided with the rack gear 3538a extending in the left and right direction downward. The rack gear 3536a of the arm 3536 and the rack gear 3538a of the second upper arm 3538 are opposed to each other. Then, between the second lower arm 3536 and the second upper arm 3538, the transmission gear portion 3540 a of the second open / close gear member 3540 is a rack gear 3536 a of the second lower arm 3536 and a rack gear 3538 a of the second upper arm 3538. They are engaged with each other. Accordingly, when the second open / close gear member 3540 (transmission gear portion 3540a) is rotated, the second lower arm 3536 and the second upper arm 3538 can be slid in directions different from each other in the left-right direction.

  Therefore, when the second opening / closing gear member 3540 is rotated in a counterclockwise direction in a front view, the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decoration via the second lower arm 3536 and the second upper arm 3538 When the second open / close gear member 3540 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front, the second lower arm 3536 and the second upper arm 3538 can be slid in a direction in which the lenses 3532 approach each other (the direction of the closed position). The second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 can be slid in a direction (direction of open position) away from each other.

  Further, in the back upper second decorative body unit 3530, the second open / close gear member 3540 has a drive gear portion 3540b integrally rotating with the transmission gear portion 3540a, and extends up and down meshing with the drive gear portion 3540b A second open / close arm 3541 having a drive rack gear 3541a is provided. Since the second opening / closing arm 3541 is mounted slidably in the vertical direction, when the second opening / closing gear member 3540 rotates, it slides in the vertical direction. Since the second opening / closing arm 3541 is disposed on the left side of the second opening / closing gear member 3540 in a front view, the second opening / closing arm 3541 slides downward when the second opening / closing gear member 3540 is rotated in a counterclockwise direction. When the second open / close gear member 3540 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front, it slides upward.

  In other words, when the second opening / closing arm 3541 is slid downward, the second opening / closing gear member 3540 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front, and the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 Can be slid toward each other (in the direction of the closed position). On the other hand, when the second opening and closing arm 3541 is slid upward, the second opening and closing gear member 3540 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front, and the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 are mutually moved. It can be slid in the direction of separation (the direction of the open position).

  Since the back upper second decoration unit 3530 has the second open / close spring 3543 urging the second lower arm 3536 to move rightward, a force acts on the second open / close arm 3541. When not moving (in the normal state), the second lower arm 3536 is slid to the right by the biasing force of the second opening and closing spring 3543, and the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decoration It will be in the state of the closed position where the lens 3532 abutted mutually. In this closed position, the transmission gear portion 3540a of the second open / close gear member 3540 meshes with the vicinity of the left end of the rack gear 3536a of the second lower arm 3536, and near the right end of the rack gear 3538a of the second upper arm 3538 I am engaged. Further, in this state, the drive gear portion 3540b of the second open / close gear member 3540 is engaged with the vicinity of the upper end of the drive rack gear 3541a in the second open / close arm 3541 (see FIG. 143A).

  When the second opening / closing arm 3541 is slid upward against the urging force of the second opening / closing spring 3543 from the state of the closed position, the second opening / closing gear member 3540 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front, The second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 slide away from each other via the second lower arm 3536 and the second upper arm 3538. Then, when the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 reach the open position, the slide is stopped (see FIG. 143 (b)). The stop of the slide in the open position is at the end of the elongated hole in at least one of the slit 3536b of the second lower arm 3536, the slit 3538b of the second upper arm 3538, and the slit 3541c of the second opening and closing arm The lower arm presser 3537, the upper arm presser 3539, and the open / close arm presser 3542 contact each other to restrict the slide.

  Therefore, when the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 are in the closed position, the second back movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 Is positioned in front of the second fixed decorative lens 3533 so that the second fixed decorative lens 3533 is hardly visible from the front, and a predetermined character is formed by the second left movable decoration lens 3531 and the second right movable decoration lens 3532 You can see the decoration of. On the other hand, when the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 are in the open position, the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 are separated from each other, The decoration of the fixed decorative lens 3533 can be seen.

  In addition, the back upper second decoration unit 3530 appropriately emits the LED of the back upper second decoration substrate 3534 to allow the second left movable decoration lens 3531, the second right movable decoration lens 3532, and the second fixed decoration lens. The 3533 can be illuminated and decorated accordingly. Specifically, when the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 are in the closed position, when the LED of the back upper second decorative substrate 3534 is made to emit light, through the second fixed decorative lens 3533 The second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 can emit light. On the other hand, when the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 are in the open position, when the LED of the back upper second decorative substrate 3534 is made to emit light, the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable Only the second fixed decorative lens 3533 which faces from between the decorative lens 3532 can be illuminated and decorated.

5-9 f-3. Back side third decoration unit]
Next, the back third decoration unit 3550 in the back movable effect unit 3500 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 144 to 147. FIG. 144 (a) is a front perspective view of the back top third decoration unit in the back top movable effect unit, and FIG. 144 (b) is a back perspective view of the back top third decoration unit. FIG. 145 is an exploded perspective view of the back-top third decoration unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 146 is an exploded perspective view of the back-top third decoration unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 147 (a) is an explanatory view showing the drive system from the front when the back upper third decoration unit is in the closed position, and FIG. It is an explanatory view shown from the front. The rear end of the rear upper third decoration unit 3550 of the rear upper movable presentation unit 3500 is near the end opposite to the rear upper second decoration unit 3530 in the longitudinal direction of the rear upper rotation base unit 3570 (horizontal position Is attached rotatably around an axis extending in the front-rear direction.

  The back third decoration unit 3550 has a light emitting third left movable decoration lens 3551 and a third right movable decoration lens 3552, each of which has a decoration forming a predetermined character as a pair. A light transmitting third fixed decorative lens 3553 disposed on the rear side of the three left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 and having a predetermined decoration formed thereon, and the back of the third fixed decorative lens 3553 It is attached to the back side of the third fixed decorative lens 3553 so as to cover the back surface of the back top third decoration substrate 3554 disposed on the side and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface and the back surface of the back top third decoration substrate 3554 And a plate-like third decoration base 3555. A decoration imitating lightning is formed on the third fixed decorative lens 3553.

  In addition, the back top third decoration unit 3550 extends in the left and right direction at the lower portion on the rear side of the third decoration base 3555 and the left end is the third left movable decoration lens 3551 at the left outside of the third decoration base 3555 And a third lower arm 3556 having a rack gear 3556a extending leftward and rightward at the upper side, and a slit 3556b extending leftward and rightward through the lower side of the rack gear 3556a, and a third lower arm 3556 A lower arm presser 3557 attached to the rear side of the third decoration base 3555 through the slit 3556b and slidably mounting the third lower arm 3556 in the lateral direction in cooperation with the third decoration base 3555; Is equipped.

  In addition, the back top third decoration unit 3550 extends in the left-right direction at the upper part on the rear side of the third decoration base 3555 and the right end is the third right movable decoration lens 3552 at the right outside of the third decoration base 3555 A third upper arm 3558 having a rack gear 3558a extending laterally from the lower side and a slit 3558b extending leftward and rightward through the upper side of the rack gear 3558a, and a third upper arm 3558 An upper arm presser 3559 attached to the rear side of the third decoration base 3555 through the slit 3558b and slidably mounting the third upper arm 3558 in the left-right direction in cooperation with the third decoration base 3555; Have.

  Furthermore, the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 is provided on the rear surface of the large diameter transmission gear portion 3560a and the transmission gear portion 3560a which are respectively meshed with the rack gear 3556a of the third lower arm 3556 and the rack gear 3558a of the third upper arm 3558. It has a third opening / closing gear member 3560 having a small-diameter drive gear portion 3560b integrally formed and rotatably mounted on the rear side of the third decorative body base 3555.

  In addition, the back-top third decoration unit 3550 extends in a flat plate shape vertically on the left side of the third opening / closing gear member 3560 on the rear side of the third decoration body base 3555, and on the right side is the third opening / closing gear member A third openable arm 3561 having a vertically extending drive rack gear 3561a engaged with the 3560 drive gear portion 3560b, and a slit 3561c penetrating vertically in the vicinity of the left side, and a slit 3561c of the third openable arm 3561 An open / close arm presser 3562 attached to the rear side of the third decoration base 3555 and slidably mounting the third opening / closing arm 3561 in the vertical direction in cooperation with the third decoration base 3555 .

  Furthermore, the back upper third decoration unit 3550 has its left end attached to the third lower arm 3556 and its right end attached to the rear side of the third decoration base 3555, and the third lower arm 3556 is viewed from the front And a third mounting base 3564 attached to the rear side of the third decorative body base 3555 so as to cover the rear side of the third opening / closing gear member 3560 and the third opening / closing spring 3563 biased to move toward the And have. The third mounting base 3564 is attached to a third drive link gear member 3578 of the back upper rotation base unit 3570 described later.

  Subsequently, the movement of the back top third decoration unit 3550 will be described in detail. The back third third body unit 3550 is located between the closed position where the left and right third left movable decorative lenses 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 approach each other and the open positions where they are separated from each other. It is formed to slide in the left and right direction.

  In the back upper third decoration unit 3550, the third upper arm 3558 to which the third right movable decoration lens 3552 is attached is disposed above the third lower arm 3556 to which the third left movable decoration lens 3551 is attached. Each is mounted slidably in the left-right direction. The third lower arm 3556 is provided with a rack gear 3556a extending leftward and rightward, and the third upper arm 3558 is provided with a rack gear 3558a extending leftward and rightward and is provided with a third lower arm The rack gear 3556a of the arm 3556 and the rack gear 3558a of the third upper arm 3558 are opposed to each other. Then, between the third lower arm 3556 and the third upper arm 3558, the transmission gear portion 3560a of the third open / close gear member 3560 is a rack gear 3556a of the third lower arm 3556 and a rack gear 3558a of the third upper arm 3558. They are engaged with each other. Thus, when the third open / close gear member 3560 (transmission gear portion 3560a) is rotated, the third lower arm 3556 and the third upper arm 3558 can be slid in directions different from each other in the left-right direction.

  Therefore, when the third open / close gear member 3560 is rotated in a counterclockwise direction in a front view, the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decoration via the third lower arm 3556 and the third upper arm 3558 When the third open / close gear member 3560 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front, the third lower arm 3556 and the third upper arm 3558 can be slid in a direction in which the lens 3552 approaches each other (the direction of the closed position). The third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 can be slid in a direction (direction of open position) apart from each other.

  Further, in the back upper third decorative body unit 3550, the third open / close gear member 3560 has a drive gear portion 3560b that rotates integrally with the transmission gear portion 3560a, and extends vertically to mesh with the drive gear portion 3560b. A third open / close arm 3561 having a drive rack gear 3561a is provided. Since the third opening / closing arm 3561 is mounted slidably in the vertical direction, when the third opening / closing gear member 3560 rotates, it slides in the vertical direction. Since the third opening / closing arm 3561 is disposed on the left side of the third opening / closing gear member 3560 in a front view, it slides downward when the third opening / closing gear member 3560 is rotated in a counterclockwise direction. When the third open / close gear member 3560 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front, it slides upward.

  In other words, when the third opening / closing arm 3561 is slid downward, the third opening / closing gear member 3560 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in front view, and the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 Can be slid toward each other (in the direction of the closed position). On the other hand, when the third opening and closing arm 3561 is slid upward, the third opening and closing gear member 3560 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front, and the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 are mutually moved. It can be slid in the direction of separation (the direction of the open position).

  Since the back upper third decoration unit 3550 has the third open / close spring 3563 urging the third lower arm 3556 to move to the right, a force acts on the third open / close arm 3561 When not moving (in the normal state), the third lower arm 3556 is slid to the right by the biasing force of the third opening and closing spring 3563, and the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decoration It will be in the state of the closed position which the lens 3552 contact | abutted mutually. In this closed position, the transmission gear portion 3560a of the third open / close gear member 3560 meshes with the vicinity of the left end of the rack gear 3556a of the third lower arm 3556, and near the right end of the rack gear 3558a of the third upper arm 3558. I am engaged. Further, in this state, the drive gear portion 3560b of the third open / close gear member 3560 is engaged with the vicinity of the upper end of the drive rack gear 3561a in the third open / close arm 3561 (see FIG. 147A).

  When the third opening / closing arm 3561 is slid upward against the urging force of the third opening / closing spring 3563 from this state of the closed position, the third opening / closing gear member 3560 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front, The third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 slide away from each other through the third lower arm 3556 and the third upper arm 3558. Then, when the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 reach the open position, the slide is stopped (see FIG. 147 (b)). The stop of the slide in the open position is at the end of the elongated hole in at least one of the slit 3556b of the third lower arm 3556, the slit 3558b of the third upper arm 3558, and the slit 3561c of the third open / close arm 3561 The lower arm presser 3557, the upper arm presser 3559, and the open / close arm presser 3562 contact each other to restrict the slide.

  Therefore, when the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 are in the closed position, the back upper third decorative unit 3550 is combined with the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552. Is located in front of the third fixed decorative lens 3553 so that the third fixed decorative lens 3553 is hardly visible from the front, and a predetermined character is formed by the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 You can see the decoration of. On the other hand, when the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 are in the open position, the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 are separated and a third of them is separated The decoration of the fixed decorative lens 3553 can be seen.

  In addition, the back third decoration unit 3550 appropriately emits the LEDs of the back third decoration substrate 3554 to allow the third left movable decoration lens 3551, the third right movable decoration lens 3552, and the third fixed decoration lens. The 3553 can be illuminated and decorated accordingly. Specifically, when the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 are in the closed position, and the LED of the back third third decorative substrate 3554 is made to emit light, through the third fixed decorative lens 3553 The third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 can be made to emit light. On the other hand, when the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 are in the open position and the LED of the back third third decorative substrate 3554 is made to emit light, the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable Only the third fixed decorative lens 3553 facing from the decorative lens 3552 can be illuminated and decorated.

5-9 f-4. Back-up rotation base unit]
Next, the back-up rotation base unit 3570 of the back-up movable effect unit 3500 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 148 to 152. FIG. 148 (a) is a perspective view of the back-up rotation base unit in the back-up movable presentation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 148 (b) is a perspective view of the back-up rotation base unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 149 is an exploded perspective view of the back-up rotation base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 150 is an exploded perspective view of the back-up rotation base unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 151 is an explanatory view showing the gear configuration of the back-to-back rotation base unit from the front. FIG. 152 (a) is an explanatory view showing from the front the state of the action lever in the back-up rotation base unit from the front, and FIG. 152 (b) is an explanatory view showing the state from the front of the action lever.

  The back-up rotation base unit 3570 of the back-up movable rendering unit 3500 is rotatably mounted on the front of the movable side unit of the back-up lifting unit around an axis extending in the front and back direction, and back up at both longitudinal ends. The second decoration unit 3530 and the back top third decoration unit 3550 are rotatably mounted relative to the front and rear extending axes, respectively.

  The back-up rotation base unit 3570 extends parallel to a plane orthogonal to the axis extending in the front-rear direction, and has a first hole 3571a penetrating in the front-rear direction at the center in the longitudinal direction A mounting cylindrical portion which cylindrically protrudes rearward from the outer periphery of the second hole 3571b and the third hole 3571c which pass through and the first hole 3571a and is rotatably attached to the movable side unit 3610 of the rear upper lifting unit 3600 It has a back-up rotation base having 3571d. The first hole 3571a (inner diameter of the mounting cylinder portion 3571d) is formed in such a size that the mounting shaft portion 3525c of the first mounting shaft member 3525 in the back top first decoration unit 3510 can pass. The second hole 3571b and the third hole 3571c are formed slightly smaller than the first hole 3571a, and are formed to have the same size. The second hole 3571b and the third hole 3571c are formed in the vicinity of the right end and in the vicinity of the left end in front view when the back-upper rotation base 3571 extends horizontally (at the time of horizontal position) There is. In the following description, the back-up rotation base 3571 is described as extending horizontally.

  Further, the back top rotation base unit 3570 is provided with a rotation base driven gear 3572 attached to the back side of the back top rotation base 3571 and extending in a semicircular shape concentrically with the center of the first hole 3571a. The rotary base driven gear 3572 is formed in an upper half shape with respect to the annular ring in a state in which the central axis is extended in the front and back direction, and gear teeth are formed on the outer peripheral surface. The rotation base driven gear 3752 is mounted such that a gap is formed between the rotation base driven gear 3752 and the outer peripheral surface on the upper side of the mounting cylindrical portion 3571 d. The rotation base driven gear 3752 engages with the rotation base drive gear 3614 in the movable unit 3610 of the back-up lifting unit 3600 described later.

  In addition, the back-up rotation base unit 3570 is fan-shaped concentrically from the front end of the annular shaft portion 3573a and the shaft portion 3573a which are rotatably inserted from the front into the second hole 3571b of the back-up rotation base 3571 The second drive link gear member 3573 to which the formed second link gear portion 3573b is attached and the rear surface of the second mounting base 3544 of the back upper second decoration unit 3530 is attached to the front surface, and the back top rotation A pressing member 3574 attached to the rear side of the second drive link gear member 3573 from the rear side of the base 3571 and having a diameter larger than that of the second hole 3571 b is provided. The second link gear portion 3573b of the second drive link gear member 3573 is formed to have a diameter larger than that of the second hole 3571b. Further, the second link gear portion 3573 b is formed to have the same diameter and the same pitch as the central link gear 3611 b of the movable side base 3611 in the movable side unit 3610 of the back-up raising and lowering unit 3600. In the second drive link gear member 3573, the pressing member 3574 is attached to the rear side of the shaft portion 3573a inserted into the second hole 3571b, thereby restricting the movement of the second hole 3571b in the back and forth direction. It is rotatably mounted in the condition.

  Furthermore, the back-up rotation base unit 3570 is rotatably attached to the back side of the back-up rotation base 3571 on the left side of the second hole 3571b in a front view, and the second link gear portion of the second drive link gear member 3573 The first link gear 3575 for spur gear meshing with 3573b and the second link gear 3575 are rotatably mounted on the rear side of the back upper rotation base 3571 on the left side in a front view. The second link gear 3576 in the form of a spur gear meshing with the first link gear 3575 for the second and the second link gear 3576 can be rotated to the rear side of the back upper rotation base 3571 in front view left side The second link gear 3576 attached to the second link gear 3576 is engaged with the second link gear 3576.

  The second link gear portion 3573 b of the second drive link gear member 3573 and the second link gear 3575 are engaged with each other through an opening formed in the upper rear rotation base 3571. The left end side of the second link gear 3577 approaches the outer peripheral surface on the right side of the mounting cylinder 3571 d of the back upper rotation base 3571. The second third link gear 3577 meshes with the central link gear 3611 b of the movable base 3611 in the movable unit 3610 of the back raising / lowering unit 3600 described later.

  Also, the back-up rotation base unit 3570 is fan-shaped concentrically from the front end of the annular shaft portion 3578a and the shaft portion 3578a which are rotatably inserted from the front into the third hole 3571c of the back-up rotation base 3571 A third drive link gear member 3578 to which the formed third link gear portion 3578b is attached and the back surface of the third mounting base 3564 of the back top third decorative unit 3550 is attached to the front surface, and the back top rotation A pressing member 3579 attached to the rear side of the third drive link gear member 3578 from the rear side of the base 3571 and having a diameter larger than that of the third hole 3571 c is provided. In the third drive link gear member 3578, the third link gear portion 3578b is formed to have a diameter larger than that of the third hole 3571c. The third link gear portion 3578 b has the same diameter and the same pitch as the central link gear 3611 b of the movable base 3611 in the movable unit 3610 of the back-up raising and lowering unit 3600. In the third drive link gear member 3578, the pressing member 3579 is attached to the rear side of the shaft portion 3578a inserted into the third hole 3571c, whereby the movement of the third drive link gear member 3578 against the third hole 3571c is restricted. It is rotatably mounted in the condition.

  Furthermore, the back-up rotation base unit 3570 is rotatably mounted on the front side of the back-up rotation base 3571 on the right side in a front view of the third hole 3571c, and the third link gear portion 3578b of the third drive link gear member 3578 And a third link gear 3580 for meshing with the first link gear 3580 and the first link gear 3580 for the third link gear 3580 and is rotatably attached to the rear side of the back upper rotation base 3571 in a front view right side The second link gear 3581 in the form of a spur gear meshing with the first link gear 3580 and the second link gear 3581 in a front view right side rotatably on the back side of the back upper rotation base 3571 And a spur gear-like third link gear 3582 attached and engaged with the third link gear 3581.

  The third first link gear 3580 and the third second link gear 3581 mesh with each other through an opening formed in the back-upper rotation base 3571. The right end side of the third link gear 3582 approaches the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the mounting cylinder portion 3571 d of the back upper rotation base 3571. The third link gear 3582 meshes with the central link gear 3611 b of the movable base 3611 in the movable unit 3610 of the back-up lifting unit 3600 described later.

  In addition, the back upper rotation base unit 3570 is attached to the rear side of the lower portion between the first hole 3571 a and the second hole 3571 b in the back upper rotation base 3571, and the rotation axis passes through the back upper rotation base 3571 Working lever drive motor 3583 protruding forward, spur gear-like working lever drive gear 3584 attached to the rotation shaft of working lever drive motor 3583, and working lever drive gear 3584 are meshed with each other, and the back upper rotary base It has a spur gear-like working lever pinion gear 3585 rotatably mounted on the front face of 3571, and a working lever rack gear 3586a meshing with the working lever pinion gear 3585 from above and extending leftward and rightward. An operation lever 3586 slidably mounted in the left and right direction on the front surface of the rotation base 3571; For controlling the forward movement of the lever 3586 and attached to the front of the back upper rotation base 3571 and to the front of the back upper rotation base 3571 in the left-right direction of the operation lever 3586 And an operation lever movement detection sensor 3588 for detecting movement of the lens.

  The action lever 3586 is connected to a horizontally long rectangular main body 3586b having an action lever rack gear 3586a at its lower side, and connected to the upper side of the main body 3586b, and extends like a band plate to the left beyond the main body 3586b. A slide mounting portion 3586c slidably attached to the front upper portion of the back upper rotation base 3571 and a first mounting shaft member 3525 projecting leftward from the left side of the main body portion 3586b in the back upper first decoration unit 3510 The lock piece 3586d which can be inserted into the horizontal lock hole 3525a and the vertical lock hole 3525b, the first extension 3586e extending downward from the main body 3586b, and the lock piece 3586d from the lower end of the first extension 3586e The first working portion 3586f protruding leftward and the upper side of the main portion 3586b A second right extension 3586g connected to the vicinity of the end and extending rightward, and a second extension extending downward from the right end of the second right extension 3586g to a position slightly higher than the first working portion 3586f The second working portion 3586i extending leftward from near the lower end of the second lower extending portion 3586h and the lower end of the second lower extending portion 3586h, and the lower end of the first extending portion 3586e from the left end of the slide mounting portion 3586c And a third working portion 3586k extending leftward from the vicinity of the lower end of the left side of the third extending portion 3586j (see FIG. See 152).

  Also, the back-up rotation base unit 3570 includes a front gear cover 3589 attached to the front of the back-up rotation base 3571 so as to cover the front of the action lever drive gear 3584 and the action lever pinion gear 3585; Of the back upper rotation base unit rotation detection sensor 3590 which is attached to the front of the first hole 3571a below the first hole 3571a and detects the rotational position of the back upper rotation base unit 3570, and the front side of the back upper rotation base unit rotation detection sensor 3590 A back top rotation base relay substrate 3591 attached to the front of the back top rotation base 3571 to cover, and a substrate mounted to the front top of the back top rotation base 3571 to cover the front surface of the back top rotation base relay substrate 3591 And a cover 3592.

  The back up rotation base unit rotation detection sensor 3590 detects the rotation position of the back up rotation base unit 3570 by detecting the rotation detection piece 3611 d of the movable side base 3611 in the movable side unit 3610 of the back up lifting unit 3600 It is. The back upper rotation base relay substrate 3591 includes the back up rotation drive motor 3612 of the movable side unit 3610 in the back up lifting unit 3600, the back up second decoration board 3534, the back up third decoration board 3554, the action lever drive motor 3583, The connection with the action lever movement detection sensor 3588 and the back rotation base unit rotation detection sensor 3590 is relayed.

  Furthermore, the back upper rotation base unit 3570 is configured to cover the back side of the second first link gear 3575, the second second link gear 3576, and the second third link gear 3577. It is attached to the rear side of the back upper rotation base 3571 so as to cover the rear side of the rear right gear cover 3593 attached to the rear side, the third link gear 3581 and the third link gear 3582. And a motor cover 3595 mounted on the rear side of the back upper rotation base 3571 so as to cover the lower side of the operation lever drive motor 3583.

  Subsequently, the movement of the back-up rotation base unit 3570 will be described. In the back-up rotation base unit 3570, a mounting cylindrical portion 3571d projecting to the rear of the back-up rotation base 3571 is inserted into the barrel portion 3611a of the movable side base 3611 in the movable side unit 3610 of the back-up raising / lowering unit 3600. Thus, the front surface of the movable unit 3610 is mounted to rotate about an axis extending back and forth. In addition, the movement to the front is restricted by the first mounting shaft member 3525 of the back upper first decorative body unit 3510 which is attached to the front surface of the movable side unit by penetrating the mounting cylinder portion 3571 d from the front and attaching the back upper rotation base unit 3570 Be done. Also, the back upper rotation base unit 3570 is mounted on the front surface of the second drive link gear member 3573 rotatably mounted in the second hole 3571 b of the back upper rotation base 3571, By mounting the rear surface of the second mounting base 3544, the back upper second decoration unit 3530 can be rotatably mounted relative to the back top rotation base 3571. Furthermore, the back top rotation base unit 3570 is mounted on the front surface of the third drive link gear member 3578 rotatably mounted in the third hole 3571 c of the back top rotation base 3571, By mounting the rear surface of the three mounting base 3564, the back upper third decoration unit 3550 can be rotatably mounted relative to the back top rotation base 3571.

  The rotary base driven gear 3572 meshes with the rotary base drive gear 3614 of the movable unit 3610 in a state where the rear rotary unit 3570 is attached to the front of the movable unit 3610 in the rear lift unit 3600. The second link gear 3577 and the third link gear 3582 mesh with the central link gear 3611 b of the movable base 3611 of the movable unit 3610 (see FIG. 163). Then, when the rotation base drive gear 3614 is rotated by the drive of the back up rotation drive motor 3612 of the movable side unit 3610, the back up rotation base unit 3570 is inserted into the first hole 3571a (mounted through the rotation base driven gear 3572). It rotates around the axis | shaft extended back and front centering on the axial center of cylinder part 3571 d). The back-up rotation base unit 3570 has a horizontal position in which the longitudinal direction (the direction in which the first hole 3571a, the second hole 3571b, and the third hole 3571c are aligned) extends horizontally, and a vertically extending vertical position. It can rotate 90 degrees between its position. In the state of the horizontal position, the second hole 3571b is positioned to the right of the first hole 3571a, and in the state of the vertical position, the second hole 3571b is positioned below the first hole 3571a. At the horizontal position, the back up rotation base unit rotation detection sensor 3590 detects the rotation detection piece 3611 d of the movable side unit 3610 in the back up lifting unit 3600.

  When the back-up rotation base unit 3570 rotates between the horizontal position and the vertical position around the first hole 3571 a, the second link gear 3577 and the third link gear 3582 move the movable unit 3610. To revolve around the central link gear 3611b. At this time, since the second third link gear 3577 and the third third link gear 3582 are in mesh with the central link gear 3611 b, when revolving around the central link gear 3611 b, the second third link The gear 3577 and the third link gear 3582 rotate respectively, and each rotates relative to the back top rotation base 3571.

  Then, when the second link gear 3577 and the third link gear 3582 rotate, the rotation of the second link gear 3577 and the second link gear 3576 from the second link gear 3577 can be performed. The second drive link gear member 3573 is transmitted to the second link gear portion 3573b via the second link gear 3575, and the second drive link gear member 3573 rotates in the opposite direction to the second third link gear 3577. The third link gear portion 3578 b is transmitted from the third link gear 3582 to the third link gear portion 3578 b via the third second link gear 3581 and the third first link gear 3580, and the third drive link gear member 3578 is third It rotates in the opposite direction to the third link gear 3582.

  At this time, since the second link gear portion 3573b and the third link gear portion 3578b have the same diameter as the central link gear 3611b of the movable unit 3610, the rotation of the back upper rotation base 3571 and the central link gear 3611b is performed. The angle is the same as the rotation angle of the back-up rotation base 3571 and the second link gear portion 3573 b and the third link gear portion 3578 b. Since the center link gear 3611b of the movable unit 3610 is non-rotatably mounted, the second link gear portion 3573b and the third link gear portion 3578b move back and forth when the back upper rotation base 3571 rotates. It will revolve around the central link gear 3611 b without rotating around the extended axis. That is, the back-up rotation base unit 3570 is configured such that the first hole 3571 a (movable side) is maintained with the back-up second decoration unit 3530 and back-up third decoration unit 3550 kept in a constant vertical direction. The central link gear 3611 b) of the unit 3610 can be revolved.

  Also, when the back lever rotation base unit 3570 rotates the action lever pinion gear 3585 in the counterclockwise direction in a front view by the action lever drive motor 3583, the action lever 3586 is moved leftward via the action lever rack gear 3586a. When the acting lever pinion gear 3585 is rotated clockwise in a front view, the acting lever 3586 can be moved rightward via the acting lever rack gear 3586a.

  More specifically, the main body 3586b is located on the right side of the first hole 3571a in the back upper rotation base 3571 in a front view in a state where the action lever 3586 is assembled to the back up rotation base unit 3570. The slide attachment portion 3586c of the action lever 3586 extends leftward to the vicinity of the third hole 3571c so as to straddle the upper outside of the first hole 3571a. The first working portion 3586f is located below the first hole 3571a. The second right extension 3586 g extends to the vicinity of the second hole 3571 b above the second hole 3571 b. The second lower extending portion 3586 h extends such that the lower end is located below the second hole 3571 b. The second application portion 3586i is located at a height near the lower portion of the second hole 3571b. The lower end of the third extending portion 3586 j extends below the third hole 3571 c. Therefore, the third working portion 3586k is located below the third hole 3571c.

  When the action lever 3586 is moved to the leftmost position (state of action position) as shown in FIG. 152 (a), the lock piece 3586d protrudes leftward from the left side of the main body 3586b in a front view. Is projected into the first hole 3571a. Further, in this state, the left end of the first working portion 3586f is located slightly to the left of the center of the first hole 3571a. In addition, the left end of the second operation portion 3586i is located to the left of the second hole 3571b. Furthermore, the left end of the third working portion 3586k is located near the right end of the third hole 3571c. Further, in this state, the lower end of the third extending portion 3586 j of the action lever 3586 is detected by the action lever movement detection sensor 3588.

  On the other hand, in the state in which the action lever 3586 is moved to the most right (state in the non-action position), the lock piece 3586 d and the first action portion 3586 f are located to the right of the first hole 3571 a. Further, the left end of the second operation portion 3586i is positioned slightly leftward with respect to the center of the second hole 3571b. Furthermore, the left end of the third working portion 3586k is located to the right of the third hole 3571c. In this state, the lower end of the third extending portion 3586j of the action lever 3586 is separated from the action lever movement detection sensor 3588 and is in a non-detection state.

  The action lever 3586, which will be described in detail later, is moved to the action position, and the lock piece 3586d is inserted into the horizontal lock hole 3525a or the vertical lock hole 3525b in the first mounting shaft member 3525 of the back top first decoration unit 3510 By doing this, the rotation of the back up rotation base unit 3570 with respect to the movable side unit 3610 of the back up lifting unit 3600 can be restricted (locked). Therefore, when the operating lever 3586 is moved to the non-operating position, the lock piece 3586d comes out from the horizontal lock hole 3525a or the vertical lock hole 3525b, and rotates back to the movable side unit 3610 of the back raising / lowering unit 3600. The base unit 3570 can be rotated.

  In the action lever 3586, the left end of each of the first action portion 3586f, the second action portion 3586i, and the third action portion 3586k is the first opening / closing arm 3521 of the back first decoration unit 3510, the back. The second opening / closing arm 3541 of the upper second decoration unit 3530 and the third opening / closing arm 3561 of the back third decoration unit 3550 can be brought into contact with each other. Therefore, when the back-up rotation base unit 3570 is rotated and positioned in the vertically extended state, when the action lever 3586 is moved to the action position, the first opening / closing arm 3521, the second opening / closing arm 3541, and the third opening / closing arm The arm 3561 can be slid upwards.

5-9 f-5. Back lift unit]
Next, the back-up lifting unit 3600 of the back-up movable rendering unit 3500 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 153 to FIG. FIG. 153 (a) is a perspective view from the front of the back-up lift unit in the back-up movable effect unit, and FIG. 153 (b) is a perspective view from the back of the back lift unit. FIG. 154 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the back raising and lowering unit disassembled into a movable unit and a fixed unit and seen from the front, and FIG. 154 (b) is a back raising and lowering unit as a movable unit and a fixed unit It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled and was seen from back. FIG. 155 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the movable side unit of the back-up raising and lowering unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 155 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the movable side unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 156 is an exploded perspective view of the fixed side unit of the back-up lift unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 157 is an exploded perspective view of the fixed side unit of the back up lift unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 158 (a) is an explanatory view showing the drive system from the front when the movable side unit of the back-up elevating unit is at the ascending position, and FIG. 158 (b) is a drive when the movable side unit of the back-up elevating unit is at the descent position It is an explanatory view showing a system from the front.

  The back up lift unit 3600 is attached between the back left movable effect unit 3300 and the back right movable effect unit 3400 on the upper side of the opening 3010 a in the front surface of the back wall of the back box 3010. The back up lift unit 3600 has a movable side unit 3610 to which the back up first decoration unit 3510 and the back up rotation base unit 3570 are attached on the front, and a fixed side unit up and down the moveable unit 3610 to be mounted in the back box 3010a. And 3650.

  First, as shown in FIG. 155, the movable unit 3610 of the back-up raising and lowering unit 3600 is attached to the substantially rectangular movable side base 3611 extending left and right in front view and the upper right corner of the front side of the movable side base 3611 A back-up rotation drive motor 3612 with a pivoting rotation shaft projecting rearward through the movable side base 3611, a rotation drive gear 3613 attached to the rotation shaft of the back-up rotation drive motor 3612, and a rotation drive gear 3613 And a rotation base drive gear 3614 meshed with the rotation base driven gear 3572 of the back top rotation base unit 3570 and rotatably mounted on the front surface of the movable side base 3611.

  Movable side unit 3610 has a motor cover 3615 attached to the front of movable base 3611 so as to cover back-up rotational drive motor 3612, and a flat base attached to the rear of movable base 3611. A cover 3616 and a movable side relay board 3617 attached to the front of the base cover 3616 are provided.

  The movable side base 3611 of the movable side unit 3610 is formed at the front end of the outer peripheral surface of the barrel portion 3611a and the barrel portion 3611a, which cylindrically protrudes forward from the lower portion at the center in the left and right direction on the front surface. A central link gear 3611b which meshes with the second link third link gear 3577 and the third link gear 3582 of the base unit 3570, and penetrates back and forth at a position from the center in the left-right direction at the top to the left A rotation detection piece 3611d attached to the long hole-like elevation slit 3611c and the lower surface of the shaft cylinder portion 3611a on the front surface and detected by the back upper rotation base unit rotation detection sensor 3590 of the back upper rotation base unit 3570 See FIG. 158)).

  The axial cylindrical portion 3611a of the movable side base 3611 is formed to have a slightly larger diameter than the outer diameter of the mounting cylindrical portion 3571d of the rear upper rotation base unit 3571 in the rear upper rotation base unit 3570, and rotates the mounting cylindrical portion 3571d. It can be inserted as possible. The center link gear 3611 b has the same diameter as the second link gear portion 3573 b of the second drive link gear member 3573 in the upper back rotation base unit 3570 and the third link gear portion 3578 b of the third drive link gear member 3578. Are formed at the same pitch.

  The movable side relay substrate 3617 includes the back upper relay substrate 3659 of the fixed side unit 3650, the first back decoration substrate 3514 of the first back decoration unit 3510, and the second back rotation base relay substrate 3591 of the second rotation base unit 3570. The connection with the back rotation drive motor 3612 is relayed. The base cover 3617 has the lifting slide rails 3656 of the fixed unit 3650 attached to the left and right ends of the rear surface. Further, the lower end of the elevating spring 3657 of the fixed unit 3650 is attached to the rear side of the base cover 3617.

  As shown in FIGS. 156 and 157, etc., the fixed side unit 3650 of the back-up raising and lowering unit 3600 is a substantially square fixed side base 3651 mounted in the back box 3010 and extending left and right in front view; In the movable gear unit 3610, a spur gear-like elevation gear portion 3652a rotatably mounted around a front and back axis in the front center of the front face and a column shape projecting forward from near the outer periphery of the front face of the elevation gear portion 3652a A lifting rotary body 3652 having a lifting drive pin 3652b slidably inserted in the lifting slit 3611c of the movable side base 3611, and a lifting detection piece 3652c fan-shaped extending outward from the lifting gear portion 3652a An elevation drive gear 3653 engaged with the elevation gear portion 3652a of the elevation rotary body 3652, and an elevation drive A 3653 is provided with a backing on elevation drive motor 3654 attached to the rear surface of which the fixed-side base 3651 attached to the rotating shaft.

  The fixed unit 3650 is attached to the front of the fixed base 3651 and is attached to the elevation detection sensor 3655 for detecting the detection piece 3652 c of the lifting rotary body 3652 and to both the left and right sides of the front The base cover 3616 of the movable unit 3610 is attached to the front, and the left and right end sides of the lower part of the front of the fixed base 3651 outside the pair of lifting slide rails 3656 and the pair of lifting slide rails 3656 The upper end side is attached, and the lower end side is attached to the movable side base 3611 of the movable side unit 3610, and the movable side base 3611 is biased to move upward, and includes a pair of elevating springs 3657.

  Furthermore, the fixed side unit 3650 has a penetrating slit 3658a which penetrates back and forth and extends in a semicircular arc shape through which the elevation drive pin 3652b of the elevation rotary body 3652 can pass, and a pair of elevation slide rails The fixed front cover 3658 is attached to the front of the fixed base 3651 so as to cover the front of the raising / lowering rotating body 3652 between 3656 and the back of the fixed base 3651. To cover the back side of the back upper relay board 3659 connecting the movable side relay board 3617, the back up and down drive motor 3654, and the lift detection sensor 3655, and the lower right relay board 3034, and the back side of the back upper relay board 3659 And a substrate cover 3660 attached to the rear side of the fixed side base 3651.

  Subsequently, the operation of the back-up lifting unit 3600 will be described. In the back-up raising / lowering unit 3600, the mounting cylinder part 3571d of the back-upper rotation base 3571 in the back-up rotation base unit 3570 is rotatably inserted into the barrel portion 3611a of the movable side base 3611 in the movable side unit 3610. The rear end of the first mounting shaft member 3525 of the back top first decorative body unit 3510 is attached to the front surface of the movable side base 3611 through the mounting cylindrical portion 3571 d of the back top rotation base 3571. Thus, the movable side unit 3610 rotatably mounts the back up rotation base unit 3570 in a state where it can not move forward, around an axis extending back and forth centering on the axial cylindrical portion 3611a (first hole 3571a) be able to.

  When the back upper rotation base unit 3570 is attached to the movable side base 3611 of the movable side unit 3610, the rotation base drive gear 3614 is engaged with the rotation base driven gear 3752 of the back upper rotation base unit 3570. Therefore, when the rotation base drive gear 3614 is rotated through the rotation drive gear 3613 by the drive of the back up rotation drive motor 3612, the back up rotation base unit 3570 is rotated about the barrel portion 3611a (first hole 3571a). It can be done. The movable side unit 3610 can rotate the back-up rotation base unit 3570 90 degrees between the horizontally extended horizontal position and the vertically extended vertical position. The rotation detection piece 3611 d of the movable base 3611 in the movable unit 3610 is detected by the back upper rotation base unit rotation detection sensor 3590 of the back upper rotation base unit 3570 when the back upper rotation base unit 3570 is in the horizontal position. .

  Further, in the assembled state, the back-up lifting unit 3600 can move (lifts) only the movable unit 3610 up and down with respect to the fixed unit 3650 by the pair of lifting slide rails 3656 of the fixed unit 3650 ing. In the movable unit 3610, the elevation drive pin 3652b of the elevation rotary member 3652 in the fixed unit 3650 is slidably inserted in the elevation slit 3611c of the movable base 3611 in the left-right direction. Therefore, the position of the movable unit 3610 in the vertical direction is restricted by the height position of the elevation drive pin 3652 b in the elevation rotary member 3652. The movable unit 3610 is biased to move upward by a pair of elevating springs 3657.

  In the back-up lift unit 3600, as shown in FIG. 158 (a), in the normal state, the lift drive pin 3652b, which revolves by the rotation of the lift rotary body 3652, is directly above the rotation center of the lift rotary body 3652. On the other hand, the movable unit 3610 is positioned at the uppermost position by the elevation drive pin 3652b. In this state, the detection piece 3652 c of the lifting and lowering rotary body 3652 is detected by the lifting and lowering detection sensor 3655. Further, in this state, the elevation drive pin 3652 b is in contact with the right end in the elevation slit 3611 c extending to the left and right of the movable base 3611 in the movable unit 3610.

  Therefore, the weight on the movable side unit 3610 acts on the lift drive pin 3652b, and even if the lift rotary body 3652 tries to rotate clockwise in a front view through the lift drive pin 3652b, the lift drive pin 3652b Since it is in contact with the right end of the elevation slit 3611c, the elevation rotary body 3652 can not rotate in the clockwise direction as viewed from the front, and the downward movement of the movable unit 3610 is blocked. ing. That is, the movable side unit 3610 is locked at the raised position. Thus, the weight (load) from the movable unit 3610 does not act on the back up and down drive motor 3554 via the up and down gear portion 3652 a of the up and down rotating body 3652 and the up and down drive gear 3653. The load is not applied to the upper and lower drive motor 3554.

  When the lifting and lowering rotary body 3652 is rotated counterclockwise in a front view by the back-up lifting and lowering drive motor 365 from the state of the lifting position, the lifting and lowering drive pin 3652 b of the lifting and lowering rotary body 3652 moves leftward. The movable unit 3610 moves to the biasing force of the pair of lift springs 3657 via the lift slit 3611 c while the lift drive pin 3652 b slides leftward in the lift slit 3611 c. It will move downward against it. The lift drive pin 3652b, which revolves by rotating the lift rotating body 365 counterclockwise, revolves downward below the same height as the rotation center of the lift rotating body 3652, the left-right direction of the lift drive pin 3652b The direction of movement is changed to move downward while moving rightward, and it slides rightward in the inside of the elevation slit 3611c.

  When the elevation drive pin 3652 b is positioned directly below the center of the elevation rotator 3652, the rotation of the elevation rotator 3652 is stopped, and at the same time, the downward movement of the movable unit 3610 is stopped. Is the state of the lowered position where it has lowered most (see FIG. 158 (b)). When moving the movable unit 3610 from the lowered position to the raised position, the back-up lift drive motor 3554 is driven in the opposite direction to rotate the lift rotary body 3652 clockwise in a front view. Can be returned to the raised position. At this time, the upward movement of the movable unit 3610 is assisted by the biasing force of the pair of lift springs 3657, and the load on the back-up lift drive motor 3654 is reduced.

  As described above, the back-up lift unit 3600 rotates the back-up first decoration unit 3510, the back-up second decoration unit 3530, the back-up third decoration unit 3550, and the back-up rotation via the movable side unit 3610. The base unit 3570 can be moved (lifted) up and down between the raised position and the lowered position.

5-9 f-6. Operation of back-to-back movable effect unit]
Next, the operation of the back-up movable effect unit 3500 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 159 to 168. FIG. 159 is an explanatory view showing a drive system for lifting and lowering when the movable side unit of the lifting and lowering unit in the lifting and lowering unit in the lifting and lowering unit in the lifting and lowering unit in the lifting and lowering unit and FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the drive system for raising / lowering when the side unit is a fall position. FIG. 161 is an explanatory view showing the state of the action lever in the acting position when the movable side unit is at the lowered position and the back rotation base unit is at the horizontal position in the back movable effect unit, and FIG. It is an explanatory view showing a state of an operation lever in a non-operating position when the movable side unit is at the lowered position and the back up rotation base unit is at the horizontal position. FIG. 163 is an explanatory view showing a drive system of the back-up rotation base unit when the movable-side unit is at the lowered position and the back-up rotation base unit is at the horizontal position in the back-up movable effect unit. FIG. 165 is an explanatory view showing a drive system of the back-up rotation base unit when the movable-side unit is at the lowered position and the back-up rotation base unit is rotated 45 degrees clockwise from the horizontal position. It is explanatory drawing which shows the drive system of a back up rotation base unit when a back movement rotation base unit is a vertical position in a movable side unit in a descent | fall position.

  Further, FIG. 166 is an explanatory view showing a state in which the action lever is in the non-operating position when the movable unit is in the lowered position and the back rotation base unit is in the vertical position in the back movable effect unit, and FIG. FIG. 168 is an explanatory view showing a state in which the action lever regulates the rotation at the action position when the movable side unit is at the lowered position and the back up rotation base unit is at the vertical position in the effect unit; When the movable side unit is in the lowered position and the back top rotation base unit is in the vertical position, the action lever acts on the back top first decoration unit, the back top second decoration unit, and the back top third decoration unit in the action position It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which is giving.

  In the normal condition, as shown in FIG. 159, etc., the back-up movable effect unit 3500 has the movable side unit 3610 of the back-up / lifting unit 3600 in the most raised position and the back-up rotation base unit The 3570 is in a horizontally extended horizontal position. In this state, with the back top first decoration unit 3510 at the center, the back top second decoration unit 3530 and the back top third decoration unit 3550 are arranged on the left and right sides. In addition, the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 of the back upper first decoration unit 3510, and the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decoration lens of the back upper second decoration unit 3530 3532 and the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 of the back top third decorative unit 3550 are respectively the first open / close spring 3523, the second open / close spring 3543, and the third open / close spring 3563 Due to the biasing force, they are in the closed position where they are in contact with each other.

  In this normal state, as shown in FIG. 159, the elevation drive pin 3652b for revolving the fixed unit 3650 in the back elevation unit 3600 is positioned slightly to the right with respect to the center of rotation of the elevation rotator 3652. And the right end in the raising / lowering slit 3611c extended to the left and right of the movable side base 3611. As a result, through the elevating slit 3611c of the movable unit 3610, the raising / lowering driving pin 3652b, the back first decoration unit 3510, the back second decoration unit 3530, the back third decoration unit 3550, the back Even if the weight (load) of the rotation base unit 3570 and the movable unit 3610 acts, the elevation drive pin 3652b can not revolve further clockwise in a front view direction, and is moved downward of the movable unit 3610. Movement is restricted and locked in the raised position.

  Therefore, in the normal state, the loads of the first back decoration unit 3510, the second back decoration unit 3530, the third back decoration unit 3550, the second rotation base unit 3570, and the movable side unit 3610 The back up and down drive motor 3554 is not acted on, and no load is applied to the back up and down drive motor 3554. Further, in the normal state, a detection piece 3652 c of the lifting and lowering rotary body 3652 which revolves the lifting and lowering drive pin 3652 b is detected by the lifting and lowering detection sensor 3655.

  From this normal state, when the lifting drive pin 3652b of the lifting rotary body 3652 is revolved in the counterclockwise direction in front view by driving the back-up lifting drive motor 3654, the lifting drive pin 3652b is moved in the lifting slit 3611c. The movable unit 3610 moves downward as the elevation drive pin 3652b descends, and when the elevation drive pin 3652b reaches the most lowered position, the revolution of the elevation drive pin 3652b is stopped. As a result, the movable unit 3610 is positioned at the lowered position (see FIG. 160).

  The back-up movable effect unit 3500 moves the movable side unit 3610 of the back-up lifting unit 3600 to the lowered position, whereby the back-up first decoration unit 3510, the back-up second decoration unit 3530, the back-up third decoration The body unit 3550 and the back top rotation base unit 3570 can be positioned at the top of the front side of the game board side effect display device 1600 (see FIG. 174).

  When moving the movable-side unit 3610 of the back-up lift unit 3600 between the raised position and the lowered position, the back-up movable effect unit 3500 moves the action lever 3586 of the back-up rotation base unit 3570 to the acting position. There is. In a state where the operating lever 3586 is moved to the left operating position by the driving of the operating lever drive motor 3583, as shown in FIG. It is in the state of being inserted into the horizontal lock hole 3525a of the first mounting shaft member 3525. As a result, the action lever 3586 can not rotate around the first attachment shaft member 3525, so the back upper rotation base unit 3570 to which the action lever 3586 is attached is the first attachment shaft member 3525 (movable side The rotation is locked with respect to the barrel portion 3611 a) of the unit 3610. That is, the rotation of the back-up rotation base unit 3570 is locked at the horizontal position.

  In addition, since the lock piece 3586 d of the action lever 3586 has a tapered tip, the horizontal lock hole of the first mounting shaft member 3525 even if the back upper rotation base unit 3570 is slightly displaced from the horizontal position By inserting the back up rotation base unit 3570, the back up rotation base unit 3570 can be moved to the horizontal position and the rotation can be locked.

  In the action lever 3586, although not shown, the second right extension 3586g of the action lever 3586 abuts on the receiving boss 3541b of the second opening / closing arm 3541 in the back upper second decoration unit 3530 from above. The third extending portion 3586j (the left end of the slide attaching portion 3586c) of the action lever 3586 is in contact with the predetermined position of the third upper arm 3558 in the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 from the right. Thus, by the action lever 3586, rotation of the back upper rotation base 3571 in the back upper second decoration unit 3530 around the axis about the second hole 3571 b and rotation of the back upper third decoration unit 3550 in the back upper direction. Rotation about an axis about the third hole 3571 c of the base 3571 is blocked. Therefore, by moving (raising and lowering) the movable side unit 3610 of the back-up and-down elevating unit 3600 in the vertical direction, the back-up second decoration unit 3530, the back-side third decoration unit 3550, and the back-up rotation base unit 3570 are Even if vibration acts, the back upper second decoration unit 3530, the back upper third decoration unit 3550, and the back top rotation base unit 3570 do not swing by the action of the action lever 3586 located at the action position. ing.

  The back top first decoration unit 3510, the back top second decoration unit 3530, the back top third decoration unit 3550, and the back top rotation base unit 3570 are provided via the movable side unit 3610 of the back top lifting unit 3600, When the operating lever pinion gear 3585 is rotated clockwise in a front view by the operating lever drive motor 3583 via the operating lever drive gear 3584 while in the lowered position, the motor is engaged with the operating lever pinion gear 3585 The operating lever 3586 in the horizontal state is moved to the right non-operating position by the operating lever rack gear 3586a, and the lock piece 3586d is removed from the horizontal lock hole 3525a of the first mounting shaft member 3525 (see FIG. 162). As a result, the back-up rotation base unit 3570 rotates about the mounting shaft portion 3525c of the first mounting shaft member 3525 (the first hole 3571a of the back-up rotation base 3571, and the barrel portion 3611a of the movable side base 3611). Will be able to

  In the back-up rotation base unit 3570 of the back-up movable effect unit 3500, as shown in FIG. 163, the rotation base driven gear 3572 meshes with the rotation base drive gear 3614 in the movable unit 3610, and The third link gear 3577 and the third link gear 3582 are in mesh with the central link gear 3611 b of the movable base 3611 of the movable unit 3610.

  Then, with the back-up rotation base unit 3570 in the horizontal position and the action lever 3586 in the non-action position, the back-up rotation drive motor 3612 of the movable unit 3610 is driven to view the rotation base drive gear 3614 from the front. When rotated in the counterclockwise direction, the back upper rotation base unit 3570 is rotated by the center link gear 3611 b (first hole 3571 a, mounting cylinder) via the rotation base driven gear 3752 engaged with the rotation base drive gear 3614. It rotates in a clockwise direction as viewed from the front about the axis of the portion 3571 d) (see FIG. 164). At this time, since the back top first decorative body unit 3510 is attached to the front surface of the movable side unit 3610 through the first hole 3571a which is the rotation center of the back top rotation base unit 3570, the back top rotation base It does not rotate with the unit 3570.

  When the back-up rotation base unit 3570 rotates around the center link gear 3611 b, the back-up movable effect unit 3500 meshes with the second link gear 3577 and the third third gear for meshing with the center link gear 3611 b. The link gear 3582 will rotate while revolving around the center link gear 3611 b, and will rotate in the clockwise direction with respect to the back top rotation base 3571, respectively. When the second link gear 3577 and the third link gear 3582 are rotated, their rotation is transmitted to the second link gear portion 3573 b and the third link gear portion 3578 b, and the second drive is driven. The link gear member 3573 and the third drive link gear member 3578 rotate in the counterclockwise direction with respect to the back top rotation base 3571. That is, when the back-up rotation base unit 3570 is rotated in a clockwise direction as viewed from the front, the second hole 3571 b and the third hole 3571 c are rotatably attached to both ends in the longitudinal direction of the back-up rotation base 3571. The drive link gear member 3573 and the third drive link gear member 3578 revolve clockwise around the first hole 3571a, and the second drive link gear member 3573 and the third drive link gear member 3578 However, each of the second hole 3571 b and the third hole 3571 c of the back-up rotation base 3571 rotates in a counterclockwise direction (rotation).

  Because the second link gear portion 3573 b of the second drive link gear member 3573 and the third link gear portion 3578 b of the third drive link gear member 3578 have the same diameter as the central link gear 3611 b of the movable unit 3610 The rotation angles of the back upper rotation base 3571 and the center link gear 3611 b and the rotation angles of the back upper rotation base 3571, the second link gear portion 3573 b, and the third link gear portion 3578 b are the same. When the back upper rotation base 3571 is rotated about the center link gear 3611 b, the second drive link gear member 3573 and the third drive link gear member 3578 maintain the rotation direction constant while maintaining the center link gear. It revolves around 3611 b (see FIGS. 164 and 165). Since the back second decoration unit 3530 and the back third decoration unit 3550 are attached to the front surfaces of the second drive link gear member 3573 and the third drive link gear member 3578, respectively When the back top rotation base 3571 is rotated, the back top second decoration unit 3530 and the back top third decoration unit 3550 keep the top and bottom orientation constant, and the back top first decoration unit 3510 is It will revolve around.

  The back-up movable effect unit 3500 has the back-up second decoration unit 3530 disposed on the right side of the back-up first decoration unit 3510 when the back-up rotation base unit 3570 is in the horizontal position. Since the back upper third decoration unit 3550 is disposed on the left side of the first decoration unit 3510, when the back up rotation base unit 3570 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front, it is in the vertical position. The two decoration units 3530 and the back third decoration unit 3550 are arranged on the lower side and the upper side of the first back decoration unit 3510, respectively, with their top and bottom orientations unchanged (FIG. 165). See). Accordingly, when the back-up rotation base unit 3570 is in the vertical position, the back-up third decoration unit 3550, the back-up first decoration unit 3510, and the back-up second decoration unit 3530 are arranged in order from the top . In this state, the first back decoration unit 3510, the second back decoration unit 3530, and the third back decoration unit 3550 are at the center in the left-right direction of the game area 5a in the closed position, respectively. It is positioned so as to traverse substantially the entire height within the frame of the accessory 2500 (see FIG. 176).

  In a state where the back-up rotation base unit 3570 is rotated from the horizontal position to the vertical position, as shown in FIG. 166, the action lever 3586 of the back-up rotation base unit 3570 located in the inoperative position is a lock piece. The 3586 d is directed upward. In this state, when the operation lever pinion motor 3583 is driven to rotate the operation lever pinion gear 3585 in the counterclockwise direction in a front view, and the operation lever 3586 is moved upward from the non-operation position to the operation position The lock piece 3586 d of the action lever 3586 is inserted into the vertical lock hole 3525 b of the first attachment shaft member 3525 (see FIG. 167). As a result, the rotation of the back-up rotation base unit 3570 is locked at the vertical position.

  In the back-up movable presentation unit 3500, when the back-up rotation base unit 3570 is in the vertical position and the action lever 3586 is moved from the non-action position to the action position, the action lever 3586 moves with the upward movement. The tip (upper end) of each of the first working portion 3586f, the second working portion 3586i, and the third working portion 3586k of 3586 is a receiving boss of the first opening and closing arm 3521 in the back first decoration unit 3510. 3521b, the receiving boss 3541b of the second opening / closing arm 3541 in the back upper second decoration unit 3530, and the lower end of the third opening / closing arm 3561 in the back upper third decoration unit 3550 from below respectively The arm 3521, the second opening and closing arm 3541, and the third opening and closing arm 3561 are moved upward.

  Then, when the first opening / closing arm 3521, the second opening / closing arm 3541, and the third opening / closing arm 3561 move upward, respectively, the first left movable of the back top first decoration unit 3510 which has been in the closed position. The third left of the decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512, the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 of the second back decoration unit 3530, and the third left third decoration unit of the back third The movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 move outward in the left-right direction so as to be separated from each other to be in the open position (see FIG. 168).

  Thus, the third fixed decorative lens 3553 facing from between the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 in the back upper third decorative body unit 3550, the first in the back upper first decorative body unit 3510 A first fixed decorative lens 3513 facing from between one left movable decorative lens 3511 and a first right movable decorative lens 3512, and a second left movable decorative lens 3531 and a second right movable decoration in the back upper second decorative unit 3530 The second fixed decorative lens 3533 facing from between the lens 3532 and the lens 3532 is in a straight line from top to bottom. In this state, when the first back decoration unit 3510, the second back decoration unit 3530, and the third back decoration unit 3550 are in the open position, respectively, the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction The first fixed decorative lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, and the third fixed decorative lens 3553 in the back front decoration unit 3100 are positioned so as to be cut across substantially the entire height within the frame of the character 2500. They are lined up and down with approximately the same width so as to be continuous with the back front lower central lens 3131 (see FIG. 177).

  Note that, in order to return the back-up movable effect unit 3500 to the normal state, it is possible to return to the normal state by performing the operation reverse to the above.

  In addition, the back-up movable effect unit 3500 includes the first left movable decoration lens 3511 and the first right movable decoration lens 3512 of the back-up first decoration unit 3510 and the second left movable decoration lens of the back-up second decoration unit 3530 In the closed position in which the 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 and the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 of the back upper third decorative unit 3550 respectively abut each other, Show different decorations from left to right, with the third decoration unit 3550 on the back, the first decoration unit 3510 on the back, and the second decoration unit 3530 on the back side by side, One letter is in a state where a predetermined logo along the concept of the pachinko machine 1 is written horizontally, and the player is made to recognize the concept of the pachinko machine 1 It is possible. When the back top rotation base unit 3570 is in the vertical position and the back top third decoration unit 3550, the back top first decoration unit 3510, and the back top second decoration unit 3530 are arranged from the top to the bottom, The logo in accordance with the concept of the pachinko machine 1 is in the state of vertical writing, and even in this state, the logo can be recognized by the player.

  Thus, according to the back-up movable rendering unit 3500, the relative positions of the back-upper rotation base unit 3570 with respect to the back-up first decoration unit 3510, the back-up second decoration unit 3530, and the back-up third decoration unit 3550 The back decoration first decoration unit 3510, the back decoration second decoration unit 3530, and the back by the action lever 3586 which moves between the action position and the non-action position according to the rotational position (horizontal position or vertical position). It is possible to show different effects to the player by exerting another action of the rotation lock (first action) and the movement to the open position (second action) to the upper third decoration body unit 3550, so that the player can be varied by various effects. As a result, it is possible to make the player hard to get bored, to entertain the player, and to suppress a drop in interest for the player's game.

[5-9 g. Back and forth movable production unit]
Next, the back and bottom movable effect unit 3700 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. Fig. 169 (a) is a front view of the back-to-back movable effect unit of the back unit, (b) is a back view of the back-to-back movable effect unit, (c) is a back-to-back movable decorative member in the back-to-back movable effect unit It is a rear view shown in the state which raised the unit. The lower back movable effect unit 3700 is attached to the lower side of the opening 3010 a at the center in the left-right direction of the front surface of the rear wall in the back box 3010. Back-to-back movable effect unit 3700 is mounted in back-to-back movable decoration unit 3710 having a predetermined three-dimensional decoration and back box 3010 to move back-to-back movable decoration unit 3710 up and down. And a lower drive unit 3750.

  Under the back movable decoration unit 3710, a three-dimensional decoration in which a plurality of gates are arranged side by side is formed under the roof extending to the left and right, and the part of each gate penetrates back and forth A plurality of back lower door members 3712 attached to the main body 3711 and the back lower decorative body main body 3711 so as to open and close in the form of a double door in pairs as a pair, and a back lower door member 3712 It is attached to the back lower side of the lower back decoration body main body 3711 more back than the lower back decoration base base 3713 which is attached to the right and left so that it can slide horizontally in the front lower part of the lower back decoration base 3713 A lower opening / closing slider 3714 for hinge-rotating the back lower door member 3712 on the left side in a front view of a plurality of back lower door members 3712 in the pair, and the left-right direction at the front upper portion of the back lower decoration base 3713 Slidably the back under the door member 3712 viewed from the front right side in mounted and are pairwise multiple subplantar door member 3712 comprises a, opening and closing the slider 3715 on which the hinge rotates.

  In addition, the back bottom movable decoration unit 3710 is rotatably attached to the back side of the back bottom decoration base 3713, and is used for opening and closing rotation to slide the lower opening and closing slider 3714 and the upper opening and closing slider 3715 in different directions in the left and right direction. One end is attached to the upper end of the body 3716 and the opening / closing rotating body 3716 and the other end is attached to the back lower decoration base 3713 via the lower opening / closing slider 3714 and the upper opening / closing slider 3715 And a door closing spring 3717 biasing the opening and closing rotary body 3716 so that the door 3712 rotates in the closing direction. The door closing spring 3717 biases the opening and closing rotary body 3716 to rotate in the counterclockwise direction in the rear view.

  Furthermore, the back rear movable decoration unit 3710 is disposed on the back side of the back bottom decoration lens 3718 (see FIG. 179) attached to the back side of the back bottom decoration body 3712 and the back side of the back bottom decoration lens 3718 Wiring cable 3701 which is attached to the underside decorative substrate 3719 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front and the back side decorative substrate 3719 attached to the underside decorative body base 3713 and connects the underside decorative substrate 3719 and the underside relay substrate 3757 And an upper wiring cover 3720 that can be guided. The wiring cable 3701 is a flexible flat cable. The upper wiring cover 3720 is attached to the lower back decoration base 3713 to form a space opened downward that can accommodate the wiring cable 3701. Further, the upper wiring cover 3720 has a curved upper guiding portion 3720a for guiding the wiring cable 3701 on the right end side in rear view.

  The lower back drive unit 3750 is mounted on the lower side of the opening 3010a at the center in the left-right direction of the front wall of the back box 3010, penetrates back and forth to the upper left corner in front view, and is short from the right end An under-back drive base 3751 having an extending link slit 3751 a, and an under-back support unit 3710 mounted on the top and movably mounted on the front of the under-back drive base 3751. A lower elevating base 3752, a pair of elevating arms 3753 rotatably mounted respectively near the left and right ends of the front of the back lower drive base 3751 and moving the back lower elevating base 3752 up and down, and a rear lower drive base 3751 behind The lower back drive motor 3754 attached to the side and the lower back drive motor 3754 transmit the rotation to move the pair up and down A plurality of transmission gears 3755 to rotate the over arm 3753 directions different from each other, and a.

  Also, the lower back drive unit 3750 is slidably mounted in the link slit 3751a of the lower back drive base 3751 at the lower end side and rotatably mounted at the upper end side to the opening / closing rotating body 3716 of the lower back decoration unit 3710. The rod-like link arm 3756 is provided. The upper end of the link arm 3756 is rotatably attached at a position on the right side in a rear view with respect to the rotation center of the opening / closing rotary body 3716. As a result, when the link arm 3756 is pulled downward, the opening / closing rotary body 3716 rotates in a clockwise direction as viewed from the rear against the biasing force of the door closing spring 3717.

  Furthermore, the back bottom drive unit 3750 is attached to the back side of the back bottom drive base 3751 and relays the connection between the back bottom decorative substrate 3719 and the back bottom drive motor 3754 and the lower right relay substrate 3034. A lower portion of the substrate 3757 which can be guided through the wiring cable 3701 attached above the lower rear relay substrate 3757 on the rear side of the lower rear drive base 3751 and connecting the lower rear relay substrate 3757 and the lower rear decoration substrate 3719 And a wiring cover 3758. The lower wiring cover 3758 is attached to the lower back driving base 3751 to form an upwardly open space capable of accommodating the wiring cable 3701. The lower wiring cover 3758 has a curved lower guiding portion 3758 a for guiding the wiring cable 3701 on the right end side in rear view.

  Subsequently, the operation of the lower back movable effect unit 3700 will be described. In the back downward movable effect unit 3700, in the normal state, the back downward movable decorative unit 3710 is in the most lowered state (see FIGS. 169A and 169B). In this state, a plurality of back lower door members 3712 are closed by the opening / closing rotary body 3716, the lower opening / closing slider 3714 and the upper opening / closing slider 3715 by the biasing force of the door closing spring 3717. A plurality of doors 3711 (back and bottom door members 3712) are in a closed state. Moreover, in this state, it is located below the upper end of the part which forms the lower side in the frame-shaped center character 2500, and can hardly be seen from the front (see FIG. 114 etc.).

  In this normal state, when the back lower drive motor 3754 is driven to rotate the pair of lift arms 3753 so that the side facing each moves upward, the back lower lift base 3752 moves upward, and the back lower An under-back movable decoration unit 3710 attached to the lifting base 3752 is lifted.

  At this time, since the upper end of the link arm 3756 is attached to the opening / closing rotating body 3716 in the lower back movable decoration unit 3710, the link arm 3756 is lifted together with the lower back movable decoration unit 3710. The link slit 3751a in the drive base 3751 is slid upward (left in rear view).

  When the lower back side of the link arm 3756 reaches the upper end of the link slit 3751a as the back bottom movable decorative body unit 3710 ascends, the link arm 3756 can not move further upward. At this position (first rising position), the back downward movable effect unit 3700 can temporarily stop the vertical movement of the back downward movable decorative unit 3710. In this state, the plurality of gate parts of the back bottom decoration body 3711 are positioned above the lower side (stage 2530) of the center character 2500, and the door is closed through the frame of the center character 2500. Multiple gates of the condition can be viewed (see FIG. 178).

  In the state of the first elevation position, when the back bottom movable decoration unit 3710 is further raised, the link arm 3756 is pulled downward relative to the back bottom movable decoration unit 3710 by the link slit 3751a, and the link The opening / closing rotary body 3716, to which the upper end side of the arm 3752 is attached, rotates in a clockwise direction as viewed from the rear against the biasing force of the door closing spring 3717 (see FIG. 169 (c)). When the opening / closing rotary body 3716 rotates clockwise in a rear view, the lower opening / closing slider 3714 and the upper opening / closing slider 3715 slide in the direction of opening the plurality of back lower door members 3712. As the door of the gate (back lower door member 3712) is opened, the lift is stopped. In the state in which the lower back door member 3712 is in the open position (second raised position), the lower back decoration lens 3718 disposed on the rear side can be viewed through the plurality of gates of the lower back decoration body 3711 (FIG. 179). See). In this state, the light emission decoration of the open gate can be performed by making the LED of the back bottom decoration substrate 3719 emit light.

  In the back-to-back movable effect unit 3700, the wiring cable 3701 connecting the back-to-back decorative substrate 3719 of the back-to-back movable decorative unit 3710 and the back-to-back relay substrate 3757 of the back-to-back drive unit 3750 is the upper wiring cover 3720. And the lower wiring cover 3758. The upper wiring cover 3720 includes an upper guiding portion 3720a which is curved between the upper side and the right side in the rear view and the lower end of the right side extends downward. The lower wiring cover 3758 has a lower guiding portion 3758 a which is curved between the lower side and the right side in the rear view and the upper end of the right side extends upward.

  The wiring cable 3701 connecting the back bottom decorative substrate 3719 and the back bottom relay substrate 3757 extends rightward in the back view at the left end in the back view on the upper side of the upper wiring cover 3720 on the back bottom movable decoration unit 3710 side. It is attached so that it extends to the right in the rear view at the rear end on the lower side of the lower wiring cover on the lower rear drive unit 3750 side. Thus, in the normal position where the back-bottom movable decorative unit 3710 is lowered most, the wiring cable 3701 is curved and extends along the upper guiding portion 3720a and the lower guiding portion 3758a without extremely bending. The under-back decorative substrate 3719 and the under-back relay substrate 3757 are well connected (see FIG. 169 (b)).

  On the other hand, in a state where the back bottom movable decorative body unit 3710 is lifted, as shown in FIG. 169 (c), the wiring cable 3701 has the upper side of the upper wiring cover 3720 and the right side in a rear view (upper guiding portion 3720a) and the lower wiring. The under-back decorative substrate 3719 and the under-back relay substrate 3757 are connected in a state of being separated respectively from the lower side of the cover 3758 and the right side (lower guide portion 3758 a) in a rear view. Then, when the lower back movable decorative unit 3710 descends from the elevated state, it is smoothly bent without being bent by being guided to the upper guiding portion 3720a and the lower guiding portion 3758a, respectively, and the upper wiring cover 3720 and the lower It will be accommodated in the wiring cover 3758. Therefore, even if the wiring cable 3701 connecting the back bottom movable decoration unit 3710 and the back bottom drive unit 3750 is repeatedly raised and lowered by the back bottom movable decoration unit 3710, Bending can be prevented, and disconnection of the wiring cable 3701 can be prevented.

[5-10. Effects on the game board]
Next, main movable effects in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 170 to FIG. FIG. 170 is a front view of the game board showing the back middle left decoration and the middle back right decoration of the back middle movable effect unit in the back unit moved to the center side appearance position. In FIG. 171, after moving the back left decoration body and the back right decoration body of the back left movable effect unit and the back right movable effect unit in the back unit to the appearance position closer to the center, each first decoration surface is directed forward 172 is a front view of the game board shown in a broken state, and FIG. 172 shows the second movable face of each of the left movable effect unit and the back right movable effect unit by rotating the back left decoration and back right decoration from the state of FIG. FIG. 173 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the left and right movable bodies are rotated from the state shown in FIG. 171 by turning the back left decoration and the back right decoration of the left and right movable effect units. It is a front view of the game board which shows the 3rd decoration side in the state which turned to the front.

  FIG. 174 shows the first left movable decorative lens and the first right movable decorative lens of the first rear decorative unit, the second left movable decorative lens of the second rear decorative unit, and the second With the two right movable decorative lenses and the third left movable decorative lens and the third right movable decorative lens of the back upper third decoration unit in the closed position, respectively, the back upper first decoration unit, the back upper It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where it is moved to the lowered position while the back top rotation base unit is in the horizontal position so that the second decoration unit and the back top third decoration unit are arranged horizontally, In the state of FIG. 174, the back top rotation base unit is rotated 45 degrees in the clockwise direction from the state of FIG. 174 and the back top first decoration unit, the back top second decoration unit, and the back top third decoration unit Diagonally FIG. 176 is a front view of the gaming board in the state shown in FIG. 175 by rotating the back-up rotation base unit further 45 degrees clockwise as viewed from the state of FIG. 175 from the state of FIG. 175; FIG. 177 is a front view of the game board showing the unit, the back second decoration unit, and the back third decoration unit vertically aligned, and FIG. 177 is a view from the state of FIG. 176 of the first decoration unit. First left movable decorative lens and first right movable decorative lens, second left movable decorative lens of second back movable unit and second right movable decorative lens, and third left movable decoration of second back movable unit In the front view of the game board which shows the first fixed decorative lens, the second fixed decorative lens, and the third fixed decorative lens in a state where the lens and the third right movable decorative lens are respectively in the open position. is there.

  FIG. 178 is a front view of the game board showing the back downward movable decorative unit of the back downward movable effect unit in the back unit moved to the first raised position, and FIG. 179 is the back downward movable decoration from the state of FIG. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state which raised the body unit further and moved it to the 2nd raising position.

  In the normal state, as shown in FIG. 114 and FIG. 121 etc., the game board 5 is a display screen of the game board side effect display device 1600 attached to the rear side of the back unit 3000 through the frame of the center character 2500. Can be visually recognized well from the player side (forward). In the back-to-back movable effect unit 3200, the left and right back middle left decoration 3210 and the back middle right decoration 3220 are located at the back of the back left decoration 3310 and the back right decoration 3410 at the retracted position. It is in the state, and a part of the back middle left decoration 3210 and the back middle right decoration 3220 is slightly visible through the frame of the center character 2500. In the back left movable effect unit 3300, the back left decoration body 3310 is in the retracted position where it has moved to the leftmost position, and is positioned behind the back front left decoration unit 3120 in the back front decoration unit 3100 can not see. In the back right movable effect unit 3400, the back right decoration body 3410 is in the state of the retracted position where it has moved to the rightmost, and a part is visible through the frame of the center work 2500 on the right side of the center work 2500 There is.

  Further, in the normal state, in the back-up movable effect unit 3500, the movable side unit 3610 of the back-up elevating unit 3600 is in the state of the most raised position, and the back up rotation base unit 3570 extends horizontally. It is in the horizontal position. Also, with the first back decoration unit 3510 at the center, the second back decoration unit 3530 is on the right and the third back decoration unit 3550 is on the left. Then, the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 of the back upper first decoration unit 3510, and the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decoration lens of the back upper second decoration unit 3530 3532 and the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 of the back top third decorative unit 3550 are respectively the first open / close spring 3523, the second open / close spring 3543, and the third open / close spring 3563. It is in the state of the closed position which mutually abutted by the energizing force, and forms the decoration of the predetermined character in each. In the back-to-back movable effect unit 3500, the third to third decoration unit 3550, the first to back decoration unit 3510, and the second to back decoration unit 3530 are arranged side by side from left to right. A predetermined logo along the concept of the pachinko machine 1 can be shown horizontally by one letter, and the predetermined logo is in the upper part in the frame of the center character 2500 above the upper part of the game board side effect display device 1600 It is visible from the player side (forward).

  The game board 5 has the back front decoration unit of the back unit 3000 according to the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result which are drawn by receiving the game balls in the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004. 3100, back-to-back movable effect unit 3200, back-to-left movable effect unit 3300, back-to-right movable effect unit 3400, back-to-back movable effect unit 3500, and back-to-back movable effect unit 3700, perform predetermined effects (movable effect and light emission effect) Do.

  Specifically, for example, as effects using the back-to-back movable effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000, the back-to-back left decorative body 3210 and the back-to-back right decoration that are separated from each other to the left and right by driving the back-to-back drive motor 3254 The body 3220 is moved closer to one another and moved to a generally central emerging position (see FIG. 170). As a result, the back middle left decoration 3210 and the back middle right decoration 3220 are positioned approximately at the center of the front side of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the back middle left decoration 3210 and the back middle right decoration The decoration with 3220 will be in the state of uniting. In the state of this appearance position, the back middle left decoration body 3210 and the back middle right decoration body 3220 interrupt the effect image displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, attracting the player's interest strongly In addition to being able to make it possible to form one big decoration (decoration that imitates the petals of a cherry tree) by uniting, it is assumed that there may be something good for the player and there is a sense of expectation for the game. It can be enhanced.

  Further, as effects using the back left movable effect unit 3300 and the back right movable effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000, for example, the back left movement drive motor 3352 and the back right of the back left movement drive unit 3350 and the back right movement drive unit 3450 By driving the moving drive motor 3452, the back left decoration 3310 and the back right decoration 3410 are moved to the center-side appearing position in the left-right direction via the back left rotation drive unit 3330. As a result, the back left decorative body 3310 and the back right decorative body 3410 are positioned closer to the center closer to the left side and the right side in the frame-shaped center character 2500. In other words, it is located near the left and right ends of the front surface of the game board side effect display device 1600 within the frame of the center character 2500 (see FIGS. 171 to 173).

  This makes it possible to surprise the player by making the back left decoration 3310 and the back right decoration 3410 visible, and attracting the player's attention to the back left decoration 3310 and the back right decoration 3410 It can be done. At this time, the back left decoration body 3310 and the back right decoration body 3410 can be made to emit light by emitting the LEDs of the back left decoration substrate 3334 and the back right decoration substrate 3434 to further attract the interest of the player. It can be done. Further, in this state, since the display screen of the game board side effect display device 1600 can be seen from between the back left decoration 3310 and the back right decoration 3410, the effect collaborating with the effect image can also be enjoyed.

  Then, with the back left decoration 3310 and the back right decoration 3410 moved to the appearance position, the back left rotation drive motor and the back right rotation drive motor (not shown) of the back left rotation drive unit 3330 and the back right rotation drive unit 3430 Thus, the player can be entertained by rotating the back left decoration 3310 and the back right decoration 3410 around the axis extending up and down. When stopping the rotating back left decoration 3310 and the back right decoration 3410, the first decoration surface 3311, 3141 of the back left decoration 3310 and the back right decoration 3410 may be stopped so as to face forward ( 171, stop the second decorative surface 3312, 3412 facing forward (see FIG. 172), or stop the third decorative surface 3313, 3341 facing forward (see FIG. 173) )can do. Since the decoration changes depending on the direction in which the back left decoration 3310 and the back right decoration 3410 are stopped, the player can enjoy the changing decoration and the back decoration 3310 and the back right decoration with the desired decoration. Whether the body 3410 is stopped or not can cause harahara or pounding, which can enhance the player's interest.

  In addition, since the back left movable effect unit 3300 and the back right movable effect unit 3400 can be moved independently of each other, only one of them may be moved, or the back left decorative body 3310 and the back right When the rotation of the decorative body 3410 is stopped, the decorative surface facing forward may be different. As a result, more various effects can be presented to the player, making it difficult for the player to get bored.

  As an effect using the back-up movable presentation unit 3500 of the back unit 3000, for example, with the back-up rotation base unit 3570 in the horizontal position and the action lever 3586 in the action position in the normal position, the back When the elevation drive pin 3652b is revolved counterclockwise in a front view by the upper elevation drive motor 3554, the movable unit 3610 moves downward and is attached to the movable unit 3610 along with the revolution of the elevation drive pin 3652b. The first back decoration unit 3510, the second back decoration unit 3530, and the third back decoration unit 3550 are lowered. Then, when the elevation drive pin 3652b reaches the most lowered position and the revolution stops, the back top first decoration unit 3510, the back top second decoration unit 3530, and the back top via the movable side unit 3610 The three decoration units 3550 are positioned at the lowered position side by side (horizontally) (see FIG. 174).

  In this state, the first back decoration unit 3510, the second back decoration unit 3530, and the third back decoration unit 3550 are located above the center in the vertical direction of the center character 2500 and above the center. The upper half of the front of the game board side effect display device 1600 is covered. As a result, predetermined logos formed by three of the first back decoration unit 3510, the second back decoration unit 3530, and the third back decoration unit 3550 are displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. Since it descends to the center side so as to block a part of the effect image being displayed, it can make the player think that something good may have happened, raising the player's expectation for the game It can be done.

  In the state shown in FIG. 174, when the operating lever pinion gear 3585 is rotated clockwise in a front view by the operating lever drive motor 3583 to move the operating lever 3586 from the operating position to the non-operating position to the right, the first mounting The lock piece 3586d inserted in the horizontal lock hole 3525a of the shaft member 3525 is in a state of coming out of the horizontal lock hole 3525a, and the rotation lock of the back upper rotation base unit 3570 is released.

  When the rotation lock of the back-up rotation base unit 3570 is released by the action lever 3586 and the back-up rotation drive motor 3612 of the movable unit 3610 rotates the rotation base drive gear 3614 in a counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front, The back-up rotation base unit 3570 rotates clockwise in a front view centering on the center link gear 3611 b through the rotation base driven gear 3752 meshing with the base drive gear 3614. At this time, since the back top first decorative body unit 3510 is attached to the front surface of the movable side unit 3610 through the first hole 3571a which is the rotation center of the back top rotation base unit 3570, the back top rotation base It does not rotate with the unit 3570.

  When the back top rotation base unit 3570 rotates around the center link gear 3611 b, the second third link gear 3577 and the third third link gear 3582 meshing with the center link gear 3611 b form the center link gear. It rotates while revolving around 3611b, and their rotation is transmitted to the second drive link gear member 3573 and the third drive link gear member 3578, and the second drive link gear member 3573 and the third drive link gear The members 3578 rotate in the counterclockwise direction with respect to the back-up rotation base 3571, respectively. Therefore, when the back-up rotation base 3571 is rotated, the back-up second decoration unit 3530 and the back-up third decoration unit 3550 keep the vertical direction constant, and the back-up first decoration is maintained. It revolves around the body unit 3510 (see FIGS. 175 and 176).

  When the back second rotating base unit 3570 rotates, the back second second decoration unit 3530 and the back third decoration unit 3550 orbit around the first back decoration unit 3510. Since the upper and lower orientations of the decoration unit 3530 and the back top third decoration unit 3550 are maintained, it is possible to allow the player to sufficiently recognize a predetermined logo by three decoration characters. You can enjoy the changing movement of the logo into a vertical logo.

  When the back-up rotation base unit 3570 rotates 90 degrees in a clockwise direction in a front view from the horizontal position, the vertical position is reached and the rotation stops. In this state, the back top third decoration unit 3550, the back top first decoration unit 3510, and the back top second decoration unit 3530 are arranged in order from top to bottom (see FIG. 176). Thereby, the logo formed by the first back decoration unit 3510, the second back decoration unit 3530, and the third back decoration unit 3550 has its frame at the center of the center character 2500 frame. Since it looks like it goes through substantially the entire height of the inside, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player and to enhance the player's interest.

  Then, the back top rotation base unit 3570 is rotated to the vertical position, and the back top third decoration unit 3550, the back top first decoration unit 3510, and the back top second decoration unit 3530 are vertically arranged. In the state, the action lever drive motor 3583 rotates the action lever pinion gear 3585 in a counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front, and the action lever 3586 in the non-action position is moved upward to the action position. The lock piece 3586d is inserted into the vertical lock hole 3525b of the first mounting shaft member 3525, and the back upper rotation base unit 3570 is rotationally locked in the vertical position.

  When the action lever 3586 moves (rises) from the non-action position to the action position, the tips of the first action portion 3586f, the second action portion 3586i, and the third action portion 3586k of the action lever 3586 (Upper end) is the receiving boss 3521b of the first opening / closing arm 3521 in the back upper first decoration unit 3510, the receiving boss 3541 b of the second opening / closing arm 3541 in the back upper second decoration unit 3530, and the back upper third decoration The lower end of the third opening / closing arm 3561 in the unit 3550 is brought into contact with the lower end, and the first opening / closing arm 3521, the second opening / closing arm 3541, and the third opening / closing arm 3561 are moved upward. Therefore, the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 of the back top first decorative unit 3510 and the second left movable decorative lens of the back top second decorative unit 3530 are in the closed position. 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532, and the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 of the back top third decorative unit 3550 move outward in the left-right direction so as to be separated from each other And the open position (see FIG. 177).

  Thus, the third fixed decorative lens 3553 facing from between the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 and the first left movable decoration so as to vertically cross the left and right center in the game area 5a The first fixed decorative lens 3513 facing from between the lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 and the second fixed decorative lens facing from between the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 The 3533 and the back front lower central lens 3131 of the back front decoration unit 3100 are aligned straight from top to bottom, which can give a strong impact to the player and strongly attract the interest of the player. It can be attached.

  Then, in this state, the LEDs mounted on the back upper third decoration substrate 3554, the back upper first decoration substrate 3514, the back upper second decoration substrate 3534, and the back front lower decoration substrate 3134 are appropriately caused to emit light, The third fixed decoration lens 3553, the first fixed decoration lens 3513, the second fixed decoration lens 3533, and the back front lower central lens 3131 are sequentially light emitting and decorated to guide the player's line of sight upward or downward. And can entertain the player. The third fixed decorative lens 3553, the first fixed decorative lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, and the back front lower central lens 3131 are formed to have substantially the same width as the door frame side effect display device 460 in the effect operation unit 400. Because the third fixed decorative lens 3553, the first fixed decorative lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, the back front lower central lens 3131, and the door frame side effect display device 460, the left and right direction center of the pachinko machine 1 Can be shown to the player (see FIG. 181).

  As an effect using the lower back movable effect unit 3700 of the lower unit 3000, for example, when the lower back movable decoration unit 3710 is moved to the first elevation position from the normal state by the lower back drive motor 3754, the lower back decoration The main body 3711 is positioned above the stage 2530 of the center character 2500 and can be seen through the frame of the center character 2500. As a result, the back bottom decoration body main body 3711 can be seen to attract the player's interest strongly (see FIG. 178). In the state of the first elevation position, the plurality of gates of the back bottom decoration body 3711 are closed by the plurality of back bottom door members 3712.

  Then, when the back bottom movable decoration unit 3710 slightly rises from the first elevation position to the second elevation position, the plurality of back bottom door members 3712 are hinged to open the plurality of gates of the bottom back decoration main body 3711 State (see FIG. 179). By opening the gate (the lower back door member 3712), it is possible to make the player think that something is good or not, and the expectation for the game can be enhanced. Then, in this state, if the LED of the back bottom decorative substrate 3719 is made to emit light to make the open gate emit light, it is possible to convince the player of the arrival of a chance, and to make the player's interest more enhanced. Can.

  As described above, in the gaming board 5 of the present embodiment, the back decoration unit 3100, the back inside movable effect unit 3200, the back left movable effect unit 3300, the back right movable effect unit 3400, the back upper movable effect unit 3500, and the back down It is possible to perform light emitting effects, moving effects, display effects, etc. by appropriately using the movable effect unit 3700, etc., and it is possible to entertain the player by various effects, and the interest for the player's game decreases. Can be suppressed.

[5-11. Different Embodiments of the Game Board]
Next, a different embodiment of the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 180 shows another embodiment of the game board in which the back-side movable presentation unit of the back unit is provided with an LED for emitting and decorating the back front and bottom center lens of the center character stage and the back front decoration unit. FIG. In the embodiment of FIG. 180, a plurality of lower LEDs 3534a capable of emitting light downward are provided on the back second decoration substrate 3534 of the second back decoration unit 3530 in the second back movable effect unit 3500. is there.

  Thus, by rotating the back-up rotation base unit 3570 to the vertical position, the lower end of the back-up second decoration unit 3530 is in the center of the stage 2530 of the center character 2500 (near the chance entrance 2535) or the back front decoration With the lower LED 3534a emitting light in this state, the center of the stage 2530 and the upper part of the lower back central lens 3131 can be decorated by emitting light by bringing the lower LED 3534a into light emission in this state. . Therefore, even at a portion where the decorative substrate provided with the LED can not be arranged at the back, light can be supplied from the outside (here, the upper side) to emit light and decoration, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted A light emission can be performed.

5-12. Effects by door frame and game board]
Next, effects using the door frame 3 and the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 181 shows that in the back up movable effect unit in the back unit of the game board, the back up rotation base unit is in the vertical position, and the first left movable decorative lens of the back up first decoration unit and the first right move The decorative lens, the second left movable decorative lens and the second right movable decorative lens of the back upper second decorative unit, and the third left movable decorative lens and the third right movable decorative lens of the back upper third decorative unit, respectively It is a front view of a pachinko machine shown in the state which enabled visual recognition of each 1st fixed decoration lens, the 2nd fixed decoration lens, and the 3rd fixed decoration lens as a state of an open position.

  As effects by the door frame 3 and the game board 5, for example, there are effects using the effect operation unit 400 in the door frame 3 and the back up movable effect unit 3500 of the back unit 3000 in the game board 5. Specifically, in the back up movable effect unit 3500 of the back unit 3000 of the game board 5, the back up rotation base unit 3570 is vertically positioned with the movable side unit 3610 of the back up lifting unit 3600 moved to the lowered position. , And move the operation lever 3586 from the non-operating position to the operating position, so that the first left movable decorative lens and the first right movable decorative lens of the back top first decoration unit, the back top second decoration unit The second left movable decorative lens and the second right movable decorative lens, and the third left movable decorative lens and the third right movable decorative lens of the back top third decorative unit are in the open position.

  In this state, as shown in FIG. 181, the third fixed decorative lens 3553, the first fixed decorative lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, and the back formed at substantially the same width at the center in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 1. The front lower central lens 3131 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are aligned from the top to the bottom, which can surprise the player and give a strong impact. Then, in this state, a third fixed decorative lens 3553, a first fixed decoration, is formed by the third back decoration substrate 3554, the first back decoration substrate 3514, the second back decoration substrate 3534, and the second back decoration substrate 3134. By making the lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, and the back front lower central lens 3131 emit light sequentially from above, the line of sight of the player can be displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460 of the effect operation unit 400 in the door frame 3. The player image can be guided to the door frame side, and the effect image displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460 can be enjoyed, and the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated to surely enjoy the player participation type effect. Can not.

[6. Characteristic effects of the present embodiment]
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the normal state, the movable side unit 3610 (the movable side base 3611) of the back up raising and lowering unit 3600 in the back up movable rendering unit 3500 of the back unit 3000 The back-up rotation base unit 3570, which is positioned at the upper position away from the center of the front view 5a and is rotatably attached to the movable base 3611, is positioned at the horizontal position, and the back-up rotation base unit The first back decoration unit 3510, the second back decoration unit 3530, and the third back decoration unit 3550 provided on the front of the 3570 are visible in a row in the left-right direction. ing. At this time, the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the second movable first decorative unit 3510, the second rear decorative unit 3530, and the third rear decoration unit 3550 have a pair as one set. The first right movable decorative lens 3512, the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532, and the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 are respectively a first open / close spring 3523 and a third Since the second opening spring 3543 and the third opening spring 3563 are in the closed position by the biasing force, the back first decoration unit 3510, the back second decoration unit 3530, and the back third decoration unit The 3550 first fixed decorative lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, and the third fixed decorative lens 3553 are the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and A state in which the first right movable decorative lens 3512, the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532, and the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 are hidden by the invisible. It has become. Therefore, the first left movable decorative lens 3511 in the closed position and the first right movable in each of the back top first decoration unit 3510, the back top second decoration unit 3530, and the back top third decoration unit 3550 Only the decoration of the predetermined logo by the character formed by the decoration lens 3512, the second left movable decoration lens 3531 and the second right movable decoration lens 3532, and the third left movable decoration lens 3551 and the third right movable decoration lens 3552 It can be entertained to the player.

  When the movable unit 3610 is moved from the raised position to the lowered position, the back upper rotation base unit 3570 attached to the movable unit 3610, the first back decoration unit 3510, the second back decoration are provided. Since the unit 3530 and the back upper third decoration unit 3550 are close to the center of the game area 5a as viewed from the front, the first back decoration unit 3510, the second back decoration unit 3530, and the back upper unit are displayed. The third decoration unit 3550 can be highlighted, and the player's interest is strongly attracted to the first decoration unit 3510, the second decoration unit 3530, and the third decoration unit 3550. be able to.

  When the back-up rotation base unit 3570 is at the rising position or when it is moved from the rising position to the lowering position, the action lever 3586 is operated along the back-up rotation base 3571 in the back-up rotation base unit 3570 from the non-operating position to the upper position When the operation lever 3586 exerts the first action on each of the back top first decoration unit 3510, back top second decoration unit 3530, and back top third decoration unit 3550, The relative rotation between the decoration unit 3510, the back second decoration unit 3530, the back third decoration unit 3550, and the back rotation base unit 3570 is restricted (locked), and vibration or inertia force is generated. And the like, the first back decoration unit 3510, the second back decoration unit 3530, and the third back decoration unit 3550 are shaken. It is possible to prevent movement and movement, and make the decoration of the first decoration unit 3510, the second decoration unit 3530, and the third decoration unit 3550 possible. it can.

  While the back-up rotation base unit 3570 is moved to the lowered position and the action lever 3586 is moved to the non-operation position, the back-up rotation base unit 3570 is rotated about an axis extending back and forth to start from the horizontal position. When the rotational movement is performed to the vertical position, the second back decoration unit 3530 and the third back decoration unit 3550 provided at both ends of the back rotation base unit 3570 in the longitudinal direction maintain the vertical orientation. Each rotates relative to the back-up rotation base unit 3570, and revolves around the back-up first decoration unit 3510, and is arranged in a vertical direction different from that in the horizontal position, The effect of changing the direction in which the first decoration unit 3510, the back second decoration unit 3530, and the back third decoration unit 3550 are changed is It is possible to entertain show in person.

  With the back-up rotation base unit 3570 rotated to the vertical position, the action lever 3586 is moved upward along the back-up rotation base 3571 from the non-operating position to the operating position, and each back-upper first decoration unit 3510 When the second function is applied to the second back decoration unit 3530 and the third back decoration unit 3550, the first back decoration unit 3510, the second back decoration unit 3530, and the second back are provided. In the third decoration unit 3550, the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 against the biasing force of the first opening and closing spring 3523, the second opening and closing spring 3543, and the third opening and closing spring 3563 The two left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 and the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 are closed. The first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512, the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532, and the third left movable decorative lens 3551 Since the first fixed decorative lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, and the third fixed decorative lens 3553 can be viewed from between the third right movable decorative lens 3552, the first fixed decorative lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens By making the 3533 and the third fixed decorative lens 3553 visible, it may make the player think that something may be good, and the first left movable decorative lens 3511 for the player. And a first right movable decorative lens 3512, a second left movable decorative lens 3531, a second right movable decorative lens 3532, and a third left movable lens Providing a sense of premium to an effect in which the decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 are opened and the first fixed decorative lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, and the third fixed decorative lens 3553 can be visually recognized This can increase the player's expectation for the game.

  Therefore, depending on the relative rotational position (horizontal position or vertical position) of the back-up rotation base unit 3570 with respect to the back-up first decoration unit 3510, the back-up second decoration unit 3530, and the back-up third decoration unit 3550 , The rotation lock (the first decoration unit 3510, the second decoration unit 3530, and the third decoration unit 3550) by the action lever 3586 which moves between the action position and the non-action position. It is possible to show different effects to the player by exerting another effect of movement (first action) and movement to the open position (second action), and it is possible to make the player less likely to get bored by various effects and It can be entertained, and a drop in interest for the player's game can be suppressed.

  In addition, as described above, from the normal state, the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first in the first back decoration unit 3510, the second back decoration unit 3530, and the third back decoration unit 3550. The right movable decorative lens 3512, the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532, and the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 are moved to the open position and fixed to the first position. Since there are multiple stages of movement (rendering) before the decorative lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, and the third fixed decorative lens 3553 can be viewed, whether or not to move to the next step in each step The first decoration unit 3510 on the back, the second decoration unit 3300 on the back, and the back are displayed on the back of the player. Third decorative body unit 3550 series of moves by (directed) can entertain, a reduction in the interest in the game of the player can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, by rotating the back-up rotation base unit 3570 about an axis extending in the back and forth direction, it is rotated and moved between the horizontal position and the vertical position, so that the back-up first decoration unit Since the orientation of the back-to-back rotation base unit 3570 with respect to 3510, the back-to-back second decoration unit 3530, and the back-to-back third decoration unit 3550 changes, in the horizontal position and the vertical position, The orientation of the operating lever 3586 also differs with respect to the one decoration unit 3510, the back second decoration unit 3530, and the back third decoration unit 3550, and the operation lever 3586 is moved from the non-operating position to the operating position. In the horizontal position and the vertical position, from the operation lever 3586 to the back decoration first decoration unit 3510, the back decoration second decoration unit 3530, and Direction acting on the back on the third decorative body unit 3550 (direction) becomes different. Therefore, since the first action and the second action act in different directions in the horizontal position and the vertical position, the first decoration unit 3510, the second decoration, and the second decoration are performed by the first action and the second action. As the actions exerted on the unit 3530 and the back top third decoration unit 3550 can be easily made different, as described above, the first action to lock the rotation and the second action to move to the open position act The mechanism to be driven can be made to be a relatively simple configuration, and the pachinko machine 1 having the above-described effects can be easily embodied.

  In addition, since the action lever 3586 is linearly moved (slided) along the back top rotation base 3571 of the back top rotation base unit 3570 between the non-action position and the action position, the action lever 3586 is rotated. The distance between the non-operating position and the operating position can be made longer as compared with the case where the back-up first decoration unit 3510, the back second decoration unit 3530, and the operation lever 3586 can be made easier. A sufficient effect can be exerted on the back top third decoration unit 3550 to facilitate desired rendering.

  Further, in the first back decoration unit 3510, the second back decoration unit 3530, and the third back decoration unit 3550, the first left movable decoration lens 3511 and the first right movable decoration lens 3512, the second left The movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532, and the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552, the first opening spring 3523, the second opening spring 3543, and the third opening spring 3563 That the back top first decoration unit 3510, the back top second decoration unit 3530, and the back top third decoration unit 3550 move or vibrate. In the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512, the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right The decorative lens 3532 and the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 are moved to the open position, and the first fixed decorative lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, and the third fixed decorative lens 3553 are moved. Can be prevented from becoming visible. Thus, the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first movable decorative lens 3511 are only when the second function is exerted on the back first decoration unit 3510, the back second decoration unit 3530, and the back third decoration unit 3550. The first fixed decorative lens 3513 is moved by moving the right movable decorative lens 3512, the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532, and the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552. , The second fixed decorative lens 3533, and the third fixed decorative lens 3553 can be made visible, and the first fixed decorative lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, and the third fixed decorative lens 3553 can be made visible. It is possible to further enhance the rendering effect.

  Furthermore, the movable upper unit 3610 displays the first back decoration unit 3510, the second back decoration unit 3530, the third back decoration unit 3550, and the second rotation base unit 3570 as viewed from the front of the game area 5a. Since it can be moved to a lowered position close to the center, the first back decoration unit 3510, the second back decoration unit 3530, the third back decoration unit 3550, and the second back rotation base unit 3570 are lowered. When moved to the position, it becomes easy to secure a space for rotating the back top second decoration unit 3530, the back top third decoration unit 3550, and the back top rotation base unit 3570, and the horizontal position and the vertical position can be obtained. Since the range of movement of the back-up rotation base unit 3570 that rotates and moves between can be made larger, the back-up second decoration Surprised player by unit 3530 and the back on the third decorative body unit 3550 revolves largely can entertain more, the lowering of interest on the game player's can be suppressed.

  In the above embodiment, when the back-up rotation base unit 3570 is in the vertical position in the back-up movable effect unit 3500, the action exerted by the action lever 3586 by moving from the non-action position to the action position (second action ), The first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 of the back upper first decoration unit 3510, the second left movable decorative lens 3531 of the back upper second decoration unit 3530, and the second right movable decoration Although the lens 3532 and the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 of the back top third decorative unit 3550 are shown to be moved from the closed position to the open position, the invention is limited thereto For example, they may be moved from the open position to the closed position, or the back top first decoration unit 3510, the back top Two decorative body unit 3530, and the back on the third decorative body unit 3550 may be or so as to rotate around an axis extending in front and rear.

[7. Main control board, payout control board and peripheral control board]
Next, a control board for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 182 is a block diagram of the main control board, the payout control board and the peripheral control board, FIG. 183 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. 182, and FIG. FIG. 185 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. 182, and FIG. 186 is a schematic view of various detection signals input to and output from the game apparatus connection terminal board for gaming balls etc. relaying the electrical connection with the display board FIG. 187 is a block diagram showing an outline of a peripheral control MPU, and FIG. 187 is a block diagram of the periphery of a sound source built-in VDP in a liquid crystal display control unit.

  As shown in FIG. 123, the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 mainly comprises a main control board 1310, a payout control board 951, and a peripheral control board 1510, and various controls are shared. First, the main control board 1310 will be described, and then the payout control board 951, the power supply board 931, and the peripheral control board 1510 will be described.

7-1. Main control board]
As shown in FIG. 182, the main control board 1310 for controlling the progress of the game controls the power-on process executed when the power is turned on and is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time the power is turned on and performs the game operation. Main control MPU 1310a, which is a microprocessor incorporating various control programs such as main control program to control and ROM storing various commands and RAM temporarily storing data, and detection signals from various detection switches are input. Main control input circuit 1310b, a main control output circuit 1310c for outputting various signals to an external substrate etc., a main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d for driving various solenoids, and a power failure or blink of a predetermined voltage. It mainly includes a power failure monitoring circuit 1310 e that monitors a sign of a stop.

  In addition to the built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in RAM”) and the built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in ROM”), the main control MPU 1310 a In addition, a watchdog timer 1310af (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in WDT 1310af") for monitoring the operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like are also incorporated.

  In addition, the main control MPU 1310a incorporates a non-volatile RAM. In this non-volatile RAM, a unique ID code to which a unique code (a code that exists only one in the world) for identifying an individual is attached by a maker who manufactured the main control MPU 1310a is stored in advance. Since this once assigned ID code is stored in the non-volatile RAM, it can not be rewritten even using an external device. The main control MPU 1310a can extract an ID code from a non-volatile RAM and can refer to it.

  In addition, the main control MPU 1310a is a hardware random number circuit 1310an (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in” that updates the jackpot determination random number for use in determining whether to generate a jackpot gaming state among various random numbers related to gaming. Hard random number circuit 1310 an ′ ′) is incorporated. The main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310 an generates a random number within a predetermined numerical range (in the present embodiment, a numerical range of a value 0 to a value 32767 as a minimum value is preset). The circuit is configured such that a predetermined value as an initial value is not fixed (that is, the initial value is not fixed), and a different value is set each time the main control MPU 1310 a is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU 1310 a is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310 an first uses a clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310 a, with one value in a predetermined numerical range as an initial value. Based on a clock signal output from a main control crystal oscillator described later, other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted at high speed one after another without overlapping, and all values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted Then, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and other values within the predetermined numerical range are determined at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a without overlapping. Extract one after another. The main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310 an repeatedly performs such high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310 a performs a big hit on the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310 an at the time of obtaining the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310 an It is set as a judgment random number.

  The main control input circuit 1310 b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information to which detection signals from various detection switches are input to its various input terminals, and has no reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit 1310 b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is not input. That is, the main control input circuit 1310b does not reset information based on detection signals from various detection switches inputted to its various input terminals by a main control system reset described later, so that various signals based on the information are variously It is configured as a circuit output from the output terminal.

  The main control output circuit 1310 c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external substrate or the like are input to the various input terminals. The main control output circuit with reset function 1310 ca having a reset function provided with a reset terminal for forcing reset of the stored information, and the reset function main control output circuit 1310 cb not having a reset function not provided with a reset terminal And consists of. The main control output circuit with reset function 1310 ca is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is input. That is, the main control output circuit with reset function 1310 ca has information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external substrate etc. by being reset by a main control system reset described later. Are constructed as a circuit in which the signals based on are not output at all from the various output terminals. On the other hand, the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb is configured as a circuit to which the system reset signal from the main control system reset described later is not input. That is, the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb has the information for outputting the various signals inputted to its various input terminals to the external substrate etc. not reset by the main control system reset described later. It is configured as a circuit in which a signal based on the signal is output from its various output terminals.

  A first starting opening sensor 3112 for detecting gaming balls entering the first starting opening 2002, a second starting opening sensor 4004 for detecting gaming balls entering the second starting opening 2004, and so on shown in FIG. A detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3111 for detecting the game ball entering the winning opening 2001 and a signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310 e are input terminals of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310 a through the main control input circuit 1310 b. Has been entered. In addition, as shown in FIG. 114, a gate sensor 2401 for detecting gaming balls having passed through the gate portion 2003, a first special winning opening sensor 4005 for detecting gaming balls having entered the first large winning opening 2005, a second large winning combination The detection signal from the second large winning opening sensor 2402 for detecting gaming balls entering the mouth 2006 and the magnetic detection sensor 4024 for detecting fraudulent activity attached to the back unit 3000 shown in FIG. , And the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310 a through the panel relay board 3032 attached to the game board 5 and the main control input circuit 1310 b.

  The main control MPU 1310 a outputs a drive signal to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310 ca from the output terminal of the predetermined output port based on the detection signal from each of these switches, thereby the main control output circuit with reset function. A control signal is output from 1310ca to the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, and the start control solenoid 2107, the first attack solenoid 2108, the second attack solenoid 2109, and the distribution solenoid 2110 from the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d via the panel relay board 3032. The main control output circuit with reset function 1310 ca outputs the drive signal to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310 ca from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, and the panel relay board 3032, and First special symbol display 1403, second special symbol display 1405, first special hold number indicator 1404, second special hold number indicator 1406, normal symbol indicator 1402, status indicator via function display unit 1400 A drive signal is output to 1401 and round indicator 1407.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a outputs various information (game information) about the game from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca, thereby controlling the payout from the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca. By outputting various information (game information) about the game to the substrate 951 or outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310 ca from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, the main function with reset function A signal (power failure clear signal) is output from the control output circuit 1310 ca to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310 e.

  In the present embodiment, the first starting opening sensor 3112, the second starting opening sensor 4004, the gate sensor 2401, the first large winning opening sensor 4005, the second large winning opening sensor 2402, the first receiving sensor 2434 and the second While a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used as the second inlet sensor 2435, a contact type ON / OFF mechanical switch is used as the general winning opening sensor 3111. This is because the game ball frequently enters the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 and frequently passes through the gate portion 2003, so the first starting opening sensor 3112, the second starting opening sensor 4004, and The detection of the game ball by the gate sensor 2401 also frequently occurs. Therefore, proximity switches with a long lifetime are used as the first start opening sensor 3112, the second start opening sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 2401. In addition, when the big hit game state which becomes advantageous for the player occurs, the 1st large winning a prize opening 2005 and the 2nd large winning a prize opening 2006 is opened, the game ball entering frequently, entering the 2nd large winning a prize opening 2006 Because the game ball which is the ball is distributed to either 1st entrance 2431 or 2nd entrance 2432, 1st large winning a prize opening sensor 4005, 2nd large winning a prize opening sensor 2402, the 1st entrance sensor 2434 and the 2nd reception The detection of the game ball by the entrance sensor 2435 also frequently occurs. Therefore, a proximity switch with a long life is also used for the first large winning opening sensor 4005, the second large winning opening sensor 2402, the first receiving sensor 2434, and the second receiving sensor 2435. On the other hand, detection by the general winning opening sensor 3111 does not frequently occur in the general winning opening 2001 where the gaming balls do not enter frequently. Therefore, a mechanical switch whose life is shorter than the proximity switch is used as the general winning opening sensor 3111.

  Also, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands relating to the payout as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function, thereby controlling the payout from the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function. Various commands are transmitted to the substrate 951 as serial data. The payout control board 951 outputs a signal (payout ACK signal) to that effect to the main control board 1310 when normal reception of various commands from the main control board 1310 is completed as serial data. This signal (payment ACK signal) is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310 a through the main control input circuit 1310 b.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951 as serial data by the main control input circuit 1310b, thereby inputting the predetermined serial input port from the main control input circuit 1310b The terminal receives various commands as serial data. Main control MPU 1310a, upon completion of normal reception of various commands from payout control board 951 as serial data, main control output with reset function from the output terminal of the predetermined output port (a main payment ACK signal) notifying that. The signal is output to the circuit 1310 ca, and a signal (main payment ACK signal) is output from the main control output circuit with reset function 1310 ca to the payout control board 951.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to control of the game effect and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function. There is no reset function, and various commands are transmitted as serial data from the main control output circuit 1310 cb to the peripheral control board 1510.

  Here, the main cycle serial transmission port for transmitting various commands as serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 will be briefly described. The main control MPU 1310a is mainly configured of the main control CPU core 1310aa, and in addition to the main control built-in RAM, the main cycle serial transmission port 1310ae etc., which is one of various main control serial I / O ports, It is connected via a circuit (see FIG. 133). The main rotation serial transmission port 1310 ae transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 as main rotation serial data, and mainly includes a transmission shift register 1310 aea, a transmission buffer register 1310 aeb, and a serial management unit 1310 aec (see FIG. See 133). When the main control CPU core 1310 aa sets a command in the transmission buffer register 1310 aeb and outputs a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 1310 aec, the serial management unit 1310 a ec sets the command set in the transmission buffer register 1310 aeb from the transmission buffer register 1310 aeb The data is transferred to the transmission shift register 1310 aea to start transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 as main cycle serial data. In the present embodiment, 32 bytes are provided as the storage capacity of the transmission buffer register 1310 aeb. After setting a plurality of commands in the transmission buffer register 1310 aeb, the main control CPU core 1310 aa continuously transmits a plurality of commands to the peripheral control board 1510 by outputting a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 1310 aec.

  The power supply substrate 931 for supplying various voltages to the main control substrate 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control substrate 1310 for a predetermined time even when power is shut off. And BCO (see FIG. 129). The main control MPU 1310 can store various information in the main control built-in RAM in the power-off process even when the power is shut off by the capacitor BC0. Various information stored in the main control built-in RAM is an operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 described later is operated within a predetermined period after power-on. Is output from the payout control board 951 and input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and the main control MPU 1310a causes the main control MPU 1310a to completely erase from the main control built-in RAM. It is supposed to be (cleared).

7-2. Disbursement control board]
As shown in FIG. 183, the payout control board 951 for controlling the payout and the like of the gaming balls displays a payout control unit 952 which performs various control relating to the payout, an operation switch 954 having various functions and the state of the pachinko machine 1 And an error LED indicator 860b. Further, the operation switch 954 having a function as a RAM clear switch is described as a RAM (hereinafter, referred to as “main control built-in RAM”) built in the main control MPU 1310 a based on a detection signal outputted by being operated. Outputs a RAM clear signal for completely erasing the information stored in ..).

7-2-1. Payout control section]
As shown in FIG. 183, the payout control unit 952 that performs various controls related to payout controls the power-on process executed at the time of power-on, and the payout of gaming media executed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time of power-on. A payout control MPU 952a, which is a microprocessor incorporating various control programs including a payout control program for controlling the operation and a ROM storing various commands and a ROM temporarily storing various commands, and detection from various detection switches related to payout In order to output a drive signal to a payout control input circuit 952b to which a signal is input, a payout control output circuit 952c for outputting various signals to an external substrate or the like, and a payout motor 834 of the payout device 830 shown in FIG. Exchange various signals between the payout motor drive circuit 952 d and the CR unit 6 It includes a CR unit output circuit 952e of the. In addition to the built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as “payment control built-in RAM”) and the built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as “payment control built-in ROM”), the payout control MPU 952 a In addition, a watchdog timer for monitoring the operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud are incorporated.

  The payout control program serializes a variety of game information from the main control board 1310 and various commands relating to payout from the main control board 1310 through the payout control input circuit 952b under control of the payout control MPU 952a. To receive serial data. Further, the payout control program generates a frame state 1 command (corresponding to a first error occurrence command) triggered by the occurrence of an error in the payout operation of the gaming ball, or operates the operation switch 954 as an error release unit. Based on the signal (detection signal), a 16-bit (2-byte) error cancellation navigation command (corresponding to the first error cancellation command) is created, and these error generation command and error cancellation navigation command are transmitted to the serial serial data of the payer. The signal is output as serial data of the serial system to the reception port of the main control board 1310 via the payout control I / O port 952b (command transmission means). In addition, the payout control program pays out after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, that is, after the payout control unit main processing is executed or the payout control unit timer interrupt processing is executed and the payout control is started. When an error occurs in the operation, the error is canceled based on the detection signal generated in response to the operation of the operation switch 954, and the output of the warning information corresponding to the error is stopped (error cancellation control means).

  Further, the payout control program outputs (first door opening command) of a door frame opening command when a detection signal (door frame opening detection signal) is input from the door frame opening switch 618 in response to the opening operation. When a detection signal (body frame opening detection signal) accompanying the opening operation is input from the body frame opening switch 619, a body frame opening command (first body frame opening command) is output. On the other hand, the payout control program also receives the door frame closing command (first door frame closing command) when the detection signal (the door frame closing detection signal) is input from the door frame opening switch 618 according to the closing operation. While outputting, when the detection signal (main frame closing detection signal) accompanying the closing operation is input from the main frame opening switch 619, the main frame closing command (first main frame closing command) is output.

  The payout control input circuit 952b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information to which detection signals from various detection switches are respectively input to the various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. For this reason, the payout control input circuit 952 b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is not input. That is, the payout control input circuit 952b does not reset information based on detection signals from the various detection switches inputted to the various input terminals by the payout control system reset described later, so that various signals based on the information are variously reset. It is configured as a circuit output from the output terminal.

  The payout control output circuit 952c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external substrate or the like are input to the various input terminals. And a reset function dispensing control output circuit 952 ca having a reset function provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the stored information and a reset function non-dispense control output circuit 952 cb not having a reset function and not provided with a reset terminal And consists of. The payout control output circuit 952 ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is input. That is, the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca has information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external substrate etc. by being reset by a payout control system reset described later. Are constructed as a circuit in which the signals based on are not output at all from the various output terminals. On the other hand, the non-resetting function dispensing control output circuit 952 cb is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a dispensing control system reset described later is not input. That is, since the information for outputting the various signals input to the various input terminals to the external substrate etc. is not reset by the later-described payout control system reset, the payout function-free payout control output circuit 952cb does not reset the information. It is configured as a circuit in which a signal based on the signal is output from its various output terminals.

  Out-of-balls detection sensor 827 for detecting out-of-balls of gaming balls in the supply passage of ball induction unit 820 of payout unit 800, and payout detection sensor 842 for detecting gaming balls discharged from payout outlets 831b and 832b of payout device 830. A detection signal from a blade rotation detection sensor 840 for detecting the rotation of the delivery blade 839 is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the delivery control MPU 952a via the delivery control input circuit 952b. In the following description, the blade rotation detection sensor 840 is simply referred to as a rotation detection sensor 840 in this specification.

  Further, a detection signal from a door frame opening switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and a main frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 It is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

  In addition, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279, which detects whether or not the storage space of the fal cover unit 270 shown in FIG. The signal is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the substrate 931 and the payout control input circuit 952b.

  The payout control MPU 952a receives various commands related to the payout from the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b at the input terminal of the serial input port in the serial data mode, or operates the operation signal of the operation switch 952 (detection Signal) to the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b. Upon completion of normal reception of various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, the payout control MPU 952a outputs a signal (payer ACK signal) to that effect, and a payout control output with a reset function from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. By outputting to the circuit 952 ca, a signal (payout ACK signal) is outputted from the payout control output circuit with reset function 952 ca to the main control board 1310.

Further, the payout control MPU 952a transmits various commands for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data to the reset function-free payout control output circuit 952cb from the output terminal of the serial output port, whereby the payout function-free payout control is performed. Various commands are transmitted as serial data from the output circuit 952 cb to the main control board 1310.
When normal reception of various commands from the payout control substrate 951 as serial data is completed, the main control substrate 1310 outputs a signal (main payment ACK signal) to that effect to the payout control substrate 951. This signal (main payment ACK signal) is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control input circuit 952b.

  Further, the payout control MPU 952a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 834 to the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, whereby the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca The drive signal is output to the payout motor drive circuit 952d from this, and the drive signal is output to the payout motor 834 from the payout motor drive circuit 952d, or the state of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed as an error LED indicator from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. By outputting a drive signal for displaying on 860b to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, the drive signal is output from the reset control payout control output circuit 952ca to the error LED indicator 860b.

  The error LED indicator 860b is a segment indicator, and displays the state of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, figures, and the like. The contents that the error LED display 860b displays and notifies include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it indicates that "normal" is displayed, and when the number "0" is displayed, it indicates that "connection abnormal" (specifically, the main control board 1310 and Informing that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the board with the payout control board 951), and when the number “1” is displayed, it means “ball out” (specifically, the ball is out) Informing that there is no gaming ball in the supply passage of the payout device 830 based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 827, and when the number "2" is displayed, it indicates that "the ball is seen" (specifically The payout rotary body and the game ball are engaged in the vicinity of the entrance of the distribution space communicating with the supply passage of the payout device 830 based on the detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840, and the payout rotary body becomes difficult to rotate. To notify that When “3” is displayed, it notifies that “disbursement detection sensor error” (specifically, it indicates that a malfunction has occurred in the payout detection sensor 842 based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 842). When the number "5" is displayed, it notifies that "retry error" (specifically, it indicates that the number of retries for the payout operation has reached the preset upper limit value), and the number "6" When it is displayed, it indicates that it is "full" (specifically, it indicates that the storage space of the fal cover unit 270 is full using the stored storage space based on the detection signal from the full detection sensor 279) And when the number “7” is displayed, it indicates that “CR not connected” (the electric connection is disconnected in any of the areas from the payout control board 951 to the CR unit 6 Is notified, and when the number "9" is displayed, it means "in stock (there is a prize ball stock (unpaid))" (specifically, the number of balls of gaming balls not yet paid out is predetermined Informing that it has reached the number of balls).

  Further, the payout control MPU 952a outputs the number of balls of the gaming ball actually paid out, etc. to the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, whereby the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca The ball number etc. of the game ball actually paid out are outputted to the external terminal board 784 through the resistance which is not shown.

Further, the payout control board 951 outputs various information (game information) about the game from the main control board 1310 to the external terminal board 784 through a resistor (not shown). The external terminal plate 784 is provided with a plurality of photocouplers (not shown) (including an infrared LED and a photo IC built in), and the game arcade (hall) is provided via the plurality of photocouplers. The number of balls of the game ball, etc. and various information (game information, details of errors or errors relating to the payout operation of the game ball) are transmitted to the hall computer installed in.
The external terminal board 784 and the hall computer are electrically insulated by a plurality of photo couplers, and an abnormal voltage is applied to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 of the pachinko machine 1 and the hall The main control board 1310 which advances the game from the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 of the pachinko machine 1 and the payout control board 951 for controlling the payout etc. An abnormal voltage is applied to prevent malfunction or failure. The hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of balls of the gaming balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1.

  The ball lending request signal of the game ball from the ball lending button 328 and the return request signal of the prepaid card from the return button 329 are firstly the frequency display board 365, the main door relay terminal board 880, and the game ball lending device connection terminal board It is input to the CR unit 6 via 869. The CR unit 6 transmits a signal specifying the number of gaming balls to be lent according to the ball lending request signal in a serial manner to the payout control board 951 via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, and this signal is a CR unit The data is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a through the input / output circuit 952e. In addition, the CR unit 6 updates the remaining degree of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of the lent game balls, and at the same time, the game ball displays a signal for displaying the remaining degree on the ball rental return display unit 330. The signal is output to the ball lending return display unit 330 by outputting the signal to the lending device connection terminal plate 869, the main door relay terminal plate 880, and the frequency display plate 365. In addition, the CR unit lamp 365d adjacent to the ball rental return display unit 330 is configured such that the supply voltage from the CR unit 6 is input through the game ball connection device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal board 880. ing.

  The power supply substrate 931 for supplying various voltages to the payout control substrate 951 has a capacitor BC1 (see FIG. 129) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the payout control substrate 951 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. There is. With this capacitor BC1, the payout control MPU 952a can store various information in the payout control built-in RAM (payout storage unit) in the power-off process even when the power is shut off. The various information stored in the payout control internal RAM, when the operation switch 954 is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on, the operation signal thereof is given via the payout control input circuit 952b to a predetermined value of the payout control MPU 952a. The payout control MPU 952a is input to the input terminal of the input port, and the payout control MPU 952a determines it as a RAM clear signal for completely erasing the information stored in the payout control built-in RAM. It is supposed to be completely erased (cleared). The operation signal (RAM clear signal) is output to the non-resetting function dispensing control output circuit 952 cb, and is also output from the non-resetting function dispensing control output circuit 952 cb to the main control board 1310.

7-2-2. Exchange of various signals with the game device connection terminal board for game balls, etc.]
Here, exchange of various signals between the payout control unit 952 and the CR unit 6 and exchange of various signals between the CR unit 6 and the frequency display plate 365 will be described based on FIG. In addition to relaying the electrical connection between the CR unit 6 and the payout control board 951 as shown in FIG. 184, the gaming ball lending device connection terminal board 869 also includes the CR unit 6 and the frequency display board 365 It also relays the electrical connection between the boards (precisely, the game ball connection device board 869 is electrically connected with the frequency display board 365 via the main door relay board 880 , CR unit 6 and the game ball connection device board 869 are electrically connected, the game ball connection device board 869 and the main door relay terminal board 880 are electrically connected, and the main door relay Terminal plate 880 and frequency display plate 365 are electrically connected). Between the substrate of CR unit 6 and the game device connection terminal board 869, between the game device connection terminal board 869 and the payout control substrate 951, the game device connection terminal board 869 and main door relay Wirings (harnesses) are used to electrically connect between the board with the terminal board 880 and between the game ball and the like, and the board of the lending device connection terminal board 869 and the frequency display board 365, respectively. Further, an AC 24 V described later from the power supply substrate 931 is supplied to the CR unit 6 through the game ball and the like lending device connection terminal plate 869. The CR unit 6 is generated from the supplied AC 24 V to a predetermined voltage VL (in the embodiment, DC +12 V (DC +12 V, hereinafter referred to as “+12 V”)) by a built-in voltage generation circuit (not shown). The game balls are supplied to the payout control board 951 through the loan device connection terminal plate 869, while the game balls are supplied to the frequency display plate 365 through the game device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880 .

  On the part surface of the frequency display plate 365, the ball lending button 328 which is a push button switch is mounted at a position corresponding to the ball lending button 328, and a push button switch at a position corresponding to the return button 329 A return button 329, which is a segment display unit, is mounted at a position corresponding to the remaining lending display portion 363 of the rental ball unit 360.

  The ball lending button 328 and the return button 329 are electrically connected via the ground LG from the CR unit 6 via the game ball and the like lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880. When the ball lending button 328 is pressed, the ball lending button 328 is switched on (turned on), and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending button 328 is the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game The input is made to the CR unit 6 through the ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. When the return button 329 is pressed, the switch of the return button 329 is turned on (turned on), the return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is connected to the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game ball connection device It is input to the CR unit 6 through the terminal plate 869.

  The ball rental return display unit 330 is a so-called dynamic lighting system in which three segment displays are arranged in a row, and one of the three-digit segment displays is sequentially driven one by one. The segment display of the digit is controlled to be lit. By such lighting control, the sphere rental return display unit 330 displays the remaining amount of the prepaid card inserted in the CR unit 6 or displays an error of the CR unit 6. Ball loan return display unit 330 has digit signals DG0 to DG2 (a total of three signals) for specifying one-digit segment display among three-digit segment displays, and the specified one-digit segment display Segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G (a total of 7 signals) for designating the content to be displayed by lighting up the game unit connection terminal board 869 from the CR unit 6 and the main door relay terminal When input through the plate 880, the 1-digit segment indicators are sequentially illuminated according to the input digit signals DG0 to DG2 and the segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G, and these 3-digit segment displays It is possible to visually recognize the content due to the light emission of the device through the loan remaining display portion 363.

  A CR unit lamp 365 d is mounted on the frequency display plate 365 adjacent to the ball rental return display unit 330. In the CR unit lamp 365d, a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is input via the game ball and the like lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880. The predetermined voltage VL is input to the CR unit 6 as a ball lending enable signal TDL through a current limiting resistor mounted on a gaming apparatus such as a gaming ball and the like via the CR unit lamp 365d. The CR unit 6 generates a predetermined voltage VL from AC 24 V supplied from the power supply substrate 931 by the built-in voltage generation circuit, and is in a ball lendable state where the ball lending button 328 and the return button 329 are valid. Controls the logic of the ball lending enable signal TDL to make the CR unit lamp 365d emit light, and this luminescence can be viewed through the lending residual display unit 363. The segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G are input to the ball rental return display unit 330 through the current limiting resistances mounted on the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869.

  In the CR unit 6, the ball lending button 328 is pressed and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending button 328 is from the frequency display plate 365 through the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal plate 869. When it is input, it is configured to output BRDY, which is a rental ball request signal, to the payout control board 951 (the payout control MPU 952a) via the gaming ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. And CR unit 6 is a single payout operation start request signal to pay out a predetermined number of balls to be rented (in this embodiment, it is 25 balls and corresponds to 100 yen as the amount of money) in one payout operation. Is output to the payout control board 951 (the payout control MPU 952a) through the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. The payout control board 951 (the payout control MPU 952a), to which BRDY and BRQ are input, sends EXS, which is a signal for notifying that one payout operation has started or ended, to the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869. , A signal indicating that it is possible or impossible to output to the CR unit 6 or that a payout operation for paying out a rental ball is possible, such as a gaming ball lending device connection terminal board 869 to the CR unit 6 or the like. In addition, for example, when a store clerk or the like in the hall sets in advance in the CR unit 6 that the gaming ball for 200 yen is paid out when the ball rental button 328 is pressed, one payout operation Will be performed twice in a row, and if 25 balls for 100 yen are paid out, then 25 balls for 100 yen will be paid out continuously, and 50 balls for a total of 200 yen will be paid out Become.

  In the CR unit 6, the return button 329 is pressed and the return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is input from the frequency display board 365 via the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game ball connection device board 869. And, the prepaid card is discharged from the insertion slot (not shown) and returned. The returned prepaid card stores the remaining amount obtained by subtracting the amount corresponding to the number of balls of the game balls paid out as a result of the ball lending button 328 being pressed.

7-3. Power supply board 931]
Next, the power supply substrate 931 will be briefly described. The power supply substrate 931 is supplied with power from the pachinko island facility and can be electrically connected or disconnected from the AC 24 V (AC 24 V), and a power control unit 935 that generates various power supplies. A launch control unit 953 performs launch control by the launch solenoid 682 of the striking launch device 650 shown in FIG. 5 and sphere feeding control by the ball feed solenoid 255 of the ball feed unit 250 shown in FIG. 1.

[7-3-1. Power supply controller]
The power supply control unit 935 improves the power factor of the power rectified by the synchronous rectification circuit 935 a and the synchronous rectification circuit 935 a that rectifies the AC 24 V (AC 24 V) supplied from the pachinko island facility by operating the power switch 934. A power factor correction circuit 935b, a smoothing circuit 935c for smoothing power whose power factor is improved by the power factor correction circuit 935b, and various DCs for supplying power smoothed by the smoothing circuit 935c to various substrates And a power supply generation circuit 935 d for generating a power supply.

7-3-2. Launch control unit]
The launch control unit 953 that performs launch control by the launch solenoid 682 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 255 mainly includes a launch control circuit 953a. The firing control circuit 953a operates the signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 307 which electrically adjusts the strength (launch strength) to launch the gaming ball toward the gaming area 5a in accordance with the rotational position of the handle 302, and the palm of the handle 302 And a detection signal from the handle touch sensor 310 for detecting whether or not a finger is touched, and a one-shot button operation sensor 312 for detecting whether or not to forcibly stop launch of the gaming ball according to the intention of the player. And the detection signal from the signal is input via the handle relay terminal plate 315. In addition, when the CR unit 6 and the game apparatus connection terminal plate 869 are electrically connected to each other, the release control circuit 953a receives a CR connection signal to that effect via the payout control board 951. .

  The firing control circuit 953a adjusts the driving current for launching (playing) the gaming ball toward the gaming area 5a based on the operation signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 307 and performs control to output to the firing solenoid 682 While the ball feed member of the ball feed unit 250 receives one ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the dish unit 320 by outputting a constant current to the ball feed solenoid 255 via the handle relay terminal plate 315; Control is performed to send the game balls received by the ball transport member to the ball striking device 650 side.

7-4. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 185, the peripheral control substrate 1510 performs effect control based on various commands from the main control substrate 1310, and effects that the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 shown in FIG. 19 is drawn. A peripheral control unit 1511 that exchanges control commands and various information (various data) with the display drive board 4450, and drawing control of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 while the speaker 921 and the upper speaker A liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that performs sound control such as music and sound effects flowing from 573, and a real time clock (hereinafter referred to as “RTC” that holds calendar information specifying the date and time information specifying Describe the volume of music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the control unit 4165, the speaker 921 and the upper Operation and a, and volume adjustment volume 1510a be adjusted by.

7-4-1. Peripheral control unit]
As shown in FIG. 185, the peripheral control unit 1511 which performs effect control controls the peripheral control MPU 1511a as a microprocessor and the power-on process executed when the power is turned on, and also after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on. Peripheral control ROM 1511b that stores various control programs such as sub control programs that are executed and controls rendering operation, various data, various control data, and various schedule data, and V from sound source built-in VDP 1512a of liquid crystal display control unit Various information (for example, schedule data defining a screen to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600, light emission modes such as various LEDs, etc. continued across peripheral control unit steady processing executed each time a blank signal is input) Manage schedule data that defines Peripheral control RAM 1511c for storing information for the game etc., and various information continued over the day (for example, information for managing the history of occurrence of the big hit gaming state, information for managing the special effect flag, etc. And a peripheral control external watchdog timer 1511 e (hereinafter referred to as “peripheral control external WDT 1511 e”) for monitoring whether or not the peripheral control MPU 1511 a is operating normally. Have.

  The peripheral control RAM 1511c can not hold the stored content only for the time when the instantaneous power failure occurs and the power is restored immediately, and the power is cut off for a long time (when a long time power interruption occurs In the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, the backup power is supplied by the large capacity electrolytic capacitor (hereinafter referred to as "electrolytic capacitor for SRAM") (not shown) provided on the power supply substrate 931. By this, it is possible to hold the stored content for about 50 hours. By providing the electrolytic capacitor for SRAM on the power supply substrate 931, when the gaming board 5 is removed from the pachinko machine 1, the backup power is not supplied to the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, so the peripheral control SRAM 1511d stores the stored contents. You can not hold it and lose its contents.

  The peripheral control external WDT 1511 e is a timer for monitoring whether or not the system of the peripheral control MPU 1511 a is out of control. When the timer is up, the hardware is reset. That is, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a does not output a clear signal for clearing the timer of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a predetermined period (until the timer is up), the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset. Since the peripheral control MPU 1511a can restart the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e when outputting a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a certain period, the reset is not triggered.

  The peripheral control MPU 1511a incorporates a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports and the like, and upon receiving various commands from the main control board 1310, based on the various commands, each decoration board of the game board 5 The game board side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, flashing signals or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs etc. provided in the lamp from the lamp drive board serial I / O port through the peripheral control output circuit (not shown) Game board motor drive data for transmitting drive signals to drive boards 4170 and outputting drive signals to electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids for operating various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 serial for motor drive boards It is transmitted to the motor drive board 4180 from the I / O port through the peripheral control output circuit, or the electric -Side motor drive data for outputting drive signals to specific drive sources from frame I / O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board motor to peripheral control output circuit, frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and peripheral door relay terminal board 882 The door side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, flashing signals or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs or the like provided on each decoration substrate of the door frame 3 or transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate 194 via It transmits to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 from the frame I / O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board LED.

  Various commands from the main control board 1310 are input to the main control board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511 a via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). Also, from the detection signal from the rotation detection switch for detecting the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 provided in the rendering operation unit 400 and the press detection switch for detecting the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 This detection signal is serialized by the door side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate 194, and this serialized rendering operation unit detection data is transmitted from the door side serial transmission circuit to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. The frame I / O port for detecting a rendering operation unit of the peripheral control MPU 1511 a is input through the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral control input circuit.

  Detection signals from various detection switches (for example, a photo sensor etc.) for detecting the original position and movable position of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 are provided on the motor drive board 4180 (not shown) The serialized movable body detection data serialized by the serial transmission circuit is input from the gaming board side serial transmission circuit to the motor control board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a through the peripheral control input circuit. There is. The peripheral control MPU 1511a exchanges various data between the peripheral control board 1510 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching the input / output of the motor drive board serial I / O port.

  Peripheral control MPU 1511a has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as "peripheral control built-in WDT"), and the system runs away using peripheral control built-in WDT and peripheral control external WDT 1511e in combination. It is diagnosed whether it is

7-4-1a. Peripheral control MPU]
Next, the peripheral control MPU 1511a which is a microcomputer will be described. As shown in FIG. 186, peripheral control MPU 1511a has peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, peripheral control DMA (abbreviated as Direct Memory Access) controller 1511ac, peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, peripheral control various serial I, centering on peripheral control CPU core 1511aa It comprises an / O port 1511 ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511 af, peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511 ag, and peripheral control analog / digital converter (hereinafter referred to as peripheral control A / D converter) 1511 ak.

  The peripheral control CPU core 1511 aa reads and writes various data from / to the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511 ab and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac via the internal bus 1511 ah while the peripheral control various serial I / O port 1511 ae and the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511 af, Various data are read from and written to peripheral control various parallel I / O port 1511 ag and peripheral control A / D converter 1511 ak via internal bus 1511 ah, peripheral control bus controller 1511 ad, and peripheral bus 1511 ai.

  The peripheral control CPU core 1511 aa reads various data from the peripheral control ROM 1511 b via the internal bus 1511 ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511 ad, and the external bus 1511 h, while the peripheral control RAM 1511 c and the peripheral control SRAM 1511 d. It reads and writes various data via the internal bus 1511 ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511 ad, and the external bus 1511 h.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes storage devices such as peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, peripheral control ROM 1511b, peripheral control RAM 1511c, and peripheral control SRAM 1511d, peripheral control various serial I / O ports 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I DMA0 is a dedicated controller that performs data transfer independently between peripheral devices such as I / O port 1511ag and peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak without using peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. It has four channels of ~ DMA3.

  Specifically, peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac is a storage device of peripheral control built-in RAM 1511 ab built in peripheral control MPU 1511 a, peripheral control various serial I / O ports 1511 ae built in peripheral control MPU 1511 a, and WDT 1511 af To perform data transfer independently between peripheral control various parallel I / O port 1511ag and input / output devices such as peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak without using peripheral control CPU core 1511aa The peripheral control built-in RAM 1511 ab reads and writes via the internal bus 1511 ah while peripheral control various serial I / O port 1511 ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511 af, peripheral control various parallel I / O port 1511 g, and the peripheral control A / D converter input and output devices such as 1511Ak, via the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and peripheral bus 1511Ai, reading and writing.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac is a peripheral control various types of serial I / s built in the peripheral control MPU 1511 a and storage devices such as the peripheral control ROM 1511 b, the peripheral control RAM 1511 c, and the peripheral control SRAM 1511 d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511 a. Between devices with input / output devices such as O port 1511 ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511 af, peripheral control various parallel I / O port 1511 ag, and peripheral control A / D converter 1511 ak, without using peripheral control CPU core 1511 aa In order to perform data transfer independently, peripheral control bus controller 1511 ad and external bus 1511 h are provided to storage devices such as peripheral control ROM 1511 b, peripheral control RAM 1511 c, and peripheral control SRAM 1511 d. And read / write, peripherals for input / output devices such as peripheral control various serial I / O port 1511 ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511 af, peripheral control various parallel I / O port 1511 ag, and peripheral control A / D converter 1511 ak Reading and writing are performed via the control bus controller 1511 ad and the peripheral bus 1511 ai.

  Peripheral control bus controller 1511 ad controls internal bus 1511 ah, peripheral bus 1511 ai, and external bus 1511 h to control the central processing unit of peripheral control MPU core 1511 aa, peripheral control built-in RAM 1511 ab, peripheral control ROM 1511 b, peripheral control RAM 1511 c, and peripheral control Various devices such as storage devices such as SRAM 1511 d, peripheral control various serial I / O ports 1511 ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511 af, peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511 ag, and peripheral control A / D converter 1511 ak etc It is a dedicated controller that exchanges various data between them.

  Peripheral control various serial I / O port 1511ae: serial I / O port for lamp drive board, serial I / O port for motor drive board, serial I / O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board motor, frame decoration drive amplifier board LED It has a serial I / O port for a frame, a serial I / O port for a frame decoration drive amplifier substrate motor, a serial I / O port for a main control substrate, and a serial I / O port for obtaining presentation operation unit information.

  The peripheral control built-in watchdog timer (peripheral control built-in WDT) 1511af is a timer for monitoring whether or not the system of peripheral control MPU 1511a is out of control, and this timer is reset by hardware when it runs up. It has become. That is, the peripheral control CPU core 1511 aa is reset when the watchdog timer is started and the clear signal for clearing the timer is not output to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511 af within a predetermined period (until the timer is up). It will take When the peripheral control CPU core 1511 aa starts the watchdog timer and outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511 af within a certain period, the timer count can be restarted, so that the reset does not occur.

  Peripheral control Various parallel I / O port 1511ag outputs various latch signals such as game board side motor drive latch signal, door side motor drive light emission latch signal etc. In addition, it outputs clear signal to peripheral control external WDT 1511 e, The detection signals from the various detection switches for detecting the original position and the movable position of the various movable bodies provided on the board 5 are serialized by the game board side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180. A movable body information acquisition latch signal for receiving the integrated movable body detection data from the gaming board side serial transmission circuit by the motor drive board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is output. This LED is a high-intensity white LED, and is a confirmation notification lamp for notifying that the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state is determined. In this embodiment, the route between the LED and the peripheral control various parallel I / O port 1511ag is shortened by adopting a configuration in which the LED and the peripheral control various parallel I / O port 1511ag are electrically connected directly. The noise measures can be taken for the lighting control of the LED which has the meaning of weight on the game. In addition, about lighting control of LED, it is performed in peripheral control part 1 ms timer interrupt processing mentioned later, and other LEDs etc. except this LED are performed in peripheral control part steady processing mentioned later It has become.

  The peripheral control A / D converter 1511 ak is electrically connected to the volume adjustment volume 1510 a, and the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510 a is rotated to change the resistance value, and the resistance at the rotation position of the knob is The voltage divided by the value is converted from an analog value to a digital value and converted into 1024 steps of values from 0 to 1023. In the present embodiment, the values of 1024 stages are divided into seven and managed as substrate volumes 0-6. Mute is set for substrate volume 0, and maximum volume is set for substrate volume 6, and the volume is set to increase from substrate volume 0 to substrate volume 6. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (a sound source built-in VDP 1512a to be described later) is controlled so that the volume set to the substrate volume 0 to 6 is obtained, and music and sound effects flow from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. As described above, music and sound effects are made to flow from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by the sound volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion.

In the present embodiment, in addition to music and sound effects, notification sounds for notifying the store clerks in the hall of occurrences of malfunctions of the pachinko machine 1 and cheating against the pachinko machine 1 and contents concerning a game effect and the like are notified. (Eg, to render the screen developed on the game board side effect display device 1600 as more powerful, to notify that the player is likely to shift to an advantageous gaming state, etc.) The notification sound also flows from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the notification sound and the notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob at all, and from the mute to the maximum volume The volume can be adjusted by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (a sound source built-in VDP 1512 a described later) by a program. The volume adjusted by this program can be changed smoothly from the muffling to the maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into the seven steps described above.
Thereby, for example, even when a store clerk or the like in a hall operates the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a to set the volume small, effect sound such as music or sound effect flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 Is small, but when the pachinko machine 1 is in trouble or when the player is cheating, a notification sound set to a large volume (in the present embodiment, the maximum volume) can be made to flow. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the clerk or the like in the hall from becoming aware of the occurrence of a malfunction or the player's fraudulent act by the notification sound. Also, based on the current substrate volume set by the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion, the volume of the advertisement sound is reduced to prevent interference with music and sound effects. There is a possibility to increase the volume to play the music and to add to music and sound effects to render the screen developed in the game board side effect display device 1600 as more powerful or to shift to a gaming state advantageous to the player. It can also be announced that it is expensive.

7-4-1 b. Peripheral control ROM]
The peripheral control ROM 1511 b stores in advance various control programs for controlling the peripheral control unit 1511, liquid crystal display control unit 1512, RTC control unit 4165 and the like, various data, various control data, and various schedule data. Various schedule data includes screen generation schedule data for generating screens to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating light emission modes of various LEDs, music There are sound generation schedule data for generating sound effects and the like, and electric drive source schedule data and the like for generating a drive mode of an electric drive source such as a motor and a solenoid. The screen generation schedule data is configured by arranging screen data defining the configuration of the screen in time series, and the order of the screen drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is specified. It is done. The light emission aspect generation schedule data is configured by arranging light emission data defining the light emission aspect of various LEDs in time series. The sound generation schedule data is configured by arranging sound command data in time series, and defines the order in which music and sound effects flow. The sound command data includes an output channel number for instructing which output channel is to be used among a plurality of output channels of the sound source built-in VDP 1512 a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 described later, and Of the plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source, track numbers for specifying which track to incorporate sound data such as music and sound effects are defined. The electrical drive source schedule data is configured by arranging drive data of an electrical drive source such as a motor or a solenoid in time series, and defines the operation of the electrical drive source such as a motor or a solenoid.

  The various control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b may be read out directly from the peripheral control ROM 1511b and executed, and copied when the power is turned on in various control program copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c described later. Some are read and executed. When various data, various control data and various schedule data stored in peripheral control ROM 1511b are also directly read from peripheral control ROM 1511b, when power is turned on to various control data copy areas of peripheral control RAM 1511c described later, etc. In some cases, the copied one is read out.

  In addition, the peripheral control ROM 1511 b is used to correct the luminance of the game board side effect display device 1600 according to the usage time of the game board side effect display device 1600 as one of various control programs for controlling the RTC control unit 4165. A brightness correction program is included. This brightness correction program is for correcting the decrease in brightness due to the secular change of the game board side effect display device 1600 when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is equipped with an LED type. The date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first powered on, the current date and time, the brightness setting information, etc. are acquired from the built-in RAM of the RTC control unit 4165 described later, and the acquired brightness setting information is based on the correction information. To correct. The correction information is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511 b. The luminance setting information is, as described later, luminance adjustment information for adjusting the range over which the luminance of the LED of the game board side effect display device 1600 is 100% to 70% in 5% steps, and the present The brightness of the LED which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 being set is included, for example, the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first powered on and the current date and time Therefore, when June has already passed from the date when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first powered on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511 b and the brightness is obtained. When the brightness of the LED included in the setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on, the correction information acquired for this 75% is used. To adjust the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness of 80% is further added by 5%. When December has already passed since the date when the effect display device 1600 was first powered on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511 b, and the LED included in the luminance setting information When the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on at a luminance of 75%, the luminance is set to 85%, which is an additional 10% of the correction information acquired with respect to the 75%. Based on the brightness adjustment information included in the information, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted and lighted.

7-4-1 c. Peripheral control RAM]
As shown in FIG. 186, the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a is a backup that exclusively stores the information to be backed up among various information updated by execution of various control programs. A management target work area 1511ca, a backup first area 1511cb and a backup second area 1511cc that exclusively store the copy of various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511ca, and the peripheral control ROM 1511b Various control program copy areas 1511 cd for storing exclusively the copied various control programs and various data, various control data, and various schedule data stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511 b Control data copy area 1511ce exclusively storing the copied data, and backup non-management which exclusively stores the information not to be backed up among the various information updated by the execution of the various control programs A target work area 1511 cf is provided.

  When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (including a momentary power failure or a power failure due to a power failure), the value 0 is forcibly written into the backup unmanaged object work area 1511 cf and cleared to zero, while the backup is performed. With regard to the management target work area 1511ca, backup first area 1511cb, and backup second area 1511cc, the power on state command (see FIG. 143) from the main control board 1310 at the time of power on of the pachinko machine 1 starts RAM clear effect And the game state (for example, it instructs the start of the effect when the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 182 is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on) Sometimes it is cleared to zero.

  The backup management target work area 1511ca is effect information (1fr) which is various information updated in peripheral control unit steady processing executed each time a V blank signal from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 described later is input. ) Bank0 (1fr), which is exclusively stored as a backup target, and peripheral information (1 ms), which is various information updated in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process executed each time a 1 ms timer interrupt described later occurs It is comprised from Bank0 (1 ms) which memorize | stores exclusively as object. Here, the names of Bank 0 (1 fr) and Bank 0 (1 ms) will be briefly described. “Bank” is a minimum management unit representing the size of a storage area for storing various types of information. The following “0” means that the storage area is normally used to store various information updated by execution of various control programs. That is, "Bank 0" means that the size of the storage area normally used is taken as the minimum management unit. Then, “Bank 1”, “Bank 2”, “Bank 3”, and “Bank 4” provided in the area ranging from backup first area 1511 cb described later to backup second area 1511 cc are the same storage areas as “Bank 0”. It means that it has a size. As will be described later, when “(1fr)” outputs drawing data of one screen (one frame) to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 as described later, the peripheral control MPU 1511a The V blank signal is transmitted to the peripheral control MPU 1511 a to indicate that it can receive screen data from the frame, so every time the V blank signal is input, in other words, one frame (1 frame) Since peripheral control unit steady processing is executed every time, “Bank 0”, “Bank 1”, “Bank 2”, “Bank 3”, and “Bank 4” are additionally described (effect information (1 fr) and effects to be described later) The backup information (1fr) is also used in the same meaning). “(1 ms)” is, as will be described later, “Bank 0”, “Bank 1”, “Bank 2”, “Bank 3”, etc., since peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed each time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. And “Bank 4” respectively (The same applies to effect information (1 ms) and effect backup information (1 ms) to be described later).

  Bank 0 (1fr) includes a lamp drive substrate side transmission data storage area 1511 caa, a frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side LED transmission data storage area 1511 cab, a reception command storage area 1511 cac, an RTC information acquisition storage area 1511 cad, and a schedule data storage area 1511 cae Etc. are provided. In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the game board 5 In the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, lighting signals, blink signals or gradation lighting to a plurality of LEDs etc. provided on each decoration substrate of the door frame 3 are set. It is a storage area in which door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a signal is set, and the received command storage area 1511cac receives various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310, and the received various commands are received. It is a storage area to be set, and an RTC information acquisition storage area 1511 cad includes an RTC control unit 4165 (an RTC information storage A storage area in which various information acquired from the TC built-in RAM 4165aa) is set, and the schedule data storage area 1511cae corresponds to the received command based on the command received from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a). It is a storage area in which various schedule data are set. In the schedule data storage area 1511 cae, various schedule data copied from the peripheral control ROM 1511 b to various control data copy areas 1511 ce may be read and set, and various schedule data may be directly read from the peripheral control ROM 1511 b. Some are set.

  Bank 0 (1 ms) includes a frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf, a motor drive substrate side transmission data storage area 1511 cag, a movable object information acquisition storage area 1511 cah, and a rendering operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511 cai, A drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511 cak and the like are provided. In the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf, door side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to an electrical drive source such as the dial drive motor 414 provided in the door frame 3 is provided. It is a storage area to be set, and is for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid for operating various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 in the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag. It is a storage area in which the game board motor drive data SM-DAT is set, and the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511 cah is provided in the game board 5 based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the game board 5. It is a storage area in which various information acquired from the original position and the movable position of various movable bodies is set, and a rendering operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511 In ai, various information (for example, effect operation) in which the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 and the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 are acquired based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the effect operation unit 400 Storage area where rotation (rotation direction) history information of the dial operation unit 401 and operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405 etc. created based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the unit 400 are set. If the effect display drive substrate 4450 receives drawing data from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the peripheral control substrate 1510 in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak, and determines that the received drawing data is abnormal data, Peripheral control board 1510 and effects based on the LOCKN signal to be output later to convey the effect A storage area in which various information acquired defect frequency and bug occurrence between connection of the shown drive substrate 4450 is set.

  The lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 caa of Bank 0 (1 fr) and the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511 cab, and the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf of Bank 0 (1 ms) The motor drive substrate side transmission data storage area 1511 cag is divided into two areas of a first area and a second area.

  In the lamp drive substrate side transmission data storage area 1511caa, when peripheral control unit steady processing described later is executed, the game board side emission data SL-DAT is set in the first area of the lamp drive substrate transmission data storage area 1511caa When the next peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive substrate side transmission data storage area 1511caa, and the peripheral control unit steady state is set. Every time the processing is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the lamp drive substrate side transmission data storage area 1511caa. When the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, for example, when the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive substrate side transmission data storage area 1511caa in the present peripheral control unit steady processing, When the control unit steady process is executed, the process proceeds based on the game board side light emission data SL-DAT set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa.

  In the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, when the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the door side emission data STL is stored in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. When the DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the door-side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side LED transmission data storage area 1511 cab. The door-side light emission data STL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side LED transmission data storage area 1511 cab each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. Ru. When peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, for example, when door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab in the present peripheral control unit steady processing, When the previous peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the process proceeds based on the door side light emission data STL-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. It has become.

  When the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later is executed, the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf opens to the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side transmission data storage area 1511 caf. When the side motor drive data STM-DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the door side motor drive data STM is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf. -DAT is set, and each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the door decoration is applied to the first area and the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf. Motor drive data STM-DAT are alternately set. The peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed, for example, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing. When set, the door-side motor drive data STM-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed It is designed to proceed with the process based on it.

  In the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag, when the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the first area of the motor drive board transmission data storage area 1511 cag When the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag, Each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board motor drive data SM-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed, for example, game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second region of motor drive substrate side transmission data storage area 1511 cag in the current peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing At the time, when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the process proceeds based on the game board motor drive data SM-DAT set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag. It is supposed to be.

  Next, a backup first area 1511 cb and a backup second area 1511 cc will be described which exclusively stores the copy of the effect information which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511 ca. In the backup first area 1511 cb and the backup second area 1511 cc, two pairs of two banks as one pair are managed as one page. The effect information (1 fr), which is the content stored in Bank 0 (1 fr), which is a storage area normally used, is used as effect backup information (1 fr) each time peripheral control unit steady processing is executed every one frame (1 frame) The effect information (1 ms) which is the content to be copied to the backup first area 1511 cb and the backup second area 1511 cc at a high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac and stored in the normally used storage area Bank 0 (1 ms) Each time a 1 ms timer interrupt is generated as effect backup information (1 ms), the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed to execute the peripheral control DMA controller 15 in the backup first area 1511 cb and the backup second area 1511 cc. It is copied to the high speed by 1ac. The consistency of one page is determined depending on whether or not the contents of the two banks making up the page match.

  Specifically, in the backup first area 1511 cb, two pairs are managed as one page, with Bank 1 (1 fr) and Bank 2 (1 fr) as one pair and Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms) as one pair. ing. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area normally used, are peripheral control DMAs in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) each time peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). The memory copied at high speed by the controller 1511 ac and stored in the normally used storage area Bank 0 (1 ms) is stored each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed each time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. The page is copied at high speed to Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac, and the consistency of this page is performed depending on whether the contents of Bank 1 (1 fr) and Bank 2 (1 fr) match or not. Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 ( It carried out by whether or not the contents of the ms) are the same.

  Also, in the backup second area 1511 cc, a total of 2 pairs are managed as one page, with Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) as one pair and Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms) as one pair. The contents stored in Bank 0 (1fr), which is a storage area normally used, are peripheral control DMAs in Bank 3 (1fr) and Bank 4 (1fr) each time peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). The memory copied at high speed by the controller 1511 ac and stored in the normally used storage area Bank 0 (1 ms) is stored each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed each time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. The contents are copied at high speed to Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac, and the consistency of this page is performed depending on whether the contents of Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) match or not. Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 ( It carried out by whether or not the contents of the ms) are the same.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the backup first area 1511 cb has a total of two pairs, one pair of Bank 1 (1 fr) and Bank 2 (1 fr) and one pair of Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms). It is an area for managing as a page, and backup 2nd area 1511 cc makes Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) as one pair, Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms) as one pair in total. It is an area for managing as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the first backup area 1511 cb and the second backup area 1511 cc.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the effect information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank 0 (1fr), which is a storage area normally used, is used as effect backup information (1fr) for each peripheral control unit for each frame (1 frame) Contents that are copied at high speed to the backup first area 1511 cb and backup second area 1511 cc by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac and stored in Bank 0 (1 ms), which is a storage area normally used, every time steady-state processing is executed The effect information (1 ms) is the effect backup information (1 ms), and whenever the 1 ms timer interrupt is generated, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the backup first area 1511 cb and the backup second area 1511 cc Peripheral control Although designed to be copied at a high speed by the MA controller 1511Ac, a program for executing a fast copy from these peripheral control DMA controller 1511Ac are common. That is, in the present embodiment, the effect information (1 fr) and the effect information (1 ms) are managed by a common management method (execution of a common program).

7-4-1 d. Peripheral control SRAM]
The peripheral control SRAM 1511 d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511 a includes a backup management target work area 1511 da for storing exclusively information to be backed up among various information updated by execution of various control programs; A first backup area 1511 db and a second backup area 1511 dc for exclusively storing the copy of various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511 da are provided. The content stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511 d is a power on state command from the main control board 1310 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (including a momentary power failure or a power failure due to a power failure) (see FIG. 143). Is an instruction to start the RAM clear effect and the game state (for example, to instruct start of effect when the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 182 is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on) Even when it is not zero cleared. This point is completely different from the point that the backup management target work area 1511 ca, the backup first area 1511 cb, and the backup second area 1511 cc of the peripheral control RAM 1511 c described above are cleared to zero. In addition, after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, when the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 It is supposed to be By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, for each content (item) stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511 d (for example, history of occurrence of the big hit gaming state) Etc.) While the contents (items) stored in the peripheral control RAM 1511c can be cleared, the contents (items) are not displayed at all and can not be cleared in the setting mode. Also in this point, the peripheral control RAM 1511 c and the peripheral control SRAM 1511 d are completely different.

  The backup management target work area 1511da is effect information (SRAM) which is various information continued across the day (for example, information for managing the history of occurrence of the big hit gaming state, and for managing a special effect flag It is comprised from Bank0 (SRAM) which memorize | stores information etc. for backup object exclusively. Here, to briefly describe the name of Bank 0 (SRAM), “Bank” is a minimum management unit representing the size of a storage area for storing various information, as described above, and “Bank” The following “0” means that the storage area is normally used to store various information updated by execution of various control programs. That is, "Bank 0" means that the size of the storage area normally used is taken as the minimum management unit. Then, “Bank 1”, “Bank 2”, “Bank 3”, and “Bank 4”, which are provided in an area ranging from backup first area 1511 db to backup second area 15 11 dc described later, have the same storage area as “Bank 0”. It means that it has a size. The “(SRAM)” is backed up by various information stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511 d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511 a, so “Bank 0”, “Bank 1”, “Bank 2”, “Bank 3” , And “Bank 4” (also used for the effect information (SRAM) and effect backup information (SRAM) described later have the same meaning).

  Next, a first backup area 1511 db and a second backup area 1511 dc for exclusively storing the copy of the effect information (SRAM) which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511 da will be described. The backup first area 1511 db and the backup second area 1511 dc are managed as one page, in which two banks form one pair. The effect information (SRAM), which is the content stored in Bank 0 (SRAM), which is a storage area normally used, is used as effect backup information (SRAM) each time peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). The data is copied at a high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac to the backup first area 1511 db and the backup second area 1511 dc. The consistency of one page is determined depending on whether or not the contents of the two banks making up the page match.

  Specifically, in the backup first area 1511 db, one pair of Bank 1 (SRAM) and Bank 2 (SRAM) is managed, and this one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank 0 (SRAM), which is a storage area normally used, are peripheral control DMAs to Bank 1 (SRAM) and Bank 2 (SRAM) each time peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). The copy is performed at high speed by the controller 1511 ac, and the consistency of this page is performed depending on whether the contents of Bank 1 (SRAM) and Bank 2 (SRAM) match.

  Further, in the backup second area 1511dc, one pair is made up of Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM), and this one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank 0 (SRAM), which is a storage area normally used, are peripheral control DMAs to Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM) each time peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). The copy is performed at high speed by the controller 1511 ac, and the consistency of this page is performed depending on whether the contents of Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM) match.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the backup first area 1511 db is an area for managing one pair as one page, in which Bank 1 (SRAM) and Bank 2 (SRAM) form one pair, and the backup second area An area 1511 dc is an area for managing one pair as one page, in which Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM) form one pair. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and the end of each page, that is, at the beginning and the end of the backup first area 1511 db and the backup second area 1511 dc.

7-4-2. Liquid Crystal Display Controller]
As shown in FIG. 185, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 for performing drawing control of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 and sound control of music and sound effects flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. And a sound source for performing sound control such as music and sound effects (hereinafter referred to as "built-in sound source") and drawing control of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 Sound source built-in VDP (abbreviation of Video Display Processor) 1512a, various character data such as music and sound effects in addition to various character data of the screen displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 Liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b for storing data, and serialized music and sound effects as audio data The door frame side effect display attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 with the audio data transmission IC 1512 c transmitted toward the decoration drive amplifier substrate 194 and the drawing data serialized to the door frame side effect display device 460 A transmitter IC 1512 d for door frame side effect that is disposed near the lower side of the device 460 and transmitted toward the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320, and serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511 a of the peripheral control unit 1511 A signal from the differential circuit 1512e, in addition to the signal output from the differential circuit 1512e that differentiates the LOCKN signal output request data into a positive signal and a negative signal, and the transmitter IC 1512d for door frame side rendering Is input, and the signal from the differential circuit 1512e is When the signal is input, the circuit is connected to transmit this signal, while when the signal from the differential circuit 1512 e is not input, the signal output from the door frame side rendering transmitter IC 1512 d is transmitted. And a forced switching circuit 1512 f for circuit connection. The liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512 b displays, for example, ring image data used for displaying a ring-shaped display (ring display) as sprite data used for displaying a screen or image described later, and display of an operation menu background image described later. Operation menu background image data to be used, selection display object image data to be used to display at least one selection display object to be described later, tonal adjustment background image data to be used to display a volume adjustment screen including a volume scale to be described later In addition to the sound volume setting icon image data and the like used for display, the display of the main body frame rear surface image data and the service mode screen used for displaying the main body frame rear surface image where the position of each part on the rear surface of the main body frame 4 can be viewed Mode screen image data used for the break, break used to display the break timer setting screen Timer setting screen image data, and, during breaks screen image data used for displaying the break in the screen is stored. The liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512 b also stores suggestion display object image data used for displaying a suggestion display for prompting that the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit) of the rendering operation unit 400 should be operated.

  Peripheral control MPU 1511a of peripheral control unit 1511 extracts screen generation schedule data corresponding to the command from main control board 1310 from peripheral control ROM 1511b of peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of peripheral control RAM 1511c. The screen data at the top of the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, various types of peripheral control ROM 1511b or peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511 After extracted from the control data copy area 1511ce and output to the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source, the schedule data is triggered by the input of a V blank signal described later. The next screen data following the top screen data is extracted from the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the peripheral control RAM 1511c according to the screen generation schedule data set in the storage area 1511cae Output to VDP1512a. In this manner, the peripheral control MPU 1511a receives the V blank signal every time the screen data arranged in time series in the screen generation schedule data is input according to the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511 cae. The VDP 1512a with built-in sound source is output one by one from the top screen data.

  In addition, peripheral control MPU 1511a receives from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of peripheral control RAM 1511c the sound command data at the top of the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the command from main control board 1310. The sound command data of the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and extracted in the schedule data storage area 1511cae is stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or peripheral After being extracted from the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the control RAM 1511c and output to the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source, the schedule data is recorded in response to the V blank signal being input. The next sound command data following the first sound command data according to the sound generation schedule data set in the area 1511 cae is extracted from the various control data copy areas 1511 ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511 b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the peripheral control RAM 1511 c Output to the built-in VDP1512a. Thus, according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511 cae, the peripheral control MPU 1511 a receives the V blank signal as sound instruction data arranged in time series in the sound generation schedule data. Each time, the sound command data at the head is output to the built-in VDP 1512a one by one.

7-4-2a. Sound source built-in VDP]
The sound source built-in VDP 1512a receives the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a in addition to the above-mentioned built-in sound source, and based on the input screen data, as shown in FIG. Extract side character data and upper dish character data to create sprite data and generate drawing data of one screen (one frame) to be displayed on game board side effect display device 1600 and door frame side effect display device 460 The VRAM for this purpose is also built-in (hereinafter referred to as "built-in VRAM"). Of the drawing data generated on the built-in VRAM, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a outputs drawing data for the game board side effect display device 1600 from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 and Drawing data from channel CH2 through peripheral control output circuit (not shown), frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and effect display drive board 4450 housed in plate unit 320 of door frame 3. By outputting (transmitting) the door frame side effect display device 460, synchronization between the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is achieved.

  The drawing data output from the channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600, whereas the drawing data output from the channel CH2 is relayed from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay A terminal board 868, a peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and a display on the lower side of the door frame side effect display device 460 mounted on the right side of the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 and stored in the dish unit 320 It is output (sent) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the drive substrate 4450. As described above, since the drawing data output from the channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600 as described above, the peripheral control board 1510 and the game board side effect display device 1600 Although the wiring length required for the route from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 is short because they are respectively attached to the game board 5, the drawing data output from the channel CH2 is the periphery as described above. The peripheral control board 1510 is attached to the game board 5 because it is output from the control board 1510 to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the effect display driving board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. Whereas the effect display drive board 4450 is housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. The wiring length from the channel CH2 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 is extremely long compared to the channel CH1 and thus is extremely susceptible to noise. Become. Therefore, for channel CH2 in which the length of the wiring for sending drawing data is extremely long compared to channel CH1, in the door frame side rendering transmitter IC 1512d, “V-by-One (Sine Electronics Co., Ltd.) By adopting the differential type communication called “registered trademark”, the system is less susceptible to the influence of noise.

Channel CH1 is LVDS (Low Voltage Differential)
The channel CH2 uses an interface according to the parallel method, while the serial interface according to the Signaling method is used. The drawing data output from the channel CH2 is composed of three video signals of a red video signal, a green video signal and a blue video signal, and three synchronization signals of a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal and a clock signal. It is serialized by the door frame side effect transmitter IC 4610d and stored in the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 (not shown). It is transmitted to the effect display drive substrate 4450. Then, the serialized various signals are restored to parallel signals in the effect display drive substrate 4450 and output to the door frame side effect display device 460.

  Thus, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs screen data of one screen (one frame) displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a The character data is extracted from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b based on the input screen data to create sprite data and displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (1 The drawing data of the frame) is generated on the built-in VRAM, and of the generated drawing data, the image data for the game board side effect display device 1600 is output from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 and Image data for effect display 460 from channel CH2 Output to the door frame side effect display device 460 through the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. (Send. In other words, “screen data for one screen (one frame)” is a built-in VRAM for drawing data for one screen (one frame) displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. It is the data to generate above.

  In addition, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600, and also displays image data for the door frame side effect display device 460 from the channel CH2. Output to the door frame side effect display device 460 through the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. After (transmission), a V-blank signal is transmitted to the peripheral control MPU 1511a to indicate that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a can be received. In this embodiment, since the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps, a V blank signal is output. The interval is approximately 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). The peripheral control MPU 1511a is configured to execute peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later, in response to the V blank signal being input. Here, the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes somewhat depending on the liquid crystal size of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. In addition, even in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the sound source built-in VDP 1512a are mounted, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may change somewhat.

  The sound source built-in VDP 1512a adopts a frame buffer method. In this "frame buffer method", drawing data of one screen (one frame) to be drawn on the screens of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is held in a frame buffer (built-in VRAM) The drawing data of one screen (one frame) held in the frame buffer (built-in VRAM) is output to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460.

  Also, when the sound command data described above is input from peripheral control MPU 1511a based on a command from main control board 1310, sound source built-in VDP 1512a stores the music stored in liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b as shown in FIG. And sound data such as sound effects are extracted and the built-in sound source is controlled to incorporate sound data such as music and sound effects into the track according to the track number specified in the sound command data, and used according to the output channel number The output channel is set, the music and sound effects flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512 c.

Note that the sound command data also includes sub-volume values for adjusting the volume of the track into which the sound data is to be incorporated, and the plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP 1512a include effects such as music and sound effects. In addition to the sound data and the sub-volume value to adjust the volume, adjust the sound data of the notification sound and its volume to notify the store clerk etc. of the occurrence of the trouble of the pachinko machine 1 or the cheating on the pachinko machine 1 Subvolume values are incorporated. Specifically, for the effect sound, the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a described above is set as the sub volume value, and for the notification sound, the volume adjustment is performed. The maximum volume is set as the sub volume value without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion of the volume 1510a.
The sub-volume value of the effect sound can be shifted to a setting mode to be described later and adjusted by operating the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400.

  The sound designation data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the channel to be output, and a plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP 1512a include a plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source Of the tracks, the sound data of the effect sound incorporated into the used track and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the effect sound incorporated into the track used are synthesized, and the volume of this synthesized effect sound is In practice, the master volume value that is the volume flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is amplified, and the amplified effect sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512 c.

  In the present embodiment, the master volume value is set to a fixed value, and when the volume of the synthesized effect sound is the maximum volume, the volume flowing through the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is amplified by amplifying to the master volume value. Is set to be the maximum allowable volume. Specifically, for the effect sound, as a sub volume value for adjusting the volume of the effect sound incorporated into the used track and the sound data of the effect incorporated into the used track among a plurality of tracks The knob portion of the set volume adjusting volume 1510a is rotated to adjust the adjusted substrate volume, and the volume of the synthesized effect sound is actually the volume flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. The amplified effect sound is amplified and serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512 c. For the notification sound, sound data of the notification sound incorporated in the track to be used and Volume control set as a sub volume value to adjust the volume of the notification sound incorporated in the track The volume of the synthesized notification sound is actually the volume flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by combining the maximum volume and the maximum volume without depending on the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the knob portion of the volume 1510a. It amplifies up to a master volume value, serializes this amplified alerting sound, and outputs it as audio data to an audio data transmission IC 1512c.

  Here, when the presentation sound is flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the control of the notification sound is simplified to notify the store clerk or the like of the occurrence of the malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or the cheating on the pachinko machine 1 To explain, first, the sub-volume value of the track into which the effect sound is incorporated is forcibly set to mute, and the sound data of the track into which the effect sound is incorporated, the sub-volume value set to the mute, and the notification sound The sound data of the track into which the sound is incorporated and the sub-volume value at which the volume of the notification sound is set to the maximum volume are synthesized, and the volume of the synthesized effect sound and the volume of the notification sound are actually the speaker 921 And amplified to the master volume value that is the volume flowing from the upper speaker 573, and the amplified effect sound and the notification sound are serialized to And it outputs the audio data transmitted IC1512c as data.

  That is, in actuality, only the notification sound of the maximum volume flows from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. At this time, since the effect sound is muffled, although it does not flow from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the effect sound proceeds in accordance with the above-described sound generation schedule data. In this embodiment, the notification sound is made to flow from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds), and after this predetermined period, for sound generation forcibly set to mute so far The volume of the effect sound proceeding according to the schedule data is again set as the sub volume value by adjusting the substrate volume adjusted by turning the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510 a (at this time, the dial operation of the effect operation unit 400 When the mode is shifted to the setting mode and adjusted by operating the section 401 or the pressing operation section 405, the sub volume value of the adjusted effect sound is set), and the signal flows from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. It has become.

  Thus, when the notification sound flows to notify the store clerk or the like in the hall of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or the fraudulent action against the pachinko machine 1 when the presentation sound is flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, Although the volume of the sound is muffled and the notification sound flows from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, this muffled effect sound is progressing according to the sound generation schedule data, so the notification sound has passed for a predetermined period. When no sound flows from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the effect sound does not start to flow again from the point where the notification sound starts to flow, but proceeds according to the sound generation schedule data until the predetermined time elapses after the notification sound starts to flow. It starts to flow again from.

7-4-2 b. Liquid Crystal and Sound Control ROM]
As shown in FIG. 187, the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b draws on the game board side character data for drawing on the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and on the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460. While upper character character data is stored in advance, various sound data such as music, sound effects, notification sounds, and notification sounds are also stored in advance.

7-4-2 c. Audio data transmission IC]
The audio data transmission IC 1512 c is a peripheral control output circuit (not shown) and a frame peripheral relay as a serial data of a difference system in which the right audio data is made a plus signal and a minus signal when serialized audio data is input from the VDP 1512 a with built-in sound source. A peripheral control output circuit (not shown) as differential serial data that transmits left audio data as a plus signal and a minus signal while transmitting to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882. , Frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 to the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate 194. Thus, music, sound effects and the like adapted to various effects are reproduced in stereo from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

  Note that the audio data transmission IC 1512c outputs audio data as serial data of the difference system between the left and right, respectively, between the substrates ranging from the peripheral control substrate 1510 to the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate 194, for example, When combining the noise component on the positive signal and the noise component on the negative signal by the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate 194 into one left audio data, even if the negative signal is affected by noise, Since noise components are canceled by canceling each other, noise countermeasures can be taken.

7-4-2 d. Transmitter IC for door frame side effect]
As shown in FIG. 187, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d receives drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512 a with a built-in sound source. As described above, the channel CH2 uses a parallel interface. The drawing data is composed of three video signals of a red video signal, a green video signal and a blue video signal, and three synchronization signals of a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal and a clock signal, and the red video signal The green video signal and the blue video signal are each composed of 8 bits, for a total of 24 bits. In the present embodiment, since the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal that can be input to the door-frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512 d are each 6 bits, for a total of 18 bits, the upper 6 bits in each video signal are It is input to the transmitter IC 1512 d for side effect. Since the lower 2 bits are extremely weak color information which is difficult to distinguish for human eyes, the lower 2 bits including weak color information are invalidated although they are outputted from the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source.

  Three synchronization signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, which are drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, and three synchronization signals, a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal Is input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d receives three video signals of a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, a horizontal synchronization signal, and a vertical synchronization. Three synchronization signals, signals and clock signals, are serialized into a differential serial signal (serial data) called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of Zine Electronics Co., Ltd. and only one differential pair cable These various signals are sent from the peripheral control board 1510 around the frame. Terminal plate 868, near the door relay terminal plate 882, and transmitted to effect display driving board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3.

  As described above, the drawing data output from the channel CH1 of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600, so the path from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 The drawing data output from channel CH2 of VDP 1512a with built-in sound source is from peripheral control board 1510 to frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and door although the length of wiring required for (first path) is short. Since it is output (sent) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the effect display drive substrate 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the frame 3, a path from the channel CH2 to the door frame side effect display device 460 2) because the length of the wiring required for 2) is much longer than the length of the wiring required for the 1 The effect of the noise is extremely susceptible.

  Specifically, since the door frame 3 is pivotally supported openably and closably with respect to the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 1, the opposite of the locking unit 700 shown in FIG. For example, from the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the game board 5 mounted on the main body frame 4 to the closing side which is the side, the effect display drive board 4450 etc. housed in the pan unit 320 provided on the door frame 3 It is necessary to pass through various wirings which electrically connect the various substrates provided and the various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side. However, on the closed side of the main frame 4, in addition to the payout device 830, the gaming balls paid out by the payout device 830 can be guided to the upper tray 321 of the tray unit 320 and the upper tray 321 is a gaming ball. A full tank branching unit 770 is disposed which can branch and guide the game balls dispensed to the lower plate 322 when the tank is full. Further, below the main body frame 4, a payout unit 800 shown in FIG. 5, which is a unitized power source board 931 and the like shown in FIG. 6 to which power is supplied from the pachinko island facility, is disposed. As described above, the various wirings for electrically connecting the various substrates provided on the main body frame 4 and the various substrates provided on the door frame 3 are drawn near the dispensing device 830, the full branch unit 770, the power supply substrate 931 and the like. In addition to the noise caused by driving the payout motor 834 provided in the payout device 830, the power supply line supplied from the pachinko island facility where the noise due to electrostatic discharge by the game ball and the pachinko machine 1 are installed It is in the environment which receives the noise etc. which invaded.

  Therefore, for channel CH2 in which the length of the wiring for sending drawing data is extremely long compared to channel CH1, the transmitter IC 1512d for door frame side effect provided in peripheral control board 1510 By adopting the differential communication of V-by-One (registered trademark), the system is less susceptible to noise. In the present embodiment, a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and a door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC 0 described later provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3; As described above, the differential 1 pair cable is used as a wire for electrically connecting between the connection of the transmitter, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver, but this differential 1 pair cable has two wires Is not a parallel line merely provided in parallel but a twisted pair cable. The twisted pair cable is a cable in which two wires are twisted together and is also called a twisted pair wire.

  Here, the case where a parallel line is adopted as a differential one pair cable electrically connecting between the transmitter and the receiver will be briefly described. In contrast to the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source in which the wiring length for sending drawing data becomes extremely long compared to the channel CH1 of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source Even if a differential-type communication system called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of the corporation is adopted to make it hard to be affected by noise, the configuration by such hardware alone is due to electrostatic discharge of the game ball When serial data in a parallel line is affected by noise, noise entering a power supply line supplied from a pachinko machine with pachinko machine 1 installed, effect display stored in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3 For the door frame side effect provided in the drive substrate 4450 Since the noise is not canceled (removed) when received by Shiba ICSDIC0, it will be received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 with the serial data affected, and output from channel CH2 of VDP1512a with built-in sound source Image data is received from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 as a disordered one different from the normal one, and in the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460, an image like a so-called sandstorm is displayed to indicate what image There is a problem that it can not be recognized at all.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the door frame side provided in the peripheral control board 1510 with respect to the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source that the wiring length for sending drawing data becomes extremely long compared to the channel CH1 with VDP 1512a with built-in sound source In addition to the configuration using such hardware, while adopting a differential system communication called “V-by-One (registered trademark)” of Sine Electronics Co., Ltd. in the transmitter IC 1512 d for effect, the system is less susceptible to noise The transmitter and receiver are electrically connected to each other through a twisted pair cable capable of canceling (eliminating) the noise on the receiving side even if differential serial data is affected by the noise that has entered the wiring. It was adopted as a differential 1 pair cable. As a result, even if serial data is affected in the twisted pair cable by noise due to electrostatic discharge of the game ball, noise entering the power supply line supplied from the pachinko island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc., the door frame The noise is canceled (removed) when received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive substrate 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of 3 and thus the channel of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source The drawing data output from CH2 is reliably received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive substrate 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, and is output to the door frame side effect display device 460 Liquid crystal display control unit 151 in door frame side effect display device 460. Image source built VDP1512a has generated a can be reliably displayed. By canceling (removing) the noise, it is possible to prevent the door frame side effect display device 460 from displaying an image that can not be recognized at all what the image is like sandstorm. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play due to the influence of noise.

  In the present embodiment, a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and a door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC 0 described later provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. A frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and a peripheral door relay terminal board 882 intervene between the connection of, and between the transmitter and the receiver. This is because the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are not integrally configured, but the separately assembled frame is mounted on the main body frame 4 so that the door frame 3 is attached. After the work of attaching the door frame 3 to 4, electrically connect various wiring such as harnesses and twist cables from various boards provided on the door frame 3 side to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 provided on the main body frame 4 side. Thus, various substrates provided on the main body frame 4 side and various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side can be electrically connected. With such a configuration, after the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 and the various wiring is removed, maintenance of the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 can be performed by removing the door frame 3 from the main body frame 4 If it is impossible to solve the problem that occurs in the door frame 3, the door frame 3 may be replaced with the other door frame 3 and the door frame 3 may be attached to the door frame 3. By electrically connecting various wiring from various substrates provided on the side to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 provided on the main body frame 4 side, various substrates provided on the main body frame 4 side and various types provided on the door frame 3 'side The substrate can be electrically connected.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, in the transmitter IC 1512d for door frame side effect provided in the peripheral control substrate 1510, the differential communication of “V-by-One (registered trademark)” of Sine Electronics Co., Ltd. is adopted. In addition to the structure that is not easily affected by noise, in addition to the configuration using such hardware, even if the serial data by the differential method is affected by the noise that has invaded the wiring, that noise is canceled (removed ) Can be employed as a differential one pair cable to electrically connect between the transmitter and the receiver. Specifically, between the boards of peripheral control board 1510 and frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, between the frame peripheral frame of relay terminal board 868 and the board of peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and with peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and effect display driving The substrate and the substrate 4450 are electrically connected to each other by a twisted pair cable, while the power supply wiring and other various signals are electrically connected to each other by a harness. As a result, in addition to the video transmission wiring pattern for transmitting the serial data by the differential method transmitted by the door frame side rendering transmitter IC 1512 d to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, A power supply wiring pattern and various signal wiring patterns for transmitting various other signals are mixed. Therefore, the video transmission wiring patterns described above are formed on the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 apart from the power supply wiring pattern and the various signal wiring patterns by a predetermined dimension. A plurality of relay terminal boards such as a frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and a peripheral door relay terminal board 882 are straddled along the route from the transmitter to the receiver. Between the input and output of the wiring pattern, a part of the signal transmitting the serial data according to the differential system transmitted by the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is reflected to become noise, or the output level of the signal decreases. Will occur. Therefore, in the present embodiment, impedance matching is performed on the video transmission wiring patterns formed on the plurality of relay terminal boards.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the space between the peripheral control board 1510 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the space between the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the peripheral door relay While electrical connection is made between the terminal plate 882 and the effect display drive substrate 4450 by means of a twisted pair cable, wiring for transmitting power supply lines and other various signals is electrically conducted by means of a harness. In the twisted pair cable, one of the wires is red and the other is gray, and the wire for supplying power is red and the other wires are gray. . Note that the wiring for supplying power may be yellow instead of red.

7-4-2 e. Forced switching circuit, differential circuit]
Signals output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d are output to the forced switching circuit 1512 f, the peripheral control output circuit (not shown), the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. It is transmitted to the effect display drive board 4450 to be stored. In this forced switching circuit 1512f, in addition to the signal output from the door frame side rendering transmitter IC 1512d, LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 Are differentially input into the plus signal and the minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e. The differential circuit 1512e serializes the LOCKN signal output request data into a differential serial signal (serial data). The LOCKN signal output request data is a period during which the game board side effect display device 1600 displays a start screen when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, or becomes a customer wait state for a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600. During the period, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC 0 to be described later provided on the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 , And is transmitted as a request for confirming the operation of the door-frame-side effect display device 460 in order to confirm whether or not there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input in the differentiation circuit 1512 e, the forcible switching circuit 1512 f performs circuit connection so as to transmit these two signals, while the difference is generated. When two signals differentiated into plus signal and minus signal are not input in the inverter circuit 1512e, the circuit configuration is made such that the signal output from the door frame side rendering transmitter IC 1512d is transmitted. It is done. Thus, when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input in the differential circuit 1512 e, the two signals are connected in order to transmit the two signals, and thus the two signals are While transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3, in the differential circuit 1512e When two signals differentiated into plus signal and minus signal are not input, the door frame side effect transmitter is connected to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d A signal output from the IC 1512 d is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, peripheral door relay terminal board 8. 2, and transmitted to the effect display driving board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. The peripheral control MPU 1511a performs a demonstration with the game board side effect display device 1600 in a period during which the game board side effect display device 1600 displays the start screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, or in waiting for customers. During the period, the LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted to the effect display drive board 4450 (in fact, the differentiation circuit 1512e provided in the peripheral control board 1510) housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3.

  The effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 receives various serial signals (serial data) from the peripheral control board 1510 by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 described later, and various serialized A liquid crystal module circuit 4450 V that restores a signal to a parallel signal and outputs the signal to the door frame side effect display device 460 is mainly configured.

  The door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 receives the drawing data from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, and if it is determined that the received drawing data is abnormal data, the LOCKN signal described later is transmitted to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. Then, the frame is output to the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. The LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511 a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. When a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the LOCKN signal input, the peripheral control MPU 1511a controls the sound source built-in VDP 1512a to generate an image for notifying that effect and outputs the image to the game board side effect display device 1600 The information is displayed and notified on the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 according to the above.

  When the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 determines that the two received signals are LOCKN signal output request data, the LOCKN signal described later is transmitted to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. It is output to the peripheral control board 1510 via The LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511 a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a does not have a problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver when the LOCKN signal is input as a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data. It can be determined that no problem has occurred in the effect display drive substrate 4450 housed in the 320, but a failure has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver when the LOCKN signal is not input. It is determined that a malfunction has occurred in the effect display drive substrate 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, and a notification image for notifying that effect (for example, “a malfunction occurs in the upper-dish liquid crystal display device Please call the store clerk. "), The sound source built-in VDP1512a is controlled by the game board side While outputting to the display device 1600, an alarm sound (for example, "a problem has occurred in the upper liquid crystal display device") to that effect is output to the audio data transmission IC 1512c by controlling the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. An announcement sound flows from the speaker provided in the door frame 3 by this. Thereby, notification can be performed by the notification image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the notification sound repeatedly flowing from the speaker or the like provided in the door frame 3. At this time, all of the LEDs for light emission decoration provided in the door frame 3 and the various LEDs mounted on various decoration substrates provided in the game board 5 may be lighted.

7-4-3. RTC control unit]
As shown in FIG. 185, the RTC control unit 4165 that holds calendar information that specifies a date and time information that specifies an hour, minute, and second is configured around an RTC 4165a. In this RTC 4165a, a RAM 4165aa in which calendar information and time information are held is built in (hereinafter, described as "RTC built-in RAM 4165aa"). The RTC 4165a is configured to be supplied with power from a battery 4165b (in the present embodiment, a button battery is adopted) as a driving power supply and a backup power supply of the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. That is, the RTC 4165a is supplied with power from the battery 4165b independently of the peripheral control board 1510 (pachinko machine 1) without any supply of power from the peripheral control board 1510 (pachinko machine 1). As a result, even if the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, the RTC 4165a can update and hold calendar information and time information by the power supply from the battery 4165b.

  The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a, sets it in the above-mentioned RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and acquires this acquired calendar information and time information Based effects can be developed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. As such an effect, for example, the screen of a Christmas tree or reindeer is unfolded by the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 for December 25th, and if it is New Year's Eve, the New Year countdown A screen to be executed may be expanded on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. Calendar information and time information are set at the time of factory shipment.

  In addition to calendar information and time information, when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is of LED type, the brightness setting information of the LED is stored and held in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. There is. When the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is equipped with an LED type, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires luminance setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa and performs the luminance adjustment of the backlight by PWM control. . The brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range of the brightness of the LED of the game board side effect display device 1600, which is the backlight of the game board side, from 100% to 70% in 5% steps, and the currently set game. The brightness of the LED which is the backlight of the board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is included.

  In addition to calendar information, time information and brightness setting information, calendar information, time information, and brightness setting information are first stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165 aa in the RTC built-in RAM 4165 aa as information on the date and time Input date and time information is also stored.

  When the backlights of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are attached with a cold cathode tube type, the peripheral control MPU 1511a turns ON / OFF control of the backlight or ON only. It is supposed to

  Various types of information such as calendar information, time information, brightness setting information, and input date and time information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa are set in the manufacturing line of the gaming machine maker. In the manufacturing line, for example, in order to perform various tests such as a display test of the game board side effect display device 1600, the year when the input date and time information is input in the manufacturing line as the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first powered on. It is set to the date of manufacture, which is the date of the month and the hour, minute and second.

  As described above, in addition to calendar information and time information, brightness setting information when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is attached to the LED type, input date information, etc. , It is possible to store and hold information that needs to be maintained independently of model information of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the probability of occurrence of a big hit gaming state with low probability and high probability).

  In addition, the brightness setting information and the like stored and held in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa may be too bright for the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 set as the manufacturing date depending on the environment of the hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Sometimes it is too dark. Therefore, by operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400, it is possible to shift to the setting mode and adjust the brightness of the backlight to a predetermined brightness. After turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1, when the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 In addition, when the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the rendering operation unit 400 is operated during a demonstration in which the gaming board side effect display device 1600 is in a waiting state, the setting mode is performed. Is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. Calendar information and time information are reset by operating the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, and the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is desired. It can be adjusted to the brightness of the The adjusted desired brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is overwritten (updated and stored) as the brightness of the LED stored in the brightness setting information.

  In the setting mode, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes the brightness correction program described above, thereby providing a game board side effect when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is equipped with an LED type. The decrease in luminance due to the secular change of the display device 1600 is corrected. The peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires input date and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, identifies the date and time when the gaming board side effect display device 1600 is first powered on, and specifies calendar information and date. Acquire the time information to specify minutes and seconds to specify the current date and time, adjust the range over which the brightness of the LED of the game board side effect display device 1600 is 100% to 70% in 5% steps Luminance setting information having luminance adjustment information to be used and the luminance of the LED which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 currently set is acquired. The acquired luminance setting information is corrected based on the correction information stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511 b.

  For example, if June has already passed from the date when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first powered on from the date when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first powered on and the current date and time, When the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on with the luminance of the LED included in the luminance setting information being 75%, this 75% The brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness of 80% is further added by 5% which is correction information acquired for the image. If it is already 12 months since the date when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on, the peripheral control ROM 15 has been turned on. When acquiring the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) from 1b and when the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on, 75% The brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness of 85% is further added by 10% which is correction information acquired Light.

  The current date and time may be specified by directly acquiring calendar information for specifying the date and time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165. Current calendar information set in the calendar information storage unit in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511 cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511 c and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510 in the current time information acquisition processing of step S 1002 in the control unit power on processing. And current time information set in the time information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510 may be acquired to specify the current date and time.

7-4-4. Volume adjustment volume]
As described above, the volume adjustment volume 1510 a can adjust the volume of music and sound effects flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by turning the knob. As described above, the volume adjustment volume 1510a is configured such that the resistance value can be varied by turning the knob portion, and the electrically connected peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak is a portion of the knob portion. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and converted into 1024 steps of values from 0 to 1023. In the present embodiment, as described above, the values of 1024 steps are divided into seven and managed as substrate volumes 0 to 6. Mute is set for substrate volume 0, and maximum volume is set for substrate volume 6, and the volume is set to increase from substrate volume 0 to substrate volume 6. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (with built-in sound source VDP 1512 a) is controlled so that the volume set to the substrate volume 0 to 6 is obtained, and music and sound effects are made to flow from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

  As described above, music and sound effects are made to flow from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by the sound volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion. Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, in addition to music and sound effects, notification sounds for notifying a store clerk or the like in the hall of an occurrence of a problem with the pachinko machine 1 or cheating against the pachinko machine 1, (For example, the screen developed on the game board side effect display device 1600 is displayed as more powerful, or it is notified that there is a high possibility of transition to an advantageous gaming state for the player. Etc.) also flows from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the notification sound and the notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob at all, The volume up to the maximum volume can be adjusted by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (with built-in sound source VDP 1512a) by a program.

  The volume adjusted by this program can be changed smoothly from the muffling to the maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into the seven steps described above. Thereby, for example, even when a store clerk or the like in a hall operates the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a to set the volume small, effect sound such as music or sound effect flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 Is small, but when the pachinko machine 1 is in trouble or when the player is cheating, a notification sound set to a large volume (in the present embodiment, the maximum volume) can be made to flow. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the clerk or the like in the hall from becoming aware of the occurrence of a malfunction or the player's fraudulent act by the notification sound.

  Also, based on the current substrate volume set by the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion, the volume of the advertisement sound is reduced to prevent interference with music and sound effects. To increase the volume of the sound to make the screen being displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 more powerful in addition to music and sound effects, or advantageous for the player It can also be notified that there is a high possibility of transition to the gaming state.

  In this embodiment, in addition to adjusting the volume of music and sound effects by turning the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a, the dial operation unit 401 of the rendering operation unit 400 and the like. By operating the pressing operation unit 405, it is possible to shift to the setting mode and adjust the volume of music and sound effects. After turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1, when the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 In addition, when the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the rendering operation unit 400 is operated during a demonstration in which the gaming board side effect display device 1600 is in a waiting state, the setting mode is performed. Is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. By operating the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 in accordance with the screen of the setting mode, the volume of music or sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume. Specifically, the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak converts the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a from an analog value to a digital value, and the converted value is obtained. The value of the substrate volume can be increased or decreased by adding or subtracting a predetermined value in accordance with the operation of the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the rendering operation unit 400. There is. The adjusted volume is set and updated as a sub-volume value for a track incorporating sound data of a rendering sound such as music or sound among a plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source. Although it is reflected in the adjustment of the volume of the above, it is not reflected in the adjustment in the volume of the notification sound and the notification sound described above.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the volume of music or sound effects is adjusted by directly turning the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510 a, the dial operation unit 401 of the effect operation unit 400 or the pressing operation unit 405. There are two methods of adjusting the volume of music and sound effects by increasing or decreasing the value of the substrate volume by adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation of. Since the volume control volume 1510 a is mounted on the peripheral control substrate 1510, it is necessary to make the main body frame 4 always open from the outer frame 2. Then, it is the store clerk in the hall that can turn the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a. However, at the volume adjusted by the store clerk in the hall, the player may feel small and may not be able to hear music and sound effects, or the player may feel large and feel loud music and sound effects. Therefore, after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 are operated within a predetermined time, or a wait by customer becomes a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600. When the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within the period being performed, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 in accordance with the screen of the setting mode, the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume. As a result, the player can adjust the volume of music and sound effects to a desired volume, so if it is difficult for the store clerk in the hall to feel the volume adjusted and the music and sound effects are difficult to hear, the effect operation unit 400. The volume operation unit can be increased to a desired volume by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405, or when the volume clerk adjusted by the hall feels loud and feels loud with music or sound effects, the rendering operation unit A desired sound volume can be reduced by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of 400.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the state in which the pachinko machine 1 is not playing a game is continued for a predetermined time, and when waiting for a customer and the demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 is repeatedly performed (for example, 10 times) The volume adjusted by the player who was sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1 and was playing a game last time is canceled, and the volume is initialized. In this initialization of the volume, the volume adjusted by the store clerk in the hall, that is, the volume adjusted by the store clerk in the hall directly rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a is adjusted. As a result, when it is difficult for the player who was sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1 to feel the volume adjusted by the player who was playing the game, and to hear the music and sound effects, this time, he sits on the front of the pachinko machine 1 The player who plays the game can operate the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 to increase the volume to a desired volume, and play the game by sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1 last time If the player who is playing feels loud and the music and sound effects are felt loudly, the player who is sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1 and plays the game plays the dial operation unit 401 of the effect operation unit 400 or The pressing operation unit 405 can be operated to reduce the volume to a desired level.

[8. Game content]
Next, the game contents by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player rotates the handle 302 of the handle unit 300 disposed at the front lower right corner of the door frame 3, so that the gaming balls stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 , The space between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the game board 5 is driven into the upper part in the game area 5a, and the game by the game ball is started. The game ball driven into the upper part in the game area 5a flows either the left side or the right side of the center character 2500 depending on the driving strength. In addition, the hitting strength of the game ball can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 302, and can be hit more strongly as it is rotated in the clockwise direction, and a maximum of 100 game balls in one minute continuously, that is, , The game ball can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

  Further, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are implanted in the front of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) in a predetermined gauge array at an appropriate position, and the game balls are obstacle nails. By the contact, the flow-down speed of the gaming ball is suppressed, and various movements are given to the gaming ball, and the movement can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail, a windmill (not shown) rotated by the contact of the game ball is provided at a suitable position.

  The gaming ball driven into the upper part of the center character 2500 contacts a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) when entering the left side in a front view than the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center character 2500, The region to the left of the center character 2500 will flow down. Then, when the gaming ball flowing down the area on the left side of the center character 2500 enters the warp inlet 2520 opened on the outer peripheral surface of the center character 2500, it is supplied from the warp outlet 2522 to the stage 2530.

  The game balls supplied to the stage 2530 roll on the stage 2530 and move back and forth and are discharged forward. When the gaming ball enters the central chance entrance 2535 at the center of the stage 2530 and is released from the chance exit 2536 into the gaming area 5a, the chance exit 2536 is located immediately above the first start opening 2002, so there is a high probability Accepted at the first starting port 2002. When a game ball is received in the first start opening 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out to the upper tray 321 from the payout device 830 through the main control substrate 1310 and the payout control substrate 951. .

  When the gaming ball rolling on the stage 2530 is released from outside the center into the gaming area 5a, it flows down toward the starting opening unit 2100. The game balls released from the stage 2530 of the center role 2500 into the game area 5a are opened in the first start opening 2002 of the start opening unit 2100, the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200 and the attacker unit 2400, and the attack unit 2400. There is a possibility that it will be accepted by the state's first big winning opening 2005 and so on.

  By the way, when the gaming ball which has flowed down to the left side of the center character 2500 does not enter the warp inlet 2520, it is brought closer to the center in the left-right direction by the shelf 2301 of the side slope 2300. , And may be received by the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100 or the like. Then, when the game ball is received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out to the upper tray 321 from the payout device 830 through the main control substrate 1310 and the payout control substrate 951. .

  On the other hand, when the game ball hit in the upper part of the center character 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center character 2500 (so-called right strike), It is discharged from the right guide passage 2540 of the center work 2500 to the top of the attacker unit 2400. Just below the downstream end of the right guiding passage 2540, the gate passage 2420 provided with the gate portion 2003 and the second start port 2004 of the attacker unit 2400 is disposed, and the gaming ball enters the gate passage 2420 with high probability. Do.

  Then, when the game ball hit to the right enters the gate passage 2420 and passes through the gate section 2003, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310, and if the lottery result of the ordinary lottery is "normal hit", the second The second starting opening door 2411 closing the starting opening 2004 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the game ball can be received in the second starting opening 2004. Then, when a game ball is received in the second start port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls are paid out to the upper tray 321 from the payout device 830 through the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. Ru.

  In this embodiment, in the normal lottery performed by the game ball passing through the gate portion 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the normal lottery until the normal lottery result is suggested (for example, 0. 0. 01 to 60 seconds, also commonly referred to as fluctuation time). The suggestion of the normal lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second start port 2004 normally opens after the fluctuation time has elapsed. As the normal fluctuation time is shorter, the game ball for which the “normal hit” is drawn at the gate unit 2003 is accepted by the second start port 2004.

  It should be noted that if the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003 during the period after the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003 until the normal lottery result is suggested, the normal lottery result can not be started, so the normal lottery The start of the suggestion of the result is put on hold until the suggestion of the previous regular lottery result is finished. In addition, the number of reserved normal lottery results has an upper limit of up to four, and more than that, even if the game ball passes through the gate section 2003, it is discarded without being suspended. Thereby, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by the accumulation of the suspension.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the gaming ball is received in the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004, an advantageous gaming state (for example, "big hit", " A drawing of a special drawing result is generated which generates a middle hit, a small hit, a probability change, a time reduction, and the like. Then, the selected special lottery result is suggested to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as a special fluctuation time). The special lottery results obtained by receiving the game balls in the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 include "lost", "15R big hit A", "15R big hit B" and the like.

  In the case of the special lottery result that the special lottery result (the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result) drawn by the reception of the game ball to the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 causes the advantageous gaming state After the elapse of the special fluctuation time, the first large winning opening 2005 and the second large winning opening 2006 can receive the game balls in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. When the game ball is received in the first large winning opening 2005 when the first large winning opening 2005 is open, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) from the payout device 830 is determined by the main control substrate 1310 and the payout substrate. ) Is paid out to the upper plate 321. On the other hand, when the game ball is received in the second big winning hole 2006 when the second big winning hole 2006 is open, a predetermined number (for example, three) of games from the payout device 830 by the main control board 1310 and the payout board A ball is dispensed onto the upper plate 321. Therefore, when the first large winning opening 2005 and the second large winning opening 2006 allow the game ball to be received, many games can be made by causing the first large winning opening 2005 or the second large winning opening 2006 to receive the game balls. The balls can be paid out and the player can be entertained.

  When the special lottery result is "big hit", a big hit gaming state occurs in which a predetermined round is generated multiple times. The big hit gaming state of the present embodiment is the first large according to the opening and closing pattern (opening and closing pattern having one opening and closing pattern, or opening and closing pattern having a plurality of opening and closing) for opening and closing the game ball in each round. The winning opening 2005 or the second large winning opening 2006 operates. Although it will be described in detail later, in the present embodiment, for example, in the case of "15R big hit", the second large winning opening 2006 is opened and closed in the first to third rounds, and the first large winning opening 2005 is opened and closed in the fourth to fifteenth rounds. "15R big hit gaming state" to occur is generated.

  In the "big hit", when the second big winning opening 2006 is open due to the big hitting gaming state, the gaming balls received in the second big winning opening 2006 are distributed to the second receiving opening 2432 by the distribution piece 2433. And, after the end of the jackpot gaming state, change the probability that a special lottery result such as "big hit" will be drawn ("perform variation"), or change the display time of the effect image that suggests the special lottery result (" ") Do.

  In this embodiment, the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2002 are until the special drawing result drawn from the start of the special drawing is suggested by the reception of the game balls to the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004. Since the suggestion of the special lottery result can not be started when the game ball is accepted in the second starting port 2004, the start of the suggestion of the special lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the special lottery result drawn earlier is completed. Ru. The number of pending special lottery results is limited to four for each of the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004, and for more than that, the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening Even if the game ball is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is discarded without being put on hold. Thereby, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by the accumulation of the suspension.

  The suggestion of the special lottery result is performed by the function display unit 1400 and the game board side effect display device 1600. The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest a special lottery result. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 causes the plurality of LEDs to blink for a predetermined time by repeatedly turning on and off, and thereafter suggests the special lottery result by the combination of the lit LEDs.

  On the other hand, in the game board side effect display device 1600, based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, it is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510, and the special lottery result is suggested as an effect image. The effect image that suggests the special lottery result on the game board side effect display device 1600 is such that each symbol row is fluctuated and fluctuated in a state where three symbol rows consisting of a plurality of symbols are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction. Each symbol row is stopped and displayed so that the symbol rows in the symbol row are sequentially stopped and displayed, and the symbols of the three symbol rows displayed in a stopped state become a combination corresponding to the special lottery result. If the special lottery result is other than "loss", after the three symbol rows are stopped and each symbol is stopped and displayed, a finalized image indicating the special lottery result is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, An advantageous gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state A, a big hit gaming state B, etc.) corresponding to the special lottery result that has been drawn is generated.

  In addition, the time which suggests the special lottery result in function display unit 1400 (flashing time of LED (variation time)), and the time which suggests the special lottery result in game board side effect display device 1600 (the symbol row fluctuates, The time until the finalized image is displayed is different, and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

  In addition, on peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by gaming board side effect display device 1600, effect operation unit 400 in door frame 3 according to the selected special lottery result. , The door frame side effect display device 460, the back unit 3000 of the back unit 3000, the back effect unit 3200, the back left operation effect unit 3300, the back right operation effect unit 3400, the back operation effect unit 3500 It is possible to perform light emitting effects, movable effects, display effects, etc. by appropriately using the rear effect movable effect unit 3700 etc., and it is possible to entertain the player by various effects, and it is possible for the player to It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest for the game.

[9. Control processing of main control board]
Next, an example of control processing executed by the main control board 1310 (in particular, the main control MPU 1310a) will be described. FIG. 188 (a) is a flow chart showing the procedure of control processing performed by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

  As shown in FIG. 188 (a), the main control board 1310 according to this embodiment is first subjected to the process of step S1 on the condition that the operation switch 954 having a function as a RAM clear switch is operated. , Initialize data stored in various registers and RAM. The operation switch 954 is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 and can not be operated unless the main body frame 4 is opened. Further, the operation switch 954 outputs a clear signal to the main control board 1310 according to an operation before a predetermined period (for example, one second) elapses from the power on, and the main control MPU 1310 a receives the clear signal at the time of power on. When it is determined that the data is stored, the initialization process (step S1) is executed to initialize data stored in various registers and the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a.

  Although not illustrated, in this example, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, backup processing is performed to save information (for example, various flags) indicating the progress of the game in the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a. Then, if the operation switch 954 is not operated when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the information stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a in the backup process is referred to without performing the initialization process (step S1). And executing recovery processing to recover the state according to the information. Further, when the operation switch 954 is operated when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the initialization process is performed without executing the recovery process to set the pachinko machine 1 in the initial state.

  Next, as the process of step S2, the update of the random number which is the number updated within a predetermined numerical range is performed. That is, in the main control board 1310 according to this embodiment, the special random number (first special random number, second special random number) to be subjected to the lottery process for the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the special symbol Reaching in the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol performed by the effect display device 1600 corresponding to the fluctuation display of the special symbol and the fluctuation random number provided for the lottery process for the predetermined time (the fluctuation time) required for the fluctuation display control of (A state in which the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed with the same symbol, and the middle decorative symbol is not displayed in a stopped state, or the left, middle and right decorative symbols are all synchronized to be the same symbol Reach random number provided for the lottery process whether or not to be selected, and a random number for the lottery process for determining the type of the big hit when it is determined to be a big hit based on the special random number A random number counter for holding random numbers such as one symbol random number, second symbol random number), random number (normal random number) to be provided for lottery processing according to the hit of the second start opening door 2411 There is.

  In this example, the first random symbol common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol is used, that is, even when the first start opening 2002 is started, the second start opening 2004 is started. Even if the reach random number is configured to be acquired from the same counter that updates reach random numbers, the reach randomization execution ratio can be obtained by acquiring from different counters where the range of random numbers to update reach random numbers is different. The first reach determination table corresponding to the first special symbol may be different as the reach determination table to be compared with the acquired reach random number, and may be different from the first reach determination table corresponding to the second special symbol. The execution ratio of the reach effect may be made different by providing a second reach determination table in which the determination value is set.

  In the process of step S2, the counter operation of the random number counter is performed in such a manner that only the random number (variation random number) which is not related to the drop of the random number is updated. After the processes of steps S1 and S2 are performed, only the process of step S2 is basically repeated. However, in this embodiment, the following timer interrupt control is performed, for example, every 4 ms.

  FIG. 188 (b) is a flow chart showing a processing procedure of timer interrupt control periodically performed by the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310.

  As shown in FIG. 188 (b), in this interrupt control, first, a register save process is performed as the process of step S11. Next, as the process of step S12, the gate sensor 2401, the first starting opening sensor 3112, the second starting opening sensor 4004, the first large winning opening sensor 4005, the second large winning opening sensor 2402, the first Detection signals from various switches such as the inlet sensor 2434, the second inlet sensor 2435, and the general winning opening sensor 3111 are input. Then, next, in step S13, random number update processing for updating the value of the random number counter that generates the random number is performed. In the process of step S13, among the above-mentioned random numbers, random numbers (special random numbers, ordinary random numbers) relating to the display mode at the time of the stop of the fluctuation display of the special symbol and the ordinary symbol are updated Counter operation is performed.

  And after updating the random numbers in this way, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 performs a special symbol process process including a lottery process according to the display mode at the time of the stop of the fluctuation display of the special symbol as the process of step S14. Run. In addition, although this special symbol process processing will be described later, here, basically, a special symbol process flag (a first special symbol process flag, a first special symbol process flag, a first flag indicating the progress of the game stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a) Corresponding processing will be selectively executed based on (2) special symbol process flag).

  Then, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 executes, as the processing of step S15, a normal symbol process process including a lottery process according to the hit which becomes the operation trigger of the second start opening door 2411. Also in this normal symbol process processing, basically, the corresponding processing is selectively executed in accordance with the normal symbol process flag indicating the progress of the game. Further, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is configured to execute the lottery process so that the drive frequency of the second start opening door 2411 is higher in a predetermined period after the end of the big hit gaming state. (So-called short time state). In this embodiment, the winning probability of the normal symbol is increased only within a predetermined period after the end of the big hit gaming state, and the time required for the variable display control of the normal symbol is shortened, and the lottery of the normal symbol is drawn. When the result is hit, such a short time state is realized by extending the opening time of the second start opening door 2411.

  When the special symbol process process (step S14) and the normal symbol process process (step S15) are performed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 next performs the special symbol process process as the process of step S16. A command set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 or the like. Next, as the process of step S17, a process of transmitting a command set in a predetermined area of the RAM in the normal symbol process process to, for example, the peripheral control board 1510 is performed.

  In addition, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is, next, information output processing for outputting data such as contact information (15R big hit A, 15R big hit B) and the like supplied to the hole management computer as processing of step S18. I do.

  Then, next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, as the processing of step S19, the first starting opening sensor 3112, the second starting opening sensor 4004, the first big winning opening sensor 4005, the second large When the detection signals from the winning opening sensor 2402 and the general winning opening sensor 3111 are in the on state, the payout control command is output to the payout control board 951 so that the winning balls corresponding to those signals are paid out to the player. As a result, the payout control MPU 952a mounted on the payout control board 951 outputs a drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit 952d to the payout motor 834 so as to pay out the prize balls to the player.

  In addition, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 next executes a storage process of checking the increase and decrease of the number of starting memories as the process of step S20. Next, test terminal processing, which is processing of outputting a test signal for enabling the control state of the pachinko machine 1 to be confirmed outside the gaming machine, is executed as the process of step S21. After that, while performing drive control of the actuator which always operates (step S22), the contents of the above register are restored (step S23), and when the interrupt enabled state is set (step S24), this control ends. It becomes.

  By the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is activated every 4 ms. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the interrupt process by the timer, but in the interrupt process, for example, only a flag may be set to indicate that an interrupt has occurred. However, in this case, the game control process is executed in the main process.

  FIG. 189 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special symbol process (step S14).

  Now, assuming that random numbers provided for various lottery processes are updated (step S13), as shown in FIG. 189, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is firstly controlled by the first starting opening sensor 3112. Under the condition that the detection signal is in the on state (with the ball entering the first starting opening 2002) (step S31), the first special random number of the first special symbol is acquired from the above random number counter A first starting opening passage process such as storing in one special symbol hold storage area is executed (step S32). In addition, the second special random number of the second special symbol is the random number on condition that the detection signal by the second starting opening sensor 4004 is in the on state (there is entering the second starting opening 2004) (step S33) The second starting opening passage processing such as acquiring from the counter and storing it in the second special symbol hold storage area of the RAM is executed (step S34).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the big hit execution flag indicating that the big hit game state is being controlled is set (step S35), and if the big hit execution flag is set, control of the big hit game state is performed A big hit control process (step S39) is performed. In the big hit control process, when the result of the lottery process for the display mode at the time of the stop of the change display of the special symbol (first special symbol, the second special symbol) becomes the mode that suggests "15R big hit A", The first large winning opening 2005 and the second large winning opening 2006 are controlled to open and close according to the 15R big hit gaming state A, and the gaming ball accepted by the second large winning opening 2006 can be received by the first receiving port 2431 or the second receiving port 2432 The distribution piece 2433 distributed to any of the above is controlled to be driven, and processing is performed to set either the special state or the non-special state when the second large winning opening 2006 is opened. In addition, when it becomes the mode which suggests "15R big hit B", according to 15R big hit game state B, it controls opening and closing the 1st large winning a prize opening 2005 and the 2nd large winning a prize opening 2006, 2nd large winning a prize opening 2006 It controls to drive the distribution piece 2433 which distributes the accepted game ball to either the first receiving port 2431 or the second receiving port 2432, and in the special state or the non special state when the second big winning opening 2006 is opened. Execute the process to set.

  Here, the "special state" and the "non-special state" will be described. First, in the present embodiment, there are two states, "special state" and "non-special state", as the states when the gaming ball is received in the second receiving port 2432. Here, the “special state” is a state where it is permitted (enabled) to control to the high probability state after the end of the big hit gaming state by the gaming ball being received in the second receiving port 2432. Therefore, the game ball is received in the second receiving port 2432 in the "special state", and therefore, it is controlled to the high probability state after the end of the big hit gaming state. Also, the “non-special state” is a state where control to a high probability state is not allowed (canceled) after the end of the big hit gaming state even if the gaming ball is received in the second receiving port 2432. Therefore, even if the game ball is received in the second receiving port 2432 in the "non-special state", it is not controlled to the high probability state after the end of the big hit gaming state. Moreover, although the "non-special state" is not controlled to the high probability state after the end of the big hit gaming state even if the game ball is received in the second receiving port 2432, the second receive port 2432 in the big hit gaming state In order to be able to execute an effect based on the fact that the game ball is accepted, it is a period during which it is monitored whether or not the game ball is accepted in the second receiving port 2432. Further, in the present embodiment, as a state in which the game ball is not received in the second receiving port 2432, the "inactive state" different from the "special state" and the "non-special state" is provided. Here, the "ineffective state" is a state in which the game ball can not be accepted in the second receiving port 2432 in principle, such as the 4th to 15th rounds of opening the first large winning opening 2005, temporarily the second receiving port Even if the gaming ball is accepted in 2432, it is not permitted (disabled) to control to the high probability state after the end of the big hit gaming state. Therefore, even if the game ball is received in the second receiving port 2432 in the "inactive state", the game is not controlled to the high probability state after the end of the big hit gaming state. In addition, in the case where the game ball is accepted in the second receiving port 2432 due to the occurrence of an abnormality such as a fraudulent action, the "ineffective state" can notify the hole management side of information related to such an abnormality occurrence. The second receiving port 2432 is a period during which it is monitored whether or not the gaming ball has been accepted.

  Also, in the big hit control process (step S41), after performing the opening control of the first large winning opening 2005 and the second large winning opening 2006, each set processing of high probability flag, time saving flag, and time saving number counter . The high probability flag is a flag indicating that the state is a high probability state. If a game ball is received in the second receiving port 2432 during the special state during execution of the big hit gaming state based on the big hit (15 R big hit A, 15 R big hit B), the high probability state after the end of the big hit gaming state When the high probability flag is set from the control to (high probability time short state), but the gaming ball is not accepted in the second receiving port 2432 during the special state (in the second receiving port 2432 during the non special state If the gaming ball is accepted, etc.), the high probability flag is not set because control is not made to the high probability state (high probability / short state) after the end of the big hit gaming state. Then, when the high probability flag is set, or when the next big hit, or when the counter value of the time reduction counter becomes “0” first special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 126 described later or A high probability flag is reset by the 2nd special symbol stop processing which is not illustrated.

  In addition, the time saving flag is a flag indicating that it is a time saving state, and the big hit (15R big hit A, 15R big hit B) which is controlled to the time short status (high probability time short status, low probability time short status) after the big hit gaming state ends. It is set when ending the jackpot gaming state based on. Then, the time saving flag is the next big hit, or when the count value of the time saving counter becomes “0”, the first special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 126 described later or the second special symbol not shown shown in FIG. It is reset by processing.

  In addition, the time reduction counter is a counter that indicates the remaining number of fluctuation display of the special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) as the number of continuations of the time reduction state, and the time reduction state (high probability) after the end of the big hit gaming state When ending the big hit gaming state based on the big hit (15R big hit A, 15R big hit B) to control to the short time state, low probability time short state), the number of continuation times of the short state is set, and the short time counter The countdown is performed each time the variable display of the special symbol is executed until the counter value becomes “0”, but when the next big hit is reached before the counter value becomes “0”, FIG. 126 described later It is reset by the first special symbol stop process shown in or the second special symbol stop process (not shown) (the counter value is returned to "0").

  In addition, if the big hit execution flag is not set, the condition that the value of the second special hold number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the second special symbol hold storage area is "0" (Step S36), the first special symbol process processing including the lottery process according to the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the first special symbol is executed (step S37), and the second special symbol stored in the second special symbol storage area The second special symbol including the lottery process according to the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the second special symbol condition that the value of the second special reserve number counter showing the number of special random numbers is not "0" (step S36) Process processing is performed (step S38). Thus, in this example, the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed when the value of the second special hold number counter is not "0".

  FIG. 190 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first starting opening passage process (step S32).

  Now, if it is determined in the process of step S31 that the first starting opening sensor 3112 is in the on state and it is determined that the game ball has entered the first starting opening 2002, as shown in FIG. 190. In step S41, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first acquires the counter value by the first special hold number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a. And based on this counter value, it is judged whether the number of holdings of the above-mentioned first special symbol is "4" which is the maximum value.

  In the process of step S41, when it is determined that the number of reservations of the first special symbol is not the maximum value, the following steps are performed to newly put variable display control of the first special symbol into a state of suspension Processing of S42 to S44 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S42, the first special hold number counter is counted up (one added). Next, as the process of step S43, the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number are acquired from the random number counter. Then, next, as the process of step S44, the first special symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the first special hold number counter in the storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a as each random number acquired in this way Store in

  However, when it is determined in the process of step S41 that the number of reservations of the first special symbol is the maximum value, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly suspended. That is, the variation display control of the first special symbol is not newly put on hold by terminating the process without executing the process of steps S42 to S44.

  FIG. 191 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second start port passing process (step S34).

  Now, if it is determined in the process of step S33 that the second starting opening sensor 2593 is in the on state and it is determined that the game ball has entered the second starting opening 2004, as shown in FIG. 191. In step S51, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first acquires the counter value by the second special hold number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a. And based on this counter value, it is judged whether the number of reservations of the above-mentioned 2nd special symbol is "4" which is the maximum value.

  In the process of step S51, when it is determined that the number of reservations of the second special symbol is not the maximum value, the following steps are performed to newly put the variable display control of the second special symbol into a state of suspension Processing of S52 to S54 will be performed. That is, first, in the process of step S52, the second special hold number counter is counted up (one added). Next, as the process of step S53, the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the variable random number are acquired from the random number counter. Then, next, as the process of step S54, the second special symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the second special hold number counter in the memory area of the main control MPU 1310a in the respective random numbers thus acquired Store in

  However, if it is determined in the process of step S51 that the number of reservations of the second special symbol is the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly suspended. That is, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly put on hold by terminating the process without executing the process of steps S52 to S54.

  FIG. 192 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first special symbol process (step S37). The first special symbol process process executed in step S37 of the special symbol process process and the second special symbol process process executed in step S38 of the special symbol process process are similar program modules, and are random numbers used for determination. Since the tables are different, only the first special symbol process processing executed in step S37 of the special symbol process processing will be described here. In the first special symbol process processing, one of the following five process treatments will be selectively executed in accordance with the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag.

1. The first special random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is read, and based on the read first special random number, the first special symbol is subjected to lottery processing and the like at the time of stopping the variation control of the first special symbol. Symbol normal processing (step S80)
2. The first special symbol stop symbol setting process in which the determination process of the mode at the time of the variation control stop of the first special symbol is performed based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode at the time of the variation control stop of the first special symbol (step S81 )
3. A lottery process for the variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 based on the variation random number, and the variation mode of the effect display executed on the effect display device 1600 corresponding to the special symbol First variation pattern setting process (step S82)
4. First special symbol variation processing to wait until the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 is stopped (step S83)
5. The first special symbol display mode 1403 is displayed on the first special symbol display unit 1403 as the first special symbol display mode is determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode at the time of the variation control stop of the first special symbol. First special symbol stop processing to stop the variation display of the first special symbol (step S84)

  The first special symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the first special symbol normal processing (step S80) should be performed in the above-mentioned processing of step S1 (see FIG. 188).

  FIG. 193 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol normal processing (step S80).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 193, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first performs step S101. As processing of, it is judged whether there is fluctuation display control of the first special symbol in the state of suspension based on the counter value by the first special suspension number counter. As a result, if it is determined that there is variable display control of the first special symbol in the state of suspension, then it is stored in the first special symbol suspension storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a as the processing of step S102. The random number stored in the first storage area of the random numbers (for example, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, the variable random number) related to the display mode of the first special symbol . Then, as the processing of steps S103 and S104, the first special holding number counter is counted down and the first special symbol storage area of the first special symbol holding storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is stored. A shift operation is performed on a random number (first special random number, first symbol random number, reach random number, variable random number) related to the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the special symbol in a first-in first-out mode.

  Specifically, the first special symbol hold storage area has four storage areas of 1 to 4, and stores the random numbers extracted according to the occurrence of the start winning from the first (first) area in order. Then, when a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, when the start winning is generated, the extracted random number is stored in the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area, and the first When the variable display start condition based on the random numbers stored in the storage area of is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area Various random numbers are moved to the (N-1) -th (N = 2 to 4) -th storage area. Thus, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the first special symbol occurs is stored so as to be identifiable, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension occurring first). become.

  After that, as the process of step S105, the big hit determination process which is a lottery process for the above big hit is performed based on the read first special random number of the first special symbol. Thereafter, when the above first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is shifted to the above first special symbol stop symbol setting processing (step S81), this processing is ended.

  FIG. 194 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit determination process (step S105).

  The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is in the high probability state shown in FIG. 195A if the current gaming state is the high probability state (high probability time short status, high probability non-short status) (step S111) The jackpot determination table is selected (step S112), and if the current gaming state is a low probability state (step S111), the jackpot determination table for low probability shown in FIG. 195 (A) is selected (step S113). The determined big hit determination table is compared with the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing (step S114).

  The big hit determination table shown in FIG. 195 (A) is stored in the ROM 4100 d of the main control MPU 1310 a, and the gaming state is low probability (normal state (low probability non-short state) and short time state (low probability time short state)) And a high probability big hit determination table used when the gaming state is high probability (high probability time reduction state). And, in the big hit judgment table at low probability, it matches with the big hit judgment value which shows that one kind of first special random number is won in the big hit, and it is out of line judgment that 299 kinds of first special random numbers show the above deviation. The first special random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the value (big hit probability at low probability: 1/300). In the second special symbol process process executed in step S38 of the special symbol process process, in the jackpot determination table at low probability referred to compare with the second special random number, it is compared with the first special random number In the same way as with the big hit judgment table at low probability to be referenced, it matches with the big hit judgment value indicating that one kind of second special random number is won in the big hit, and 299 kinds of second special random numbers deviate from the above The second special random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with the out-of-range determination value indicating that (the big hit probability at low probability: 1/300).

  In the high probability big hit determination table, 10 types of first special random numbers including the same first special random number as the first special random number set in the low probability big hit determination table coincide with the big hit determination value, The first special random numbers are associated with each other so that the 290 first special random numbers coincide with the disconnection determination value (big hit probability at high probability: 1/30). As described above, in this embodiment, in the high probability state (high probability and short state), the big hit determination value indicating that the big hit is won is low probability (normal state (low probability non-short state) and short time state (low It is raised to 10 times probability) In the second special symbol process process executed in step S38 of the special symbol process process, the high probability big hit judgment table to be referred to compare with the second special random number is compared with the first special random number In order to make a big hit, 10 kinds of second special random numbers including the same second special random number as the second special random number set in the big hit judgment table at low probability as well as the big hit judgment table at high probability to be referred to The second special random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with the jackpot determination value indicating that the player has won, and to match the outlier determination value indicating that the 290 types of second special random numbers are the above-mentioned deviations (at high probability) Jackpot probability: 1/30).

  If the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the selected big hit determination table with the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing, it determines that it is a big hit (step S115) ), The big hit flag which shows that the particular fluctuation is hit big is set, it ends processing (step S116), the 1st special read out at step S102 of the selected big hit judgment table and the 1st special symbol normal processing As a result of the comparison with the random number, when it is determined to be out, the reach determination table (not shown) is compared with the reach random number read out in step S102 (step S117). Then, as a result of comparison between the reach determination table and the reach random numbers read in step S102, when it is determined that the reach is out (step S118), the reach flag indicating that the change becomes reach is set and processing is performed. The process ends (step S119).

  FIG. 196 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first, as shown in FIG. 196, The result of the lottery process of the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the first special symbol, that is, the result of the above-mentioned big hit determination process (step S105) is determined. The determination of the lottery process result is performed by determining whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S121).

  If the big hit flag is set in step S121, the main control MPU 1310a compares the first symbol random number read out in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing with the symbol determination table shown in FIG. 195 (B). (Step S122) The type of the big hit is determined, and the mode (stop symbol of the first special symbol) at the time of the variation control stop of the first special symbol corresponding to the determined type of the big hit is determined (step S123). On the other hand, if the big hit flag is not set in step S121, it is determined that the first special symbol is out of pattern as the variation stop state (step S124).

  As shown in FIG. 195 (B), in the symbol determination table, symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, second symbol random number) are associated with each determination result (15R big hit A, 15R big hit B, 15R big hit C) It is memorized in the form. The main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 determines the type of the jackpot by specifying the determination result associated with the acquired symbol random number. In the symbol determination table of this example, the determination probability of the type of jackpot determined based on the first symbol random number and the determination probability of the type of jackpot determined based on the second symbol random number are set to be different ing.

In particular,
It controls opening and closing of the first large winning opening 2005 and the second large winning opening 2006 according to the 1.15R jackpot gaming state A, and in the opening of the second large winning opening 2006 in the 13th to 15th rounds. It is set to a special state (a state where it will be controlled to a high probability state after the end of the big hit gaming state by the game ball being received in the second receiving port 2432) in the 13th round, and the second receiving during the special state If the probability that the game ball can be received at the entrance 2432 is increased and the game ball is received at the second receiving port 2432 during the special state, the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second game symbol after the end of the jackpot game state) If the game ball is not accepted in the second receiving port 2432 during the special state, the jackpot gaming letters while controlling the high probability time short state until the variable display of the special symbol is executed 100 times. 15R jackpot A which variation display of the special symbol after the completion of (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is controlled to a low probability time reduction until it is executed 100 times
2.15R The opening and closing control of the first large winning opening 2005 and the second large winning opening 2006 according to the gaming state A, and in the opening of the second large winning opening 2006 in the 13th to 15th round It is set to a special state (a state where it will be controlled to a high probability state after the end of the big hit gaming state by the game ball being received in the second receiving port 2432) in the 13th round, and the second receiving during the special state While reducing the probability that the game ball will be accepted at the entrance 2432, it is not controlled to the high probability state after the end of the jackpot game state even if the game ball is accepted at the second entrance 2432 in the non special state in the 14th round And the probability that the game ball will be accepted in the second inlet 2432 during the non-special state is increased, and the second inlet 2432 is played in the special state. If the ball is accepted, while it is controlled to high probability time short state until the variable display of special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) is executed 100 times after the end of the big hit gaming state, while in special state If the game ball is not accepted in the second entrance 2432, after the end of the jackpot gaming state special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) until the variable display of 100 times is executed low probability time 15R big hit B to control the state
3.15R The opening and closing control of the first large winning opening 2005 and the second large winning opening 2006 according to the jackpot gaming state A, among the opening time of the second large winning opening 2006 in the 13th to 15th round It is set to a special state (a state where it will be controlled to a high probability state after the end of the big hit gaming state by the game ball being received in the second receiving port 2432) in the 13th round, and the second receiving during the special state If the probability that the game ball can be received at the entrance 2432 is reduced and the game ball is received at the second receiving port 2432 during the special state, the special symbol (first special symbol and the second game symbol after the end of the jackpot game state) The game is controlled to the high probability non-short state until the variable display of the special symbol is executed 100 times, while the game ball is not accepted in the second receiving port 2432 during the special state, the big hit game 15R jackpot controlled after the end of the state to the low probability non time reduction state (normal state) C, determined in any of the jackpot from the three types of jackpot.

  In this example, a symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol and a symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol are provided. And, in the symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol, the distribution of the determination value is set to be different compared to the symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol, so that the determination ratio of each big hit is different ing. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 195 (B), in the symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol, of the 15R jackpots A to C, the 15R jackpot A (which is particularly advantageous to the player) is advantageous to the player. While the probability that the game ball will be accepted in the second receiving port 2432 is high, and the distribution of 50 judgment values is set for the big hit), which has a high probability of being controlled to the high probability state after the big hit gaming state ends. , 15R big hit B that is relatively disadvantageous to the player (a big hit with a low probability that the game ball is accepted in the second receiving port 2432 during the special state, and a high probability of controlling the high hit state after the end of the big hit game state) Distribution of 40 judgment values is set, the 15R big hit C which is also relatively disadvantageous to the player (The probability that the game ball will be accepted in the second receiving port 2432 during the special state is low, the end of the big hit gaming state Distribution of ten discriminants values for the probability of controlling the high-probability state is lower jackpot) is set later. On the other hand, in the symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol, the distribution of the determination value is set only for the 15R big hit A which is relatively advantageous to the player among the 15 R big hits A to C. In this way, when the jackpot on the side of the first special symbol side, it is determined which kind of jackpot is determined at the time of the first jackpot since the player's degree of advantage is determined by one of the 15R jackpots A to C different from each other. It can be done. In addition, when it is controlled to time saving state after the end of the big hit game state, the game of the second special symbol side (the game which enables the entry of the game ball to the 2nd starting opening 2004) is done, but the second special At the time of the big hit on the symbol side, it is decided to be 15R big hit A (15 R big hit game A), so it can be made to focus only on how much the prize ball amount can be obtained at the time of consecutive units. Therefore, the game does not become monotonous because the game nature changes between the first big hit time and the consecutive time time.

  Moreover, if the kind of big hit is determined, the stop design according to the kind of big hit will be determined as a mode at the time of the stop of the first special symbol. Specifically, if it is decided that 15R big hit A, it is decided as 15R big hit A symbol as big hit symbol, and if 15R big hit B is decided as big hit symbol it is decided as 15R big hit B symbol and it is decided 15R big hit C When it is decided, it is decided to 15R big hit design C as big hit design. In addition, in the 2nd special symbol stop symbol setting processing which is not illustrated, when it is decided to be 15R big hit A, it is decided to be 15 R big hit A symbol as a big hit symbol.

  And after the decision processing about the stop design is done in this way, as the processing of step S125, these drawing results (the kind of big hit, reach out indication, either of the out indication (the form of the stop special pattern of the first special symbol A determination result notification command corresponding to each lottery result is set so that the instruction may be sent to the peripheral control board 1510). And after that, this process is complete | finished when the above-mentioned 1st special symbol process flag is updated so that a process may be transfered to said 1st fluctuation pattern setting process (step S82) as a process of step S126. Peripheral control MPU 1511a starts fluctuating display of the left, middle and right decorative symbols based on the received judgment result notification command and fluctuation pattern command, and stops and displays them in the order of left decorative symbol → right decorative symbol → middle decorative symbol Thus, the display control of the effect display device 1600 is performed.

  Specifically, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is 15R of the big hit related to the first special symbol from the received determination result notification command as a mode (stop symbol) at the time of the variation stop of the decorative symbol displayed on the effect display device 1600. When the big hit A is specified, it is decided on the 15R big hit A symbol (combination of the same decorative symbols), and when the 15R big hit B is identified, it is decided on the 15R big hit B symbol (common to 15R big hit A symbol), 15R When the big hit C is specified, it is decided on the 15R big hit C symbol (common to the 15R big hit A symbol), and the decided stop symbol at the time of lapse of the fluctuation time specified from the fluctuation pattern command (at the end of reach effect) Are controlled to be displayed on the effect display device 1600. In this way, when the decorative symbol displayed on the effect display device 1600 is stopped changing at either 15R big hit A symbol, 15R big hit B symbol or 15 R big hit C symbol, it is a big hit from the stop symbol of the decorative symbol The 15R big hit A symbol, the 15R big hit B symbol and the 15R big hit C symbol are used as the same symbol, so it is possible to identify either the 15R big hit A, the 15R big hit B or the 15R big hit C symbol I can not do it.

  In addition, peripheral control MPU 1511a, when it specifies reach out of the received judgment result notification command as a mode (stop symbol) at the time of variation stop of the decorative symbol displayed on effect display device 1600, the out pattern with reach (A combination of decorative designs that are not identical, but the left and right decorative designs are the same.) A combination of non-identical outlying designs (not identical), but with left and right decorations Is determined to be non-identical, and display control of the determined stop symbol is performed on the effect display device 1600 when the fluctuation time specified from the fluctuation pattern command has elapsed (when the game effect is ended).

  FIG. 197 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first variation pattern setting process (step S82).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 197, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets the big hit flag. If it is (step S141), the fluctuation pattern table (not shown) at the time of big hit according to the current gaming state and the presence or absence of the second receiving port passing flag is selected (step S142), and the reach flag is set. (Step S143), select a fluctuation pattern table (not shown) at the time of reach according to the current gaming state and the presence or absence of the second receiving port passing flag (step S144), and either the big hit flag or the reach flag If it is not set, that is, if it is normal release (a reach effect is not performed), the current Gaming state, and pattern table (not shown) fluctuations during off according to the presence or absence of the second receiving port passage flag selecting (step S145).

  Then, the variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the variation random number read out in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing (step S146), and starting the determined variation pattern A variation pattern command to be notified to the control board 1510 is set, and variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 is started (step S147). Further, the main control MPU 1310a sets the fluctuation time set corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined to determine the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation timer (step S148). As a result, effect control is performed by the first special symbol display 1403 and the effect display device 1600 only during the thus determined fluctuation time.

  The variation pattern table of this example is provided with a plurality of types for each determination result based on the special random number (first special random number, second special random number) and the symbol random number (first symbol random number, second symbol random number). In addition, in the fluctuation patterns set in each fluctuation pattern table, a plurality of fluctuation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for fluctuation display control of the above special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is It is stored in a form associated with each of the variable random numbers. Thus, main control MPU 1310a selects a variation pattern table selected from among a plurality of variation pattern tables according to the determination result based on the special random number and the symbol random number, and the variation random number read out in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing. Are compared, and fluctuation time information associated with the read fluctuation random number is acquired from this table to determine the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol). Thereby, the lottery process for the variation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed. The variation pattern table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU 1310a.

  In addition, the fluctuation pattern table at the time of the big hit of this example, the fluctuation pattern table at the time of reach, and the fluctuation pattern table at the time of the loss, the fluctuation pattern according to the present gaming state and the presence or absence of the second reception passage flag respectively A table is provided. Specifically, the variation pattern table when the current gaming state is non-short time (low probability non-short state (normal state), high probability non-short state), the current gaming state is short time (low probability time short state, It is a high probability time short state), and a fluctuation pattern table at the time of setting of the second reception port passing flag described later, the current gaming state is short time (low probability time short state, high probability time short state), and A variation pattern table at the time of setting of the second reception non-passing flag is prepared. That is, when the current gaming state is non-short, the variation pattern table of non-short time is used, but when the current gaming state is short, based on the 15R big hit A or 15R big hit B that triggered the control to be short then. In the jackpot gaming state, the variation pattern table to be used is made different depending on whether or not the game ball is received in the second receiving port 2432 (the second receiving port passing flag described later is set or not). . As described above, in the big hit gaming state based on 15 R big hit A or 15 R big hit B, after the game ball is received in the second receiving port 2432, the variation pattern table at the time of setting the second receiving port passing flag is used By performing a dedicated effect when the game ball is received in the second receiving port 2432, it appears as if it is controlled to a high probability state by the game ball being received in the second receiving port 2432 (In fact, if the game ball is not accepted in the second entrance 2432 during the special state, it is not controlled to the high probability state), and the player's expectation for the next big hit game state is made to increase . On the other hand, in the big hit gaming state based on 15 R big hit A or 15 R big hit B, after the game ball is not accepted in the second receiving port 2432, use the fluctuation pattern table at the time of setting the second receiving non-passing flag Is it not controlled to a high probability state by not having received the game ball in the second receiving port 2432 by executing a dedicated effect when the game ball is not received in the second receiving port 2432? It looks like (in fact, it is not controlled to the high probability state because the gaming ball is not received in the second receiving port 2432 during the special state). In addition, after the end of the big hit gaming state based on the 15R big hit C, since the non-short time state is controlled, the non-short time variation pattern table is used.

  Further, in the variation pattern table at the time of reach in the present example, it is set so as to determine the type type of reach effect to be executed by comparing the determination value indicating which reach effect is to be performed with the change random number. . For example, among the reach effects, the super reach effect has a higher expectation for a big hit than the normal reach effect, and when the super reach effect is executed, the player's expectation for the big hit gaming state is increased.

  In addition, when the variable display control of the first special symbol is started, the first special symbol process flag described above is transferred to the first special symbol variation processing (step S83) as the processing of step S149 next. When updated, this processing ends.

  In this example, in the variation pattern table at the time of disconnection, the variation time information of the special symbol set to about 1 second at the time of short is associated with the above special symbol random number (first special symbol, second special symbol). When the time is short, the variation time information of the special symbol set to about 12 seconds is associated with the special symbol random number (first special symbol, second special symbol), and the variation pattern of the special symbol is set. That is, as compared with the variation pattern at the time of non-short time, the variation pattern at the time of short time selected as the time-short can be extremely short in time required for the variable display control of the special symbol. The fluctuation time information of the symbol is set.

  FIG. 198 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol variation process (step S83).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 198, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first performs step S171. As a process of (1), the fluctuation timer for which the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined in the lottery process (step S82) for the fluctuation pattern is set is decremented by one. Then, if it is determined that the fluctuation time timer is 0, that is, the above-mentioned lottery fluctuation time has elapsed (step S172), the process proceeds to step S173. That is, when the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process proceeds to the above-mentioned first special symbol stop processing (step S84) in the processing of step S173, this processing is ended.

  FIG. 199 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop process (step S84).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 199, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first performs step S181. The display control for causing the first special symbol display 1403 to display the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting processing as the processing of the first special symbol, and the first special symbol in the effect display device 1600 A stop display command for instructing derivation and display of the display result of the decorative symbol according to the stop symbol of is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S182).

  Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines whether the count value of the time counter is "0" while the time reduction flag is set and the number of continuation times of the time reduction state is set. (Step S183). Then, if this counter value is not "0", after counting down the time counter (step S184), it is further determined whether the counter value of the simultaneous short counter is "0" (step S185). . As a result, if the same counter value is “0”, the time-shortening flag is reset, and if the high-probability flag is set, the high-probability flag is reset. Since either the flag or the second reception non-passing flag is set, the set flag is reset (step S186). If it is determined that the counter value of the time reduction counter is "0" in the process of step S183, or if it is determined that the time reduction counter is not "0" in the process of step S185. At that time, the process proceeds to step S187.

  When the big hit flag is set (step S187), a big hit start command indicating that the big hit gaming state is started is set (step S188), and the big hit gaming state is started (big hit round start command is set) The standby time (period for displaying a message to start the big hit gaming state, etc.) until it is set is set in the interval timer (step S189). Then, next, when the high probability flag is set, the high probability flag is reset, and when the time reduction flag is set, the time reduction flag is reset, and the counter value of the time reduction counter is If it is not "0", the counter value is reset (returned to "0"), and if either the second inlet passing flag or the second inlet non passing flag is set, the flag is set. Reset the flag, set the big hit running flag showing that the big hit gaming state is being executed (step S190), and shift the process to the first special symbol normal processing which is the initial value of the first special symbol process flag When the update is performed as described above (step S191), this process ends.

  The jackpot start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is individually prepared according to the type of jackpot (15R jackpot A, 15R jackpot B, 15R jackpot C). In step S188, a big hit start command (15 R big hit A start command, 15 R big hit B start command, 15 R big hit C start command) according to the type of big hit is set. As a result, the effect corresponding to the type of the big hit instructed by the big hit start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker, and the like.

  FIG. 200 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit control process (step S39).

  In the above step S189, the waiting time until the big hit gaming state starts is set in the interval timer, but after the waiting time set in this interval timer has passed in the process of step S401, the same figure 200 is drawn. As shown, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 controls the opening and closing of the first large winning opening 2005 and the second large winning opening 2006, and when the second large winning opening 2006 is opened, the special state (second reception In the state where it will be controlled to the high probability state after the end of the big hit gaming state by the game ball being received in the entrance 2432) or non-special state (even if the game ball is received in the second receiving port 2432 The big winning opening opening and closing process which can be set to any of the following two conditions). (Step S402) The drive control of the distributing piece 2433 capable of distributing the gaming ball received in the second large winning opening 2006 to the second receiving port 2432 and the gaming ball receiving in the second receiving port 2432 And a second receiving opening / closing process (step S403) for monitoring whether or not the timing at which the gaming ball is received in the second receiving port 2432 is in a special state.

  FIG. 201 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special winning opening / closing process (step S402).

  Now, if it is determined in the process of step S411 that the first big winning hole 2005 or the second big winning hole 2006 is in the open state, as shown in FIG. 201, the main control board 1310 can be used. The main control MPU 1310 a takes a predetermined time (eg, for example, from the open state of the first large winning opening 2005 or the second large winning opening 2006 according to the operation schedule of the first large winning opening 2005 and the second large winning opening 2006 described later) Or, when 20 seconds open for a long time, 0.5 seconds when open for a short time (step S 412), or the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 When the game ball has won the maximum number of winnings (for example, nine) (step S413), the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning in the open state 2006 is controlled in a closed state (step S414). When it is determined that the current round is to be ended by controlling the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 in the closed state (step S 415), the game is sent to the peripheral control board 1510. When the big hit round end command according to the big hit type and the current number of rounds is set as the command (step S416), this process is finished.

Also, if it is determined in the process of step S411 that the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 is in the closed state, as shown in FIG. 201, the main control board 1310 is The main control MPU 1310 a comes to the timing to open the first large winning opening 2005 or the second large winning opening 2006 according to the operation schedule of the first large winning opening 2005 and the second large winning opening 2006 described later. (Step S417), when it is determined to start a new round by controlling the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 to an open state (step S418), the peripheral control board Big hit round start frame according to big hit type and new number of rounds as command sent to 1510 To set the de (step S419). Then, when it is determined that it is the timing to set the special status flag or the non-special status flag, that is, the V release round described later in the opening of the second large winning opening 2006 (opening of the second large winning opening 2006). When it is the start of the round when gaming balls can be accepted in the second receiving port 2432 (step S420), the special status flag or non-special according to the status setting schedule of the second receiving port 2432 described later The status flag is set (step S421). It should be noted that there is no need to reset the special status flag if the special status flag has already been set, and likewise it is not necessary to reset the non special status flag if the non special status flag has already been set. . Then, when the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 in the closed state is controlled to the open state (step S422), this process is ended. In addition, when it is judged that it will not start a new round by controlling the said 1st big winning opening 2005 or the said 2nd big winning opening 2006 in an open state (the 2nd opening etc. in the same round) (Step S418) or when it is determined that it is not the timing to set the special status flag or the non-special status flag (when the first large winning opening 2005 is opened or the second large winning opening 2006 is opened). When it is time of opening other than V opening round which will be described later (step S420), when the first large winning opening 2005 or the second large winning opening 2006 in the closed state is controlled to the open state (step S422) End this process. As a result, the effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker, etc. can execute effects according to the type of the big hit instructed by the big hit round start command and the big hit round end command and the current number of rounds.

In addition, if it is determined that it is not the timing to open the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 in the process of step S417, as shown in FIG. 201, the main control When the main control MPU 1310a of the substrate 1310 finishes all the rounds by repeating the open state and the closed state of the first large winning opening 2005 or the second large winning opening 2006 (step S423), a big hit is in progress. The flag is reset and a big hit end command is set (step S424). The big hit end command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral control board 1510 receives the big hit end command, and ends the big hit gaming state, and effects related to the gaming state after the big hit gaming state ends, etc. , Lamps, LEDs, and speakers. Then, when it is determined that the second reception passage passing flag described later is set (step S425), the high probability flag is set and the second reception passage passing flag is reset (step S426). When the flag is set and an initial value (for example, 100 times) is set as the number of continuations of the short time state to the counter value of the short time number counter (step S427), this processing is ended.

  In addition, the special state flag indicates that the special state (the state in which the game ball is received in the second receiving port 2432 and the state is to be controlled to the high probability state after the end of the big hit gaming state) is set. It is a flag, and the non-special status flag is set to the non-special status (a status where it will not be controlled to the high probability status after the big hit gaming status is ended even if the gaming ball is accepted in the second inlet 2432) It is a flag which shows that it is. Among the 13th to 15th rounds of opening the second large winning opening 2006, the gaming ball received by the second large winning opening 2006 in the second opening opening and closing process (step S403) described later is the first receiving opening 2431 or In the round where the game ball can be received in the second receiving port 2432 by controlling the distribution piece 2433 distributed to any of the second receiving port 2432, it is set to either the special state or the non-special state .

  In addition, if it is determined that it is not the timing to open the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 in the process of step S417, as shown in FIG. 201, the main control When the main control MPU 1310a of the substrate 1310 finishes all the rounds by repeating the open state and the closed state of the first large winning opening 2005 or the second large winning opening 2006 (step S423), a big hit is in progress. The flag is reset and a big hit end command is set (step S424). The big hit end command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral control board 1510 receives the big hit end command, and ends the big hit gaming state, and effects related to the gaming state after the big hit gaming state ends, etc. , Lamps, LEDs, and speakers. If it is determined that the special state in-pass flag is set (step S425), the special state in-pass flag is reset and the high probability flag is set (step S426). Also, if it is a big hit (15R big hit A, 15R big hit B) to be controlled to a short time state among 15R big hit A to C (step S 427), the time short flag is set and the counter value of the time shorting counter The initial value (for example, 100 times) is set as the number of continuation times of the time saving state (step S428), and the second receiving port 2432 is not used if the second receiving port passing flag described later is not set (step S429). When the second receiving port non-passing flag indicating that the game ball has not been accepted is set (step S430), this processing is ended. Thus, the 15R big hit A to C is 15R big hit A or 15R big hit B, and the special state middle passage flag is set (the game ball is received in the second receiving port 2432 during the special state) If it is determined, the high probability flag and the short time flag are set, and the high probability time short state is controlled, but the special state in-transit flag is not set (the gaming ball is in the second receiving port 2432 during the special state) If it is determined that the time is not accepted, only the short time flag is set without setting the high probability flag, and the low probability time short state is controlled. On the other hand, when it is determined that the 15R jackpot among the 15R jackpots A to C is the 15R jackpot and the special state passage flag is set (the gaming ball is received in the second receiving port 2432 during the special state) The high probability flag is set without setting the short time flag, and the high probability non-short state is controlled, but the special state passage flag is not set (the gaming ball is in the second receiving port 2432 during the special state) If it is determined that the condition is not accepted, control is made to the low probability non-time-short state (normal state) without setting the high probability flag and the short time flag.

  FIG. 202 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second inlet opening / closing process (step S403).

  If it is determined in the process of step S431 that the second receiving port 2432 is in the open state (the state where the gaming ball is distributed to the second receiving port 2432 by the distributing piece 2433), as shown in FIG. As shown, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 follows the operation schedule of the distribution piece 2433, which will be described later, for a predetermined time from the open state of the second receiving port 2432 (e.g. Second, when 0.2 seconds when opening for a short time has elapsed (step S 423), or by controlling the first large winning opening 2005 or the second large winning opening 2006 in the closed state, the current round (Step S433), the second inlet 2432 in the open state is closed (the first inlet by the distribution piece 2433). Game ball is controlled to a state) that is distributed to 431 side (step S434).

  If it is determined in the process of step S431 that the second receiving port 2432 is in the closed state, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, as shown in FIG. When it is time to put the second receiving port 2432 in the open state according to the operation schedule of the piece 2433 (step S435), the second receiving port 2432 in the closed state is controlled to the open state (step S436).

  Next, in step S437, if it is determined that the gaming ball is received in the second receiving port 2432 in the open state, as shown in FIG. 202, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 The game ball is accepted in the second inlet 2432 during the special state while setting the special state flag (step S 438), or the second during the non-special state while setting the non-special state flag It is determined whether the gaming ball has been received in the receiving port 2432 (step S441). At this time, when it is determined that the game ball is received in the second receiving port 2432 during the special state (step S438), the game ball is received in the second receiving port 2432 during the special state. If the special state in-transit flag indicating "1" is not set (step S439), the special state in-pass flag is set (step S440). When it is determined that the game ball is received in the second receiving port 2432 during the special state (step S438), or it is determined that the game ball is received in the second receiving port 2432 during the non-special state. In any case (step S441), the big hit (15R big hit A, 15R big hit B) which will be controlled to the short time state among the 15R big hit A to C (step S442), and If the second receiving port passing flag indicating that the game ball has been received in the second receiving port 2432 is not set (step S443), the second receiving port pass flag is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 When the second reception port passing command is set as the command (step S444), this processing ends. As described above, it is determined that the second receiving port passing flag is set (the game ball is received at the second receiving port 2432), which is the 15R big impact A or the 15R big impact B among the 15R big hits A to C. In this case, regardless of whether the gaming ball is received in the second receiving port 2432 in the special state or the non-special state, a common second receiving port passing command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the second The effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker, and the like can execute an effect corresponding to the reception of the game ball in the reception port 2432. In addition, when it is judged that 15R big hit A or 15R big hit A or 15R big hit B among 15R big hit A to C, and the second reception passage passing flag is set (the game ball is received at the second reception 2432) In order to determine the variation pattern of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot gaming state, use the fluctuation pattern table according to the second reception passage passing flag, as the effect after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the above The effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker, and the like execute an effect corresponding to the game ball being received in the second receiving port 2432. On the other hand, if it is determined that the 15R jackpot A to 15R jackpot A or the 15R jackpot B among the 15R jackpots A to C and the second reception passage passing flag is not set (the game ball is not accepted in the second reception opening 2432) , The second entrance non-passing flag is set in step S430 of the big winning opening opening and closing processing, when determining the variation pattern of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the second entrance non-passing flag In accordance with the variation pattern table according to, as the effect after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the effect display device 1600, the lamp · LED and the speaker according to that the game ball was not accepted in the second receiving port 2432 It is made to execute by etc.

  FIG. 203 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the ordinary symbol process (step S15).

  Now, if it is determined that the detection signal by the gate sensor 2401 is in the on state in the process of step S801 and it is determined that the game ball has passed to the gate unit 2003, as shown in FIG. 203, the main The main control MPU 1310a of the control board 1310 first executes gate part passing processing such as acquiring an ordinary random number of an ordinary symbol from the random number counter and storing it in the ordinary symbol holding storage area of the RAM as the processing of step S802. Do.

  Then, in the normal symbol process processing, one of the following five process operations is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag.

1. Normal symbol normal processing in which the normal random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is read out and the lottery processing for the display mode at the time of the fluctuation control stop of the normal symbol is performed based on the read normal random number (step S803)
2. Normal symbol fluctuation time determination processing in which lottery processing or the like for the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the normal symbol displayed on the above-mentioned normal symbol display 1402 is performed based on the common pattern fluctuation random number (step S804)
3. Normal symbol variation processing to stand by until the variation display of the above normal symbol in the normal symbol display 1402 is stopped (step S805)
4. The pattern at the time of the variation control stop of the normal symbol determined based on the result of the lottery process about the display mode at the time of the variation control stop of the normal symbol is displayed on the above-mentioned normal symbol display 1402 as the mode at the time of the variation control stop Normal symbol stop processing to stop the key (step S806)
5. When the result of the lottery process about the mode at the time of change control stop of the normal symbol becomes the mode which suggests “per common figure”, the second starting opening door 2411 is rotated and the game to the second starting opening 2004 Normal electric part opening process which executes the process which controls the acceptance of the ball (step S807)

  The normal symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the normal symbol normal processing (step S803) should be performed in the process of step S1 described above (see FIG. 188).

  FIG. 204 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the gate part passing process (step S802).

  Now, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 2401 is in the on state in the process of the step S801 and it is determined that the game ball has passed to the gate portion 2003, as shown in FIG. 204, The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first acquires the counter value by the above-mentioned normal hold number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a as the process of step S811. And based on this counter value, it is judged whether the number of holdings of a normal symbol is "4" which is the maximum value.

  If it is determined in the process of step S811 that the number of reserved normal symbols is not the maximum value, the following steps S812 to S814 are performed in order to newly put the variable symbol display control of the normal symbols on hold status. It will process. That is, first, as the process of the step S812, the normal number-of-holds counter is incremented (one added). Next, as the process of step S813, the above-mentioned ordinary random number and the above-mentioned common-mode fluctuation random number are acquired from the above-mentioned random number counter. Then, next, in the process of step S 814, each random number acquired in this way is stored in the normal symbol holding storage area corresponding to the counter value by the normal holding number counter among the storage areas of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310 a.

  However, if it is determined in the process of step S811 that the number of reserved normal symbols is the maximum value, the variable display control of the normal symbols is not newly suspended. That is, by not executing the processing of step S812 to step S814, the variable display control of the normal symbol is not newly put on hold.

  FIG. 205 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal symbol normal processing (step S803).

  When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol normal processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 205, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first performs the processing in step S821. Based on the counter value by the normal holding number counter, it is determined whether or not there is fluctuation display control of the normal symbol in the holding state. As a result, when it is determined that there is fluctuation display control of the normal symbol in the state of suspension, next, as the processing of step S822, the normal stored in the regular symbol storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a. The random number stored in the first storage area of the random numbers (for example, ordinary random number, common drawing random number) related to the display mode of the symbol is read from the same RAM. Then, next, as the processing of steps S823 and S824, while counting down the above-mentioned normal number-of-holds counter, at the time of the fluctuation display stop of the above-mentioned normal symbol stored in each storage area of the ordinary storage area of RAM of the main control MPU 1310a. The shift operation is performed in a first-in first-out mode for random numbers (normal random numbers, common drawing random numbers) related to the display mode in.

  Specifically, the normal symbol storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and the random numbers extracted according to the passage of the game ball to the gate unit 2003 are sequentially from the first (first) area Remember. Then, when a random number is stored in the n-th (n = 1 to 3) storage area, when the game ball passes through the gate section 2003, the random number extracted to the n + 1-th (n = 1 to 3) storage area is When the variable display start condition stored based on the random number stored and stored in the first storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area Are moved to the (N-1) -th (N = 2 to 4) -th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the normal symbol occurs is stored so as to be identifiable, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension occurring first). .

  Next, if the current gaming state is the short time state (low probability time short state, high probability time short state) (step S826), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines the spread table per time judgment table (not shown) ) Is selected (step S826), and if the current gaming state is the non-short time state (low probability non-short state) (step S825), the non-short time per common drawing determination table (not shown) is selected (step S8) S827), the selected common drawing determination table and the ordinary random number read out in step S822 of the ordinary symbol normal processing are compared (step S828).

  It should be noted that the determination table for the common drawing is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU 1310a, and the determination table for the common drawing during the time reduction to be used when the gaming state is short (time low state, high probability short state) The game has a non-time-shorting common drawing determination table used when the gaming state is non-time-short (a low probability non-time-short state). Then, in the common time-per-diagram determination table referred to for comparison with the normal random number, the 251 common random numbers correspond to the common-per-diagram determination value indicating that all the common random numbers were selected per common diagram, The above-mentioned ordinary random numbers are associated with each other so as not to be matched with the deviation judgment value which is a deviation. As described above, when the game ball passes to the gate unit 2003 in the time saving mode, the player always wins the flat figure, and the second start opening door 2411 rotates to the second start opening 2004. It is possible to control the reception of the game ball.

  In addition, in the non-short time common drawing determination table referred to for comparison with the normal random numbers, it is possible that all 251 kinds of the normal random numbers coincide with the common drawing determination value indicating that the common drawing is won. Instead, the above-mentioned ordinary random numbers are respectively associated with each other so as to coincide with the deviation judgment value. As described above, in the short time, even if the game ball passes to the gate unit 2003, the second start opening door 2411 is rotated because the win is not won per common drawing. There is no possibility to control the reception of the game ball to the starting opening 2004.

  When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines that the selected common drawing is the common drawing as a result of comparison between the selected common drawing determination table and the ordinary random number read in step S822 of the normal symbol normal processing (step S829). ), After setting the flag per common drawing showing that the fluctuation is won per common drawing (step S 830), per common drawing as a mode (stop symbol of normal design) at the time of change control stop of the normal symbol The symbol is determined (step S831). On the other hand, as a result of comparison between the selected common drawing determination table and the ordinary random number read out in step S822 of the ordinary symbol normal processing, the fluctuation of the ordinary symbol when it is determined to be out of place. A common figure as a mode (stop symbol of a normal symbol) at the time of control stop determines a misaligned symbol (step S832). After that, when the above-mentioned normal symbol process flag is updated so that the process is shifted to the above-mentioned normal symbol variation time determination processing (step S804), this processing is ended.

  In this example, in the control of the time saving state, the winning probability of the normal symbol is set to 251/251, and the lottery result of the normal symbol always becomes a hit, and the time required for the variable display control of the normal symbol is extreme. Is shortened to a predetermined short time (for example, 0.3 seconds). And when the lottery result of the above-mentioned normal design becomes a hit, it controls with the opening and closing pattern which closes the above-mentioned 2nd starting opening 2004 as an open state for a very long predetermined time (for example, 5.5 seconds) . That is, during the control of the time saving state, the probability of the lottery result of the normal symbol being hit is extremely high, and the time required for the variable display control of the normal symbol is constant and short. The game ball is much easier to win in the second start hole 2004 because of the long time of the game, etc., and it is more efficient to aim the second start hole 2004 than the first start hole 2002 more efficiently. You can win a prize. In the control of the non-short time state, the winning probability of the above normal symbol is set to 0/251, and the lottery result of the above normal symbol does not always hit, and it is assumed that the second starting port 2004 is targeted. Also, the game ball can not be won in the second start port 2004.

  As described above, during the control of the non-short time state, the game ball can not be won in the second start opening 2004 even if the second start opening 2004 is aimed, so the first start opening 2002 In order to win the game ball, it is necessary to aim at the left side of the center character 2500 and fire the game ball (so-called "left-hand"). Further, in the game area 5a on the left side of the center character 2500, a plurality of obstacle nails are implanted in the front of the game panel 1100 with a predetermined gauge arrangement at an appropriate position, and the game ball is placed on the obstacle nails. By touching, various movements are given to the game ball and it flows down. Therefore, even if the game ball is hit on the left side of the center role 2500 aiming at the first start opening 2002, the first start opening 2002 does not necessarily win, but the first start opening 2002 wins. The game balls that were not present are discharged to the outside from an out port 1126 provided at the lower end in the left-right direction center of the game area 5a.

  On the other hand, during control of the time saving state, it is more efficient to aim the game ball at the second start port 2004 than at the first start port 2002, so the game ball can be played at the second start port 2004. In order for the player to win a prize, he must aim at the right side of the center character 2500 and fire the game ball (so-called "right-handed"). In addition, when the second start port 2004 is opened due to the structure of the game board 5, when the game ball is hit to the right of the center role 2500 aiming at the second start port 2004, the gate section 2003 is passed. The game ball, which has been played, will win the second starting opening 2004 with a very high probability. For this reason, during control of the time saving state, the game ball struck on the right side of the center character 2500 is hardly wasted (discharged to the outside from the out port 1126 or the sub out port 2007), and the non time saving As compared with the first start opening 2002 during control of the state, the gaming ball comes to win the second start opening 2004 extremely efficiently.

  Further, during the control of the time saving state, in addition to the structure of the game board 5, when passing through the gate part 2003, the probability that the lottery result of the normal symbol will hit is extremely high, and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol It is easy for the game ball to win the second start port 2004 because the time required for the control is constant and short, and the open state time of the second start port 2004 is long, etc. When the ball wins, the time required for the variable display control of the special symbol is about 1 second, which is extremely short compared to the range of 10 to 120 seconds during the control of the non-short time state, so the special It is possible to digest the fluctuation display control of the symbol (the suspension of the fluctuation display control of the above special symbol). In other words, if the time reduction state is controlled after the end of the big hit gaming state, hitting the game ball on the right side of the center role 2500 aiming at the second start port 2004 results in a big hit again in a short time It can be controlled to the jackpot gaming state, it can be expected to obtain many gaming balls. As described above, in the present embodiment, since the number of gaming balls paid out by the winning of the gaming balls to the second starting opening 2004 is one, the number of gaming balls to the second starting opening 2004 is Even if a prize occurs frequently, it is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall side while enhancing the interest of the player.

[10. Control processing of peripheral control board]
Next, processing executed by the peripheral control MPU 1511 a mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 will be described. FIG. 206 is a flowchart showing a process procedure of control performed by the peripheral control MPU 1511 a mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

  As shown in FIG. 206, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a performs an initial setting process (step S501). In this initial setting process, a process of clearing the RAM of the peripheral control MPU 1511 a mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 is performed. Note that interrupts are disabled during this initialization process, and interrupts are enabled after the initialization process. When the initial setting process (step S501) is completed, a loop process of monitoring whether the 16 ms elapsed flag T has been set or not is started (step S502).

  In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 1511a generates an interrupt every 2 ms and executes 2 ms steady processing. In the 2 ms steady process, a process to count up the 16 ms elapsed monitoring counter (1 ms added to the 16 ms elapsed monitoring counter) is executed, and when the value of the 16 ms elapsed monitoring counter becomes 8, that is, 16 ms elapsed. While the flag T is set, processing for resetting (setting to 0) the 16 ms lapse monitoring counter is executed. Thus, the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set (set) to "1" every 16 ms in 2 ms steady processing, and is normally set (reset) to "0". When the 16 ms elapsed flag is set in step S502 (16 ms elapsed flag T is "1"), the 16 ms elapsed flag is reset (step S503), and the 16 ms steady process is performed (step S504).

  In the 16 ms steady process, a process of controlling the effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker and the like is executed based on the command received from the main control board 1310. When the 16 ms steady process is completed, the process returns to step S502 again, and the above-described steps S503 to S504 are repeated every time the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set, that is, every 16 ms. On the other hand, when the 16 ms elapsed flag T is not set in step S502 (16 ms elapsed flag T is "0"), loop processing is performed until the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set.

  FIG. 207 is a flow chart showing an example of the 16 ms steady process executed every 16 ms in the sub main process. In the 16 ms steady process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes the processes of step S601 to step S606. In the command analysis process of step S601, the command received from the main control board 1310 is analyzed. In the effect control process of step S602, the variation pattern setting process (step S147 of the first variation pattern setting process, the process corresponding to the first variation pattern setting process of the second special symbol process process (second variation pattern setting process)) Based on the reception of the variation pattern command transmitted by being set, the control processing related to the effect display device 1600 is executed.

  In addition, in the sound control processing of step S603, control processing related to a speaker or the like is executed. In the lamp control process of step S604, control processes related to the lamp and LED provided in the pachinko machine 1 are performed. In the information output process of step S605, a process of transmitting a lamp / LED lighting signal to the lamp driving board 4017 is executed. In the random number update process of step S606, a process of updating random numbers (for example, pre-read random numbers) used for various settings in the effect control process (step S602) is executed.

  The process of steps S601 to S606 in the 16 ms steady process ends within 16 ms. Even if it takes 16 ms or more from the start of the 16 ms steady process to the end of the 16 ms steady process, the 16 ms steady process starts immediately after the 16 ms elapses from the start of the 16 ms steady process (the command in step S601 Do not execute (from analysis processing). That is, when 16 ms has elapsed during execution of the 16 ms steady process, only the 16 ms elapsed flag is set, and after it is determined that the 16 ms elapsed flag is set in step S502 after the 16 ms steady process is completed, the 16 ms steady process is performed. To start.

  Further, in this embodiment, the random number updating process (step S606) is performed in the 16 ms steady process to update various random numbers, but the timing (timing) for updating the various random numbers is limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, various random numbers may be updated in one or both of loop processing in the sub main processing and 16 ms stationary processing.

[11. About the jackpot gaming state of this embodiment]
In the present embodiment, the second large winning opening 2006 having the first receiving opening 2431 and the second receiving opening 2432 therein is opened, and the second receiving opening 2432 is opened in a predetermined round of opening the second large winning opening 2005. (A state where game balls are distributed to the second receiving port 2432 side by the distribution piece 2433) Whether the game balls are distributed (accepted) to the second receiving port 2432 when the second large winning opening 2006 is opened It is carried out. In addition, in a predetermined round in which the second receiving port 2432 is in the open state, the special state (a state in which the game ball is received in the second receiving port 2432 and the state is controlled to the high probability state after the end of the big hit gaming state) Or in a non-special state (a state where it will not be controlled to the high probability state after the end of the big hit gaming state even if the game ball is received in the second receiving port 2432), but the special state or non The player is not notified as to which period of the special state is set. For this reason, it is not possible to determine whether control is made to the high probability state or not to the high probability state after the end of the big hit gaming state only by the gaming balls being distributed (accepted) to the second receiving port 2432 . A game example as to whether or not the game ball is distributed (accepted) to the second receiving port 2432 when the second large winning opening 2006 is opened will be described with reference to FIGS. 208 to 211.

  FIG. 208 (A) is a view showing a closed state of the second receiving port 2432 (a state where gaming balls are distributed to the first receiving port 2431 side by the distribution piece 2433), and FIG. 208 (B) is the above It is a figure which shows the open state (The state to which a game ball is distributed to the 2nd receiving port 2432 side by the distribution piece 2433) of the 2nd receiving port 2432. FIG.

  As described above, the attacker unit 2400 detects the second large winning opening 2006, the second large winning opening door 2413 for opening and closing the second large winning opening 2006, and the gaming ball received by the second large winning opening 2006. And a second large winning opening sensor 2402. The second large winning opening door 2413 is formed to move forward and backward by driving the second attachment solenoid 2109, and closes the second large winning opening 2006 when the second attachment solenoid 2109 is OFF (during non-energization). When the second attack solenoid 2109 is ON (during energization), the second large winning opening 2006 is opened.

  In addition, the attacker unit 2400 has an inner passage 2430 through which gaming balls received in the second big winning opening 2006 can flow, and a first inlet 2431 and a second inlet 2432 opened at the bottom of the inner passage 2430. The first receiving sensor 2434 detects the game ball received by the first receiving port 2431 and the distributing piece 2433 which distributes the gaming ball to either the first receiving port 2431 or the second receiving port 2432 in the inner passage 2430. And a second receiving sensor 2435 for detecting a game ball received by the second receiving port 2432. The distribution piece 2433 is formed to rotate by the drive of the distribution solenoid 2110. As shown in FIG. 208 (A), when the distribution solenoid 2110 is OFF (during non-operation), the distribution piece 2433 rises vertically to establish communication between the second big winning hole 2006 and the first receiving port 2431. In this state, the gaming balls accepted by the second large winning opening 2006 are distributed to the first receiving port 2431 side. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 208 (B), when the distribution solenoid 2110 is ON (during operation), the upper side of the distribution piece 2433 moves leftward in front view and abuts on the left side wall of the internal passage 2430 The second big winning opening 2006 and the second receiving port 2432 are communicated with each other (or approached), and the gaming ball received by the second big winning port 2006 is distributed to the second receiving port 2432 side.

  The execution table of 15R big hit gaming state A shown in FIG. 209 (A), the execution table of 15 R big hit gaming state B shown in FIG. 209 (B), and the execution of 15 R big hit gaming state C shown in FIG. 209 (C) The table is stored in the ROM 4100 d of the main control MPU 1310 a, and the operation schedule of the first large winning opening 2005 and the second large winning opening 2006 in the first to fifteenth rounds, the operation schedule of the distribution piece 2433, and the second The status setting schedule of the reception port 2432 is associated with each other. FIG. 210 (A) is a timing chart for the 12th to 15th rounds executed according to the execution table in the 15R big hit gaming state A, and FIG. 210 (B) is executed according to the execution table in the 15R big hit gaming state B FIG. 211 (C) is a timing chart of the twelfth to fifteenth rounds executed according to the execution table at the time of the 15R big hit gaming state C.

  First, as shown in FIGS. 209A to 209C, in the 15R big hit gaming state A to C, the operation of the first large winning opening 2005 and the second large winning opening 2006 in each round of the first to twelfth rounds As a schedule, it is set to open the first big winning opening 2005 for a long time (30 seconds). As described above, in the 1st to 12th rounds of the 15R big hit gaming states A to C, a game is simply performed to determine whether the game ball can be accepted when the first big winning opening 2005 is opened. And the opening time of the 1st big winning a prize mouth 2005 in each round of the 1st-12th round is longer than the opening time of the 2nd big winning a prize mouth 2006 in each of the 13th-15th round mentioned later, and, The award amount that can be obtained by opening the first big winning opening 2005 in the first to twelfth rounds is an award that can be obtained by opening the second big winning opening 2006 in the thirteenth to fifteenth rounds described later Since it is larger than the ball size, the player can play the game in the first to twelfth rounds with ease and at ease. On the other hand, in the 13th to 15th rounds of 15R big hit gaming states A to C, the game ball is distributed (accepted) to the second receiving port 2432 when the second large winning opening 2006 is opened. There is.

  As shown in FIG. 209A, in the 15R big hit gaming state A, the second big winning opening 2006 is opened for a short time as the operation schedule of the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 in the 13th round The second large winning opening 2006 is set to be opened for a long time (20 seconds) after a predetermined time (4.5 seconds) has elapsed as the in-round interval time. In addition, as the operation schedule of the distribution piece 2433 in the 13th round, when the second large winning opening 2006 is opened for a short time (0.5 seconds), the distribution piece 2433 is operated for a short time (0.2 seconds), The distribution piece 2433 is set to operate for a long time (10 seconds) when the second large winning opening 2006 is opened for a long time (20 seconds). In addition, as a state setting schedule of the second receiving port 2432 in the 13th round, special state (the state that will be controlled to the high probability state after the end of the big hit gaming state by the game ball is received in the second receiving port 2432) It is set to.

  In addition, in the 15R jackpot gaming state A, as the operation schedule of the first large winning opening 2005 and the second large winning opening 2006 in the 14th round, to open the second large winning opening 2006 for a short time (0.5 seconds) It is set. Further, as the operation schedule of the distribution piece 2433 in the 14th round, it is set so as not to operate the distribution piece 2433. In addition, as the state setting schedule of the second receiving port 2432 in the 14th round, invalid state (in principle, the game ball is not accepted in the second receiving port 2432 and it is not controlled to the high probability state after the end of the big hit gaming state State) is set.

  In addition, in the 15R big hit gaming state A, it is set to open the second large winning opening 2006 for a long time (20 seconds) as an operation schedule of the first large winning opening 2005 and the second large winning opening 2006 in the 15th round. ing. Further, as the operation schedule of the distribution piece 2433 in the 15th round, it is set so as not to operate the distribution piece 2433. In addition, as the state setting schedule of the second receiving port 2432 in the 15th round, invalid state (in principle no game ball is accepted in the second receiving port 2432, and it is not controlled to the high probability state after the end of the big hit gaming state State) is set.

  As shown in FIG. 209B, in the 15R big hit gaming state B, the second big winning opening 2006 is opened for a short time as the operation schedule of the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 in the 13th round ( 0.5 seconds) is set. In addition, as the operation schedule of the distribution piece 2433 in the 13th round, when the second large winning opening 2006 is opened for a short time (0.5 seconds), the distribution piece 2433 is operated for a short time (0.2 seconds) It is set to. In addition, as a state setting schedule of the second receiving port 2432 in the 13th round, special state (the state that will be controlled to the high probability state after the end of the big hit gaming state by the game ball is received in the second receiving port 2432) It is set to.

  In addition, in the 15R jackpot gaming state B, as the operation schedule of the first large winning opening 2005 and the second large winning opening 2006 in the 14th round, it is set to open the second large winning opening 2006 for a long time (20 seconds) ing. Also, as the operation schedule of the distribution piece 2433 in the 14th round, when the second large winning opening 2006 is opened for a long time (20 seconds), the distribution piece 2433 is operated for a short time (0.2 seconds), and the predetermined time It is set to operate for a long time (10 seconds) after (4.8 seconds) has elapsed. Also, as the state setting schedule of the second receiving port 2432 in the 14th round, it will not be controlled to the high probability state after the end of the big hit gaming state even if the game ball is accepted in the second receiving port 2432 State) is set.

  In addition, in the 15R jackpot gaming state B, the second large winning opening 2006 is opened for a short time (0.5 seconds) as the operation schedule of the first large winning opening 2005 and the second large winning opening 2006 in the 15th round. The second large winning opening 2006 is set to be opened for a long time (20 seconds) after a predetermined time (4.5 seconds) has elapsed as an inner interval time. Further, as the operation schedule of the distribution piece 2433 in the 15th round, it is set so as not to operate the distribution piece 2433. In addition, as the state setting schedule of the second receiving port 2432 in the 15th round, invalid state (in principle no game ball is accepted in the second receiving port 2432, and it is not controlled to the high probability state after the end of the big hit gaming state State) is set.

  As shown in FIG. 209C, in the 15R big hit gaming state C, the second big winning opening 2006 is opened for a short time as the operation schedule of the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 in the 13th round 0.5 seconds) is set. In addition, as the operation schedule of the distribution piece 2433 in the 13th round, when the second large winning opening 2006 is opened for a short time (0.5 seconds), the distribution piece 2433 is operated for a short time (0.2 seconds) It is set to. In addition, as a state setting schedule of the second receiving port 2432 in the 13th round, special state (the state that will be controlled to the high probability state after the end of the big hit gaming state by the game ball is received in the second receiving port 2432) It is set to.

  In addition, in the 15R jackpot gaming state C, as the operation schedule of the first large winning opening 2005 and the second large winning opening 2006 in the 14th round and the 15th round, respectively, open the second large winning opening 2006 for a short time (0. 5 seconds) is set. Also, as the operation schedule of the distribution piece 2433 in the 14th round and the 15th round, it is set such that the distribution piece 2433 is not operated. In addition, as the state setting schedule of the second entrance 2432 in the 14th round and the 15th round, each invalid state (in principle no game ball is accepted in the second entrance 2432, it is high after the end of the big hit gaming state It is set to the state which will not control to a probability state.

  As shown in FIGS. 210 (A) and 210 (B), in the 15R big hit gaming state A and 15 R big hit gaming state B, the opening time and number of times of the second big winning opening 2006 as a whole of the 13th to 15th rounds The release timings are all the same. In addition, in 15R big hit gaming state A and 15R big hit gaming state B, although opening time and opening frequency of the 2nd big winning a prize mouth 2006 in each round of the 13th-15th round are made different, concerning the number of rounds under execution Has not notified the player. As described above, in the 15R big hit gaming state A and the 15R big hit gaming state B, the opening pattern of the second big winning opening 2006 is made the same as the whole of the 13th to 15th rounds, so the operation pattern of the split piece 2433 ( Although the operation time and operation timing of the distribution piece 2433 are partially different, it is difficult for the player to determine whether it is 15R big hit gaming state A or 15R big hit gaming state B.

  In the present embodiment, any of the 15R big hit gaming states A to C is controlled to the high probability state after the big hit gaming state is ended by receiving the gaming ball in the second receiving port 2432 in the special state in the 13th round In the 15R jackpot gaming state A, it is open in the second opening of the second large winning opening 2006 in the 13th round, but it is set to the state), so it is open for a long time (20 seconds). It is extremely easy for the ball to be accepted, and furthermore, the second big winning opening is to operate the split piece 2433 for a long time (10 seconds) while opening the second big winning opening 2006 for a long time (20 seconds). It is extremely easy for the game ball accepted in 2006 to be distributed (accepted) to the second receiving port 2432. As described above, in the 15R big hit gaming state A, since the probability that the game ball is accepted in the second receiving port 2432 in the 13th round set to the special state is extremely high, the state is controlled to the high probability state after the big hit gaming state ends. The probability is also very high. On the other hand, in the 15R big hit gaming state B and 15 R big hit gaming state C, the game ball is accepted in the second big winning hole 2006 because the second big winning hole 2006 is opened for a short time (0.5 second) in the 13th round It is extremely difficult for the second large winning opening 2006 to be opened for a short time (0.5 seconds), and the distributing piece 2433 is operated for a short time (0.2 seconds). It is extremely difficult for the game balls received in the winning opening 2006 to be distributed (accepted) to the second receiving port 2432. As described above, in the 15R big hit gaming state B and 15 R big hit gaming state C, since the probability that the game ball is accepted in the second receiving port 2432 in the 13th round set to the special state is extremely low, after the big hit gaming state ends The probability of controlling to a high probability state is also extremely low.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, all of the 15R big hit gaming states A to C are opened for a short time (0.5 seconds) when the second large winning opening 2006 is opened for the first time, so 1 of the second large winning opening 2006 It is extremely difficult for the game ball to be accepted in the second large winning opening 2006 at the time of opening the second time, and the distributing piece 2433 is further opened during a short period (0.5 second) of opening the second large winning opening 2006. Since only a short time operation (0.2 seconds) is required, it is extremely difficult for the gaming balls received in the second big winning opening 2006 to be distributed (accepted) to the second receiving port 2432. On the other hand, in 15R big hit gaming state A and 15 R big hit gaming state B among 15 R big hit gaming states A to C, both open for a long time (20 seconds) at the second opening of the second big winning opening 2006, During the second opening of the second large winning opening 2006, it is extremely easy for the game ball to be accepted in the second large winning opening 2006, and further during a long period (20 seconds) of opening the second large winning opening 2006. In order to operate the distributing piece 2433 for a long time (10 seconds), it is extremely easy for the game ball received by the second large winning opening 2006 to be distributed (accepted) to the second receiving port 2432. However, in the 15R big hit gaming state A, the second opening time of the second big winning opening 2006 corresponds to the 13th round, the special state (the end of the big hit gaming state by the game ball being accepted in the second receiving port 2432 In the 15R big hit gaming state B, the second opening time of the second big winning opening 2006 corresponds to the 14th round, but it is set to the state to be controlled to the high probability state later, and it is not special state ( Even if the game ball is received in the second receiving port 2432, it is set to a state where it will not be controlled to the high probability state after the end of the big hit game state. In addition, in at least 15R big hit gaming state A and 15R big hit gaming state B, what round is the second opening time of the second big winning opening 2006 is, in addition, it is set to special state or non special state The player is not notified as to whether it is set to. Therefore, even when the game ball received in the second large winning hole 2006 is distributed (accepted) to the second receiving port 2432 at the second opening of the second large winning hole 2006, the state of the big hit gaming state It is difficult for the player to determine whether to control to the high probability state or not to control the high probability state after the end.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 211 (C), in the 15R big hit gaming state C of the 15 R big hit gaming states A to C, in addition to the opening time of the second big winning opening 2006 corresponding to the 13th round, 14 The second and third opening of the second winning opening 2006 because there is only a short opening time (0.5 seconds) at the time of opening the second and third opening of the second winning opening 2006 corresponding to the round and the 15th round. It is extremely difficult for the game ball to be accepted in the second large winning opening 2006 at the time of opening of the second, and further operates the distributing piece 2433 during a period in which the second large winning opening 2006 is opened for a short time (0.5 seconds) The game ball received in the second big winning opening 2006 is not distributed (accepted) to the second receiving port 2432. In addition, in the 15R big hit gaming state C, at the time of opening of the second big winning opening 2006, it does not notify that effect, it is difficult to notice the player whether or not the second big winning opening 2006 is open There is. As described above, in the 15R big hit gaming state C, unlike the 15 R big hit gaming state A and the 15 R big hit gaming state B, it is extremely difficult for the game ball to be accepted in the second big winning opening 2006 in the first place. Since the game ball is hardly received in the second receiving port 2432 when the distribution piece 2433 is activated, the game ball is not received in the second receiving port 2432 so that the state is not controlled to the high probability state after the big hit gaming state is over It is possible for the player to determine that.

  In the present embodiment, when the opening of the second big winning opening 2006 is started in the 13th round in the 15R big hit gaming state A to C and in the 14th round in the 15R big hit gaming state B, the operation of the distribution piece 2433 However, the operation of the split piece 2433 is finished before closing the second big winning opening 2006. In addition, in the 13th round in 15R big hit gaming state A-C, and in the 14th round in 15R big hit gaming state B, when opening the second big winning opening 2006 starts special state (the second game slot 2432 game ball State will be controlled to the high probability state after the end of the big hit gaming state by being accepted) or non-special state (even if the game ball is accepted in the second receiving port 2432 high probability state after the end of the big hit gaming state Set to one of the states not to be controlled, and continue either the set special state or non-special state until the next round is started after closing the second large winning opening 2006. ing. Therefore, after the game ball distributed (accepted) to the second receiving port 2432 by the operation of the distributing piece 2433 closes the second large winning opening 2006 (the operation of the distributing piece 2433 is finished) Even when the second inlet sensor 2433 is reached afterward, it is possible to determine whether the gaming ball has been received in the second inlet 2432 during the special state or the non-special state period. In addition, in the 13th round in 15R big hit gaming state A-C, and 14 round in 15R big hit gaming state B, it is set to either special state or non special state, but for other period, for example, 15R big hit In the 14th to 15th rounds in the gaming states A to C (except the 14th round in the 15R big hit gaming state B), since the distributing piece 2433 does not operate, the gaming ball is accepted in principle in the second receiving port 2432 (sorting It is set to an invalid state different from the special state and the non-special state.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in each round (13th to 15th rounds) in the 15R big hit gaming state A to C, the open state even before the open time of the second big winning opening 2006 has passed. When the game ball wins the maximum winning number (for example, nine) in the second large winning opening 2006, the second large winning opening 2006 in the open state is controlled to be in the closed state. When the second large winning opening 2006 is closed before the opening time of the second large winning opening 2006 elapses, the distributing piece 2433 is deactivated if the distribution piece 2433 is in operation. It is like that. However, the special state (the state where it will be controlled to the high probability state after the end of the big hit gaming state by receiving the gaming ball in the second receiving port 2432) or the non special state (the gaming ball is received in the second receiving port 2432 For the setting of the state that will not be controlled to the high probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, even if it has been closed, the second large winning opening 2006 is closed before the opening time of the second large winning opening 2006 elapses Even in the state, until the next round is started, either the set special state or the non-special state is continued.

  Further, in this embodiment, as the operation schedule of the distribution piece 2433, the distribution piece 2433 is operated for a short time (0.2 seconds), and after a predetermined time (4.8 seconds) has elapsed, the distribution piece 2433 is lengthened. It has a single operation schedule set to open time (10 seconds), and every 13th round of 15R big hit gaming state A to C and 14 round of 15 R big hit gaming state B In addition, the operation schedule of such a distribution piece 2433 is started. As described above, by setting the operation schedule of the distribution piece 2433 as a single operation schedule, the amount of data concerning the operation schedule of the distribution piece 2433 is not increased as much as possible.

  In the first embodiment, when the second large winning opening 2006 is opened twice in each round in the 15R large hitting gaming state A and 15R large hitting gaming state B, the first of the second large winning opening 2006 Between the opening time and the second opening time, 4.5 seconds is set as an intra-round interval. On the other hand, when the opening of the second large winning opening 2006 in the round is ended, the round is ended, and between the opening of the second large winning opening 2006 and the start of the next round The interval time between rounds is set to 4.5 seconds. Thus, by setting the intra-round interval time and the inter-round interval time to the same time (4.5 seconds), the generation period of 13 to 15 rounds of 15R big hit gaming state A and 15 R big hit gaming state B It is possible to approximate a series of opening patterns (operation patterns) of the second big winning opening 2006 in the 15R big hit gaming state A and 15 R big hit gaming state B.

  Next, a specific effect example when executing the 15R big hit gaming states A to C in the effect display device 1600 will be described with reference to FIG. 212 and FIG. In the present embodiment, at least a 15R big hit gaming state A and a 15R big hit gaming state B V open round (a round where the game ball can be received in the second receiving port 2432 when the second big winning opening 2006 is opened), By executing a common effect in the effect display device 1600, it is difficult to determine which of the 15R big hit gaming state A and 15 R big hit gaming state B from the production, and further, after the V opening round, the second receiving port 2432 A common effect depending on whether or not the game ball has been accepted is executed.

  In addition, V opening round is the round where it is possible for the game ball to be accepted to the 2nd entrance 2432 when the 2nd big winning a prize opening 2006 is opened, in 15R big hit game state A, special state (the 2nd entrance It corresponds to the 13th round that is set to be controlled to the high probability state after the end of the big hit gaming state by the acceptance of the game ball in 2432), and is set to the special state in the 15R big hit gaming state B It corresponds to the 14th round and the 14th round set to the non special state (the state that will not be controlled to the high probability state after the big hit gaming state even if the game ball is received in the second receiving port 2432) There is. As described above, in any of the 15R big hit gaming state A and 15R big hit gaming state B, the second large winning opening 2006 is opened for a long time (20 seconds) and the sorting piece 2433 is operated for a long time (10 seconds Since the second receiving port 2432 is opened for a long time, it is easy for the game ball to be received in the second receiving port 2432 when the second large winning opening 2006 is opened in the V-opening round.

  First, in the effect display device 1600, based on the judgment result notification command and the fluctuation pattern command received by the peripheral control board 1510, the fluctuation display of the left, middle and right decorative symbols is started, and the left decorative symbol → right decorative symbol → middle Display is controlled to stop display in the order of decorative symbols, but as a mode (stop symbol) at the time of fluctuation stop of decorative symbols, 15R big hit A among the big hit related to the first special symbol from the received judgment result notification command If you specify the 15R big hit A design (the combination of the same decorative pattern) is determined, if 15R big hit B is specified 15 R big hit B design (15R big hit A common pattern and design), 15R big hit C If you specify the 15R big hit C symbol (15R big hit A symbol and the same) is determined, when the variation time specified from the variation pattern command elapses (reach The determined stop symbols at the output at the end) to the effect display device 1600 is configured to display control. As described above, even when any of 15R big hit A to C is determined, the stop symbol common to the stop display of the decorative symbol is controlled and displayed on the effect display device 1600 so that the 15R big hit A from the stop symbol of the decorative symbol It is not possible to determine one of ~ C.

  Next, after the peripheral control board 1510 receives the first round big hit round start command (1 round A start command, 1 round B start command, 1 round C start command), 1 to 15 R of big hit gaming states A to C During the 13th round, a game is performed whether or not the game ball is accepted when the first big winning opening 2005 is opened, but during the 1st to 12th rounds, during the period of the game Perform a big hit during the production to entertain you. Specifically, in the effect display device 1600, the number of rounds executed in each of the first to twelfth rounds is displayed, and in addition, a bonus video which is not displayed except in the big hit gaming state, the first Display the number of gaming balls accepted when opening the big winning opening 2005, the number of gaming balls to be paid out based on the acceptance of gaming balls in the first large winning opening 2005 (total number of winning balls), etc. It is

  Next, after the peripheral control board 1510 receives the big hit start command (12 round A start command, 12 round B start command, 12 round C start command) for the 12th round, the big hit end command for the 12th round (12 round A Until the end command, 12 round B end command, 12 round C start command) is received, ie, in the 12th round of the 15R jackpot gaming states A to C, the V open round (the opening of the second large winning opening 2006) Sometimes, the V opening round acquisition effect (notice effect) is executed to notify the second receiving port 2432 whether or not to execute a round where the game ball can be accepted. In the V open round acquisition effect, in the effect display device 1600, first, as shown in FIG. 212 (A), the player is notified of a message “Can I obtain the V open round?”, And then FIG. 212 (B) As shown in, the display contents of "acquisition" and "failure" are displayed in the roulette mode, and the display contents to be selected among "acquisition" and "failure" are displayed to be sequentially moved. And, when it is 15R big hit gaming state A and 15 R big hit gaming state B among 15R big hit game states A-C, that is, when peripheral control board 1510 receives 12 round A start command or 12 round B start command As shown in FIG. 212C, in the effect display device 1600, the display content of "acquisition" is displayed so as to be finally selected. On the other hand, when it is 15R big hit gaming state C, that is, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives a 12 round C start command, as shown in FIG. 212 (D), in the effect display device 1600, “failed” The display content is displayed to be selected finally. Thereby, when the display content of "acquisition" is selected as a result of V opening round acquisition presentation, it recognizes that V opening round is started from the next round, and the game ball is in the 2nd entrance 2432 It is possible to make the player understand that there is a chance of being controlled to the high probability state after the end of the big hit gaming state by being accepted.

  On the other hand, when the display content of "failure" is selected as a result of V opening round winning production, V opening round (the game ball is accepted in the 2nd entrance 2432 at the time of opening of 2nd large winning a prize opening 2006) It is possible to recognize that the possible rounds have not been won, and to let the player understand that the chance to be controlled to the high probability state is not obtained after the end of the big hit gaming state. In addition, in the 15R big hit game state C, the second large winning a prize mouth 2006 is opened for a short time (0.5 second) in the 13th to 15th round respectively, and the distribution piece 2433 is operated for a short time in the 13th round among them (0.5 seconds), but in the period of the 13th to 15th rounds, as in the case where the gaming ball is not accepted in the second receiving port 2432 in the V opening round described later, “Sorry It is disappointing that the display of "is performed" is performed. In this way, in the period of the 13th to 15th round of the 15R big hit gaming state C, it is not notified that it is the opening time of the second large winning opening 2006, but is the second large winning opening 2006 open? It is difficult to notice the player.

  Next, when the display content of “acquired” is selected as a result of the V open round acquisition effect, the peripheral control board 1510 receives a big hit start command (13 round A start command, 13 round B start command) for the 13th round. After receiving it, that is, after starting the 13th round of 15R big hit gaming state A and 15 R big hit gaming state B, V opening round (the game ball receives in the second entrance 2432 when the second big winning opening 2006 is opened) Target indication indicating that the opening of the second receiving port 2432 should be aimed (the operating time of the distribution piece 2433) so that the game ball can be received in the second receiving port 2432 with the start of the possible round). I am performing the production. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 213E, in the effect display device 1600, the player is notified of the message "V open round start! Target here!" An image showing the location of the second receiving port 2432 to be aimed by the player is displayed together with an image obtained by copying the attacker unit 2400 including the receiving port 2432 and the distribution pieces 2433 and the like. Thereby, in the V opening round, in order to receive the game ball in the second receiving port 2432 while the second big winning opening 2006 is open, it is necessary to clearly know where on the game area 5a to aim. it can.

  In the present embodiment, a cover member is provided on the front side of the attacker unit 2400 including the second large winning opening 2006, the second receiving port 2432, the distribution piece 2433, etc., but the cover member is transparent. Since there is a game ball is accepted in the second large winning opening 2006, whether the distribution piece 2433 is activated (the second receiving port 2432 is open), the second It is easy to visually recognize whether or not the game ball has been received (distributed) in the receiving port 2432. In addition, in the V opening round of 15R big hit gaming state A and 15R big hit gaming state B (round where the game ball can be received in the second receiving port 2432 when the second large winning opening 2006 is opened), the effect display device 1600 In addition to displaying an image showing the location of the second inlet 2432 that the player should aim at, the back of the attacker unit 2400 that includes the second large winning opening 2006, the second inlet 2432, the distribution piece 2433, etc. It is made to irradiate with LED from the side, and it is made to highlight the place which players, such as the 2nd big prize winning opening 2006 and the 2nd receiving port 2432 and the distribution piece 2433, should aim for. On the other hand, except for the attacker unit 2400 including the second big winning opening 2006, the second receiving port 2432, the distribution piece 2433, etc., by controlling the light emission of the LED or the like so that the entire game area 5a becomes dark, The locations such as the second large winning opening 2006, the second receiving port 2432, the distribution pieces 2433, etc. should be relatively highlighted. Thereby, in the V opening round, in order to receive the game ball in the second receiving port 2432 while the second big winning opening 2006 is open, it is easy to grasp where on the game area 5a to aim. Can. In addition, in the V opening round of 15R big hit gaming state A and 15 R big hit gaming state B, the player can visually recognize whether or not the game ball is actually accepted in the second receiving port 2432 due to the configuration of the game board 5 However, even when the game ball is received in the second receiving port 2432, the LED is used from the back side of the attacker unit 2400 including the second large winning opening 2006, the second receiving port 2432, the distribution piece 2433, etc. The irradiation makes it easier for the player to visually recognize whether or not the game ball has been received in such a second receiving port 2432.

  In addition, the following may be performed as another example of the method of making the player easily distinguish the second big winning opening 2006, the second receiving port 2432, and the distributing piece 2433. For example, “set the second large winning opening 2006 to a structure that makes it easy to identify the opening / closing operation (for example, a power-chu type or an open type in which the opening / closing door tilts forward)”, “opening of the second large winning opening 2006 Making the area larger than the opening area of the first large winning opening 2005 can be exemplified.

  Next, after the V opening round of 15R big hit gaming state A and 15 R big hit gaming state B (round where the game ball can be accepted in the second receiving port 2432 when the second big winning opening 2006 is opened), the second As an effect depending on whether or not the game ball is accepted in the second receiving port 2432, either a bless effect or a disappointing effect is being executed. First, in the V open round of 15R big hit gaming state A and 15 R big hit gaming state B, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the second receiving port passing command, that is, within the period of either the special state or the non special state. When the game ball is received in the second receiving port 2432, a bless effect is performed to congratulate the game ball in the second receiving port 2432. Specifically, regardless of whether the special state or the non-special state period, based on setting the second receiving passage passing command when the gaming ball is received in the second receiving port 2432 As shown in FIG. 213F, in the effect display device 1600, the player is notified of the message “Congratulations!”. If the second receiving slot 2432 receives a second or subsequent gaming ball within the special status or non-special status, the second receiving port passing command is not set again, so the second receiving port is not received for the first time. Blessing effect is performed only when the game ball is received at the entrance 2432.

  In the present embodiment, when the gaming ball is received in the second receiving port 2432, in the 15R big hit gaming state A, the timing is a special state (the game ball is received in the second receiving port 2432 in the big hit gaming state) It is a state which will be controlled to the high probability state after the end), and will be controlled to the high probability state after the end of the big hit gaming state. On the other hand, in the 15R big hit gaming state B, since the probability that the game ball is received in the second receiving port 2432 during the special state is extremely low, the timing at which the game ball is received in the second receiving port 2432 is non-special state (second Even if the game ball is received in the second receiving port 2432, the probability that it will not be controlled to the high probability state after the end of the big hit gaming state is very high probability, very low probability state after the end of the big hit gaming state Control. In this way, depending on whether the timing when the gaming ball is received in the second receiving port 2432 is in the special state or the non-special state, the second receiving is performed while the gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state is different. By performing a blessing effect in response to the game ball being accepted at the entrance 2432, when the bless effect is executed, the conventional gaming machine (V winning (the second receiving port 2432 receives the game ball is accepted It can be seen as if a high probability state is obtained by the game ball being received in the second receiving port 2432 like a gaming machine that controls to a high probability state based on the equivalent). As a result, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the next big hit gaming state.

  On the other hand, until the end of the V opening round of 15R big hit gaming state A and 15 R big hit gaming state B (round where the game ball can be accepted in the second receiving port 2432 when the second big winning opening 2006 is opened) When the peripheral control board 1510 does not receive the second receiving port passing command, that is, when the gaming ball is not received in the second receiving port 2432, the gaming ball is not received in the second receiving port 2432 I am executing a disappointing production to inform Specifically, as shown in FIG. 213 (G), when the V opening round of 15R big hit gaming state A and 15 R big hit gaming state B ends without the gaming ball being received in the second receiving port 2432, In the effect display device 1600, the player is notified of a message of "sorry".

  In the present embodiment, the 15R big hit gaming state A and the 15R big hit gaming state B V opening round (a round where the game ball can be received in the second receiving port 2432 when the second large winning opening 2006 is opened), If the game ball is not accepted in the second receiving port 2432, it is controlled to the low probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state. In this way, when controlling to the low probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, disappointing effects are executed by executing disappointing effects in response to the game ball not being accepted in the second receiving port 2432 Occasionally, it may appear as if a high probability state could not be obtained due to the game ball not being received in the second receiving port 2432.

  Next, after the end of the 15R big hit gaming state A and 15R big hit gaming state B, at least a short time until the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) is executed 100 times (high The game is controlled to control the probability time short state, the low probability time short state) and whether or not the big hit game state is obtained again, but during the time to control the short time state, the second receiver during the execution of the big hit game state As an effect corresponding to whether or not the game ball is accepted in 2432, either an effect mode effect effect or an advantage mode effect effect is executed. First, when the gaming ball is received in the second receiving port 2432 in the V opening round of the 15R big hit gaming state A and 15 R big hit gaming state B, as shown in FIG. 213 (H) at the end of the big hit gaming state. A message of "advantage mode start" is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the player is notified that the effect is started during the advantageous mode. Also, as described above, when the gaming ball is received in the second receiving port 2432, the second receiving port passing flag is set on the main control board 1310 side, and after the big hit gaming state is over, the second receiving port By using the variation pattern table when setting the passage flag, and by determining the variation pattern of the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) from the variation pattern table, the gaming ball is in the second receiving port 2432 As an exclusive effect in the case of being accepted, an effect during the advantageous mode is performed.

  In the present embodiment, when the gaming ball is received in the second receiving port 2432, in the 15R big hit gaming state A, the timing is a special state (the game ball is received in the second receiving port 2432 in the big hit gaming state) It is a state which will be controlled to the high probability state after the end), and will be controlled to the high probability state after the end of the big hit gaming state. On the other hand, in the 15R big hit gaming state B, since the probability that the game ball is received in the second receiving port 2432 during the special state is extremely low, the timing at which the game ball is received in the second receiving port 2432 is non-special state (second Even if the game ball is received in the second receiving port 2432, the probability that it will not be controlled to the high probability state after the end of the big hit gaming state is very high probability, very low probability state after the end of the big hit gaming state Control. Thus, depending on whether the timing when the gaming ball is received in the second receiving port 2432 is in the special state or the non-special state period, the jackpot gaming state while varying the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state is over After completion of the game, the effect during the advantageous mode is executed by performing the effect during the advantageous mode in response to the game ball being received in the second receiving port 2432, and when the effect during the advantageous mode is executed, the conventional gaming machine Control to a high probability state by the game ball being received in the second receiving port 2432 like a gaming machine that controls to a high probability state based on the game ball being received in the second receiving port 2432) It can appear as if it were being done. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the next big hit gaming state.

  On the other hand, the second opening 2432 in the V opening round of 15R big hit gaming state A and 15R big hit gaming state B (round where game balls can be received in the second receiving slot 2432 when the second large winning opening 2006 is opened) When the game ball is not accepted at the end of the big hit gaming state, as shown in FIG. The player is notified that it is to be started. Further, as described above, when the game ball is not accepted in the second receiving port 2432, the second control port non-passing flag is set on the main control board 1310 at the end of the big hit gaming state, and the big hit gaming state After completion, use the fluctuation pattern table when setting the second entrance non-passing flag, and determine the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) from the fluctuation pattern table. As an exclusive effect in the case where the game ball is not accepted in the second receiving port 2432, an effect during the adverse mode is performed.

  In the present embodiment, the 15R big hit gaming state A and the 15R big hit gaming state B V opening round (a round where the game ball can be received in the second receiving port 2432 when the second large winning opening 2006 is opened), If the game ball is not accepted in the second receiving port 2432, it is controlled to the low probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state. As described above, when controlling to the low probability state after the end of the big hit gaming state, after the end of the big hit gaming state, the disadvantageous mode effect is executed in response to the game ball not being accepted in the second receiving port 2432 In this way, when the disadvantage mode effect is executed, it can appear as if it is not controlled to the high probability state by the fact that the game ball is not accepted in the second receiving port 2432.

  In the present embodiment, the time saving state is performed from when the 15R big hit gaming state A and 15R big hit gaming state B ends until the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) is executed 100 times. As an effect according to whether or not the game ball is accepted in the second entrance 2432 during execution of the big hit gaming state, while controlling to (high probability time short state, low probability time short state), during the advantageous mode production or disadvantage mode You are performing one of the middle effects. During the execution of such advantageous mode during production, it appears as if the second receiving port 2432 is controlled to a high probability state by receiving gaming balls, so when it is a big hit again, it is high It is difficult to determine whether it is a big hit during control of the probability time reduction state or a big hit during control of the low probability time reduction state, but since it is controlled to the high probability state, the player is notified that the big hit is obtained again It can make you think. In addition, 15R big hit game state A and 15R big hit again after the end of game state B, if the fluctuation display of special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) is executed 100 times, it is low While returning to the probability non-short time state (normal state), the advantageous mode in progress mode or the adverse mode in progress being executed is ended, but after the execution of the advantageous mode in progress mode, whether it was a high probability time short state or low probability It is possible to make the player think that the control of the high probability state has ended while making it difficult to determine whether it is a short time state or not.

  Further, in the present embodiment, since the probability that the gaming ball is received in the second receiving port 2432 during the special state is extremely high in the 15R big hit A, the big hit is controlled to the high probability state after the end of the big hit gaming state On the other hand, 15R big hit B and 15R big hit C are in a low probability state after the end of the big hit gaming state because the probability that the game ball is accepted in the second receiving port 2432 during the special state is extremely low. It is a big hit to control. And when deciding the type of the big hit using the symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol, 15R big hit B and 15R big hit B and 15R big hit C in total while it is decided at the ratio of 50%. Since it determines by the ratio of%, it controls to the low probability state by the ratio of 50% to controlling to the high probability state by the ratio of 50% after the end of the big hit gaming state substantially at the time of the first big hit It is. On the other hand, in the 15R big hit A and 15R big hit B, the game ball in the second receiving port 2432 in the V opening round (round where the game ball can be received in the second receiving port 2432 when the second large winning opening 2006 is opened) As the probability of being accepted is extremely high, the blessing effect is executed in the V open round, and the probability of rushing into the effect mode during the advantageous mode after the end of the big hit gaming state is extremely high, and in most cases, in the second entrance 2432 By accepting the game ball, it can appear as if it is controlled to a high probability state. That is, since the 15R big hit A and the 15R big hit B are determined at a rate of 90% in total, it is a specification that controls the high probability state at 50% rate after the end of the big hit gaming state. However, after the end of the jackpot gaming state can be seen as if being controlled to a high probability state at a rate of 90%.

  In the present embodiment, in the 12th round of the 15R big hit gaming state A to C, the V opening round (a round where the game ball can be received in the second receiving port 2432 when the second large winning opening 2006 is opened) The V opening round acquisition presentation (notice effect) is performed to notify whether or not to execute, but V opening across multiple rounds before the start timing of the V opening round (13th round) You may perform round acquisition presentation. For example, in the 11th round, the display contents of "acquire" and "failure" are displayed in the roulette mode by starting the V open round acquisition effect, and as the result of the V open round acquisition effect in the next 12 rounds Display may be made to select one of the display contents of "acquisition" and "failure". According to this, even if the game ball wins the maximum winning number (for example, nine) in the first large winning opening 2005 and the first large winning opening 2005 is closed early, V opening round It becomes possible to show the player the result of the winning presentation surely and loosely.

  Also, in the present embodiment, the V opening round (round where the game ball can be received in the second receiving port 2432 when the second large winning opening 2006 is opened) in the 12th round of the 15R big hit gaming state A to C. The V opening round acquisition effect (notice effect effect) to notify whether or not to execute is executed, but it may be performed before the timing (the 13th round) when the V opening round can start, for example, It may be executed in any of the first to twelfth rounds of opening the special winning opening 2005. In addition, it is possible to execute a plurality of V open round acquisition effects during the period until the start timing of the V open round (the 13th round), that is, between 1st to 12th rounds, "acquired" or "failed" The effect of selecting any of the effect contents from "" may be shown for a plurality of times. For example, in the case where it is possible to execute the V release round acquisition effect in each of the 1st to 12th rounds, in the case where the 15R big hit gaming state C which does not start the V release round is determined, in all the rounds, It is assumed that the display content of "failure" is selected as a result of the V open round acquisition effect. On the other hand, when 15R big hit gaming state A and 15 R big hit gaming state B which will start V opening round is decided, as a result of V opening round winning presentation among 1st 12 rounds, it is acquired Determine in advance the round (acquisition notification round) in which the display content is selected, and in the rounds leading to the acquisition notification round, the display content of “failure” is selected as a result of the V release round acquisition presentation Do. As described above, by enabling execution of the V open round acquisition effect for a plurality of times, the game is performed with expectation for the start of the V open round until reaching the timing (the 13th round) at which the V open round can be started. be able to. Also, as described above, when the 15R big hit gaming state A and the 15R big hit gaming state B are determined, the display content of "acquired" is selected as a result of the V open round winning presentation among the 1st to 12th rounds. When determining the round to be won (acquisition notification round), there is no difference in the acquisition notification round determined between the 15R jackpot gaming state A and the 15R jackpot gaming state B. That is, regardless of which of 15R big hit gaming state A and 15 R big hit gaming state B is determined, a common table is used as a table for determination of an acquisition notification round, and a predetermined round becomes an acquisition notification round The probability does not change between the 15R jackpot gaming state A and the 15R jackpot gaming state B. As a result, even before the start timing of the V release round (13th round), even if it is notified whether the V release round is to be executed by execution of the V release round acquisition effect (preliminary effect), the 15R big hit The game state A and the 15R big hit game state B are not indicated. In addition, in the case where a general advance notice effect other than the V open round acquisition effect (for example, an effect that suggests the open of the V open round) is executed before the start timing of the V open round (the 13th round) Also, by using a common table as a table for determining the advance effect, it is not suggested which of 15R big hit gaming state A and 15 R big hit gaming state B. Although the V open round acquisition effect described above is executable in all rounds among the 1st to 12th rounds, it may be executable in some predetermined rounds among the 1st to 12th rounds, and It may be possible to execute at the closing time (inter-round interval time or in-round interval time) of the first large winning opening 2005.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the V opening round of 15R big hit gaming state A and 15 R big hit gaming state B (round that the game ball can be accepted in the second receiving port 2432 when the second big winning opening 2006 is opened) Whether or not the game ball is accepted (distributed) to the second entrance 2432 by setting either the special state or the non-special state to the high probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state It is difficult for the player to determine whether or not to control to the high probability state. Thereby, even if the game ball is received in the second receiving port 2432, the player does not give a sense of security to the player, and the player feels the expectation or tension of controlling in a high probability state or not controlling in a high probability state. It is possible to continue the big hit game while giving to.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, the generation period of 13 to 15 rounds of 15R big hit gaming state A and 15 R big hit gaming state B (period in which the second large winning opening 2006 having the second receiving port 2432 is opened a plurality of times) Among them, "the ratio set in the special state (the ratio to stay in the special state)" is different for each big hit gaming state (15 R big hit gaming state A, 15 R big hit gaming state B). That is, in the 15R big hit gaming state A in which the proportion set in the special state (the proportion to stay in the special state) is relatively large, the proportion set to the special state (the proportion to stay in the special state) is relatively Compared to the smaller 15R big hit gaming state B, the possibility of the game ball being received in the second receiving port 2432 during the special state is increased, and a high probability state occurs when the game ball is received in the second receiving port 2432 You are more likely to As a result, the jackpot gaming state (15R jackpot gaming state A) that is highly likely to be given a high probability state when the gaming ball is received in the second receiving port 2432 and the gaming ball is received in the second receiving port 2432 A big hit game state (15R big hit game state B) which is unlikely to be given a high probability state when being played gives a clear picture to the game, and V prize winning (the first time in a specific round) The game can be prevented from becoming monotonous as compared with a gaming machine in which the big winning opening is open for a long time, which is equivalent to the game ball being received in the second receiving port 2432).

  Further, according to the present embodiment, as described above, the jackpot gaming state (15R big hit gaming state A) is highly likely to be given a high probability state when the game ball is received in the second receiving port 2432 By setting the jackpot gaming state (15R jackpot gaming state B) which is less likely to be given a high probability state when the gaming ball is received in the second receiving port 2432, “this jackpot gaming state is special It is possible to realize a game in which the player is expected to pay attention to the fact that the player is in the jackpot gaming state in which the state generation ratio is large.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, the generation period of 13 to 15 rounds of 15R big hit gaming state A and 15 R big hit gaming state B (period in which the second large winning opening 2006 having the second receiving port 2432 is opened a plurality of times) The special status is generated in the 13th round (specific round), and the opening and closing mode (opening time, number of times of opening, opening timing, etc.) of the second big winning opening 2006 in the 13th round of 15R big hit gaming state A, The opening and closing mode of the second big winning opening 2006 spanning the 13th round and the 14th round of the 15R big hit gaming state B (a non-specific round generating a non-special state) is the same. Thus, although the special condition is generated in the 13th round of the generation period of 13 to 15 rounds of 15R big hit gaming state A and 15 R big hit gaming state B, 13 rounds from the opening and closing mode of the second big winning opening 2006 It can be difficult to determine whether or not it is an eye, and the above-described game characteristics can be realized more effectively.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, the generation period of 13 to 15 rounds of 15R big hit gaming state A and 15 R big hit gaming state B (period in which the second large winning opening 2006 having the second receiving port 2432 is opened a plurality of times) The special status is generated in the 13th round (specific round), and the opening number of the second big winning opening 2006 in the 13th round of 15R big hit gaming state A and 15 R big hit gaming state B is made different (15 R big hit The number of opening times of the second large winning opening 2006 in the 14th and 15th rounds is different in the gaming state A twice, once in the 15R big hit gaming state B) (totally twice in the 15R big hit gaming state A, 15R big hit In gaming state B, a total of three times). At that time, in the 15R big hit gaming state A and 15R big hit gaming state B, while making the opening number of the second big winning opening 2006 different in the 13th round, the second big winning opening 2006 in the generation period of 13 to 15 rounds By setting the number of times of opening of the second big winning opening 2006 in the 14th to 15th rounds so that the total number of times of opening will be the same, to generate a special status in the 13th round of the generation period of the 13th to 15th rounds Regardless, it can be difficult to determine how many rounds are being performed from the opening and closing operation of the second large winning opening 2006, and the above-described game characteristics can be realized more effectively.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, the occurrence period of 13 to 15 rounds of 15R big hit gaming state A and 15 R big hit gaming state B (period in which the second big winning opening 2006 having the second receiving port 2432 is opened a plurality of times) By making the series of opening and closing modes of the second large winning opening 2006 the same in the 15R large hitting gaming state A and 15R large hitting gaming state B, it is set to a special state even when looking at the opening operation of the second large winning opening 2006 It can be made difficult (or impossible to determine) whether it is set or not set to the non-special state, and the above-described game feature can be realized more effectively.

  In addition, the second large winning opening 2006 in the occurrence period of 13 to 15 rounds of 15 R big hit gaming state A and 15 R big hit gaming state B (period in which the second large winning opening 2006 having the second receiving port 2432 is opened a plurality of times) It may be configured to be different as long as it approximates a part of the series of opening and closing modes. For example, the opening time or opening timing in the opening operation of a part of the opening operation of the second large winning opening 2006 in the generation period of 13 to 15 rounds of 15R big hit gaming state A and 15R big hit gaming state B, or It can be illustrated that the opening number of the second big winning opening 2006 is made different to approximate. As a first example of such a mode, the 15R big hit gaming state A of the present embodiment as a series of opening and closing modes of the second big winning opening 2006 in the generation period of 13 to 15 rounds of the 15 R big hit gaming state B of the present embodiment. Similarly to the above, the first opening time of the second large winning opening 2006 is not “0.5 seconds” but “0 seconds”, while sharing the rough opening and closing pattern “short opening → long opening → short opening → long opening” in common. Changed to .8 seconds (changed to a slightly longer time) or changed the second opening time of the second big winning prize port 2006 to "19 seconds" instead of "20 seconds" (slightly short time Can be exemplified. It should be noted that the difference of the opening time different from the 15R big hit gaming state A may be a degree that makes it difficult for the player to determine, and is not limited to the above. As a second example, as a series of opening and closing modes of the second large winning opening 2006 in the generation period of 13 to 15 rounds of the 15R big hit gaming state B of this embodiment, similar to the 15R big hit gaming state A of this embodiment The closing time between the first opening and the second opening of the second large winning opening 2006 (the interval between rounds and the like) while sharing the rough opening and closing pattern of “short opening → long opening → short opening → long opening” Change the interval in the round to "4.7 seconds" instead of "4.5 seconds" and slightly delay the release timing or change it to "4.2 seconds" and slightly advance the release timing It can be illustrated. The difference between the closing times different from the 15R big hit gaming state A may be any level that makes it difficult for the player to determine, and is not limited to the above. As a third example, as a series of opening and closing modes of the second large winning opening 2006 in the generation period of 13 to 15 rounds of the 15R big hit gaming state B of this embodiment, the same as the 15R big hit gaming state A of this embodiment Add another short opening (for example, open the second big winning opening 2006 once in 0.5 seconds) before and after the opening and closing pattern, even though it has a rough opening and closing pattern of "short opening → long opening" Among the rough open / close patterns of “short open → long open → short open → long open” in the 15R big hit gaming state A of the first embodiment, except for the second short open, the open state is slightly open. It can be illustrated by reducing the number slightly. Note that the difference in the number of opening times different from the 15R big hit gaming state A may be a degree that makes it difficult for the player to determine, and is not limited to the above. As described above, the 15R big hit gaming state A and the 15R big hit gaming state A and the 15R big hit gaming state B in the series of opening and closing modes of the second big winning opening 2006 in the generation period of 13 to 15 rounds of the 15R big hit gaming state A and 15R big hit gaming state B By changing to an approximate degree, it can be difficult to determine whether the special operation is set or not set even if the opening operation of the second big winning opening 2006 is seen, and the above-mentioned game characteristics and Equivalent game characteristics can be realized.

  Further, the series of opening and closing modes of the second big winning opening 2006 may include the operation mode of the distribution piece 2433 provided in the second big winning opening 2006, and the 15R big hit gaming state A and 15 R big hit gaming The second big winning opening 2006 that includes the operation mode of the distribution piece 2433 although the operation time and operation number of the distribution piece 2433 and the operation timing are partially different in the generation period of the 13th to 15th rounds of the state B A series of opening and closing modes are approximated by the 15R big hit gaming state A and the 15R big hit gaming state B, and even when they are made like this, the opening operation of the second big winning opening 2006 and the operation of the split piece 2433 Even if it sees, it can be difficult to determine whether it is set to the special state or the non-special state, and the game property equivalent to the game property described above can be realized. However, the activation time, the number of times of operation, and the operation timing of the distribution piece 2433 in the generation period of 13 to 15 rounds of the 15R big hit gaming state A and 15 R big hit gaming state B are made the same, A series of opening and closing modes of the two big winning prize opening 2006 may be the same in the 15R big hit gaming state A and the 15R big hitting gaming state B, and even in such a case, the opening operation of the second big prize winning port 2006 and It can be difficult (or impossible to determine) whether it is set to the special state or the non-special state even if the operation of the distribution piece 2433 is seen, and the above-mentioned game characteristic can be realized more effectively. it can.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, the generation period of 13 to 15 rounds of 15R big hit gaming state A and 15 R big hit gaming state B (period in which the second large winning opening 2006 having the second receiving port 2432 is opened a plurality of times) Among them, at the time of operation of the distribution piece 2433, either the special state or the non-special state is set in accordance with the state setting schedule of the second receiving port 2432. Therefore, although it is difficult to determine whether the special opening state or the non-special state is set even if the opening operation of the second big winning opening 2006 is seen as described above, the 15R big hit gaming state A and 15R big hit gaming state The game ball is accepted in the second receiving port 2432 while predicting which of the second big winning opening 2006 is set to the special state while predicting which of the B is controlled to be. ) Can be entertained.

  Also, as in the present embodiment, by setting the special state and the non-special state in each big hit gaming state and enabling the second receiving port 2432 to accept the gaming balls, the “high probability state in each hit gaming state The difficulty of occurrence of ", the time when the game ball can be accepted to the second entrance 2432 that triggers the occurrence of the high probability state in each gaming state, or the second entrance 2432 that does not become the occurrence of the high probability state The game ball can be controlled in a form that reflects the intention of the game designer. Therefore, the above-mentioned game characteristic can be realized with certainty by suppressing the occurrence of a high probability state unintended by the game designer.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, the following game effects can be exhibited as compared with the prior art. That is, in the conventional "game machine controlled to a high probability state based on the V winning (equivalent to the game ball being received in the second receiving port 2432)", an aspect (for example The game is provided with an advantageous big hit gaming state in which the big winning opening is opened in a long time opening) and a disadvantageous big hit gaming state in which the big winning opening is opened in a difficult-to-enter state (for example, short opening) Based on the generation rate of each big hit gaming state set in advance by the designer, the occurrence of the high probability state is controlled substantially. However, in such a conventional gaming machine, the presence or absence (occurrence difficulty) of the high probability state is recognized by the player at first glance depending on whether or not the big winning opening is opened in the easy entry mode in the big hit gaming state. There was a problem that For example, in the advantageous big hit gaming state, it is recognized that there is a high possibility of being controlled to the high probability state by opening the big winning opening in an easy entry mode, and at that time the player feels relieved May be given. In this case, entering the large winning opening and firing operation of the gaming ball for generating V winning become mere work, the original fun of the gaming machine to notice the behavior of the launched gaming ball is lost, the game There was a risk that the interest would decline. Further, in the disadvantageous big hit gaming state, it is recognized that the possibility of being controlled to the high probability state is low by opening the big winning opening in a difficult-to-enter mode, and the player is disappointed at that time. Sometimes it gives a feeling. Also in this case, there is a possibility that the game intention may be reduced, and there is a possibility that the game interest may be lowered. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, while having the conventional basic configuration of controlling to the high probability state based on the V winning (equivalent to the game ball being received in the second receiving port 2432), It is possible to open the second large winning opening 2006 in an easy-to-enter mode in the easy to enter the ball in each big hit gaming state (15R big hit gaming state A, 15R big hit gaming state B), a special state in the second big winning opening 2006 open (A state where it will be controlled to a high probability state after the end of the big hit gaming state by the game ball being received in the second receiving port 2432) and non-special state (even if the game ball is received in the second receiving port 2432 It is determined that it is difficult to determine that the state is not controlled to the high probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state. As a result, while it is possible to control whether or not the occurrence of the high probability state (occurrence difficulty) is possible based on the occurrence rate of each big hit gaming state preset by the game designer, it is controlled to the high probability state after the big hit gaming state ends. Can be made indistinguishable from the operation of the second large winning opening 2006, and the game willingness to positively enter the game ball into the second large winning opening 2006 and the second receiving port 2432 during each big hit gaming state is played It is possible to give an entertainer an original fun of the gaming machine, which allows the player to pay attention to the behavior of the shot game ball entering the second big winning hole 2006 and the second receiving port 2432 while continuing to give to the player. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the game interest during the big hit gaming state.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, the “special state” is permitted to be controlled to the high probability state after the end of the big hit gaming state by the game ball being received in the second receiving port 2432 (activated ) In the "non-special state" state, even if the game ball is received in the second inlet 2432, it is not permitted (disabled) to control to the high probability state after the end of the big hit gaming state is there. Thereby, whenever gaming balls are received in the second receiving port 2432 in the "special state", the game is controlled to the high probability state after the end of the big hit gaming state, while on the second receiving port 2432 in the "non-special state". Even if the gaming ball is accepted, it is not controlled to the high probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state. On the other hand, when the game ball is received in the second receiving port 2432 in the "special state" and the "non-special state", a lottery is performed to determine whether to control to the high probability state after the end of the big hit gaming state, respectively Ratio to derive the result of the lottery that will be controlled to the high probability state after the end of the big hit gaming state in the "special state" to be controlled to the high probability state after the end of the big hit gaming state based on the result of the lottery May be higher than in the “non-special state”. Specifically, "a special state probability table set so that the proportion of controlling the high probability state after the big hit gaming state is high" and "the proportion of controlling the high probability state after the big hit gaming state is over" Is set to be lower than the probability table for the special condition, and when the gaming ball is accepted in the second inlet 2432 in the "special condition", the main The control MPU 1310a acquires a predetermined random number for lottery (random number value of 0 to 99), and uses the acquired random number for lottery using the “probability table for special state (a plurality of hit values are set)”. By performing determination (lottery drawing) whether or not the coin value matches the hit value, it is possible to increase the ratio of controlling to the high probability state after the end of the big hit gaming state as a result of the drawing. On the other hand, when the gaming ball is received in the second receiving port 2432 in the "non-special state", the main control MPU 1310a acquires a predetermined random number for drawing (random number value of 0 to 99), and the acquired random number for drawing It is judged (lottery) whether or not it matches with the hit value by using “probability table for non-special condition (the number of hits for which the number is smaller than the probability table for special condition is set)”. As a result of the lottery, it is possible to lower the ratio to be controlled to the high probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state compared to the "non-special state". Then, for example, during the "special state", by setting the ratio for deriving the result of controlling the high probability state after the end of the big hit gaming state in the "probability table for the special state", to about 90/100. In most cases, the game can be controlled to the high probability state after the end of the big hit game state by receiving a plurality of game balls. In addition, by setting the ratio that will be controlled to the clocking probability state after the end of the big hit gaming state in the "probability table for non-special state", a plurality of "non-special state" during the "non-special state" In most cases, even if the gaming ball is accepted, it can be controlled not to be in a high probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Even in such a case, each big hit is made by making it difficult to distinguish either “special status” or “non-special status” from the operation of the second large winning opening 2006 while the second large winning opening 2006 is opened. While continuing to give the player the game willingness to make the game ball actively enter the second big winning opening 2006 and the second receiving port 2432 during the gaming state, the launched game ball is the second big winning opening 2006 and the second It becomes possible to impart the original fun of the gaming machine to notice the behavior of entering the second entrance 2432 or not. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the game interest during the big hit gaming state.

  Also, in the above, when the gaming ball is received in the second receiving port 2432 in any of the “special state” and the “non-special state”, respectively control to the high probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state If a game ball is accepted in the second receiving port 2432 in the "special state", the actual implementation is performed without performing this lottery (for example, the random number for lottery is not acquired). In the same process as in the form, the game is controlled to the high probability state after the end of the big hit gaming state, and when the gaming ball is received in the second receiving port 2432 in the "non-special state", the lottery wins the big hit gaming state It may be determined whether or not to control to the high probability state after the end of. In such a case, although the percentage that will be controlled to the high probability state after the end of the big hit gaming state by the lottery in the "non-special state" will be lower than "special state", "non-special" Even in the state, since the possibility of being controlled to the high probability state after the end of the big hit gaming state is left, the game ball is entered with expectation in the second big winning opening 2006 and the second receiving port 2432 during each big hit gaming state While being able to make it do, the same effect as the above can be produced. On the other hand, when the gaming ball is received in the second receiving port 2432 in the "special state", it is decided to determine whether or not to control to the high probability state after the end of the big hit gaming state by performing lottery. When the gaming ball is received in the second receiving port 2432 in the state, the lottery is not performed (for example, the random number for drawing is not obtained) and the same process as the present embodiment makes the high probability state after the big hit gaming state ends. The control may not be performed. In such a case, although the percentage that will be controlled to the high probability state after the end of the big hit gaming state by the lottery in the "special state" will be higher than the "non-special state", "special state" Even if the game ball is received in the second receiving port 2432, it is not decided to control to the high probability state after the end of the big hit gaming state, so the player is not given a sense of security during each big hit gaming state The game ball can continue to enter the second large winning opening 2006 and the second receiving port 2432 and the same effect as described above can be exhibited.

  Although the present invention has been described above by way of preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and as described below, various improvements can be made without departing from the scope of the present invention. And design changes are possible.

  That is, in the above embodiment, although what was applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a game machine was shown, it is not limited to this, and a pachislot machine or a gaming machine formed by combining a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine It may be applied, and even in this case, the same operation and effect as described above can be exhibited.

1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Door frame 4 Body frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 1000 Front component 1100 Game panel 1600 Effect display device 2000 table unit 2005 1st large winning opening 2006 2nd large winning opening 2400 Attacker unit (variable entry Ball device)
2431 first receiving port 2432 second receiving port (specific area)
2433 Distribution piece 2434 First inlet sensor 2435 Second inlet sensor (specific area)
3000 back unit 3500 back up movable production unit 3510 back up first decoration unit (decoration body)
3511 First left movable decorative lens (movable decorative part)
3512 First right movable decorative lens (movable decorative part)
3513 1st fixed decoration lens (fixed decoration part)
3516 first lower arm 3518 first upper arm 3520 first opening and closing gear member 3521 first opening and closing arm 3523 first opening and closing spring (biasing member)
3524 first mounting base 3525 first mounting shaft member 3530 back upper second decoration unit (decoration body)
3531 Second left movable decorative lens (movable decorative part)
3532 Second right movable decorative lens (movable decorative part)
3533 Second fixed decorative lens (fixed decorative part)
3536 second lower arm 3538 second upper arm 3540 second opening / closing gear member 3541 second opening / closing arm 3543 second opening / closing spring (biasing member)
3544 Second mounting base 3550 Back top third decoration unit (decoration)
3551 Third left movable decorative lens (movable decorative part)
3552 Third right movable decorative lens (movable decorative part)
3553 3rd fixed decoration lens (fixed decoration part)
3556 third lower arm 3558 third upper arm 3560 third opening / closing gear member 3561 third opening / closing arm 3563 third opening / closing spring (biasing member)
3564 Third Mounting Base 3570 Back Top Rotation Base Unit (Base Body)
3571 back-to-back rotation base 3573 second drive link gear member 3578 third drive link gear member 3583 operating lever driving motor 3585 operating lever pinion gear 3586 operating lever (operating body)
3586a action lever rack gear 3586f first action portion 3586i second action portion 3586k third action portion 3600 back raising / lowering unit 3610 movable side unit 3611 movable side base (appearing base)
3612 back up rotation drive motor 3614 rotation base drive gear 3650 fixed side unit 3652 lifting and lowering rotary body 3554 back up and down lifting drive motor

Claims (4)

A game board in which a game area in which a predetermined game is performed is formed;
A main unit frame on which the game board is mounted;
A door frame which can be opened and closed on the body frame;
A bulging portion provided on the door frame and bulging forward in the lower part of the game area in a front view to form a predetermined internal space;
An upper plate provided on the upper surface side of the bulging portion, and storing a game medium for playing a game in the game area;
An operating device accommodated in the internal space and operable by a player;
A lower plate body provided on the door frame and provided with a vertical wall having a predetermined height, and capable of receiving game media from a predetermined supply port;
The lower plate is provided in a space provided in parallel with the internal space in the bulging portion in the left-right direction,
The lower tray main body is integrally formed with a first lower tray portion in which a region facing the front of the gaming machine is formed , and a configuration in which the first lower tray portion protrudes into the internal space with respect to the first lower tray portion. And a second lower plate portion provided with a second lower plate portion where an area not facing the front of the gaming machine is formed,
The supply port communicates with the second lower plate portion,
A cover upright wall located in front of the supply port is provided integrally with the lower tray body,
The upright wall portion and the cover upright wall portion of the lower tray main body located in front of the supply port have a diagonal wall portion for rolling game media supplied from the supply port toward the first lower tray portion. And
Further, on the side opposite to the side on which the lower plate is provided with the inner space as a boundary, a handle portion for firing game media is provided.
The gaming machine is characterized in that the bulging portion is provided to project forward of the gaming machine than a foremost portion of the handle portion. A game board in which a game area in which a predetermined game is performed is formed;
A main unit frame on which the game board is mounted;
A door frame which can be opened and closed on the body frame;
A bulging portion provided on the door frame and bulging forward in the lower part of the game area in a front view to form a predetermined internal space;
An upper plate provided on the upper surface side of the bulging portion, and storing a game medium for playing a game in the game area;
A rendering device accommodated in the internal space and exhibiting a predetermined rendering effect;
A lower plate body provided on the door frame and provided with a vertical wall having a predetermined height, and capable of receiving game media from a predetermined supply port;
The lower plate is provided in a space provided in parallel with the internal space in the bulging portion in the left-right direction,
The lower tray main body is integrally formed with a first lower tray portion in which a region facing the front of the gaming machine is formed , and a configuration in which the first lower tray portion protrudes into the internal space with respect to the first lower tray portion. And a second lower plate portion provided with a second lower plate portion where an area not facing the front of the gaming machine is formed,
The supply port communicates with the second lower plate portion,
A cover upright wall located in front of the supply port is provided integrally with the lower tray body,
The upright wall portion and the cover upright wall portion of the lower tray main body located in front of the supply port have a diagonal wall portion for rolling game media supplied from the supply port toward the first lower tray portion. And
Further, on the side opposite to the side on which the lower plate is provided with the inner space as a boundary, a handle portion for firing game media is provided.
The gaming machine is characterized in that the bulging portion is provided to project forward of the gaming machine than a foremost portion of the handle portion. A game board in which a game area in which a predetermined game is performed is formed;
A main unit frame on which the game board is mounted;
A door frame which can be opened and closed on the body frame;
A bulging portion provided on the door frame and bulging forward in the lower part of the game area in a front view to form a predetermined internal space;
An upper plate provided on the upper surface side of the bulging portion, and storing a game medium for playing a game in the game area;
An operating device accommodated in the internal space and operable by a player;
A lower plate body provided on the door frame and provided with a vertical wall having a predetermined height, and capable of receiving game media from a predetermined supply port;
The lower plate is provided in a space provided in parallel with the internal space in the bulging portion in the left-right direction,
The lower tray main body is integrally formed with a first lower tray portion in which a region facing the front of the gaming machine is formed , and a configuration in which the first lower tray portion protrudes into the internal space with respect to the first lower tray portion. And a second lower plate portion provided with a second lower plate portion where an area not facing the front of the gaming machine is formed,
The supply port communicates with the second lower plate portion,
A cover ceiling portion that covers the upper side of the second lower plate portion is provided integrally with the lower plate body,
The standing wall portion of the lower tray main body located in front of the supply port has a diagonal wall portion for rolling game media supplied from the supply port toward the first lower tray portion.
Further, on the side opposite to the side on which the lower plate is provided with the inner space as a boundary, a handle portion for firing game media is provided.
The gaming machine is characterized in that the bulging portion is provided to project forward of the gaming machine than a foremost portion of the handle portion. A game board in which a game area in which a predetermined game is performed is formed;
A main unit frame on which the game board is mounted;
A door frame which can be opened and closed on the body frame;
A bulging portion provided on the door frame and bulging forward in the lower part of the game area in a front view to form a predetermined internal space;
An upper plate provided on the upper surface side of the bulging portion, and storing a game medium for playing a game in the game area;
A rendering device accommodated in the internal space and exhibiting a predetermined rendering effect;
A lower plate body provided on the door frame and provided with a vertical wall having a predetermined height, and capable of receiving game media from a predetermined supply port;
The lower plate is provided in a space provided in parallel with the internal space in the bulging portion in the left-right direction,
The lower tray main body is integrally formed with a first lower tray portion in which a region facing the front of the gaming machine is formed , and a configuration in which the first lower tray portion protrudes into the internal space with respect to the first lower tray portion. And a second lower plate portion provided with a second lower plate portion where an area not facing the front of the gaming machine is formed,
The supply port communicates with the second lower plate portion,
A cover ceiling portion that covers the upper side of the second lower plate portion is provided integrally with the lower plate body,
The standing wall portion of the lower tray main body located in front of the supply port has a diagonal wall portion for rolling game media supplied from the supply port toward the first lower tray portion.
Further, on the side opposite to the side on which the lower plate is provided with the inner space as a boundary, a handle portion for firing game media is provided.
The gaming machine is characterized in that the bulging portion is provided to project forward of the gaming machine than a foremost portion of the handle portion.

Images